Before diving into all the applications that come with Haiku, let's have a more detailed look at how to install and uninstall programs you downloaded somewhere, for example from a site mentioned on the Welcome page.
+
Archive sollten immer unter Haiku entpackt/installiert werden. Packt man sie nämlich zum Beispiel unter Linux oder Windows aus und kopiert später einfach nur den Ordern rüber zu Haiku, fehlen wichtige Attribute. Diese werden von den anderen Betriebssystemen nämlich in der Regel ignoriert.
Haiku Software kommt immer als Archiv. Meist ist es ein ZIP, einige alte BeOS Pakete kommen auch mal in Software Valet's PKG Format. Software Valet konnte automatisch Installationsskripte ausführen, so dass man nach dem Doppelklicken nur noch einen Zielordner angeben musste und alles weitere von selbst ging.
+Handelt es sich um ein ZIP Archiv, öffnet ein Doppelklick den Expander wo man ebenfalls den Zielordner angeben kann und es anschließend entpackt. Wie im Kapitel Dateisystem Layout beschrieben, ist das Ziel entweder
+
+
/boot/common/apps/
für Anwendungen auf die alle Benutzer Zugriff haben sollen
+
/boot/home/apps/
für Anwendungen auf die man nur selbst Zugriff haben soll
+
+
Diese Unterscheidung wird natürlich erst relevant wenn Haiku mehrere Benutzer unterstützt.
+
Ist das Archiv entpackt, sollte man mal in das neue Verzeichnis schauen. Oft enthält es ReadMe Dateien oder andere interessante Informationen.
+
Einige Programme benötigen noch weitere Konfiguration. So müssen z.B. Tracker Add-Ons, Translatoren und andere Erweiterungen in besonderen Ordnern abgelegt werden. Oft findet man dazu ein kleines Skript (meistens mit der Endung .sh) wie install, das nach einem Doppelklick alles nötige erledigt.
+Manchmal findet man auch Ordner, die mit dem entsprechenden Zielort verlinkt sind und z.B."drag [filename] here..." heißen. Man folgt also einfach dieser Anweisung, macht also ein Drag&Drop der entsprechenden Datei auf den Ordner und verschiebt sie so.
+
Meistens ist sowas aber nicht nötig und es bleibt beim einfachen Entpacken.
+In den Kapiteln Deskbar und LaunchBox ist beschrieben wie man Verknüpfungen zu den neu installierten Anwendung herstellt.
Geschah die Installation durch ein Installationsskript stehen die Chancen gut, dass auch ein entsprechendes De-Installationsskript existiert. In diesem Fall ist es wieder mit einem einfachen Doppelklick auf das Skript getan.
+Andernfalls löscht man einfach den Ordner der Anwendung.
+
Dadurch bleiben allerdings eventuelle Konfigurationsdateien im ~/config/settings Ordner übrig. Das kann natürlich auch gewollt sein, um die Einstellungen nicht zu verlieren, falls man das Programm zukünftig nochmal installieren möchte. Falls die Installation über die erwähnten "drag [filename] here..." Ordner ablief, bleiben die Dateien dort auch übrig.
+
Eine Möglichkeit um schnell alle zu einer Anwendung gehörenden Dateien zu finden, ist eine Query nach einem signifikanten Teil des Anwendungsnamens zu starten. Dadurch gelangt man an die Anwendung selbst, ihren Installationsordner und ihre Konfigurationsdateien, sowie mögliche Verknüpfungen in der Deskbar etc. Jetzt muss man nur noch alle relevanten Dateien auswählen und löschen.
Mit Haiku werden einige meist kleine, aber nützliche Anwendungen geliefert. Sie liegen alle in /boot/system/apps/ oder /boot/common/apps/. Anwendungen die normalerweise nicht per Doppelklick auf eine Datendatei gestartet werden (wie z.B. ShowImage für Bilder) befinden sich im Applications Menü der Deskbar.
Neben der oben aufgeführten Software, die komplett vom Haiku Projekt stammt und betreut wird, werden in einem Standard Haiku System noch einige weitere wichtige Programme mitinstalliert. Dort gefundene Bugs und gewünschte Features müssen allerdings direkt bei den jeweiligen Projekten gemeldet werden.
Um Systemressourcen im Auge zu behalten, kann der ActivityMonitor gestartet werden, um darin die für einen interessanten Information anzeigen zu lassen.
+
+
Mit einen Rechtsklick ins Fenster kann die Anzeige verschiedener Ressourcen ein- und ausgeschaltet werden:
+Benutzter/gecacheter Speicher, Auslagerungsgröße, CPU Auslastung, Netzwerk Empfang/Versand, Page Faults, Semaphores, Ports, Threads, Teams, Laufende Anwendungen, Raw/Text Clipboard Größe, Media Nodes.
+
Unter der Anzeige befindet sich eine Legende, die über das Kontextmenü auch ausgeschaltet werden kann. Farben der Legende und auch der Anzeigehintergrund können mittels Drag&Drop von jedem Farbauswahl-Tool aus, z.B. von Icon-O-Matic, geändert werden.
+
Mittels File | Add View lassen sich noch weitere Anzeigeflächen dazuschalten, falls es zu unübersichtlich wird.
+
Das Settings Menü öffnet ein Fenster, in dem das Aktualisierungsintervall der Anzeige eingestellt werden kann.
+
Jede Anzeige hat ihre eigenes kleines Replikanten Symbol und kann so z.B. auf den Desktop gezogen werden.
BePDF ist ein einfacher und schneller Betrachter für (unverschlüsselte) PDF-Dateien. Neben dem reinen Betrachten werden noch Anmerkungen zum Dokument und Lesezeichen unterstützt.
+
Das Benutzerhandbuch zu BePDF ist als HTML-Datei oder als PDF-Dokument vorhanden. Letzteres kann auch über den Menüpunkt Help | Show Help... im Programm aufgerufen werden.
Der BeZillaBrowser basiert auf dem Quellcode des bekannten Browsers Mozilla. Es wurden jedoch spezielle Anpassungen vorgenommen, um die Stabilität und Geschwindigkeit unter Haiku zu verbessern. Bislang wird der BeZillaBrowser aus dem Versionszweig 1.8 des Mozilla-Quellcodes erstellt. Für Fehlermeldungen wäre der Link zu HaikuPorts zu verwenden.
+
Da der Mozilla-Browser zwischenzeitlich eine recht große Verbreitung gefunden hat, gibt es hierfür eine fast nicht mehr zu überschauende Anzahl an Tipps & Tricks im Internet. Ein guter Einstiegspunkt wäre: http://support.mozilla.com/
+
Zum aktuellen Zeitpunkt ist es mit dem BeZillaBrowser leider nicht möglich, Webseiten auszudrucken. Es gibt aber eine Möglichkeit, diese Einschränkung zu umgehen. Mit dem "Add-On" html2pdf wird über einen Online-Service aus der zu druckenden Seite eine PDF-Datei erstellt, die über den dann neuen Menüpunkt "Download PDF" heruntergeladen werden kann.
+Anmerkung: dies funktioniert nicht mit lokal gespeicherten Webseiten.
~/cd/* - Hier werden Informationen zu den CDs gespeichert
+
+
+
+
+
+
Durch die Standardsymbole der Knöpfe ist CDPlayer ziemlich selbsterklärend.
+Für die fortlaufende Wiederholung der gesamten CD sorgt der Repeat Button - links neben Shuffle (für die Wiedergabe in zufälliger Reihenfolge).
+
Wer gern mehr Kontrolle hätte, zum Beispiel durch selbst erstellte Titelfolgen (Playlisten), sollte besser den MediaPlayer probieren.
CharacterMap zeigt eine Übersicht aller Schriftzeichen und deren UTF-8 Code, die eine Schriftart enthält.
+
+
Links werden alle Standard-Blöcke innerhalb einer Schriftart angezeigt, die mittels Filter eingegrenzt werden können. Es ist auch möglich, zusätzlich enthaltene Schriftzeichen mit Show Private Blocks aus dem Menü View einzublenden. Rechter Hand werden die einzelnen Schriftzeichen aus dem ausgewählten Block der im Menüpunkt Font ausgewählten Schriftart angezeigt. Mit dem Schieberegler darunter kann die Schriftgröße eingestellt werden. Ganz unten wird das Schriftzeichen unter dem Mauszeiger als Code in Hex, Dezimal und UTF-8 angezeigt.
+
Aus der Schriftzeichen-Tabelle lässt sich ein einzelnes Zeichen direkt in eine andere Anwendung ziehen. Es ist auch möglich, über einen Rechtsklick und Copy Character (ALTC) das Zeichen zu kopieren, oder mittels Copy As Escaped Byte String (SHIFTALTC) das Zeichen als Code zu übernehmen. So erhält man beispielsweise entweder € oder \xe2\x82\xac.
Mit CodyCam können von einer angeschlossenen Webcam, oder anderen Videoquelle, in regelmäßigen Zeitabständen Bilder auf einen FTP-Server abgelegt werden.
+
+
Links unter der Vorschau wird der Dateiname festgelegt, der automatisch um einen nachgestellten Zähler erweitert wird. Darunter kann das Dateiformat und das Zeitintervall eingestellt werden.
+
Rechts sind die Daten für FTP oder sFTP (wenn SSH möglich ist) einzugeben, um die Bilder auf den Server hochladen zu können.
DeskCalc ist ein einfacher Rechner, der aber trotzdem einige nette Funktionen hat, die allerdings nicht sofort ersichtlich sind.
+
+
+
DeskCalc kann viel mehr, als seine wenigen Tasten versprechen.
+Neben den Operatoren +, -, *, /, %, ^ und den Konstanten pi und e werden noch die folgenden mathematischen Funktionen unterstützt:
+acos, asin, atan, atan2, ceil, cos, cosh, exp, floor, log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan und tanh.
+
DeskCalc geht sehr großzügig mit Benutzereingaben um:
+/, :, \ sind alles gültige Eingaben für "Division".
+* und x werden als "Multiplikation" verstanden.
+Aber Achtung: . and , sind beides Zeichen für Gleitkomma-Berechnungen. Sie dürfen also nicht als 1000-er Trennung verwendet werden.
+
Über einen Rechtsklick sind diese Einstellungen erreichbar:
+
+
Enable Num Lock on start up
beim Start von DeskCalc wird automatisch der Nummernblock aktiviert
+
Show Keypad
unterdrückt das Tastenfeld, wenn diese Option deaktiviert ist
+
+
Man kann die Fenstergröße von DeskCalc nach Belieben ändern und dann als Replicant auf den Desktop ziehen. Hierzu muss natürlich in der Deskbar Show Replicants aktiviert sein.
+
Wenn eine Farbe, zum Beispiel aus Icon-O-Matic auf das Tastenfeld gezogen wird, färbt es sich entsprechend ein.
+
Mit ↑ und ↓ kann man vorangegangene Berechnungen wieder aufrufen.
+
Alle Ausdrücke im Anzeigefeld von DeskCalc können als "Textschnipsel" auf den Desktop, in ein Trackerfenster oder eine beliebige andere Anwendung gezogen werden.
+
Dies ist natürlich auch andersrum möglich:
+Diverse Zwischenergebnisse einer Berechnung kann man wie beschrieben als Textschnipsel anlegen, um sie später wieder in DeskCalc zu ziehen, um wieder zu diesen Phasen zurückzukehren.
+Oder man zieht sich eine Berechnung direkt aus einer E-Mail in DeskCalc.
+
DeskCalc kann auch direkt im Terminal benutzt werden. Der Ausdruck muss hierfür in Anführungszeichen gesetzt werden:
DiskProbe ist ein HEX-Editor zum Anzeigen und Bearbeiten von Daten in Dateien oder auch direkt auf dem Datenträger. Es ist ein Tool, das wirklich auf unterster Ebene ansetzt. Dadurch kann eine unbedachte Änderung natürlich viel zerstören!
+
Man sollte mit DiskProbe immer mit einer Kopie der zu ändernden Datei arbeiten und besondere Vorsicht walten lassen, wenn man direkt in einer Partition Daten ändert!
+
Beim Start von DiskProbe wählt man zuerst, ob mit einer Datei oder einer Partition gearbeitet werden soll. Danach erscheint dieses Programmfenster:
+
+
Es wird immer ein Datenblock angezeigt, dessen Größe über View | BlockSize angepasst werden kann. Am linken Rand ist der Abstand zum Blockbeginn zu sehen, in der Mitte die Daten als HEX-Werte und rechts dasselbe als ASCII-Zeichen.
+Von Datenblock zu Datenblock kann mit dem Schieberegler, oder durch ALT← und ALT→ gesprungen werden. Zwischen HEX- und ASCII-Spalte wird mit TAB gewechselt.
+
Das Menü Block | Selection zeigt die momentane Auswahl nicht nur in beiden Endian-Formaten (und in HEX oder Dezimal, je nach Einstellung mit View | Base), es interpretiert die Auswahl auch als anspringbaren Block-Offset. Es erscheint ausgegraut, falls diese Position außerhalb der Datei oder des Datenträgers liegt.
+Dieses Feature ist besonders hilfreich beim Untersuchen von Dateisystemen, weil diese oft Zeiger auf andere Blöcke enthalten.
+
Wenn die bearbeitete Datei Attribute enthält, kann über das Attributes Menü ein spezielles DiskProbe-Fenster geöffnet werden. Als Beispiel, hier das Copyright-Attribut der Anwendung AboutSystem:
+
Je nach Art von Attribut, erhält man neben dem Raw Editor unterschiedliche Editor-Reiter. So gibt es einen Editor für Text, MIME-Typen und einen Betrachter für das Icon.
DiskUsage zeigt graphisch aufbereitet, für was der Speicherplatz einer Partition verwendet wird.
+Ein hilfreiches Werkzeug, wenn man sich fragt: Wo sind eigentlich die ganzen Terabyte freier Speicherplatz hingekommen?
+
+
Die konzentrischen Ringe repräsentieren die verschiedenen Ebenen im Verzeichnisbaum. Im obigen Bild steht der Kreis in der Mitte für das Benutzerverzeichnis /boot/home/. Jedes Ring-Segment um diesen Kreis steht für eine Datei oder ein Verzeichnis unterhalb von /boot/home/. MIt jedem weiter außen gelegenen Segment gelangt man tiefer in die Verzeichnisstruktur. Für tief verschachtelte Verzeichnisse muss man eventuell die Größe des Programmfensters anpassen.
+
Über das Menü über der Graphik kann man zwischen den eingebundenen Partitionen wechseln. Bevor die Belegung einer Partition angezeigt werden kann, muss sie natürlich erst eingelesen werden. Da dies bei großen Partitionen etwas dauern kann, lassen sich nebenher andere Partitionen betrachten, während dieser Durchlauf im Hintergrund weitergeht.
+
+
Wäre die Darstellung einer Datei oder eines Ordners kleiner als 2° des Kreises, wird sie nicht angezeigt.
+
Die Anzahl der in einem Ordner enthaltenen Dateien beinhaltet sämtliche Unterordner, wobei Unterordner selbst ebenfalls als Datei zählen.
+
DiskUsage ignoriert symbolische Verknüpfungen.
+
+
In der Statuszeile am unteren Rand des Programmfensters werden Informationen über das jeweilige Segment angezeigt, über dem sich die Maus gerade befindet.
+
Ein Rechtsklick auf ein Segment zeigt ein Kontextmenü um Informationen (Get Info) anzuzeigen, das Objekt im Tracker (Open) oder mit einem anderen Programm (Open With) zu öffnen, oder einen Ordner erneut einzulesen (Rescan).
+Durch einen Linksklick wird eine Datei oder Verzeichnis zum Kreis in der Mitte.
+Ein Linksklick auf den Mittelkreis wechselt in das übergeordnete Verzeichnis.
+
Dateien oder Ordner können direkt aus DiskProbe herausgezogen werden; hierbei werden sie an den neuen Ort kopiert. Umgekehrt wird eine Datei, beziehungsweise Ordner zum Mittelkreis, wenn sie in das DiskUsage Fenster gezogen wird.
DriveSetup ist ein Programm zum Erstellen, Löschen und Initialisieren von Partitionen. Aktuell ist es noch nicht möglich, bestehende Partitionen zu verschieben oder in ihrer Größe zu verändern. Man benötigt also entweder Platz auf einem unpartitionierte Teil einer Disk (vielleicht ein USB Laufwerk oder eine zweite Festplatte) oder man muss auf externe Werkzeuge, wie der
+GParted LiveCD zurückgreifen.
+
+
Oben ist die Partitionierung des unten ausgewählten Datenträgers graphisch dargestellt. Neben maximal vier Primären Partitionen, kann jede von ihnen eine Anzahl von erweiterten/logischen Partitionen enthalten. Über das + / - Symbol können derart "versteckte" Partitionen auf- und eingeklappt werden.
+
Die ausgewählte Partition kann über die Befehle im Menü Partition oder mit der Tastenkombination ALTM, beziehungsweise ALTU in das System eingebunden oder ausgehängt werden.
+
Mit Partition | Delete kann eine Partition auch komplett gelöscht werden.
+
Mit Partitionen zu arbeiten, insbesondere sie zu initialisieren, erstellen oder zu löschen ist höchst gefährlich. Ein unbedachter Klick, eine falsch ausgewählte Partition und gespeicherte Daten sind unwiederbringlich verloren! Es bietet sich an, sicherheitshalber alles zweimal zu überprüfen und eine aktuelle Sicherheitskopie wichtiger Daten parat zu haben.
Wenn man einen Datenträger mit nur einer Partition komplett ausfüllen möchte, beispielsweise bei einem USB-Stick oder einer Speicherkarte, kann man direkt mit Initialisierung anfangen.
+
Wenn auf einem Datenträger ein unformatierter Bereich existiert, wie der Bereich <empty> im obigen Bild, kann man hierin mit Partition | Create... (ALTC) eine neue Partition anlegen.
+
+
Es erscheint ein Dialog um Partitionsgröße und -typ einzustellen. Für eine Haiku-Installation wäre Be File System zu wählen. Ebenso, wenn man all die interessanten Haiku Feature, wie Attribute und Queries, nutzen will. Man bedenke jedoch, dass andere Betriebssysteme auf so eine Partition eventuell nicht zugreifen können.
+
Bei der Erstellung einer primären Partition - im Gegensatz zu einer erweiterten/logischen Partition innerhalb einer solchen Primärpartition - kann sie in diesem Dialogfeld noch mit Active Partition gekennzeichnet werden. Der Haken muss also gesetzt werden, um von solch einer Partition Haiku booten zu können.
+
Um eine neu angelegte Partition verwenden oder ins System einbinden zu können, muss sie zuerst mit einem Dateisystem initialisiert werden.
Nur wenn eine Partition nicht ins System eingebunden ist, kann sie mit dem Menüpunkt Partition | Initialize initialisiert werden.
+
+
Beim Initialisieren muss ein Name für diese Partition und die Blockgröße angegeben werden. Ein "Block" ist dabei der Speicherplatz in Byte, den eine Datei auf dem Datenträger mindestens belegt. Den vorgeschlagenen Wert von 2048 sollte man am besten beibehalten, außer man ist sicher, dass man wirklich einen anderen braucht.
+Durch das Initialisieren gehen alle Daten auf dieser Partition unwiederbringlich verloren!
Keine Verknüpfung; Expander wird durch Doppelklick auf eine gepackte Datei gestartet.
+
Ort:
/boot/system/apps/Expander
+
Einstellungen:
~/config/settings/Expander_Settings
+
+
+
Mit dem Expander lassen sich schnell und einfach die gebräuchlichsten Archive entpacken, darunter ZIP, GZIP, BZIP2, RAR und TAR.
+Ein Doppelklick auf ein Archiv öffnet Expander:
+
+
+
Source
ALTS
öffnet einen Dialog zur Auswahl eines Archivs
+
Destination
ALTD
öffnet einen Dialog, um zu bestimmen wohin entpackt werden soll
+
Expand
ALTE
startet das Entpacken; kann mit ALTK abgebrochen werden
+
+
Der Inhalt des Archivs lässt sich mit Show Contents oder ALTL anzeigen und verbergen.
+
Expander kann lediglich ganze Archive entpacken.
+Nur einzelne Dateien eines Archivs auspacken, beziehungsweise Dateien entfernen oder hinzufügen, ist nicht möglich.
+
Über Edit | Preferences... oder ALTP gelangt man zu den Einstellungen von Expander.
+Die Optionen sind selbsterklärend:
Im Gegensatz zum BeOS verwendet Haiku vektor-basierte Icons an Stelle von pixel-basierten Icons. Für diesen Zweck wurde ein eigenes "Haiku Vector Icon Format" (HVIF) entwickelt, das für eine kleine Dateigröße und schnelle Anzeige optimiert ist. Aus diesem Grund sind Haiku Icons normalerweise erheblich kleiner als ein Pixelbild oder das weit verbreiteten SVG-Format. Ebenso sind die Haiku Icons nicht - wie die im BeOS verwendeten - auf 256 Farben (8bit Palette) beschränkt.
+Als Beispiel, das Icon für Terminal:
+
+
Pixel
SVG
HVIF
+
+
1,024 byte + 256 byte
7,192 byte
768 byte
+
+
Anzumerken ist, dass im BeOS immer zwei Versionen eines Icons (16x16 und 32x32 Pixel) verwendet wurden, um sowohl in der Listen- als auch in der Icon-Darstellung gute Ergebnisse zu erzielen.
+
Diesen Trick muss man bei Vektor Icons nicht anwenden. Es ist nicht nur lediglich einige hundert Bytes groß, es skaliert auch viel besser als Pixel-Icons. (Anmerkung: da das BeOS nur zwei verschiedene Icon-Einstellungen hatte - 16x16 und 32x32 - war das Problem der Skalierung nicht so ausschlaggebend.)
Icons werden als Attribut in der jeweiligen Datei gespeichert. Aber es muss nicht jede Datei solch ein Attribut besitzen, um in einem Tracker-Fenster mit einem Icon dargestellt zu werden. Dateien, die kein eigenes Icon besitzen, übernehmen das Icon, das ihren Dateityp repräsentiert; sie erben es sozusagen. Wenn man das Icon für den Dateityp global ändern möchte, verwendet man FileTypes in den Einstellungen. Wenn man das spezielle Icon einer einzelnen Datei ändern möchte, dann macht man dies über das FileType Add-On im Kontext-Menü zu dieser Datei. Unter Filetypes wird hierzu noch mehr ausgeführt.
+
Da Icons als Attribute einer Datei gespeichert sind, bleiben diese nur in Dateisystemen, die Attribute unterstützen erhalten. Man sollte daher Dateien mittels zip komprimieren, um die in den Attributen gespeicherten Informationen auch außerhalb einer BFS Partition zu erhalten.
Icon-O-Matic ist der Icon-Editor unter Haiku. Die hiermit erstellten Icons können im haiku-eigenen Format HVIF, als SVG oder PNG abgespeichert werden. Darüber hinaus ist es auch möglich, das Icon direkt als Attribut an eine bestehende Datei anzuhängen oder es als Ressource, beziehungsweise Quell-Datei für Programmierer bereit zu stellen. Da Icon-O-Matic speziell für das Format HVIF entwickelt wurde, kann man an Hand der Arbeitsabläufe im Programm ein wenig die Struktur des HVIF Formates erkennen.
+
Im Gegensatz zu anderen Vektorgraphik-Programmen werden hier keine seperaten Objekte erstellt, die jeweils ihre eigene Sammlung an Eigenschaften, wie Pfad, Strichstärke oder Farbe haben, sondern es werden die einzelnen Objekte ("shapes") aus mehrfach genutzten Pfaden ("paths") und Farben ("styles") zusammengesetzt und mit Eigenschaften ("properties") versehen. Dieses Wiederverwenden von einzelnen Elementen ist eines der Geheimnisse von HVIF. Auch wenn es dem Icon-Designer etwas mehr abverlangt, gibt es doch einige Vorteile, die für diesen Ansatz sprechen.
+So können beispielsweise durch das Wiederverwenden eines Pfades mehrere Objekte gleichzeitig geändert werden, wenn dieser eine Pfad geändert wird. Besonders deutlich wird es bei einem Objekt, das einen Schatten hat. Durch die Änderung des Pfades, den das Objekt und der Schatten nutzen, wird gleichzeitig und gleichartig zum Objekt auch dessen Schatten verändert.
+
+
Ein kurzer Überblick über das Programmfenster von Icon-O-Matic:
+
+
+
Um ein sichtbares Objekt auf der Zeichenfläche zu erstellen, benötigt man einen shape mit einem path und einem style. Der Einfachheit halber kann man eines davon, zwei oder alle drei Teile gleichzeitig aus dem Shape-Menü heraus erstellen. Bei jedem der vier Elemente eines Objektes (path, shape, transformer oder style) kann durch Anklicken der jeweiligen Kopfzeile ein Kontext-Menü aufgerufen werden. Darüber hinaus hat jedes Element noch Eigenschaften, die im Menü Properties gesetzt werden können.
Ein Pfad besteht aus mehreren Punkten, die mit einer Linie oder einer Bezier-Kurve miteinander verbunden sind. Um einzelne Punkte zu ändern oder hinzuzufügen, muss der entsprechende Pfad in der Pfad-Liste links ausgewählt sein.
+
+
Durch Klicken auf die Zeichenfläche wird der erste Punkt eines Pfades gesetzt. Man kann hierbei auch schon festlegen, ob es sich bei dem Pfad um eine Linie oder eine Kurve handelt: ein einfacher Klick erzeugt eine gerade Linie; wird die Taste gehalten und die Maus bewegt, erscheinen die typischen Greifer für Bezier-Kurven. Natürlich kann der Pfad auch noch nachträglich von einer Linie zur Kurve oder anders herum geändert werden.
+
+
+
+
Um von Bild "A" zu Bild "B" zu kommen, muss man die Eckpunkte der Linie zu Kurvenpunkten umwandeln. Durch gleichzeitiges Drücken der Taste ALT beim Klicken auf einen Punkt werden die Bezier-Greifer (wenn man die Maus bei gedrückter Maustaste bewegt) aus dem Kurvenpunkt sozusagen herausgezogen. Hierdurch ergibt sich eine symmetrische Bezier-Kurve; beide Greifer sind miteinander verknüpft. (Wenn man nur einen der beiden verändern möchte, muss man wiederum die ALT-Taste drücken und den Greifer anklicken.)
+Umgekehrt kann man einen Kurvenpunkt in einen Eckpunkt verwandeln, in dem man ihn bei gedrückter ALT-Taste anklickt.
+
+
Durch Klicken und Ziehen kann ein Punkt verschoben werden. Um mehrere Punkte gleichzeitig auszuwählen kann man bei gedrückter SHIFT-Taste ein Auswahl-Rechteck zeichnen und diese damit umfassen. Ausgewählte Punkte sind mit einem roten Rahmen versehen statt einem Schwarzen.
+Um zu einem Pfad einen Punkt hinzuzufügen, muss die Verbindungslinie zwischen zwei Punkten angeklickt werden.
+Ausgewählte Punkte lassen sich durch Drücken von DEL entfernen; alternativ kann auch ein nicht ausgewählter Punkt durch einen CTRL-Klick gelöscht werden.
+
+
Am Maus-Zeigers kann der aktuelle Bearbeitungs-Modus abgelesen werden:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Punkt(e) bewegen
+
Punkt(e) einfügen
+
Punkt hinzufügen
+
Punkt löschen CTRL
+
Eck-Punkt ↔ Kurven-Punkt ALT
+
Auswahlrechteck SHIFT
+
+
+
Durch Rechtsklick auf einen Punkt (oder einer Auswahl von Punkten) wird ein Kontext-Menü angezeigt:
+
+
Select all
ALTA
Wählt alle Punkte des aktuellen Pfades aus.
+
Transform
T
Alle ausgewählten Punkte werden gruppiert um sie zusammen bewegen, in der Größe verändern oder drehen zu können. Die Gruppierung ist lediglich temporär.
+
Split
Trennt den ausgewählten Punkt in zwei Punkte auf, die übereinander liegen.
+
Flip
Dreht die ausgewählten Punkte um 180°. (Hat logischerweise nur bei Bezier-Punkten eine sichtbare Auswirkung.)
Das Path-Menü hat einige selbsterklärende Einträge: Add Rectangle, Add Circle, Duplicate oder Delete. Andere benötigen ein paar Worte der Erklärung:
+
+
+
Reverse
Wenn der Pfad nicht "geschlossen" ist (siehe weiter unten: Pfad Eigenschaften), wird ein neuer Punkt mit dem zuletzt gesetzten Punkt verbunden. Durch "Umkehren" wird der neue Punkt mit dem ursprünglichen Startpunkt des Pfades verbunden.
+
Clean Up
Entfernt überflüssige Punkte (insbesondere beim Import von SVG-Graphiken hilfreich).
+
Rotate Indices Right
ALTR
Hierdurch wird die Öffnung des Pfades gedreht. Am besten wird es bei einem nicht geschlossenen Pfad mit einem zugewiesenen Stil und Form, die als Strich transformiert ist, deutlich: wenn der Pfad diese Gestalt hat ⊂ wird er folgendermaßen gedreht: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Das Menü Properties links unten im Programmfenster bietet alle verfügbaren Einstellungen für das ausgewählte Objekt an. Bei einem Pfad sind das: Name und ob er geschlossen, also Closed ist, oder nicht.
Eine Form ("shape") weist einem oder mehreren Pfaden einen Stil zu. Dadurch wird der Pfad auf der Zeichenfläche auch tatsächlich sichtbar. Die Zuweisung erfolgt, indem man bei ausgewählter Form die entsprechenden Pfade und den Stil ankreuzt.
+
Eine Form definiert, wie ein Pfad oder ein Stil angewendet wird, beispielsweise ob ein Objekt gefüllt oder umrandet ist (hier spielt zusätzlich noch die Transformation eine Rolle; hierzu weiter unten mehr). Eine Form kann auch bewegt, gedreht oder in ihrer Größe geändert werden, ohne den verwendeten Pfad verändern zu müssen. Somit ist es möglich, einen einzigen Pfad mehrfach zu verwenden und unterschiedliche, aber ähnliche Formen zu erhalten.
+
+
+
+
Wird eine Form aus der Liste ausgewählt, wird diese Form mit einem Rechteck umschlossen um sie hervorzuheben. Je nach dem, wo dieses Rechteck mit der Maus angefasst wird, kann man die Form verschieben, in der Größe verändern oder um den Mittelpunkt drehen, der selbst auch verschoben werden kann. Mittels der SHIFT-Taste kann man beim Verschieben die Richtung unveränderlich halten, beim Drehen 45°-Schritte festlegen und das Seitenverhältnis bei der Größenänderung beibehalten. Wie bereits bei der Bearbeitung des Pfades kann am Mauszeiger der aktuelle Bearbeitungsmodus abgelesen werden:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Bewegen
+
Größe ändern
+
Drehen
+
Mittelpunkt verschieben
+
+
+
+
Formen liegen - jede für sich in einer seperaten Ebene - übereinander. Die Position in der Z-Achse (also welche Form über oder unter welcher liegt) wird über die Reihenfolge in der Liste aller Formen festgelegt. Hier kann eine Form mit der Maus nach oben oder unten gezogen werden.
Das Menü Shape beinhaltet neben der bereits erwähnten Möglichkeit eine "leere" Form, eine Form zusammen mit einem Pfad, einem Stil oder beidem zu erstellen, also Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path & Style, sowie Duplicate und Remove noch:
+
+
Reset Transformation
Alle Veränderungen an der Form (Größe, Verschieben, Drehen) werden zurückgesetzt.
+
Freeze Transformation
Bei der Transformierung einer Form verbleiben die zugewiesenen Pfade an ihrer ursprünglichen Position. Das kann durchaus gewollt sein, so zum Beispiel, wenn mehrere Formen auf einen Pfad zurückgreifen oder man die Option "Am Raster ausrichten", also Options | Snap to Grid, aktiviert hat.
+Anderenfalls wird durch diesen Menüpunkt die Transformation auf die Pfade angewendet und ein zukünftiges "Transformation zurücksetzen" setzt auf diese neue Transformation zurück.
Ein gutes Beispiel für den Detail-Grad ist das Icon von BeVexed.
+Je nach dem, welche Icon-Größe im Tracker eingestellt ist, kann für jede Form festgelegt werden ob sie angezeigt wird, oder nicht. In diesem Beispiel wären die Zahlen bei 16x16 nicht mehr erkennbar und würden das Icon als Ganzes "optisch beeinträchtigen". Über den entsprechenden Wert beim Detail-Grad wurden sie ausgeblendet.
+
Der Wert für den "LOD" errechnet sich folgendermaßen: ein LOD von 1.00 ist für eine Icon-Größe von 64x64 festgelegt. Für andere Größen ist die Icon-Größe durch 64 zu teilen. So hat ein Icon der Größe 16x16 einen LOD von 16/64 = 0.25.
+Eine Form wird unterhalb seines Min LOD, beziehungsweise überhalb seines Max LOD nicht angezeigt.
+
Wenn man also den Min LOD einer Form auf 0.0 und den Max LOD auf 0.5 setzt, dann wird diese Form nur angezeigt, wenn die Icon-Größe im Tracker kleiner oder gleich 32x32 ist. Wenn sie bereits ab dieser Größe ausgeschlossen werden soll, muss ein Wert kleiner als 0.5 - beispielsweise 0.49 - eingegeben werden.
+
Der "LOD" kann nicht nur dafür verwendet werden, Formen ein- oder auszublenden, sonder unter anderem auch um Linien verschiedener Strichstärken zu verwenden: die Form duplizieren, am Duplikat die gewünschten Änderungen vornehmen und bei beiden den LOD so einstellen, dass entweder die eine oder die andere Form angezeigt wird. Hierbei ist aber darauf zu Achten, dass die Werte der jeweiligen Detail-Grade nicht überlappen! Sonst sind bei einer Icon-Größe beide Formen sichtbar...
+Wenn zum Beispiel "Form 1" unterhalb 48x48 zu sehen sein soll und "Form 2" überhalb (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
Ein Stil ("style") kann entweder eine Vollfarbe oder ein Farbverlauf sein.
+Neben vordefinierten Farben der Farbpalette unter Swatches kann man auch seine eigene Farbe mischen. Der Regler unterhalb des Farbspektrums legt den Alpha-Kanal einer Farbe, also dessen Transparenz fest.
+
+
Ein neuer Stil kann auch erstellt werden, in dem man zuerst die gewünschte Farbe wählt oder mischt und diese dann in die Stil-Liste zieht.
+
Wenn als Stil anstatt Vollfarbe die Wahl auf Gradient fällt, kann man noch zwischen Linear, Radial, Diamond und Cone wählen. Die Anfangs- und Endfarbe kann durch Ziehen aus der Farbübersicht auf den dreieckigen Marker gewählt werden.
+Natürlich kann der Marker verschoben werden, um den Farbverlauf anzupassen. Zusätzliche Marker können durch Doppelklick in den Farbverlauf hinzugefügt werden. Mittels DEL wird der ausgewählte (unterstrichene) Marker gelöscht.
+
Wie bei einer Form kann das Rechteck, dass den Gradient auf der Zeichenfläche repräsentiert, verschoben, gedreht oder in seiner Größe verändert werden.
Neben dem Namen Name und der Breite Width der Transformation können unter den Properties diese (je nach Art leicht unterschiedliche) Einstellungen vorgenommen werden:
+
+
Caps
(nur bei "Stroke") Definiert die Endpunkte einer Linie: Butt - abgeflacht, Square - die Linienbreite wird auf die Linie als Abschluss-Quadrat aufgesetzt, oder Round, die Linie wird abgerundet.
+
Detect Orient.
(nur bei "Contour") Stellt sicher, dass Icon-O-Matic - insbesondere bei Pfaden, die sich selbst schneiden - die Kontur um einen Pfad immer außen anbringt.
+
Joins
Definiert, wie Linien an einem Punkt miteinander verbunden werden: Miter (auf Gehrung), Round (abgerundet) oder Bevel (abgeschrägt).
+
Miter Limit
nur wenn unter Joins "Miter" ausgewählt wurde: diese Einstellung beeinflusst das Aussehen des Gehrungsschnittes.
Am oberen Rand des Fensters findet man die Menüzeile. File, Edit und Options sind hinreichend selbsterklärend. Detaillierter sind die Möglichkeiten des Abspeicherns zu betrachten.
+
File | Save As... speichert die Datei im speziellen Format von Icon-O-Matic, das zusätzliche Informationen, wie den Namen von Pfaden, Formen oder Stilen, mit abspeichert. Diese Informationen gehen, um Speicherplatz zu sparen, verloren, wenn das Icon exportiert wird. Es empfiehlt sich, Entwürfe für eine spätere Verwendung in diesem Format zu speichern, da sonst alle Objekte ihren Namen verlieren und nur noch <path>, <shape>, respektive <style> heißen.
+
+
File | Export As... öffnet ein Dialogfenster zum Exportieren der Zeichnung. Das Dateiformat kann über ein Auswahlmenü unten im Dialogfeld ausgewählt werden:
+
+
HVIF
Haiku Vektor Icon Format
+
HVIF RDef
Exportieren als Resource (wird von Programmierern verwendet)
+
HVIF Quellcode
Exportieren als Quellcode (wird von Programmierern verwendet)
+
SVG
Exportieren als SVG
+
PNG
Exportieren als PNG in der Größe 64x64 Pixel
+
PNG Set
Exportieren als PNG in den Größen 16x16, 32x32 und 64x64 Pixel
+
BEOS:ICON Attribute
Nach Auswahl einer Datei wird die Zeichnung direkt als Icon-Attribut dieser Datei zugewiesen
+
META:ICON Attribute
Nach Auswahl einer Datei wird die Zeichnung als Icon (als Meta-Daten) dieser Datei zugewiesen
Ein paar Dinge, die man beherzigen sollte, wenn man Icon-O-Matic verwendet:
+
+
Die Icon Guidelines (englisch) enthalten wichtige Informationen zu Haiku Icons wie Perspektive, Farben und Schattenwurf.
+
Mit Pfaden sollte sparsam umgegangen werden, da sie am meisten Speicherplatz benötigen. Man sollte eher Formen bearbeiten und transformieren, um bereits bestehende Pfade wiederverwenden zu können. Ebenso kann die Verwendung von Gradienten Speicherplatz sparen.
+
So oft es möglich ist, sollte die Option "Am Gitter ausrichten" aus den Options aktiviert werden. Pfade, deren Punkte sich am 64x64 Pixel-Gitter der Zeichenfläche orientieren, benötigen weniger Speicherplatz. Darüber hinaus sind so die Icons optisch ansprechender.
+
Im Programmfenster ist oben links eine Vorschau der Zeichnung in verschiedenen Auflösungen. Hier kann der sinnvolle Einsatz des Detail-Grades von Formen direkt überprüft werden.
+
Icon-O-Matic selbst enthält keine Möglichkeit, um Text einzufügen. Text kann nach Einstellung von Schriftart und Schriftschnitt in einem Texteditor - beispielsweise StyledEdit - direkt auf die Zeichenfläche gezogen werden. Icon-O-Matic erstellt automatisch die entsprechenden Pfade und Formen.
+
Sind einer Form mehrere, sich überschneidende Pfade zugewiesen, wird die Schnittfläche ausgeblendet. So ist es möglich, ein Loch in eine Fläche zu "schneiden".
+
Über das Mausrad kann die Zeichenfläche gezoomt werden. Zum Verschieben der Zeichenfläche wird die mittlere Maustaste verwendet, beziehungsweise per normalem Linksklick bei gedrückter LEERTASTE.
Der Installer installiert (genauer: kopiert) Haiku auf einen Datenträger. Eine "Installation" im klassischen Sinn ist bei Haiku nicht notwendig. Das System muss nicht durch Installation an die vorhandene Hardware angepasst werden, sondern läuft mit identischem Dateiumfang auf allen (unterstützten) Systemen.
+Beim Start des Installer werden zunächst wichtige Informationen angezeigt. Es sind aber keine juristischen Formulierungen eines Endbenutzer-Lizenzvertrages (EULA), sondern tatsächlich wichtige Informationen, die lesenswert sind:
+
+
Haiku ist noch im "Alpha"-Stadium. Es wird dringend angeraten, Sicherheitskopien von wichtigen Dateien zu machen; ein Datenverlust ist - obwohl nicht wahrscheinlich - nicht auszuschließen!
+
Der Installer kann selbst noch keine neue Partition anlegen. Hierfür wird zusätzliche Software, wie die GParted LiveCD benötigt. Erst wenn Haikus DriveSetup vollkommen sicher ist, wird es möglich sein, während der Installation die Partitionen zu ändern.
+
Haiku kann zum Boot-Manager GRUB hinzugefügt werden. Hierzu ist in der Datei /boot/grub/menu.lst ein weiterer Eintrag hinzuzufügen, der folgendermaßen aussieht (aber natürlich an die eigenen Gegebenheiten angepasst werden muss):
+
# Haiku on /dev/sda7
+title Haiku
+rootnoverify (hd0,6)
+chainloader +1
+
+
+
Nach Bestätigung der Informationen durch Drücken von Continue erscheint dieses Fenster:
+
+
Im ersten Auswahlmenü ist die Quelle der Installation zu wählen. Dies kann entweder ein bereits installiertes Haiku sein, oder ein explizites Installationsmedium, wie zum Beispiel die Haiku Alpha1-CD.
+Das zweite Auswahlmenü bezeichnet das Ziel der Installation. Dieses Ziel, das bereits vor der dem Start von Installer existieren muss, wird durch die Installation vollständig überschrieben; eine nachträgliche Rettung von darin gespeicherten Daten ist nicht möglich.
+
Durch einen Klick auf das Dreieck neben Show Optional Packages werden, so vorhanden, zusätzliche Programmpakete angeboten, die mitinstalliert werden können.
+
Wie bereits erwähnt, wird die Zielpartition vollständig überschrieben. Man muss daher sicher sein, die richtige Partition gewählt zu haben. Über Setup partitions... wird das Programm DriveSetup aufgerufen, in dem man eine Übersicht über die Partitionen erhält.
+
Mit Klick auf Begin wird der eigentliche Installations-Prozess gestartet. Wie oben beschrieben, muss lediglich kopiert und nicht installiert werden. Wenn von einer bestehenden Haiku-Installation aus installiert wird, werden bis auf home/ and common/ alle Ordner übernommen und die Zielpartition startfähig gemacht.
+
Durch die Installation anderer Betriebssysteme kann es vorkommen, dass Haiku nicht mehr startfähig ist, weil der "Boot-Sektor" überschrieben wurde. In diesem Fall kann man - wenn unter Onto: Please Choose Target die nicht mehr startfähige Haiku-Installation auswählt - über einen Klick auf Write Boot Sector den vorherigen Zustand wieder herstellen.
Magnify stellt den Bildschirmbereich unter dem Mauszeiger vergrößert dar.
+
+
Im Programmfenster oben stehen die Größe des angezeigten Bereiches und der Vergrößerungsgrad. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" bedeutet, man sieht einen 32 x 32 Pixel großen Bereich unter dem Mauszeiger und jedes Pixel ist um den Faktor 8 vergrößert.
+
Darunter ist die Farbe des Pixels angegeben, der rot umrandet dargestellt ist. Sie wird nach dem RGB-Schema und in HEX angegeben. Die rote Umrandung kann mit den Pfeiltasten verschoben werden.
+
Zum Ausrichten und Messen von Entfernungen können bis zu zwei blaue Umrandungen mittels ALTH angezeigt werden. Deren X/Y-Koordinaten bezogen auf die linke obere Ecke und - wenn zwei angezeigt werden - die Entfernung der beiden zu einander werden am unteren Rand des Programmfensters angezeigt.
+Das jeweils aktivierte, durch ein X markierte der beiden kann mit den CURSOR Pfeiltasten verschoben werden.
+
Der Mauszeiger kann über die Tastenkombination OPT und Pfeiltaste verschoben werden.
+
Das Auswahlmenü oben rechts enthält mehrere Einträge:
+
+
Save Image
ALTS
Das aktuell angezeigte Bild wird als "Resource"-Datei gespeichert.
+
Copy Image
ALTC
Das aktuell angezeigte Bild wird in die Zwischenablage kopiert.
+
Hide/Show Info
ALTT
Die Informationen im Programmfenster oben und unten werden an-, beziehungsweise ausgeblendet.
+
Add a Crosshair
ALTH
Fügt eine (von maximal zwei) blauen Umrandungen hinzu.
+
Remove a Crosshair
ALTSHIFTH
Entfernt die zuletzt hinzugefügte blaue Umrandung
+
Hide/Show Grid
ALTG
Hier kann das angezeigte Gitternetz abgeschaltet werden.
+
Freeze/Unfreeze image
ALTF
Wenn die Maus bewegt wird, ändert sich automatisch der angezeigte Bereich; dies kann hiermit verhindert werden.
+
Stick Coordinates
ALTI
Der angezeigte Bildschirmbereich wird bei Mausbewegung aktualisiert, die angezeigten Koordinaten verbleiben jedoch auf ihrem ursprünglichen Wert.
+
Make Square
ALT/
Nach einer manuellen Änderung der Programmfenstergröße kann mit dieser Option wieder ein quadratischer Darstellungsbereich eingestellt werden.
Pe ist ein sehr umfangreiches Schreibprogramm, dessen Syntax-Hervorhebung hauptsächlich auf Programmierer und für HTML-Dokumente zugeschnitten ist. Pe wurde von Maarten Hekkelmann programmiert und wird, seit dem es quelloffen ist, von Haiku-Entwicklern gepflegt. Eine detaillierte Beschreibung ist auf der Projekt Seite von Pe vorhanden.
People ist eine einfache Kontaktverwaltung, die die Attribute von Haikus Dateisystem dazu nutzt Adressen und andere Kontaktinformationen zu speichern. Jeder Kontakt ist dabei eine eigene "Person" Datei mit ihren Daten in getrennten Attributen. Sie alle sind indiziert und daher mittels Queries durchsuchbar.
+
+
+
+
Mit dem Group Attribut ganz unten, lässt sich eine Person einer oder mehreren Gruppen zuordnen. Das ist nützlich bei "Massenmailings" an eine Reihe von Leuten, die z.B. gemeinsam an einem bestimmten Projekt arbeiten. Das Drop-Down Menü enthält alle momentan existierenden Gruppen. Gehört eine Person zu mehreren Gruppen, werden deren Namen mit einem "," getrennt.
+
+
Diese "Person" Dateien werden normalerweise im Ordner /boot/home/people/ abgelegt. Für eine Liste aller Kontakte öffnet man einfach seinen People Ordner und blendet sich die gewünschten Attribute ein. Benutzt man mehrere Verzeichnisse um seine Kontakte zu ordnen, kann man sie mittels einer Query alle in einem einzigen Fenster anzeigen lassen.
+
+
+
+
Diese Dateien verhalten sich wie jede andere: Man kann sie nach ihren Attributen sortieren (sogar mit einer sekundären Sortierfolge durch halten von SHIFT während des Klickens) und sie lassen sich natürlich entfernen, duplizieren und umbenennen. Sogar die Kontaktinformationen selbst lassen sich direkt bearbeiten: Ein Klick auf ein Attribut (oder ALTE) springt in den Editiermodus genau wie das auch beim Dateiumbenennen geschieht. In diesem Modus springt man mit TAB und SHIFTTAB von Spalte zu Spalte.
PoorMan ist ein netter kleiner Webserver, der ausgesprochen einfach einzurichten ist. Er bietet natürlich keine so fortgeschrittenen Funktionen wie eine ausgewachsene Serversoftware; er ist schließlich, wie der Name schon sagt, ein Arme-Leute-Webserver.
+
Bei seinem ersten Start fragt PoorMan nach dem Ordner, der im Netz publiziert werden soll. Wählt man hier Default, wird dafür der Ordner /boot/home/public_html angelegt. Als Startseite muss hier eine HTML-Datei mit dem Standardnamen index.html liegen.
+
PoorMan zeigt sich mit einer einfachen Konsole, die alle Aktivitäten aufzeichnet. Dazu eine Statusanzeige ob der Server läuft, welches Verzeichnis publiziert wird und einen Zugriffszähler. Mit Edit | Settings... lassen sich die Einstellungen ändern:
+
+
+
Das Einstellungsfenster besteht aus drei Reitern:
+
Im Site Reiter kann ein anderer zu publizierender Ordner oder eine andere Startseite angegeben werden oder festgelegt werden, dass die Dateiliste des Ordners übertragen werden soll, falls keine Startseite existiert.
+Im Logging Reiter kann man die Aufzeichnung der Ereignisse in der Konsole de/aktivieren oder sie optional in eine eigene Datei umleiten.
+Im Advanced Reiter lässt sich die maximale Anzahl gleichzeitiger Verbindungen einstellen.
+
Die Befehle in der Menüleiste des Konsolenfensters sind selbsterklärend. Mit ihnen lässt sich die Konsolenausgabe oder Teile davon speichern, die Konsolenaufzeichnung bzw. Log-Datei leeren, der Server starten und anhalten und der Zugriffszähler zurücksetzen.
+
+
Um auszuprobieren, ob PoorMan funktioniert, kann man einfach mal /boot/apps/BePDF/docs/ als Ordner und index.html als Startseite einstellen. Dann springt man im Browser zur Adresse 127.0.0.1, also dem localhost.
Anders als bei normalen Screenshots, die durch die Druck Taste als PNG unter /boot/home/ gespeichert werden, bietet diese Anwendungen einige nützliche Optionen.
+
+
Startet man Screenshot, wird der aktuelle Bildschirminhalt wie üblich aufgenommen. In dessen Hauptfenster können jedoch vor dem Speichern des Bilds noch Dateiname, Format und Speicherort bestimmt werden.
+
Der Options Dialog bietet weitere Einstellungen:
+
+
Neben dem Offensichtlichen - Wechsel zwischen Aufnahme des gesamten Bildschirminhalts oder nur des aktiven Fensters, mit oder ohne Fensterrahmen und Mauszeiger - lässt sich eine Aufnahmeverzögerung festlegen. Diese Verzögerung kommt natürlich erst zum tragen, wenn mit Take Screenshot eine neue Aufnahme ausgelöst wird.
+
+
+
+Screenshots aus dem Terminal
+
Die Screenshot Anwendung kann auch vom Terminal oder einem Skript aus benutzt werden.
+Screenshot --help zeigt die vertrauten Optionen als Parameter:
+
+
~> Screenshot --help
+
+Screenshot [OPTION]... Erstellt einen Screenshot vom aktuellen Bildschirminhalt
+OPTION
+ -o, --options Zeigt zuerst das Einstellungsfenster
+ -m, --mouse Nimmt den Mauszeiger mit auf
+ -b, --border Nimmt den Fensterrahmen mit auf
+ -w, --window Aufnahme des aktiven Fensters statt des gesamten Bildschirminhalts
+ -d, --delay=seconds Aufnahmeverzögerung [in Sekunden]
+ -s, --silent Macht den Screenshot, ohne das Anwendungsfenster zu öffnen
+ hebt --options auf, speichert ein PNG ins HOME Verzeichnis
+
+Achtung: OPTION -b, --border funktioniert nur zusammen mit -w, --window
StyledEdit heißt Haikus einfacher Texteditor. Obwohl er reine Textdateien schreibt, lassen sich gewisse Formatierungen mittels Dateiattributen verwenden, die dann unter StyledEdit dargestellt werden.
+
+
Falls es interessiert, so sehen diese zusätzlichen Attribute aus, wenn man sie im Terminal mit listattr anzeigt:
+
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+ Int-32 4 "be:encoding"
+MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Int-32 4 "wrap"
+ Int-32 4 "alignment"
+ Raw Data 1048 "styles"
+
+1071 bytes total in attributes.
+
Wie man sieht, sind sämtliche Möglichkeiten zur Formattierung von StyledEdits Menü vorhanden: Zeilenumbruch ("line wrapping (on/off)") und Ausrichtung ("alignment (left/center/right)"); beide in einem eigenen Attribut. In einem weiteren befindet sich Schriftart, Größe und Farbe jedes Zeichens.
+
Weil Attribute auf die Eigenschaften des BFS Dateisystems angewiesen sind, heißt das nicht nur, dass man unter anderen Betriebssystem ganz normale Textdateien vorfindet. Es bedeutet auch, dass die Formatiierungen verloren gehen, wenn man die Datei auf einer nicht-BFS Partition ablegt. Die oben erwähnten Attribute verschwinden dadurch und es bleibt eine einfache Textdatei.
+
Auf alle Fälle ist es eine nette Idee, die Möglichkeit für bunten Text in unterschiedlichen Schriften und Größen zu haben, während es sich immer noch um eine reine Textdatei handelt. Damit ist zum Beispiel eine ReadMe.txt Datei von jeder Plattform aus in einer Konsole lesbar und hat immer noch ein bisschen Style, wenn man sie unter Haiku doppelklickt.
+
Die eigentliche Bedienung von StyledEdit ist so einfach, dass sich eine Erklärung für jeden der banalen Menüpunkte erübrigt. Man schreibt einfach seinen Text runter, markiert die zu formatierenden Wörter und wählt die entsprechenden Einträge für Schrift, Größe und Farbe aus dem Font Menü. Zeilenumbruch und Ausrichtung aus dem Document Menü lassen sich nur auf die gesamte Datei anwenden.
~/config/settings/Terminal_settings
+~/.profile - hinzufügen/übergehen von Standardwerten in /boot/system/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - hinzufügen/übergehen von Standardwerten in /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+
+
+
Das Terminal ist Haiku's Schnittstelle zur Bash, der "Bourne Again Shell".
+
Einige Anleitungen zum arbeiten in der Konsole finden sich in Bash und skripten. Hier geht es um die Anwendung Terminal an sich.
Es können beliebig viele Terminals geöffnet werden. Entweder jedes in seinem eigenen Fenster - durch einfaches Starten, oder mit ALTN von einem bereits laufenden Terminal aus - oder man benutzt die Reiterfunktion von Terminal und öffnet einen neuen Reiter mit ALTT.
+
Ein Terminal-Fenster kann, wie jedes andere Programmfenster, in seiner Größe verändert werden. Es sind auch vorgegebene Einstellungen unter Settings | Window Size vorhanden. Mittels ALTENTER kann in den Vollbild-Modus (und zurück) geschaltet werden.
+
Die vorgenommenen Einstellungen sind jedoch nur bis zum Start eines neuen Terminal aktiv, außer man speichert sie mit dem Menüpunkt Settings | Save as default als Voreinstellung.
+
+
+
Über Settings | Preferences kann man die Schriftart und -größe, sowie die Farbe des Textes und Hintergrunds festlegen. Verschiedene Einstellungen können abgespeichert und später mittels Doppelklick auf diese Einstellungs-Datei wieder gestartet werden.
+Mit OK wird die aktuelle Einstellung übernommen.
Da die Bash aus der Unix-Welt stammt, gibt es unzählige Möglichkeiten, diese anzupassen. Zwei davon sind für den Anwender besonders hervorzuheben: .profile und .inputrc
+Diese beiden Dateien erweiteren oder ersetzen die Standard-Werte, die in /boot/system/etc/ gespeichert sind, wenn sie im home/ Verzeichnis angelegt werden.
+
+
.profile
+
Die Datei .profile wird jedes Mal geladen, wenn ein neues Terminal gestartet wird. Es werden dadurch die verschiedensten Variablen und Verhalten innerhalb der Bash eingerichtet. Da eine detaillierte Beschreibung der Möglichkeiten hier zu umfangreich ist, wird auf die ausführlichen Erklärungen zu dieser Datei im Internet verwiesen.
+
Der Haiku/BeOS Tipp-Server enthält einige Beispiele und Tipps, unter anderem:
Die Datei .inputrc kümmert sich um die Tastaturzuweisungen. Da Haiku aber bereits mit einer sinnvollen Voreinstellung eingerichtet ist, wird man hier wenig ändern müssen - außer man hat spezielle Bedürfnisse. In diesem Fall wird auf die The GNU Readline Library im Internet verwiesen.
Wird eine Datei in das Tracker-Fenster gezogen, so wird der Pfad zu dieser Datei an der aktuellen Cursor-Position eingefügt. Wird sie mittels der rechten Maustaste hineingezogen, gibt es mehrere Möglichkeiten zur Auswahl:
+
+
Insert Path
Fügt den Pfad zu dieser Datei ein.
+
Change Directory
Wechselt im Terminal zum Verzeichnis, in dem die Datei gespeichert ist.
+
Create Link Here
Im aktuellen Verzeichnis des Trackers wird einen Verweis zu dieser Datei erstellt.
+
Move Here
Verschiebt die Datei in das aktuelle Verzeichnis im Tracker.
+
Copy Here
Kopiert die Datei in das aktuelle Verzeichnis im Tracker.
+
+
Vom Terminal aus kann auch jede Datei mit ihrem bevorzugten Programm gestartet werden. Der Befehl hierfür ist open [filename]. Dies funktioniert auch mit den Repräsentanten für das aktuelle (".") und übergeordnete ("..") Verzeichnis. Um also ein Tracker-Fenster mit dem aktuellen Verzeichnis zu öffnen wäre dies einzugeben:
Vision ist ein IRC Client, der ursprünglich für das BeOS entwickelt wurde. Auf der Vision Webseite findet man Anleitung und Bugtracker.
+
In den Haiku Kanälen findet man in verschiedenen Sprachen Hilfe von anderen Benutzern und Entwicklern.
+Am besten besucht, ist der englisch sprachige Kanal #haiku von irc.freenode.org.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/userguide/de/applications/vlc.html b/userguide/de/applications/vlc.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0096634f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/userguide/de/applications/vlc.html
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ VLC media player
+
+
+
+
+
Der VLC Media Player ist ein Port des auf mehreren Plattformen weitverbreiteten Mediaplayers. Weitere Informationen finden sich auf der VideoLAN Webseite.
WonderBrush ist ein Bitmap- und Vektorgraphik Editor. Nähere Informationen können auf der Webseite von YellowBites, den Entwicklern dieses Programms, und in der Haiku beigefügten englischen Dokumentation nachgelesen werden.
Attribute sind Datenfelder, die zu einer Datei gehören ohne dabei ein Teil von ihr zu sein. So werden sie nicht zur Dateigröße dazugerechnet und können kopiert oder geändert werden ohne die Datei selbst anzufassen. Das System benutzt diese Attribute, um z.B. Größe, Dateityp oder das Datum der letzten Änderung zu speichern. Soweit ist das ähnlich wie bei anderen Betriebssystemen und deren Dateisystem.
+
Der Unterschied liegt darin, dass jede Art von Attribut an jedwede Datei gehängt werden kann und es in einem Trackerfenster dargestellt oder auch bearbeitet werden kann. Dazu muss nur die Art des Attributs definiert werden, das einem Dateityp hinzugefügt werden soll - z.B. Text, Zahl oder Zeit - und ein Name und eine Beschreibung vergeben werden.
+
Die Datei selbst muss dabei nicht mal einen Inhalt haben. People Dateien sind ein Beispiel dafür:
+
+
+
Wie man sieht, sind das alle 0 byte große Dateien mit angehängten Attributen. Das E-mail Attribut von "John Nox" wird gerade direkt im Tracker bearbeitet.
+
Werden diese Attribute indiziert, wie das mit People, Email oder Audio Dateien von Hause aus der Fall ist, kann man sie mit Haikus schnellem Query System durchsuchen.
Attribute werden ähnlich wie in einer Datenbank oder Tabellenkalkulation dargestellt. Im Tracker kann ausgewählt werden welche Attribute gezeigt werden sollen (Spalten) und die Dateiliste (Reihen) anschließend entsprechend sortiert werden.
+
Dazu öffnet man ein Trackerfenster und wählt aus dem Attributes Menü die darzustellenden Attribute aus. Oder man führt einen Rechtsklick auf einen Spaltentitel aus und wählt die entsprechenden Einträge aus dem Kontextmenü. Die Spalten können durch Ziehen der Spaltentitel verschoben werden. Um Spalten die man nicht braucht schnell zu entfernen, zieht man sie einfach ganz aus dem Fenster.
+
Ein Doppelklick auf die Trennlinie zweier Spaltentitel stellt automatisch die optimale Breite ein.
+
Klickt man auf einen Spaltentitel, ändert sich die Sortierreihenfolge von auf- zu absteigend. Hält man SHIFT gedrückt während man auf einen Spaltentitel klickt, lässt sich eine zweite Sortierung einrichten. So kann man zum Beispiel seine People Dateien nach Firmen sortieren und innerhalb dieser Sortierung nach Kontaktnamen. Obiger Screenshot zeigt ein Beispiel dafür. Die zweite Sortierordnung ist mit einem helleren Pfeil neben dem Titel gekennzeichnet.
+
Diese Attribute zu bearbeiten ist genauso einfach wie das Umbenennen einer Datei: Entweder klickt man auf einen Eintrag oder drückt ALTE und bewegt sich zwischen den Attributen mit TAB und SHIFTTAB. ESC verlässt den Bearbeitungsmodus ohne die Änderungen zu übernehmen.
Für alle, die die Kommandozeile bevorzugen oder vor haben mit vielen Dateien via Skript zu arbeiten, gibt es eine Reihe von Befehlen, um Attribute vom Terminal aus zu bearbeiten.
listattr listet die Attribute einer Datei auf, zeigt aber nicht deren Inhalt.
+
usage: listattr 'filename' ['filename' ...]
+
Von obigem Beispiel-Screenshot:
+
~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters
+File: Clara Botters
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Text 14 "META:name"
+ Text 6 "META:nickname"
+ Text 1 "META:company"
+
+ Text 18 "META:address"
+ Text 8 "META:city"
+ Text 1 "META:state"
+ Text 1 "META:zip"
+ Text 1 "META:country"
+
+ Text 1 "META:hphone"
+ Text 13 "META:wphone"
+ Text 1 "META:fax"
+ Text 19 "META:email"
+ Text 1 "META:url"
+
+ Text 5 "META:group"
+ Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le"
+
+131 bytes total in attributes.
+
Neben all den "META:*" Attributen mit den Kontaktinformationen, erscheinen zwei Attribute, die vom System gepflegt werden:
+
+
BEOS:TYPE enthält den Dateityp als MIME String, hier "application/x-person". Er bestimmt das Standard-Icon und welche Anwendung die Datei z.B. bei einem Doppelklick öffnet.
+
"_trk/pinfo_le" ist das Attribut, in dem Tracker die Position des Icons der Datei speichert.
+
Man beachte den umgekehrten Schrägstrich nach "Clara". Im Terminal muss man Sonderzeichen wie ' " * \ $ ? ! "escapen". Das Leerzeichen zwischen "Clara" und "Botters" ist ebenfalls eines. Der Backslash ist also in Wirklichkeit vor dem Leerzeichen, und nicht etwa nach "Clara".
addattr hängt ein Attribut an eine Datei und/oder füllt es mit einem Wert.
+
usage: addattr [-t type] attr value file1 [file2...]
+ or: addattr [-f value-from-file] [-t type] attr file1 [file2...]
+
+ Type is one of:
+ string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, raw
+ or a numeric value (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...)
+ The default is "string"
+
Wenn also die gute Clara einen Job bei der multi-nationalen Barkelbaer Inc. angetreten hat, befüllt man das vorher leere "Company" Attribut mit dieser Information (welches vom Typ "string" ist):
+
~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters
rmattr entfernt ein Attribut komplett von einer Datei.
+
+
usage: rmattr [-p] attr filename1 [filename2...]
+ 'attr' is the name of an attribute of the file
+ If '-p' is specified, 'attr' is regarded as a pattern.
+
Obwohl es in der Praxis wohl immer genügen würde das "Fax" Attribut einfach nicht zu füllen, kann man es so auch komplett von Clara's Datei entfernen:
copyattr kopiert Attribute von einer oder mehreren Datei zu einer anderen. Standardmäßig wird dabei der eigentliche Inhalt der Datei nicht mit kopiert.
"Skripten" bezeichnet die Technik Prozesse zu automatisieren, indem
+Befehle aneinandergereiht werden und das Ganze als Textdatei, ein
+sogenanntes "Skript", abgespeichert wird. Jedes mal wenn so ein Skript
+aufgerufen wird, werden die Befehle nacheinander so ausgeführt, als ob
+man sie per Hand ins Terminal eintippt.
+Skripte können zum einfachen Ausführen weniger Befehle in einer
+bestimmten Reihenfolge dienen, durch ausgefeilte Programmierung aber
+auch komplexe Aufgaben lösen.
Da Skripte natürlich stark auf die Konsole für die sie geschrieben wurden aufbauen, sollte man sich zuerst mit der BASH vertraut machen, die von Haiku benutzt wird. Dank ihrer weiten Verbreitung, existieren für diese Konsole viele Ressourcen online. Johan Janssons Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS ist ein lesenswertes Dokument.
Sobald man sich ein gewisses Grundwissen zum Arbeiten in der Shell angeeignet hat, ist es Zeit sich ein wenig tiefer in die Welt des Skripten zu begeben. Nochmals, es gibt massenhaft Beispiele und Referenzmaterial im Internet und im Buchhandel. Eine sehr schöne, für Haiku praktisch maßgeschneiderte, Einführung ist das online verfügbare Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900kb) aus Scot Hackers BeOS Bible.
In Haiku macht das System selbst natürlich auch Gebrauch vom Skripten. Hoch- und Runterfahren sind typische Aufgaben für Skripte. Diese definierten Abfolgen können vom Benutzer mit eigenen Benutzerskripten erweitert werden.
+Falls sie noch nicht existieren, muss man die benötigten Dateien selbst anlegen. Ansonsten sollten eigene Befehle einfach an den Stellen eingefügt werden, an denen sie ausgeführt werden sollen.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript wird ausgeführt nachdem das System komplett hochgefahren wurde. Man kann zum Beispiel einige Programme aufrufen, die dann nach jedem Hochfahren automatisch gestartet werden:
Das "&" am Ende jedes Befehls ist wichtig, um ihn im Hintergrund zu starten. Anderenfalls wird das Skript solange anhalten, bis der Befehl beendet ist (in diesem Fall, bis das ausgeführte Programm geschlossen wurde).
+
+
Eine einfache Alternative zum oben genannten ist es, die Anwendungen, die nach dem Hochfahren gestartet werden sollen, im Verzeichnis /boot/home/config/boot/launch zu verlinken. Am einfachsten klickt man dazu mit der rechten Maustaste auf die entsprechende Anwendung, geht auf Create Link und navigiert dann zum oben genannten Verzeichnis.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript wird direkt vor dem Herunterfahren ausgeführt. Das Runterfahren wird abgebrochen, falls das Skript einen anderen Rückgabewert als "0" zurück liefert.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript wird beim Herunterfahren als letztes ausgeführt. Es gilt jedoch zu beachten, das zum Zeitpunkt, an dem dieses Skript ausgeführt wird, viele Systemkomponenten schon nicht mehr laufen.
Mit dem "Haiku Boot Loader" kann man zum einen unterschiedliche Haiku-Installationen starten, zum anderen hardware-spezifische Probleme umgehen. Ebenso ist es damit möglich, während einer Software-Installation hinzugefügte Systemerweiterungen vorübergehend zu deaktivieren (über den unten bezeichneten Punkt Disable user add-ons), um eventuell aufgetretene Fehler zu beheben.
+
Um den Haiku Boot Loader zu starten, muss man am Anfang des Boot-Prozesses die LEERTASTE drücken. Da Haiku jedoch sehr schnell bootet, ist es hilfreich, sie sofort und solange zu drücken, bis der Boot Loader erscheint.
+
+
Im Boot Loader hat man drei Auswahlmöglichkeiten:
+
+
Select boot volume
Hier wird eine Auswahl an bootfähigen Haiku-Installationen angezeigt.
+
Select safe mode options
+
Es gibt mehrere Möglichkeiten, Haiku im Falle hardware-bezogener Probleme zum Booten zu bringen, indem man verschiedene Komponenten deaktiviert. Wenn man über die Pfeiltasten eine Option auswählt, wird am unteren Bildschirmrand eine kurze Erklärung angezeigt.
+
- Safe mode
+- Disable user add-ons
+- Disable IDE DMA
+- Use fail-safe video mode
+- Don't call the BIOS
+- Disable APM
+- Disable ACPI
+- Disable IO-APIC
+- Enable serial debug output
+- Enable on screen debug output
+
+
Select fail safe video mode
Falls die Option Use fail-safe video mode gewählt werden muss, um Haiku zu starten, kann man hier die Bildschirmauflösung und Farbtiefe auswählen.
+
+
+
Nach der Auswahl einer oder mehrerer Optionen kann man über das Hauptmenü den eigentlichen Boot-Vorgang starten. Es erscheint daraufhin folgender Bildschirm:
+
+
+
Wenn Haiku ordnungsgemäß bootet, leuchten nacheinander alle Icons auf und das System wechselt zum Desktop.
+Die unterschiedlichen Symbole repräsentieren die verschiedenen Phasen des Boot-Vorganges:
+
+
Atom
Die einzelnen Kernel-Module werden geladen.
+
Laufwerk + Lupe
Die Boot-Partition wird gesucht und spezielle Dateisysteme angelegt (rootfs: / und /dev).
+
Steckkarte
Der Geräte-Manager, der sich um die Zuteilung von Systemressourcen an die einzelnen Hardware-Komponenten kümmert wird geladen.
+
Boot-Laufwerk
Die vorher gefundene Boot-Partition wird in das Dateisystem eingebunden.
+
Chip
Spezielle Hauptprozessor-Module werden geladen.
+
Ordner
Alle Subsysteme werden aktiviert.
+
Rakete
Die Boot-Skripte werden abgearbeitet und anschließend der Desktop gestartet.
Dies ist die Beschreibung der wichtigsten Aspekte von Haiku. Das Vervollständigen und Erweitern der Doku ist natürlich ein ständig fortlaufender Prozess. Wer Fehler findet, weitere Kapitel vorschlagen oder selber etwas beisteuern will, soll bitte über die Documentation Mailinglist Kontakt aufnehmen. Wer bei den Übersetzungen helfen möchte, findet im i18n User Guide Wiki Informationen dazu.
In der Grundinstallation von Haiku sind einige kleine Unterhaltungs-Spiele und Beispiel-Programme enthalten. Die meisten davon zielen auf Entwickler ab, um anhand ihres Quellcodes Problemlösungen erlernen zu können.
Die Deskbar wird standardmäßig in der oberen rechten Ecke des Desktops angezeigt. Sie ist praktisch Haikus Version von Windows' "Taskbar" und "Startmenü". Sie besteht aus dem Deskbar Menü, von dem aus Programme und Einstellungen aufgerufen werden können, darunter einen Infobereich (das "Tray") mit Uhr und Hilfsprogrammen, sowie eine Liste der gerade laufenden Programme.
+
+
Die Deskbar kann in jede der vier Ecken - oder entlang des oberen oder untereren Bildschirmrands - verschoben werden. Hierzu muss die gepunktete Linie seitlich vom Tray mit der Maus zur gewünschten Position gezogen werden. Man kann die Deskbar auch zu einer kompakten Darstellung zusammenschieben, indem man die gepunktete Linie auf das Deskbar Menü zieht.
Ein Klick auf den oberen Bereich der Deskbar öffnet dieses Menü:
+
+
+
About This System... - zeigt grundsätzliche Informationen zum installierten System, Lizenzinformationen und Danksagungen.
+
+
Find... - öffnet den Query Dialog; ein mächtiges Werkzeug zum Suchen und Finden.
+
Show Replicants - zeigt/verbirgt die kleinen Symbole mit dem Replikanten verschoben, bzw. mittels deren Kontextmenü entfernt werden können.
+
Mount - öffnet den gleichen Dialog zum Einbinden von Partitionen, wie bei einem Klick auf den Desktop (siehe Datenträger einbinden).
+
Deskbar Preferences... - öffnet ein Dialogfenster um die Deskbar anzupassen (siehe unten).
+
Shutdown - bietet die Möglichkeit, das System neu zu starten (Restart System) oder herunterzufahren (Power Off).
+
Recent Documents, Folders, Applications - eine Liste der kürzlich geöffneten Programme, Dateien und Ordnern (siehe Deskbar Preferences weiter unten).
+
Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, Preferences - eine Liste aller installierten Programme, der Demo-Programme und der System-Einstellungen (siehe Deskbar Preferences weiter unten).
+
+
+
+Deskbar Preferences
+
+
+
Menu
+Hier lässt sich die Anzahl der kürzlich geöffneten Dokumente, Ordner und Anwendungen einstellen, die in den entsprechenden Menüs der Deskbar erscheinen.
+Edit Menu... öffnet den Ordner /boot/home/config/be/. Hier befinden sich die Dateien und Ordner aus der Deskbar, standardmäßig Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets und Preferences.
+Einträge wie Verküpfungen zu Anwendungen, Dokumenten oder sogar Query-Suchen können hinzugefügt und wieder gelöscht werden, indem man sie einfach in diesem Ordner ablegt bzw. entfernt.
+
Noch einfacher geht das, indem man eine Datei, Ordner oder gespeicherte Query einfach an die gewünschte Position in die Deskbar zieht.
+
Window
+
+
Always on Top
Die Deskbar bleibt immer im Vordergrund über allen anderen Fenstern.
+
Auto Raise
Wird die Deskbar vom Mauszeiger berührt, springt sie automatisch in den Vordergrund.
+
+
Applications
+
+
Sort Running Applications
Ordnet die Liste laufender Programme alphabetisch.
+
Tracker always First
Selbst wenn alphabetisch sortiert wird, bleibt Tracker immer erster in der Liste.
+
Show Application Expander
Über ein kleines Symbol lassen sich die Fenster eines Programms direkt unter seinem Eintrag in der Deskbar ein- und ausklappen.
+
Expand New Applications
Fenster neu gestarteter Programme werden automatisch unter deren Eintrag in der Deskbar ausgeklappt.
+
+
Clock
+
+
24 Hour Clock
Schaltet zwischen 24 und 12 Stundenanzeige um.
+
Show Seconds
Blendet die Sekundenanzeige ein.
+
European Date
Zeigt das Datum im europäischen Tag-Monat-Jahr Format
Im Tray befindet sich unter anderem die Uhr. Ein Linksklick wechselt zwischen Zeit- und Datumsanzeige. Ein Rechsklick öffnet ein Kontextmenü mit dem die Uhranzeige aus- und eingeschaltet und zur Einstellung das Panel Time geöffnet werden kann.
+Außerdem kann hier ein kleiner Kalender angezeigt werden. Der erscheint übigens auch, wenn man die linke Maustaste etwas länger auf der Uhr gedrückt hält.
+
Das Tray steht jedem Programm zur Verfügung, um dort Informationen oder Einstellungsmöglichkeiten für den Benutzer bereit zu stellen. So ändert sich zum Beispiel das Icon des Mailsystems, sobald ungelesene E-Mails vorhanden sind. Der ProcessController ist ein weiteres Beispiel. Er zeigt durch Balken die aktuelle Prozessor-Last und Auslastung des Hauptspeichers und bietet über ein Kontextmenü weitere Informationen und Aktionen.
Hier werden alle Programme angezeigt, die gerade aktiv sind. Durch einen Klick auf ein Programm kann man zu diesem, respektive zu einem seiner Fenster, wechseln. Mit einem Rechtsklick minimiert oder schließt man ein Programmfenster oder das gesamte Programm.
+
Bei aktivierter Einstellung "Show Application Expander..." in den Deskbar Einstellungen, kann man über das kleine Dreieck die Liste der einzelnen Fenster eines Programmes direkt unterhalb des jeweiligen Eintrages in der Programmliste anzeigen lassen.
+
Das Symbol vor den Einträgen der einzelnen Programmfenster zeigt Informationen zu diesem Fenster. Ein farbiges Icon repräsentiert ein sichtbares Fenster, ein ausgegrautes Icon ein minimiertes Fenster. Linien vor dem Icon deuten darauf hin, dass das Fenster auf einem anderen als dem aktuellen "Workspace" ist.
Um schnell auf seine Lieblingsanwendungen zugreifen zu können, kann eine oder mehrere LaunchBoxen gestartet werden. Sie können so eingestellt werden, dass sie entweder nur auf dem aktuellen oder allen Workspaces erscheinen. Sie lassen sich auch zum schnellen Öffnen eines Dokuments in einer bestimmten Anwendung verwenden. So kann man z.B. eine HTML Datei auf einen Texteditor in der LaunchBox fallen lassen, um sie im Editor anstelle des normalerweise bevorzugten Programms, dem Browser, zu öffnen.
+
+
Alle Einstellungen sind vom Kontextmenü aus erreichbar:
+
+
Add Button Here
Erzeugt ein neues, leeres Iconfeld.
+
Clear Button
Leert ein Iconfeld.
+
Remove Button
Entfernt ein Iconfeld.
+
Settings
+- Horizontal Layout
+- Icon size
+- Ignore Double-click
+- Show Window Border
+- Auto Raise
+- Show On All Workspaces
+Richtet die Iconfelder horizontal aus.
+Legt die Icongröße von 16 bis 64 Pixel fest.
+Started das verlinkte Objekt nur einmal, auch wenn man (unabsichtlich) doppelklickt.
+Blendet den Fensterrahmen ein.
+Die Launchbox spingt in den Vordergrund, sobald der Mauszeiger in die Nähe des Bildschirmrands kommt.
+Zeigt die LaunchBox auf allen Workspaces.
+
Pad
+- New
+- Clone
+- Close
+Erzeugt eine weitere LaunchBox.
+Dupliziert die aktuelle LaunchBox..
+Schließt die aktuelle LaunchBox.
+
LaunchBox
+- About...
+- Quit
+Zeigt das About Fenster.
+Schließt alle LaunchBoxen.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - Speichert die Fensterposition des Panels.
+
+
+
+
+Das Workspaces Applet befindet sich mit den anderen Desktop Applets in der Deskbar. Es stellt eine Miniversion aller Workspaces dar. Im Kontext Menü des Applet Fensters sind mehrere Optionen verfügbar, welche alle recht selbsterklärend sind.
+Change Workspace Count... öffnet die Screen Einstellungen, dort kann die Anzahl der Workspaces und deren Anordnung festgelegt werden (wie viele Zeilen und Spalten).
+
Da es sich um einen Replikant handelt, kann man das Fenster auf die gewünschte Größe bringen und dann direkt auf den Desktop ziehen (vorausgesetzt, die Option Show Replicants im Deskbar-Menü ist aktiviert).
Um ein Fenster zu bewegen kann es einfach im Workspaces Applet gepackt, und dann auf einen anderen Workspace gezogen werden. Das hat den Vorteil, dass das Fenster bewegt werden kann ohne den aktuellen Workspace verlassen zu müssen. Sind sehr viele Fenster auf einem Workspace, ist es natürlich entsprechend schwer das Richtige zu erwischen. Eine andere Möglichkeit ist es das Fenster an seinem Tab zu halten und den Workspace mit ALTFx zu wechseln.
+
Mehr Informationen zu Workspaces im allgemeinen und noch weitere Tastaturkürzel finden sich im Kapitel Workspaces.
In Haikus Dateisystem werden nach Möglichkeit allgemein verständliche Datei- und Ordnernamen verwendet, um den Benutzer nicht unnötig im Dunkeln zu lassen. Dateien und Ordner, die für das Funktionieren des Systems wichtig sind, werden gegen zufällige Änderungen durch einen der folgenden Hinweise geschützt:
+
+
+
Der zweite Hinweis erscheint wenn versucht wird, etwas in der Systemhierarchie zu löschen. Der "Do it" Button wird erst anklickbar wenn die SHIFT Taste gedrückt wird.
+
Grundsätzlich verzweigt sich das Hauptverzeichnis der Bootpartition in drei getrennte Bereiche:
+
+
/boot/system/
gehört allein dem System. Nicht anfassen!
+
/boot/common/
enthält gemeinsame Dateien aller Benutzer.
+
/boot/home/
ist der persönliche Ordner des Benutzers mit all seinen Daten und Einstellungen.
Bei Haikus Vorgänger BeOS hieß dieser Ordner /boot/beos/. Ihn trifft man immer mal wieder in älterer Dokumentation an (z.B. im original BeBook).
+
+Wie immer er auch heißt, man sollte nichts darin ändern. Bei jedem Update von Haiku können hier Sachen dazukommen, gelöscht oder überschrieben werden. Soll etwas erweitert werden, vielleicht durch andere Tracker Add-Ons oder Translatoren oder auch einen neuen Hardwaretreiber, muss dies im eigenen Verzeichnis unter der /boot/home/ Hierarchie oder, wenn es für alle Benutzer gedacht ist, unter /boot/common/ geschehen.
+Solange Haiku noch nicht mehrbenutzerfähig ist, hat diese Unterscheidung noch keine offensichtlichen Auswirkungen, weil es ja nur einen Benutzer mit nur einem home Ordner gibt. Weil es aber doch irgendwann Unterstützung für mehrere Benutzer geben wird, ist es sinnvoll sich von Anfang an die richtige Vorgehensweise anzugewöhnen.
+
Möchte man also einen neuen Translator für das neueste Bildformat installieren, kopiert man ihn nicht einfach in den entsprechenden Systemordner. Wie gesagt, nicht anfassen!
+Stattdessen wandert er in die gespiegelte Hierarchie unter /boot/common/ oder /boot/home/config/.
+
In diesem Beispiel befindet sich der Ort für Translatoren im Systemordner unter
+
/boot/system/add-ons/Translators/
+
Der gespiegelte Ordner für Benutzer ist also entweder
Das hat noch einen weiteren Vorteil: Falls die installierte Komponente etwas arg durcheinander bringt (durchaus möglich, Hardwaretreiber werden ja auch so installiert), lässt sich immer noch die Option "Disable User Add-Ons" im Boot Loader Menü auswählen. So lässt sich das System immer ohne die Probleme verursachende Komponente starten.
+
Meistens muss man sich allerdings nicht mit diesen Dingen beschäftigen, da jede Software aus einer vertrauensvollen Quelle normalerweise über eine entsprechende Installationsroutine verfügt, die sich um alles kümmert.
+
+
Haiku ist noch kein Mehrbenutzersystem. Aber sobald es das ist, bekommt jeder Benutzer einen eigenen home Ordner, auf den niemand der anderen Zugriff hat. Jede Anwendung oder zusätzliche Komponente wie Tracker Add-Ons oder Translatoren etc., ebenso wie alle Daten, die mit den anderen Benutzern geteilt werden sollen, müssen daher nach /boot/common/.
Dieser Ordner gehört einzig und allein dem Benutzer. Hier können beliebig Dateien und Verzeichnisse erstellt und gelöscht werden. Mit dem ~/config/ Ordner und seinen Unterverzeichnissen sollte man sich jedoch zurückhalten. Zwar kann man z.B. den ~/config/settings/ Ordner löschen ohne dadurch das Betriebssystem selbst zu beeinträchtigen, aber wer will schon all seine Konfigurationen und Einstellungen verlieren? In jedem Falle warnt einen das System mit dem oben erwähnten Hinweis.
+
Neben dem ~/config/add-ons/ Ordner, der wie oben beschrieben das System Add-On Verzeichnis für zusätzliche Komponenten spiegelt, existieren noch einige weitere Ordner von Interesse. (Die Tilde ("~") ist übrigens eine Abkürzung für das Home Verzeichnis. So muss man im Terminal nicht immer "/boot/home/" schreiben.)
+
+
~/mail
+
Standardmäßig werden hier alle Mails abgelegt.
+
+
~/queries
+
Queries werden generell für 7 Tage in diesem Ordner gespeichert, danach werden sie automatisch gelöscht.
+
+
~/config/be/
+
Aus der BeOS Geschichte heraus beinhaltet der Ordner be was im Deskbar Menü angezeigt wird. Einträge können durch Anlegen bzw. Löschen von Dateien, Verzeichnissen, Verknüpfungen oder Queries in diesem Ordner hinzugefügt bzw. entfernt werden.
+
+
~/config/bin/
+
Ergänzt den /boot/system/bin/ Systemordner mit selbst installierten Kommandozeilen-Befehlen.
+
+
~/config/boot/
+
Dieser Ordner enthält User Skripte die vor oder nach dem Hoch- bzw. Herunterfahren des Systems ausgeführt werden.
+
+
~/config/boot/launch/
+
In diesem Ordner enthaltene Verknüpfungen zu Programmen oder Dokumenten werden automatisch beim jedem Hochfahren geöffnet.
+
+
~/config/fonts/
+
In diesen Ordner kopierte TrueType oder Postscript Schriften sind automatisch sofort verfügbar.
+
+
~/config/settings/
+
Dieser Ordner enthält die eigenen Einstellungen für alle Anwendungen, sowie einige Systemkonfigurationen. Einige Anwendungen verwalten ihre Einstellungen in eigenen Unterverzeichnissen, andere schreiben ihre Einstellungsdatei direkt in diesen Ordner.
+
+
~/config/settings/beos_mime/
+
In dieser MIME Datenbank sammelt Haiku all die verschiedenen Dateitypen und ihre Einstellungen.
+
+
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/
+
Hier gibt es vor allem eine interessante Datei: kernel bietet einige hardwarenahe Konfigurationen, wie Auschalten von SMP, Aktivieren von Debugging über die serielle Schnittstelle oder Einschalten von erweitertem Power-Management. Eine Konfigurationszeile wird aktiviert, indem das Rautesymbol "#" entfernt wird. Hier ist Vorsicht angeraten!
+
+
~/config/settings/Tracker/
+
Neben diversen Konfigurationsdateien für den Tracker, finden sich hier einige interessante Unterverzeichnisse:
+
+
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Jedes neu erstellte Verzeichnis erbt die Fenstergröße und das Layout der angezeigten Attribute dieses Ordners.
+
+
DefaultQueryTemplates/
Das Layout von Query-Ergebnissen lässt sich je nach Dateityp individuell definieren. Siehe Query: Das Ergebnisfenster.
Anders als Windows, verlässt sich Haiku zur Bestimmung des Dateityps nicht auf die Dateiendung (beispielsweise ".txt", ".jpg", ".mp3"). Diese Methode wird nur benutzt, wenn keine andere Möglichkeit erfolgreich war. Ansonsten verwendet Haiku MIME Typen, wie sie auch im Internet benutzt werden.
+
Während es unter Haiku nicht zwingend ist, Dateiendungen zu benutzen, sollte man es trotzdem tun, falls man Dateien mit Nutzern anderer Betriebssysteme austauschen möchte; zum Beispiel per E-Mail, durch Hochladen auf einen Server oder über einen USB-Stick. Ohne Dateiendung kann das andere System eine Datei eventuell nicht richtig zuordnen.
Man kann den Typ, das Icon und die verknüpfte Anwendung einer bestimmten Datei ändern. Dazu markiert man die Datei und ruft mittels Rechtsklick Add-Ons | Filetype add-on aus dem Kontextmenü auf.
Im obigen Beispiel ist einer Datei der Typ "image/png" zugeordnet; sie wird von Haiku demnach als PNG-Datei erkannt. Sollte es sich tatsächlich jedoch um einen anderen Dateityp handeln, kann man diesen ändern, indem man entweder die korrekte MIME Signatur einträgt, oder auf einen der beiden Buttons unter dem Textfeld klickt:
+
+
Select...
zeigt eine hierarchische Liste von Dateitypen, in der man zu image | GIF Image gelangt.
+
Same as...
öffnet einen Dialog zur Auswahl einer Datei, die bereits den entsprechenden MIME-Typ besitzt.
Dieses Menü zeigt eine Liste aller Anwendungen, die mit diesem Dateityp etwas anfangen können. Aus ihr kann man das Programm wählen, das diese eine bestimmte Datei bei einem Doppelklick öffnen soll. So kann man z.B. die bevorzugte Anwendung einer HTML Datei vom Browser zu einem Texteditor ändern, solange man an ihr arbeitet. Jede andere HTML Datei wird weiterhin im Browser geöffnet, nur eben diese eine im Texteditor.
+
+
Die Default Application ist die für diesen Dateityp global gesetzte Anwendung. Befindet sich die gewünschte Anwendung nicht in dem Menü, finden sich darunter wieder die beiden Buttons Select... und Same As..., mit denen man das gleiche machen kann wie schon unter "Der Dateityp" weiter oben beschrieben.
Icons werden normalerweise vom Systemstandard für diesen Dateityp geerbt. Darum muss man sich nicht wundern, wenn das Iconfeld oben rechts im Dialog leer ist. Besitzt eine Datei ein eigenes Icon, lässt es sich im Filetype Add-On in das Iconfeld einer anderen Datei ziehen. Oder man doppelklickt in das Iconfeld und baut sich sein eigenes Symbol. Mehr über Icons und ihre Erstellung steht im Kapitel Icon-O-Matic.
Wird das Filetype Add-On auf eine Anwendung angewandt, (hier: StyledEdit), erscheint ein etwas anderer Dialog:
+
+
Ganz oben befindet sich statt des Standard MIME Kennzeichens die eindeutige Signatur der Anwendung. Mit ihr findet das System das Programm, wo immer es auch installiert wurde.
+
Darunter finden sich eine Reihe von Optionen, die das Verhalten der Anwendung regeln:
+
+
Single Launch
Pro ausführbarer Datei kann die Anwendung nur ein einziges mal laufen. Hat man zwei Kopien des Programms, können diese aber durchaus gleichzeitig ausgeführt werden.
+
Multiple Launch
Die Anwendung kann öfters gestartet werden und läuft dann praktisch mehrmals parallel.
+
Exclusive Launch
Es kann wirklich nur eine einzige Anwendung mit dessen genauer Signatur auf einmal laufen.
+
Args Only
Zeigt an, dass die Anwendung nicht auf Messages reagiert.
+
Background App
Die Anwendung erscheint nicht im Twitcher oder der Liste laufender Programme in der Deskbar.
+
+
Danach folgt eine Liste aller unterstützten Dateitypen. Typen können hinzugefügt (und auch entfernt) werden, wenn man meint die Anwendung käme mit ihnen klar. Als Folge erscheint das Programm im Menü bevorzugter Anwendungen oder in Trackers Open with... Kontextmenü bei einem Rechtsklick auf eine Datei dieses Typs.
+
Ganz unten folgen Informationen zu Version und Copyright. Wie die Signatur, werden auch diese Angaben vom Autor der Anwendung befüllt und sollten nicht verändert werden.
Die FileTypes Preferences beschäftigen sich nicht mit individuellen Dateien, sondern mit den globalen Einstellung von Dateitypen. Es lassen sich Standardicons und bevorzugte Anwendungen für ganze Dateitypen einstellen, oder Attribute hinzufügen, entfernen oder ändern. Es lassen sich sogar komplett eigene Dateitypen neu erstellen.
+
Alle Dateitypen und ihre Konfiguration sind in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/ gespeichert. Bevor man mit Experimenten anfängt, sollte man dieses Verzeichnis sichern...
Haikus grafische Benutzeroberfläche ist ein fundamentaler Bestandteil des Systems. Anders als bei Unix-basierten Systemen, gibt es keinen getrennten Fenstermanager und nur in eine Konsole hochfahren ist nicht möglich. Weil sich Haiku ganz auf den Desktop-Nutzer konzentriert, ist dies einfach nicht nötig.
+
Weil die meisten wohl schon Erfahrung mit anderen grafischen Benutzeroberflächen haben, überspringen wir mal die Standards wie Menüs, Rechtsklick Kontextmenüs, Drag&Drop etc. Konzentrieren wir uns stattdessen auf die paar Besonderheiten der Haiku Oberfläche.
+
+
Haikus GUI ist ziemlich selbst erklärend; nur wenige Dinge bedürfen einer weiteren Erläuterung.
+
+
Die Deskbar ist sozusagen Haikus "Start" Menü und Taskbar, siehe Deskbar.
+
Der gelbe Reiter zeigt mehr als den Programm- oder Dateinamen:
+
Er lässt sich verschieben, indem man die SHIFT Taste gedrückt hält, während man ihn an eine andere Position zieht. So lassen sich einige Fenster hintereinander anordnen, und bleiben durch ihre beschrifteten Reiter einfach erreichbar.
+
Durch einen Doppelklick auf den Reiter werden Fenster minimiert (oder per CTRLALTM). Auf ein so minimiertes Fenster kann über dessen Eintrag in der Deskbar oder dem Twitcher zugegriffen werden.
+
Ein Rechtsklick auf den Reiter eines Fensters (oder dessen Rahmen) schickt es in der Hierarchie offener Fenster ganz nach hinten.
+
Der Button zum Fenster schließen.
+
Der "Zoom" Button (auch durch STRGALTZ). Die meisten Anwendungen ziehen damit ihr Fenster auf die Maximalgröße auf. Das muss aber nicht immer sein. Trackerfenster etwa, ändern sich so, dass der Inhalt optimal dargestellt wird.
+
Die Ecke zum Ändern der Fenstergröße. Zieht man irgendwo anders am Rahmen eines Fensters, verschiebt man es stattdessen.
+
+
Hält man STRGALT gedrückt, kann man mit der linken Maustaste irgendwo in ein Fenster klicken, um es zu verschieben; die rechte Maustaste schickt es in den Hintergrund.
Öffnet oder speichert man eine Datei in irgendeiner Anwendung, erscheint so ein Dialog:
+
+
Er besteht aus den üblichen Dingen: Eine Auswahlliste aller Dateien des aktuellen Ordners, ein Textfeld um einen Dateinamen einzugeben und ein Menü für unterschiedliche Dateiformate und deren Einstellungen.
+Zum übergeordneten Verzeichnis gelangt man mit dem Pop-up Menü über der Dateiliste.
+
Ist bereits ein Trackerfenster mit dem gewünschten Ort offen, kann man einfach irgendeine Datei von dort oder das Ordnersymbol oben rechts in der Menüleiste in den Dialog ziehen. Dadurch springt der Dialog zu diesem neuen Ort.
Viele Kürzel in Öffnen- und Speicherdialogen sind die gleichen wie im Tracker. Neben den Befehlen, die auch über das File Menü erreichbar sind, gibt es noch einige nicht so offensichtliche:
In Öffnen- und Speicherdialogen bietet das Menü Favorites kürzlich besuchte Ordner und bevorzugte Speicherorte, die man selbst einrichten kann. Wie durch den kleinen Pfeil erkennbar, lassen sich diese Orte auch als Ausgangspunkt zum weiteren Navigieren in der Hierarchie nutzen.
+
+
Um einen Favoriten hinzuzufügen, klickt man sich einfach zu seinem Ziel durch und wählt dann Favorites | Add Current Folder. Er erscheint von nun an in jedem Öffnen/Speichern Dialog. Möchte man ihn wieder entfernen, wählt man Favorites | Configure Favorites... und löscht den entsprechenden Eintrag.
+Alle Favoriten befinden sich in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/.
+Man kann Verknüpfungen zu Dateien und Ordnern also auch dort direkt anlegen und entfernen.
Replikanten sind kleine autarke Module von Anwendungen, die in andere Programme integriert werden können. Sofern Deskbars Option Show Replicants aktiviert ist, erkennt man "replizierbare" Teile einer Anwendung durch ein kleines Symbol, normalerweise rechts unten:
+
+
Das nächstgelegene Objekt, das Replikanten aufnehmen kann, ist der Desktop: Man lässt einfach das kleine Symbol per Drag&Drop darauf fallen. Ab sofort ist es ein Teil des Desktops und die ursprüngliche Anwendung muss nicht mehr laufen damit es funktioniert.
+Ein Rechtsklick auf ein Replikanten-Symbol öffnet ein Kontextmenü, um das About Fenster der ursprünglichen Anwendung anzuzeigen und zum Entfernen den Befehl Remove Replicant.
+
Sollte ein Replikant auf dem Desktop mal Schwierigkeiten machen und sich auch nicht mehr entfernen lassen, kann man die Datei ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf löschen. Dadurch werden allerdings alle Replikaten vom Desktop entfernt.
Attribute and Queries sind zwei fundamentale Features von Haiku. Während Attribute allein schon sehr nützlich sind, um Zusatzinformationen anzuzeigen, müssen sie jedoch indiziert werden, um sie mit einer Query durchsuchen zu können. Dadurch gelangen sie intern in eine einfach durchsuchbare Tabelle, was Queries wiederum blitzschnell werden lässt.
+Der Index ist ein Teil des Dateisystems und wird getrennt pro Partition verwaltet.
+
+
+Index-Befehle im Terminal
+
Es existieren mehrere Befehle zur Verwaltung des Index:
+
+
lsindex - Zeigt alle indizierten Attribute der aktuellen Partition.
+Folgende Attribute sind standardmäßig indiziert:
mkindex - Legt einen Index für ein Attribut auf der aktuellen Partition an.
+
+
Gebrauch: mkindex [Optionen] <Attribute>
+Legt einen neuen Index für das angebene Attribut an.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH ein Pfad auf der Partition, auf der der Index angelegt wird,
+ Standard ist die aktuelle Partition.
+ -t, --type=TYPE der Typ des zu indizierenden Attributs. Entweder "int",
+ "llong", "string", "float", or "double".
+ Standard ist "string".
+ --copy-from Pfad zur Partition von der der Index kopiert wird.
+ -v, --verbose gibt informationen zum angelegten Index aus
+
+
+
+Nur neu angelegte Dateien mit diesem Attribut kommen automatisch in den Index!
+Bereits existierende Dateien müssen von Hand hinzugefügt werden, indem sie kopiert und anschließend die Originaldateien gelöscht werden.
+Oder man benutzt den Befehl reindex.
+
+
reindex - Fügt die Attribute bereits existierender Dateien in den neu erstellten Index der aktuellen Partition.
+
+
Gebrauch: reindex [-rvf] attr <Liste von Dateinamen und/oder Ordner>
+ -r arbeitet Ordner recursiv ab
+ -v ausführliche Ausgabe von Informationen
+ -f erstellt/aktualisiert alle Indexe von der Quell-Partition,
+ "attr" ist der Pfad zur Quell-Partition
+
+
rmindex - Entfernt ein Attribut aus dem Index der aktuellen Partition.
+
+
Gebrauch: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME
+
+Entfernt den Index "INDEX_NAME" von einer Partition. Ist das geschehen,
+kann mittel Queries nicht länger nach Dateien mit dem INDEX_NAME
+Attribut gesucht werden.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH ein Pfad zu der Partition, von der der Index entfernt
+ werden soll
+ -h, --help zeigt diese Hilfe und bricht ab
+ -p, --pattern INDEX_NAME ist ein Muster
+ -v, --verbose gibt Informationen zum entfernten Index aus
+
+INDEX_NAME ist der Name eines Datei Attributs.
+
+Wird keine Partition angegeben, wird von der Partition des aktuellen Ordners ausgegangen.
Um z.B. Befehle von Menüs auszuführen, wird in Haiku standardmäßig nicht die anderwo übliche STRG Taste, sondern ALT benutzt. Das hat historische Gründe, da BeOS sehr durch MacOS inspiriert wurde. Wenn man sich erst mal daran gewöhnt hat, hat das tatsächlich Vorteile. So integriert sich ALTC und ALTV nahtlos in die bash Konsole des Terminals, wo STRGC einen gerade laufenden Prozess beendet.
+
Mit den Keymap Einstellungen kann jedoch für alle Fälle zur vielleicht vertrauteren STRG Taste gewechselt werden. Dieser Userguide geht auf alle Fälle immer von der Standardkonfiguration mit ALT als Befehlstaste aus.
+
Wenn man sich nicht sicher ist, welche Taste OPT oder MENÜ bei seinem Keyboard/Tastatur-Layout ist, kann man wieder die Keymap Einstellungen benutzen. Hier lässt sich erkennen welcher Tastendruck erzeugt wird, wenn man eine bestimmte Taste auf seiner Tastatur drückt.
Hier eine Liste mit den meist genutzten Tastaturkürzel, die immer zur Verfügung stehen, auch falls es dafür gerade kein entsprechendes Menü gibt:
+
+
ALTFx
Wechselt zum Workspace X (Fx ist dabei die dem Workspace entsprechende Funktionstaste). Bei gleichzeitigem Drücken der SHIFT-Taste wird das aktive Fenster mit zum neuen Workspace genommen.
+
STRGALT←/→/↑/↓
Zum Bewegen durch die Reihen und Spalten der verfügbaren Workspaces. Bei gleichzeitigem Drücken der SHIFT-Taste wird das aktive Fenster mit zum neuen Workspace genommen.
Zusätzlich zu den allgemeinen Kürzeln, gibt es noch einige mehr für die Trackernavigation:
+
+
ALT↑
Öffnet den übergeordneten Ordner.
+
ALT↓ or ENTER
Öffnet den markierten Ordner.
+
OPT
Wird die Taste gehalten, während man einen Ordner öffnet, schließt sich automatisch dessen übergeordneter Ordner. Das funktioniert auch wenn man zum Navigieren die Maus benutzt.
+
MENÜ
Öffnet das Deskbar Menü (Verlassen mit ESC).
+
ALTZ
Macht die letzte Aktion rückgängig. Wieviele Aktionen rückgängig gemacht werden können wird nur durch den verfügbaren Speicher begrenzt. Man beachte, das funktioniert nur für Aktionen, die Dateien direkt betreffen, Änderungen an Attributen oder Zugriffsrechten können so nicht rückgängig gemacht werden. Und wenn eine Datei aus der Trash geleert wurde, ist sie unwiederbringlich weg.
+
ALTSHIFTZ
Wiederholt die Aktion die zuvor mittels ALTZ rückgängig gemacht wurde.
Öffnet eine neue Terminal Session in einem neuen Fenster.
+
ALTT
Öffnet eine neue Terminal Session in einem neuen Reiter.
+
ALT1, 2, 3...
Wechselt zum entsprechenden Reiter.
+
SHIFT←/→
Wechselt zum vorigen/nächsten Reiter.
+
ALTTAB
Wechselt zum nächsten Terminal Fenster.
+
ALT+, -
Vergrößern/Verkleinern der Schriftgröße.
+
ALTENTER
Wechsel Vollbild-/Fenstermodus.
+
SHIFT↑/↓
Scrollt die Terminal Ausgabe um eine Zeile rauf/runter.
+
SHIFTBild↑/Bild↓
Scrollt die Terminal Ausgabe um eine Seite rauf/runter.
+
TAB
Tab-Vervollständigung. Nachdem einige Zeichen eingegeben wurden, komplettiert ein Druck der
+TAB Taste einen Dateinamen oder Pfad. Gibt es mehr als einen Treffer, hält die Ausgabe an der Stelle die beginnt sich zu unterscheiden und man muss noch einige Zeichen zur weiteren Unterscheindung nachliefern. Drückt man TAB zweimal, werden alle Treffer aufgelistet.
+
↑/↓
Bewegt einen rauf und runter in einer Liste aller vorher schon mal eingegebenen Befehle.
+
STRGR
Bash Historie. Alle eingegebenen Befehle werden in der Datei ~/.bash_history gespeichert. Drückt man STRGR und beginnt einen Befehl einzugeben, erhält man den ersten Treffer aus der Bash Historie. Jetzt kann immer wieder STRGR gedrückt werden bis man die gewünschte Befehlszeile finden, die man mit ENTER ausführt.
Weitere Objekte können zu einer bestehenden Auswahl hinzugefügt oder davon entfernt werden, indem man eine zusätzliche Taste gedrückt hält, während man auf ein Objekt klickt (oder eine Datei im Tracker).
+
+
SHIFT
Es werden alle Objekte zwischen dem markierten und dem geklickten ausgewählt.
+
ALT
Fügt das angeklickte Objekt der Auswahl hinzu oder entfernt es aus ihr.
+
+
Beginnt man in einem Tracker Fenster Zeichen einzutippen, wird das Fenster entsprechend gescrollt und die Datei ausgewählt, die dieser inkrementellen Suche am besten entspricht. Existiert keine Datei, die mit den eingegebenen Zeichen anfängt, wird die Datei markiert, die diese Zeichen irgendwo in ihrem Namen oder in sonst einem angezeigten Attribut enthält. Diese Suche unterscheidet keine Groß- und Kleinbuchstaben.
+Die eingegebenen Zeichen erscheinen unten links, wo ansonsten die Anzahl der Objekte steht. Nach einer Sekunde springt die Anzeige dort wieder zurück und man könnte mit einer neuen inkrementellen Suche beginnen.
Obwohl eine Grundphilosophie von Haiku besagt möglichst wenige Optionen, und dafür umso bessere Grundeinstellungen zu bieten, gibt es einige Dinge, die man einfach konfigurieren muss oder nach seinem Geschmack einstellen kann. Alle Einstelldialoge befinden sich in Deskbars Preferences Menü.
Im ersten Reiter, Colors, lassen sich die Farben einiger Teile der Oberfläche einstellen. In das Farbfeld können Farben per Drag & Drop aus anderen Programmen, wie z.B. WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic oder dem Backgrounds Panel, reingezogen werden.
Im zweiten Reiter, Antialiasing, befinden sich unterschiedliche Einstellungen, die die Ausgabe auf dem Bildschirm beeinflussen.
+
+
+
+Glyph Hinting
+
Aktiviert man Glyph hinting, werden alle Buchstaben so ausgerichtet, dass ihre horizontalen und vertikalen Ränder genau zwischen zwei Pixel liegen. Dadurch erreicht man einen sehr guten Kontrast, besonders bei Darstellungen von schwarz auf weiß. Text erscheint schärfer. Die Einstellung Monospaced Fonts Only beschränkt das Hinting auf Schriften fixer Breite und ist gerade bei Geräten mit geringen Auflösungen, wie Netbooks, interessant. Bei kleinen Schriftarten kann das Hinting ziemlich schlimm aussehen. Mit dieser Einstellung hat man die Vorteile aber zumindest noch in Texteditoren und im Terminal.
+
Hier sieht man den Unterschied von Hinting anhand vergrößerter Screenshots:
+
+
Hinting: aus
Hinting: an
+
+
Es sei angemerkt, dass alle Magnify Fenster auf dieser Seite natürlich auch selbst mit den verschiedenen Optionen dargestellt werden. So bekommt man einen echten Eindruck der Einstellungen, indem man z.B. die fetten Titel der Fensterreiter vergleicht, oder den Text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+
+
+
+Antialiasing Typ
+
Eine weitere Technik, um die Darstellung zu verbessern, ist Antialiasing, welches auf Vektorgrafiken, als auch auf Text angewandt wird. Es glättet Linien, indem die Farbe bestimmter Pixel geändert wird. Dazu gibt es zwei unterschiedliche Methoden:
+
Grayscale ändert die Intensität der äußeren Pixel.
+LCD subpixel macht das noch besser, vor allem bei (hochauflösenden) LCD Monitoren. Anstatt der Intensität eines Pixels, wird die Farbe so geändert, dass eine Kante nur einen Bruchteil eines Pixels bewegt wird, da LCD Schirme jeden Pixel aus einer roten, grünen und blauen Komponente zusammensetzen.
+
Hier wieder die beiden Methoden anhand vergrößerter Screenshots:
+
+
Grayscale, Hinting: aus
LCD subpixel, Hinting: aus
+
+
Subpixel Antialiasing verleiht Objekten einen leicht farbigen Umriss, den nicht jeder mag. In Haiku kann man beide Antialiasing Methoden mischen und die für einen richtige Einstellung mit einem Schieberegler finden.
+
Die Kombination von Subpixel Antialiasing und Glyph Hinting ist durch ein Softwarepatent geschützt und daher nicht von Hause aus verfügbar. Je nachdem in welchem Land der Erde man sich befindet, existiert u.U. eine dieses Feature enthaltene Version. Das ist sehr schade. Abhilfe könnte ein Gespräch mit seinem Abgeordneten bringen.
+
Wenn Glyph Hinting zusammen mit LCD Subpixel Antialiasing aktiviert wird, indem man den Sourcecode entsprechend ändert und neu kompiliert, sieht das so im Vergleich mit Hinting bei Grayscale Antialiasing aus:
+
+
Grayscale, Hinting: an
LCD subpixel, Hinting: an
+
+
+
Ganz unten im Fenster befinden sich zwei Buttons:
+
+
Defaults
stellt die Standardwerte wieder her.
+
Revert
setzt wieder die Werte, die aktiv waren als das Appearance Panel gestartet wurde.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - Speichert die Position des Programmfensters.
+
+
Für jeden Ordner und für den Desktop von jedem Workspace, lassen sich eigene Hintergrundfarben oder -grafiken auswählen.
+
+
+
Im Menü ganz oben lässt sich einstellen, ob die Änderungen nur für den aktuellen Workspace, alle Workspaces, einem bestimmten Ordner oder für alle neu angelegten Ordner gelten sollen.
+
Unter "Image" kann ein Hintergrundbild ausgewählt werden. Ein Bild lässt sich auch in die Vorschau links ziehen; es wird dann automatisch übernommen. Wählt man im Menü None bekommt man einen einfachen einfarbigen Hintergrund.
+
Wird ein Hintergrundbild verwendet, kann unter "Placement" dessen Plazierung eingestellt werden:
+
+
Manual
Das Bild kann in der Vorschau verschoben werden. Zur genaueren Positionierung lassen sich auch X- und Y-Koordinaten eingeben.
+
Center
Zentriert das Bild in der Bildschirmmitte.
+
Scale to fit
Das Bild wird unbeachtet seiner Seitenverhältnisse auf die gesamte Bildschirmgröße skaliert.
+
Tile
Das Bild wird als Kachel auf dem Bildschirm wiederholt angezeigt.
+
+
Die Option Icon label outline legt eine dünne Kontur um Icon-Beschriftungen, um die Lesbarkeit zu erhöhen.
+
Ob die Icon-Beschriftung auf dem Desktop schwarz oder weiß dargestellt wird, entscheidet der Farbeinsteller. Eine dunkle Farbwahl erzeugt weißen Text, eine helle umgekehrt schwarzen. Wenn man also beispielsweise ein sehr helles Hintergrundbild verwenden will, sollte man auch den Farbeinsteller entsprechend hell einstellen, damit der Icon-Text in schwarz erscheint. (Oder man benutzt die erwähnte Kontur-Option.)
+Die ausgewählte Farbe findet sich auch im Workspaces Applet wieder, welches eventuell benutzte Hintergrundbilder ignoriert.
+
+
Revert
setzt die Einstellungen auf die Werte zurück, die beim Start des Backgrounds Panels aktiv waren.
~/config/settings/* - Jeder Übersetzer ("Translator") hat hier Datei mit spezifischen Einstellungen.
+~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Speichert die Position des Programmfensters.
+
+
Die Möglichkeit eines Programms, Daten in verschiedenen Dateiformaten abspeichern zu können, wird unter Haiku zentral durch sogenannte "Translators" - also Übersetzer - bereitgestellt. Die Einstellungen für die einzelnen Übersetzer werden in DataTranslations vorgenommen.
+
+
+
Abhängig von den einzelnen Übersetzern variiert der Umfang der Einstellungsmöglichkeiten. Es ist aber immer mindestens eine Schaltfläche Info... vorhanden, die Auskunft über den Übersetzer und den Speicherort angibt.
+Nachfolgend ist eine Tabelle über die standardmäßig installierten Übersetzer und ihrer wichtigsten Einstellungen.
+
+
BMP Images
24 bit Farbtiefe, unkomprimiert, keine Transparenz
+
EXR Images
ILM-eigenes Format für HDR-Bilder.
+
GIF Images
8 bit Farbtiefe, verlustfreie Kompression, Transparenz
+Über die Anzahl der zu verwendenden Farben kann die Dateigröße beinflusst werden.
+Die Transparenz wird entweder automatisch aus dem Alpha-Kanal genommen, oder händisch über die Definition einer speziellen Farbe, die als transparent dargestellt wird.
+
JPEG2000 Images
24 bit Farbtiefe, komprimiert, keine Transparenz
+Dieses Dateiformat kann verwendet werden, wenn eine hohe Bildqualität gewünscht wird.
+
JPEG Images
24 bit Farbtiefe, komprimiert, keine Transparenz
+Neben der Ausgabequalität kann noch eine Kantenglättung eingestellt werden, die Kompressions-Artefakte mildert, aber gleichzeitig die Bildschärfe verringert.
+
PCX Images
24 bit Farbtiefe, unkomprimiert, keine Transparenz; "PC Paintbrush Exchange"-Format
+
PNG Images
32 bit Farbtiefe, verlustfreie Kompression, Transparenz
+
PPM Images
24 bit Farbtiefe, unkomprimiert, keine Transparenz; "Portable PixMap"-Format
+
RAW Images
bis zu 48 bit Farbtiefe, unkomprimiert, keine Transparenz
+
RTF Text Files
formatierter Text, dessen Formatierung in den Datei-Attributen gespeichert werden
+
SGI Images
24 bit Farbtiefe, Möglichkeit der verlustfreien Kompression, Transparenz
+
StyledEdit Files
formatierter Text, dessen Formatierung in den Datei-Attributen gespeichert werden
+
TGA Images
32 bit Farbtiefe, Möglichkeit der verlustfreien Komprimierung, Transparenz
+
TIFF Images
24 bit Farbtiefe, Möglichkeit der verlustfreien Komprimierung, Ebenen, Transparenz
+
WonderBrush Images
32 bit Farbtiefe, Ebenen, Transparenz; spezielles Dateiformat von WonderBrush
+
+
+
Welches Dateiformat für welche Art von Bildern das Beste ist, hängt von der weiteren Verwendung des Bildes und dem verwendeten Farbumfang ab. Man muss abwägen, ob ein Verlust der Farbinformationen bei geringer Dateigröße (GIF), hoher Komprimierungsgrad bei Artefakten-Bildung (JPEG), höherer Dateigröße bei vollem Farbraum (PNG) oder ein spezielle Dateiformat die jeweils beste Wahl ist.
In Haiku wird der Empfang und Versand von E-Mails vom Mail Service (auch mail_daemon gennant) gehandhabt. Dieser Systemdienst kümmert sich darum, dass eingegangene Mails als Datei gespeichert werden und die Attribute zu dieser Datei aus den entsprechenden E-Mail Informationen befüllt werden. So können die E-Mails von jedem Programm oder vom Benutzer direkt verwendet werden und ein Wechsel des Mail-Programms ist jederzeit möglich.
+Die Konfiguration des Mail-Verkehrs wird in den "E-Mail"-Einstellungen vorgenommen.
Im Folgenden werden die einzelnen Schritte erklärt, um ein neues E-Mail Konto anzulegen:
+Im Programmfenster der E-Mail Eigenschaften als erstes unten auf Add klicken, um ein neues, noch unbenanntes Mail-Konto anzulegen. Es folgt dieser Dialog:
+
+
Zuerst ist der Account Type festzulegen, also ob über dieses Konto nur empfangen wird (Receive Mail Only), E-Mails nur gesendet werden (Send Mail Only), oder - dies dürfte der Regelfall sein - beides (Send and Receive Mail). Danach ist der Konto-Typ festzulegen: POP3 oder IMAP.
+
Dann ist die verwendete E-Mail Adresse unter E-mail Address einzugeben, sowie der Login Name und das Password für das Mail-Konto am Server. Der Kontoname unter Account Name bezeichnet das E-Mail Konto in der Liste aller Konten, der Real Name wird als Absender einer E-Mail angegeben.
+
Haiku kennt einige der großen E-Mail Provider, so dass die notwendigen technischen Einstellungen wie IP-Adresse und Servername bereits automatisch ausgefüllt werden. Wenn das nicht möglich ist, oder die Daten angepasst werden müssen, kann man dazu wie nachfolgend beschrieben vorgehen.
Mit einem Klick auf Incoming unter dem Kontonamen, lassen sich Einstellungen zum E-Mail Empfang vornehmen.
+
+
Im Menü ganz oben stehen die Übertragungs-Protokolle IMAP und POP3 zur Verfügung.
+
Unter Mail Server ist die Adresse (IP-Adresse oder Servername) des Mail-Servers einzutragen. Sollte der Mail-Provider einen anderen, als den Standard-Port verlangen, ist dieser
+mit einen Doppelpunkt getrennt nachzustellen. Beispielsweise: mail.provider.org:1400.
+
Die vom Provider zugewiesene Kombination von Benutzerkennung und Passwort ist unter Username, respektive Password einzutragen. Falls nötig, kann die Art des Login unter Login Type von Plain Text auf APOP geändert werden.
+
Bei Verwendung des POP3-Protokolls für eingehende E-Mails kann die Option Leave mail on server eingeschaltet werden, um die Mails nach dem Empfang auf dem Server zu belassen. So kann auch von einem anderen Computer aus auf die Mails zugegriffen werden. Mit Remove mail from server when deleted werden die E-Mails erst dann auf dem Server gelöscht, wenn sie auch auf dem Rechner entfernt werden.
+
Sollte IMAP als Übertragungs-Protokoll verwendet werden, steht nur die Möglichkeit Remove mail from server when deleted zur Verfügung. Zusätzlich kann man noch ein Haupt-Postfach unter Top Mailbox Folder angeben, um nur von diesem Postfach und dessen Unterverzeichnissen die E-Mails zu synchronisieren.
+
Die Art der Benachrichtigung bei neuen Mails wird unter New Mail Notification eingestellt. Das ist natürlich Geschmackssache; hier hilft nur ausprobieren.
+
Der Speicherpfad für das lokale Postfach ist unter Location eingetragen (Standard ist /boot/home/mail/in/) und kann jederzeit geändert werden. Dies ist sinnvoll, wenn man für jedes E-Mail Konto ein eigenes Unterverzeichnis verwenden möchte. Zwingend notwendig ist es aber nicht, denn über die "Queries" - Haikus mächtige Suchfunktion - kann man gleiches erreichen.
+
Zuletzt kann man angeben, ob E-Mail lediglich teilweise (bis zu einer bestimmten Größe) heruntergeladen werden - Partially download messages. Dadurch werden von Mails, die größer als der eingestellt Wert sind, nur die Kopfzeilen heruntergeladen. So kann man erstmal die Betreffzeile und Absender prüfen, bevor man den Rest der Nachricht plus eventuelle Anhänge runterlädt. Die Einstellung ist vor allem bei langsamen Netzwerkverbindungen sinnvoll.
Unter Outgoing lassen sich für jedes Konto Einstellungen zum E-Mail Versand vornehmen.
+
+
Genauso wie bei eingehenden Mails kann der Speicherpfad für ausgehende E-Mails unter Location vom Standard /boot/home/mail/out/ in einen anderen geändert werden.
+
Als nächstes ist der SMTP Server anzugeben. Hier kann wenn nötig auf gleiche Art ein spezieller Port angegeben werden: mail.provider.org:1200.
+
Falls man sich am SMTP-Server mit Benutzernamen und Passwort anmelden muss, kann man diese angeben, wenn man den Login Type auf ESMTP stellt. Die andere Möglichkeit POP3 before SMTP ist für Provider, die festgelegt haben, dass man nur unmittelbar nach einem Post-Abholen auch Versenden kann.
Zur Filterung eingehender E-Mails ermöglicht ein Klick auf E-Mail Filters unter dem Kontonamen diverse Einstellungsmöglichkeiten. Es kann eine beliebige Anzahl an Filtern eingerichtet werden, die der Reihe nach abgearbeitet werden, wobei die Sortierreihenfolge durch Ziehen mit der Maus geändert werden kann.
+Neben dem R5 Daemon Filter, der aus Gründen der Rückwärts-Kompatibilität noch vorhanden ist, gibt es unter Incoming Mail Filters noch zwei weitere.
+
+
+
+Spam Filter
+
+
Spam-Filter verwenden Methoden der Statistik, um E-Mails zu klassifizieren. Jeder Mail wird dabei ein Wert zwischen 0 und 1 zugewiesen, wobei man selbst festlegt, ab welchem Wert eine Mail als Spam gilt. Der errechnete Wert kann, durch Setzen des entsprechenden Hakens, der Betreffzeile vorangestellt werden.
+Der Spam-Filter kann auch so eingestellt werden, dass er anhand eingehender E-Mails dazulernt und sich dadurch immer weiter verbessert. Ein gezieltes Training auf erkannte Spam-Mails und Mails, die fälschlicherweise als Spam kategorisiert wurden, kürzt den Lernprozess ab. Mehr dazu im Abschnitt zum Programm Mail der Dokumentation.
+
Zusammen mit dem folgenden Filter Match Header ist man in der Lage erkannte Spam-Mails automatisch aussortieren zu lassen.
+
+
+
+Match Header
+
+
Dieser Filter vergleicht die Kopfzeilen einer Mail mit vorgegebenen Werten und führt entsprechende Aktionen aus.
+Im ersten Textfeld gibt man die zu prüfende Kopfzeile an. Diese Werte möglich:
+
+
Name
+
der Name des Absenders
+
From
+
die eingetragene E-Mail Adresse des Absenders
+
To
+
die Empfänger-Adresse
+
Reply To
+
die Antwort-Adresse
+
When
+
das Datum / die Uhrzeit des Mail-Empfangs
+
Subject
+
die Betreffzeile
+
Cc
+
für Adressen, die unter CC: (Empfänger einer Mail-Kopie) eingetragen sind
+
Account
+
der Name des Mail-Kontos
+
Status
+
der Status der E-Mail; normalerweise kann er "Read" (gelesen), "Replied" (geantwortet), "Sent" (gesendet), "Forwarded" (weitergeleitet) oder "New" (ungelesen) sein - eingehende Mails sind naturgemäß immer "New"
+
Priority
+
der Marker über die Wichtigkeit der Mail (wird - wenn überhaupt - vom Versender vergeben)
+
Thread
+
grundsätzlich das gleiche wie die Betreffzeile, jedoch ohne eventuell vorangestelltes "Re:", "FW:", oder ähnliches
+
Classification Group
+
je nach dem, als was der Spam-Filter die Mail klassifiziert hat, ist dieser Wert entweder leer (wenn kein genauer Wert errechnet werden konnte), "Genuine" für erwünschte Mails oder "Spam"
+
Spam/Genuine Estimate
+
der errechnete Wert des Spam-Filters für diese Mail; dieser Wert wird in wissenschaftlicher Schreibweise notiert, so steht zum Beispiel 1.065e-12 für 1,065/(10^12), also für "1,065 dividiert durch 10 hoch 12" - was ausgeschrieben 0,000000000001065 ergibt
+
+
Das zweite Textfeld ist für das Suchmuster. Hier können "reguläre Ausdrücke" - sogenannte Reguläre Ausdrücke (reg_ex) - verwendet werden. Damit erreicht man zwar eine sehr hohe Flexibilität bei den Suchmustern, unglücklicherweise sind reguläre Ausdrücke aber nicht leicht anzuwenden. Ein wenig Einarbeitung ist es aber wert und einfache reg_ex sind auch nicht zu schwer.
+
Über das Menü darunter lässt sich eine Aktion ausführen, wenn das Suchmuster erkannt wurde. So kann der Status der Mail verändert, oder die Mail an sich verschoben oder direkt gelöscht werden.
+
+
+
+Outgoing Mail Filters
+
Aktuell gibt es für ausgehende Mails nur einen Filter: fortune.
+Dieser Filter hängt an den E-Mail Text ein zufällig ausgesuchtes Zitat oder eine Text ähnlich einem Glückskeks. Wenn man diesen Filter vorher ausprobieren möchte, kann man den Befehl fortune auch direkt im Terminal eingeben.
Nach der Konfiguration eingehender und ausgehender Mailserver, sowie eventuellen Filtern, muss dem Mail Service, der das ganze Holen und Senden erledigt, noch gesagt werden wie und wann das zu geschehen hat.
+
+
Mit Mail Checking legt man fest, in welchen Zeitabständen der Mailserver kontaktiert werden soll.
+Wenn man seine Netzwerkverbindung über eine Wählverbindung aufbaut, ist es ratsam Only When Dial-Up is Connected und Schedule Outgoing Mail When Dial-Up is Disconnected auszuwählen, damit nur dann E-Mails abgefragt werden, wenn sowieso schon eine Netzwerkverbindung besteht und ausgehende Mails zurück gehalten werden, um keine unnötigen Einwähl-Entgelte zu verursachen.
+
Der Mail Service kann entweder Never (nie), While Sending (während dem Versand), While Sending and Receiving (während dem Versenden und dem Empfangen) oder Always (immer) ein Statusfenster anzeigen.
+
Nur wenn der mail_daemon schon während dem Hochfahren gestartet wird (Start Mail Services on Startup), werden E-Mails automatisch empfangen und versendet.
+
+
Edit Mailbox Menu... öffnet das Verzeichnis ~/config/Mail/Menu Links/. Alle Ordner oder auch Queries(!) - beziehungsweise Verknüpfungen hierzu - erscheinen im Kontextmenü des Mail Service Icons in der Deskbar.
+
Über dieses Kontextmenü kann man auch eine neue E-Mail verfassen (Create New Message...), sofort nach neuen E-Mails schauen (Check For Mail Now), oder die E-Mail Einstellungen aufrufen (Edit Preferences...).
+
Das Icon selbst zeigt an, ob sich im Posteingang ungelesene E-Mails (mit dem Status "New") befinden. Dann liegt ein kleiner Umschlag im Briefkasten.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/fonts
+~/config/settings/Font_settings - Speichert die Position des Programmfensters.
+
+
+
+
Haiku verwendet systemweit drei verschiedene Schriftarten. Sie können hier unter "Plain font" (normale Schrift), "Bold font" (fett) und "Fixed font" (Schrift mit fester Buchstabenbreite) festgelegt werden. Daneben kann auch noch die Schriftart für Menüs eingestellt werden.
+
+
Defaults
stellt die Standardwerte wieder her.
+
Revert
stellt den Zustand wieder her, der beim Start von "Fonts" aktiv war.
Neue Schriftarten werden installiert, indem sie an ihren Platz im Dateisystem kopiert werden. Diese sind: /boot/common/fonts/, beziehungsweise /boot/home/config/fonts/ (unter Filesystem Layout wird der Unterschied dieser beiden Speicherorte näher erläutert).
Hier kann die Wiederholrate für einen Tastendruck und die Verzögerung eingestellt werden, die das System wartet, bis eine gedrückte Taste wiederholt wird. Die Einstellungen können in dem Textfeld getestet werden.
+
+
Defaults
stellt die Standardwerte wieder her.
+
Revert
stellt die Einstellungen wieder her, die aktiv waren, als Keyboard gestartet wurde.
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Ort für vom Benutzer geänderten Tastaturlayouts.
+~/config/settings/Key_map
+
+
+
+
Zur Rechten zeigt das Keymap Fenster die Darstellung einer Tastatur. Wird eine Taste gedrückt, verfärbt sich die entsprechende Taste und das jeweilige Zeichen wird in das Sample and Clipboard Textfeld unten eingetragen. Von dort kann der Inhalt auch in irgendein Dokument kopiert werden.
+Neben der Konfiguration seines eigenen Tastaturlayouts, kann das Keymap Panel auch hilfreich sein, ein spezielles Zeichen einer anderen Sprache zu finden. Man kann z.B. zu Französisch wechseln, um das "ç" zu finden, um es in seine Mail an François zu kopieren. (Das "cedil" findet sich allerdings auch in anderen Tastaturlayouts...)
+
Gedrückte Zusatztasten wie SHIFT, CONTROL oder OPTION ändern die Tastenanzeige entsprechend.
+
Dann gibt es da noch die Tasten, die mit einem blauen Hintergrund gekennzeichnet sind. Diese Tasten werden Dead Keys genannt und verändern die Taste, die man anschließend drückt. Klickt man auf so eine Taste mit der Maus, leuchten auf diese Weise veränderliche Tasten gelb auf. Ein weiterer Klick macht das wieder rückgängig. Beispiele sind é, ñ, ó or ë.
+
Unter der Tastaturdarstellung befinden sich zwei weitere Optionen:
+
+
Select Dead Keys
zum Setzen der oben erwähnten blauen Tasten.
+
Switch Shortcut Key...
zum Setzen der Befehlskürzeltaste in Windows/Linux Mode, d.h. CONTROL (= STRG) oder Haiku Mode, d.h. COMMAND (= ALT).
+
+
Die Liste zur Linken enthält die voreingestellten Tastaturlayouts des Systems, und darunter ggf. benutzerdefinierte Layouts. Layouts lassen sich via Drag&Drop in der Tastaturdarstellung verändern: mit der linken Maustaste ausgeführt, wird eine Taste kopiert, mit der rechten die beiden Tasten ausgetauscht.
+Abschließend lässt sich das Ergebnis mittels File | Save... speichern. So veränderte Layouts erscheinen nur in der benutzerdefinierten Liste wenn sie unter ~/config/settings/Keymap/ abgelegt werden. Ansonsten muss man sie per File | Open... laden.
+
Um die Tastaturdarstellung besser an die echte Tastatur anzupassen, stehen diverse Einstellungen um Menü Layout zur Verfügung.
+
Die Schriftart der Tastenbeschriftungen kann im Font Menü gesetzt werden. Achtung, nicht alle Schriften enthalten unbedingt alle für ein bestimmtes Layout benötigte Zeichen.
+
Schließlich bringt der Revert Knopf die Einstellungen wieder zurück, die beim Start des Keymap Panels aktiv waren.
Neben dem Keymap Panel existiert noch eine weitere Möglichkeit sein Tastaturlayout zu individualisieren. Dabei wird eine Textdatei mit einer Unmenge HEX-Werten bearbeitet, was auf den ersten Blick erstmal erschreckt, aber grundsätzlich begreifbar ist.
+
Das aktuelle Layout lässt sich mit einem Befehl im Terminal ausgeben:
+
keymap -d MyKeymap
+
Die so generierte Textdatei lässt sich anschließend in einem Texteditor öffnen. Hier sollte man auf alle Fälle eine Schrift mit fester Breite verwenden, sonst findet man sich hier bestimmt nicht zurecht...
+Am Anfang der Datei befindet sich die Legende für eine stilisierte Tastatur mit den entsprechenden HEX-Werten für jede Taste. Darunter folgen die eigentlichen Zuweisungen der einzelnen Werte. Hiermit lässt sich all das ändern, was auch mit den Keymap Einstellungen möglich ist, und noch mehr. Besitzt die eigene Tastatur spezielle Tasten, lassen sie sich hier u.U. aktivieren. Zumindest als normale Tasten oder weitere Option- oder Control-Taste. Dadurch kann man immer noch nicht z.B. Multimediatasten zum lauter/leiser machen benutzen oder um bestimmte Anwendungen zu starten. Dazu existiert z.B. SpicyKeys.
+
Ist man fertig, wird die Datei abgespeichert und das geänderte Layout mit diesem Befehl geladen:
+
keymap -l MyKeymap
+
So sieht die ausgegebene Datei aus (die ganz rechten Tasten wurden hier ausgeblendet, damit es besser auf die Seite passt):
Im Auswahlmenü links kann die Art der Maus, respektive deren Tastenzahl, ausgewählt werden. Insbesondere für 1-Tasten Mäuse interessant: der Rechtsklick kann mit CTRL-Linksklick und ein Klick auf die mittlere Taste mit CTRLALT-Linksklick erzeugt werden. Der mittlere Klick kann bei 2-Tasten Mäuse auch mit einen Klick auf beide Tasten erreicht werden.
+
Die Tastenbelegung kann über das Markieren der entsprechenden Taste und dem dazugehörigen Auswahlmenü geändert werden.
+
Über die Schieberegler rechts kann die Doppelklick-Geschwindigkeit, die Geschwindigkeit des Mauszeigers und seine Beschleunigung eingestellt werden.
+
Focus follows mouse bewirkt, dass ein Programmfenster nicht angeklickt wird, um es zu Aktivieren. Hierfür gibt es drei Möglichkeiten:
+
+
Enabled
Das Fenster, über dem sich der Mauszeiger befindet wird Aktiviert, ohne das gesamte Fenster in den Vordergrund zu bringen.
+
Warping
Der Mauszeiger gleitet automatisch zu einem über die Deskbar oder dem "Twitcher" ausgewählten Fenster.
+
Instant-Warping
Im Gegensatz zu "Warping" springt hier der Mauszeiger zum Aktivierten Fenster.
+
+
Alle Einstellungen werden sofort im System übernommen.
+
+
Defaults
stellt die Standardwerte wieder her.
+
Revert
die Einstellungen, die aktiv waren, als das Programmfenster geöffnet wurde, werden wieder hergestellt.
Im ersten Auswahlmenü werden alle konfigurierbaren Netzwerk-Adapter angezeigt.
+
Nach der Auswahl des Netzwerk-Adapters kann über das zweite Auswahlmenü die Art der Netzwerk-Konfiguration gewählt werden. Entweder per DHCP oder mittels einer statischen Netzwerk-Adresse. Bei letzterem müssen dann die für die jeweilige Netzwerk-Umgebung richtigen Werte bei IP-Adresse, Netmask, Gateway und DNS-Server eingetragen werden.
+
+
Revert
die Werte und Einstellungen, die beim Öffnen von Network aktiv waren werden wieder hergestellt.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Nur im VESA Modus.
+~/config/settings/Screen_data - Speichert die Position des Programmfensters.
+
+
Jeder Workspace kann seine eigene Bildschirmauflösung und Farbtiefe haben.
+
+
Im oberen Dropdown Menü kann ausgewählt werden, ob Änderungen nur den derzeitigen oder alle Workspaces betreffen. In den anderen beiden Dropdown Menüs können, abhängig von der Grafikkarte, alle unterstützten Bildschirmauflösungen und Farbtiefen gewählt werden.
+
Nach einem Klick auf Apply werden die Änderungen sofort übernommen und es erscheint eine Alarmmeldung ob die Einstellungen behalten werden, oder rückgängig gemacht werden sollen. Falls nach 12 Sekunden keine Antwort erfolgt ist, werden alle Änderungen auf den vorherigen Stand zurückgesetzt. Hilfreich, falls der Monitor die gewählten Einstellungen nicht unterstützt, und die Alarmmeldung nicht sichtbar ist.
+
Auf der linken Seite kann die Anzahl der Workspaces gewählt werden und diese in Spalten und Zeilen eingeteilt werden, sowie die Hintergrund Einstellungen geöffnet werden.
+
Revert setzt alle Einstellungen auf die Werte zurück die beim starten der Bildschirmeinstellungen aktiv waren.
Wird das oberste Kreuz gesetzt, ist der Bildschirmschoner aktiviert.
+Mit dem Schieberegler darunter wird die Dauer festgelegt, nach der der Bildschirmschoner startet.
+
Die nächsten beiden Schieberegler müssen erst aktiviert werden bevor sie benutzbar werden.
+Mit dem einen kann festgelegt werden wann der Bildschirm ausgeschaltet wird.
+Mit dem anderen, wann ein Passwort benötigt wird um den Computer freizuschalten.
+
Mit einem Klick in eine der Ecken des linken unteren Bildschirms kann dem System mitgeteilt werden, dass es den Bildschirmschoner sofort einschaltet wenn die Maus sich in der entsprechenden Ecke befindet. Im anderen Bildschirm wird die Ecke festgelegt in der der Bildschirmschoner geblockt wird. Um diese Funktion zu deaktivieren genügt ein Klick in die Mitte des jeweiligen Bildschirms.
Der zweite Reiter zeigt eine Liste aller installierten Bildschirmschoner mit ihren jeweiligen Einstellungen. Mittels Test kann die aktuelle Einstellung getestet und per Add... neue Bildschirmschoner hinzugefügt werden. Neue Bildschirmschoner können auch einfach in die Liste hineingezogen werden, oder in den Ordner /boot/common/add-ons/screensavers/, beziehungsweise /boot/home/config/add-ons/screensavers/ kopiert werden. Zum Unterschied zwischen diesen beiden Speicherorten siehe: Filesystem Layout.
Bestimmten Ereignissen im System lassen sich Klänge zuweisen. Dazu markiert man das entsprechende "Event" in der Liste und wählt aus dem Menü darunter einen entsprechenden Klang aus.
+
+
None
schaltet einen Klang aus.
+
Other...
öffnet einen Dialog, um einen neuen Klang zu laden, der sich noch nicht im Menü befindet.
+
Es können Klänge in jedem vom System unterstützten Format verwendet werden. Wenn MediaPlayer damit umgehen kann, funktioniert es auch mit jedem anderen Program.
+Mit Play und Stop lässt sich ein markiertes Ereignis probehören.
~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings
+~/config/settings/timezone - Eine Verknüpfung zur aktuellen Zeitzone in /boot/system/etc/timezones/*/*
+~/config/settings/Time_settings - Speichert die Position des Programmfensters.
+
+
Das Fenster der Zeit-Einstellungen gliedert sich in zwei Reiter:
Links kann man den Tag durch einen Klick in den Kalender einstellen. Monat und Jahr lassen sich durch einen Klick ins entsprechende Feld und anschließender Betätigung der Pfeilsymbole oder mit den Cursortasten der Tastatur ändern.
+
Ebenso stellt man die Zeit. Für die Uhr gibt es zwei Modi:
Die Tracker Einstellungen lassen sich auch aus jedem Trackerfenster mit dem Menü Window | Preferences.... aufrufen.
+Die einzelnen Einstellungen werden im Thema Tracker besprochen.
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory
+~/config/settings/VM_data - Speichert die Position des Programmfensters.
+
+
Wenn dem Betriebssystem virtueller Hauptspeicher zur Verfügung steht, kann es im RAM gespeicherte Daten auf die Festplatte auslagern, um den Hauptspeicher besser verwenden zu können. Selbst wenn dem System eine große Menge an RAM zur Verfügung steht, ist es sinnvoll, virtuellen Speicher zu aktivieren.
+
+
Die Größe des virtuellen Hauptspeichers ist nur durch die Größe des Datenträgers begrenzt, auf dem er angelegt wird. Da er normalerweise auf die Boot-Partition geschrieben wird, sollte man per DiskUsage hin und wieder nachsehen, ob der virtuelle Hauptspeicher daran schuld ist, wenn der Plattenplatz zur Neige geht.
+
Das Auslagern von RAM-Inhalten in einen virtuellen Hauptspeicher und das Zurückschreiben hat natürlich sehr viele Festplattenoperationen zur Folge. Hierdurch kann die Systempartition verlangsamt werden. Wenn im System eine weiter Festplatte vorhanden ist, bietet es sich an, den virtuellen Hauptspeicher auf diese zu legen.
+Für virtuellen Hauptspeicher im Vergleich zu echtem RAM gilt: mehr RAM ist immer besser als mehr virtueller Speicher.
+
+
Defaults
stellt die Standardwerte wieder her.
+
Revert
setzt die Werte auf den Wert zurück, die aktiviert waren, als VirtualMemory gestartet wurde.
Als "Query" bezeichnet man eine Dateisuche anhand ihrer Attribute. Sie kann im Tracker oder Terminal gestartet werden und wird in /boot/home/queries/ abgelegt. Dort gespeicherte Such-Abfragen werden standardmäßig nach sieben Tagen entfernt. Die gespeicherten Such-Abfragen sind jedoch keine statischen Ergebnislisten, sondern vielmehr die dabei verwendete Suchformel, die bei jedem weiteren Aufruf dieser Query für die erneute Suche benutzt wird.
+Eine gespeicherte Query muss man aber nicht doppelklicken, um an aktuelle Ergebnisse zu kommen. Mittels Trackernavigation kann man sie wie jeden anderen Ordner über Untermenüs durchforsten.
Queries werden über das Find... Menü gestartet. Entweder von der Deskbar, einem Trackerfenster oder dem Desktop. Das Tastenkürzel ist ALTF. Das Suchfenster sieht folgendermaßen aus:
+
+
+
Hier lassen sich lassen sich kürzlich verwendete oder gespeicherte Queries auswählen und die aktuellen Parameter als Query Template speichern.
+
Suchen lassen sich von allen Dateien und Ordnern (All files and folders) auf bestimmte Dateitypen einschränken.
+
Auswahl der Suchmethode:
+
by Name - eine einfache Suche nach Datei- oder Odrnername.
+
by Attribute - eine erweiterte Suche nach bestimmten Zeichen in einem oder mehreren Attributen.
+
by Formula - ein noch fortgeschrittenere Suche, bei der komplexe Suchformeln sehr fein angepasst werden können.
+
Auswahl der zu durchsuchenden Datenträger.
+
Eingabefeld des Suchbegriffs.
+
Über einen Klick auf das Dreieck werden weitere Optionen aufgerufen.
+
Wird die Option Temporary abgewählt, wird die Query nicht mehr automatisch nach sieben Tagen entfernt.
+
Wird die Option Include trash aktiviert, wird der Papierkorb mit durchsucht.
+
Optionales Eingabefeld für den Dateinamen der Query, falls diese gespeichert werden soll.
+
Eine Query lässt sich durch Drag & Drop des Icons speichern. Geschieht dies mit der rechten Maustaste, kann sie auch als "Query Template" gespeichert werden.
Will man einfach nur alle Dateien und Ordner auf den eingehängten Datenträgern finden, die einem bestimmten Muster entsprechen, belässt man die Suchmethode einfach auf by Name, füllt das Suchfeld entsprechend aus und drückt ENTER.
Erweiterte Suchen sind durch Queries in den Attributen ausgewählter Dateitypen möglich. Das geht aber nur, wenn diese Attribute indiziert sind.
+
+
Als erstes stellt man dazu den Dateityp von All files and folders auf, zum Beispiel, Text | E-mail und die Suchmethode auf by Attribute.
+
Daraufhin erscheint links vom Eingabefeld ein Menü und darunter die Buttons Add und Remove. Aus dem Menü wählt man das zu durchsuchende Attribut. Mittels Add und Remove können noch weitere Attribute für die Suche verwendet werden, beziehungsweise auch wieder entfernt. Untereinander können die einzelnen Attributsuchen logisch mit AND/OR verknüpft werden.
+
Als Beispiel, eine Suche nach E-Mails:
+
+
So sieht das Find-Fenster aus wenn man nach allen E-Mails sucht, die einen Clara Botters in den letzten 2 Monaten geschickt hat und deren Betreff "vibraphone" oder "skepticality" enthielt.
+Wie man sieht, versteht die Suche nach zeitbasierten Attributen einige nützliche Begriffe: Neben dem "last 2 months", funktionieren auch "today", "yesterday", "Monday" oder "last Monday" (was Montag letzter Woche entspricht) oder "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
+So lässt sich die Trefferzahl sehr gut einschränken.
Die Formel einer Query von Hand einzugeben is eine wahre Herausforderung und eigentlich ziemlich unpraktisch. Trotzdem ist es manchmal nützlich.
+
Nehmen wir mal obige Attribute-Query von Claras E-Mails. Hat man erst mal alle Suchbegriffe beisammen, schaltet man um zu by Formula und ist prompt überwältigt von diesem einzeiligen Query-Ausdruck:
+
+
Hier noch mal als Text und zur besseren Lesbarkeit umgebrochen:
Die Suchformel lässt sich in eine E-Mail oder Forumbeitrag kopieren oder im IRC erwähnen, damit sie von anderen benutzt oder verbessert werden kann.
+
Mit dieser Methode lassen sich Queries entspannt im Attribute Modus konstruieren. Anschließend wechselt man in den Formula Modus, um die Formel der so erstellten Query im Terminal oder einem Skript zu nutzen.
+
Eine Query lässt sich so fein anpassen, indem man zusätzliche Klammern setzt, in bestimmten Abschnitten auf Groß- und Kleinschreibung achtet oder einige logische Verknüpfungen verneint durch Ändern von "==" zu "!=" für ein NOT AND. Dazu benötigt man nur ein gewisses Basiswissen über Reguläre Ausdrücke und ein klein wenig Programmier-Kenntnisse.
Hat man die Suche gestartet, wird das FInd-Fenster durch ein Ergebnisfenster ersetzt. Hier ein Beispiel einer Suche nach "server":
+
+
Außer ihrem grauen Hintergrund, unterscheidet Ergebnisfenster nichts von jedem anderen Trackerfenster. Einige Dinge gehören erwähnt:
+
+
Durch einen Doppelklick auf das Path Attribut, öffnet sich der Speicherort einer Datei oder eines Ordners.
+
Mit File | Edit Query oder ALTG gelangt man zurück zum Find-Fenster, um die Query zu verändern.
+
Eine Query ist "live". Wenn im System also eine den Suchkriterien entsprechende Datei neu auftaucht oder verschwindet, schlägt sich diese Änderung sofort im Suchergebnis nieder.
+
+
Für jeden Dateityp lässt sich für das Ergebnisfenster ein sinnvolles Attribut-Layout festlegen. Dazu öffent man einen Ordner, der Dateien des Dateityps enthält, für den man so eine Layout-Vorlage erstellen möchte. Hier richtet man sich die Ansicht der einzelnen Attributspalten so ein, wie man sie im Ergebnisfenster gern hätte und kopiert das Layout mit Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Jetzt öffnet man /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, legt einen neuen Ordner mit dem Namen Gruppe/Dateityp an, wobei dabei der Querstrich mit einem Unterstrich ersetzt wird, also zum Beispiel "audio_x-mp3". Diesen neuen Ordner öffnet man anschließend und fügt das vorher kopierte Layout mit Attributes | Paste Layout ein.
Beim Doppelklick einer gespeicherten Query erscheint sofort das Ergebnisfenster und die Dateisuche beginnt unverzüglich. Manchmal möchte man aber nicht mit exakt diesen Parametern suchen, sondern sie nur als Ausgangspunkt für eine etwas abgeänderte Formel benutzen.
+Mit dem Menüpunkt Save Query as Template (siehe (1) im Bild weiter oben) oder durch Herausziehen des Icons (10) mit der rechten Maustaste lässt sich genau das erreichen. Ein Doppelklick darauf öffnet nicht gleich das Ergebnisfenster, sondern das Find-Fenster, in dem man schnell einen Suchbegriff anpassen oder Attribute hinzufügen oder entfernen kann.
+
Egal wo Query Templates gespeichert wurden, sie erscheinen im Menü mit den kürzlich durchgeführten Queries im Find-Fenster.
STRGALTENTF ruft den Team Monitor auf, der alle momentan laufenden Programme auflistet.
+
+
Programme, die vom System gestartet wurden sind blau, die vom Benutzer schwarz.
+Rote Anwendungen reagieren nicht mehr; oft ein Zeichen, das sie abgestürzt sind. Mit Kill Application lässt sich eine aus der Liste gewählte Anwendung "abschießen".
+
OPTALTT ruft ein Terminal auf.
+
Falls Tracker oder Deskbar abgestürzt und eingefroren sind, erscheint ein weiterer Button (manchmal muss dazu das hängende Team erst gekillt werden): Restart the Desktop startet Tracker oder Deskbar neu.
Anwendungen können Add-Ons installieren, um im Tracker von einer Dateiauswahl aus aufgerufen werden zu können. Es werden im Kontextmenü unter Add-Ons oder dem File Menü des Trackerfensters nur die Add-Ons angezeigt, die auch mit dem betreffenden Dateityp umgehen können. Add-Ons die unabhängig von einer markierten Datei starten, werden immer angezeigt.
+
Tracker Add-Ons, oder Links zu den Programmen die mit dem Tracker zusammenarbeiten können, sind in drei verschiedenen Verzeichnissen installiert (siehe auch Filesystem layout):
+
+
/boot/system/system/add-ons/Tracker/
Vom System mitgelieferte Add-Ons.
+
/boot/common/add-ons/Tracker/
Add-Ons die für jeden Benutzer verfügbar sind
+
/boot/home/config/add-ons/Tracker/
Add-Ons die nur für einen selbst verfügbar sind.
+
+
Wenn der Dateiname eines Add-On mit einem Bindestrich und einem Buchstaben endet, kann das Add-On über diesen Buchstaben mit einer Tastenkombination aufgerufen werden, zum Beispiel: Open Target Folder-T kann mit ALTOPTT gestartet werden.
+Da es keine zwei Add-On mit dem gleichen Kürzel geben kann, muss man bei der Vergabe des Buchstabens rücksichtsvoll vorgehen.
Die folgenden Tracker Add-Ons sind in jeder Haiku Installation enthalten:
+
+
Background-B
+
Öffnet die Einstellung Background zum Anpassen des Bildschirm- oder Ordnerhintergrundes. Wenn dieses Add-On auf einer Bilddatei aufgerufen wird, ist dieses Bild im Einstellungsdialog bereits als mögliches Hintergrundbild vorausgewählt.
+
DiskUsage-I
+
Startet DiskUsage mit dem aktuellen Ordner als Basis.
+
FileType-F
+
Der für diese Datei spezielle FileType-Dialog wird geöffnet. Wenn das Add-On nicht auf einer Datei aufgerufen wird, öffnen sich die Einstellungen für die globalen Datei-Typen.
+
Open Target Folder-O
+
Wird nur bei einer Verknüpfung angeboten und öffnet den Ordner, in dem die Datei eigentlich gespeichert ist.
+
TextSearch-G
+
Öffnet die Anwendung TextSearch um nach einem beliebigen Text innerhalb eines Ordners und dessen Unterordner zu suchen.
+
ZipOMatic-Z
+
Eine Auswahl an Dateien wird zu einer ZIP-Datei zusammengepackt. Wenn dieses Add-On aufgerufen wird, ohne dass eine oder mehrere Dateien markiert sind, öffnet sich ein Dialogfeld, mit dem man per Ziehen und Ablegen von Dateien ein Archiv erstellen kann.
Der Tracker ist die graphische Oberfläche zu den gespeicherten Dateien. Alle Dateioperationen (Dateien und Ordner anlegen oder löschen, kopieren, verschieben, oder ausführen) können hier vorgenommen werden.
+
Der Tracker ist genauso eine Anwendung, wie alle anderen. Deshalb wird er auch in der Deskbar mit allen geöffneten Fenstern gelistet. Da der Arbeitsplatz mit den Icons auch "nur" ein Trackerfenster im Vollbild-Modus ist, macht sich es sich hier im Besonderen bemerkbar, sollte der Tracker einmal einfrieren. Am leichtesten kann er (und die Deskbar) über den Team Monitor reaktiviert werden.
Um einen Datenträger (sei es eine Festplatte oder Partition, eine CD oder USB-Stick) unter Haiku verwenden zu können, muss dieser erst in das System eingebunden werden. Über einen Rechtsklick auf den Arbeitsplatz oder einem bereits eingebundenen Datenträger kann der Menüpunkt Mount aufgerufen werden. Dieser Punkt Mount findet sich auch in der Deskbar.
+
+
Über die Mount Settings können Einstellungen vorgenommen werden, ob und welche Datenträger bei einem Systemstart eingebunden werden
+Im obigen Bild beispielsweise werden automatisch alle Datenträger eingebunden, die während dem Betrieb hinzugefügt werden (beispielsweise eine CD oder ein USB-Stick) und während dem Systemstart nur die Datenträger, die beim letzten Mal eingebunden waren.
+
Bevor man einen Datenträger, wie zum Beispiel einen USB-Stick, vom Computer trennt, sollte man ihn unbedingt vorher über "unmount" im System abmelden. Nur so wird sichergestellt, dass alle Dateioperationen auf diesem Datenträger vollständig abgeschlossen wurden. Anderenfalls ist ein Datenverlust nicht auszuschließen!
Standardmäßig wird beim Doppelklick auf einen Ordner ein neues, weiteres, Tracker-Fenster geöffnet. Das führt schnell zu einem übervollen Arbeitsplatz.
+Wenn beim Doppelklick auf den Ordner OPT gedrückt wird, schließt sich automatisch das übergeordnete Fenster.
+Dies gilt auch bei der Navigation über die Tastatur. Mehr hierzu unter Tastaturkürzel und Tastenkombinationen.
+
Die Ordner-Navigation ist eine der Hauptaufgaben des Tracker. Im Gegensatz zu Datei-Managern anderer Betriebssysteme hat man im Tracker einige einzigartige Funktionen, die das Navigieren effizienter gestalten.
Anstatt jeden Unterordner über einen Doppelklick aufrufen zu müssen, kann man im Tracker sehr einfach durch die Ordnerstruktur navigieren:
+
+
+
Wird ein Ordner, oder ein Datenträger mit der rechten Maustaste angeklickt, so ist der erste Eintrag im Kontextmenü dieser Ordner, beziehungsweise Datenträger selbst. Man kann nun sehr einfach über das aufklappende Untermenü in der Ordnerstruktur bis zum Zielverzeichnis, respektive der gewünschten Datei navigieren und über einen Klick öffnen. Das obige Bild zeigt beispielsweise den Inhalt des Ordners /boot/home/config/.
+Wenn man bei dieser Art der Navigation zusätzlich noch einen Datei zieht, wird sie an den Ort verschoben (innerhalb des gleichen Datenträgers) oder kopiert (auf einen anderen Datenträger) über dem man sie los lässt.
+
Eine ähnliche Navigationsmethode steht in jedem Tracker-Fenster zur Verfügung:
+
+
Ein Klick auf den linken unteren Bereich - dort wo die Anzahl der angezeigten Einträge steht - öffnet ein Menü, dass alle übergeordneten Ordner bis zur obersten Ebene (dem Arbeitsplatz) enthält, was ein Navigieren zum gewünschten Zielordner möglich macht.
+
Als Hinweis: der Arbeitsplatz (Desktop) ist immer die höchste Ebene in der Ordnerstruktur, da im Tracker dort die eingebundenen Datenträger angezeigt werden. Wenn man - über diese Art der Navigation - auf einen anderen Datenträger wechseln möchte, muss man zum Arbeitsplatz, um dort alle eingebundenen Laufwerke angezeigt zu bekommen.
+
Die gleiche Möglichkeit der Navigation über Untermenüs erhält man auch, wenn man eine Datei über einen Ordner zieht und einen kurzen Moment verweilt. Es klappt dann ein Untermenü auf, in dem man sich bis zum gewünschten Ordner vorarbeiten kann, um die Datei dorthin zu verschieben. Wenn die Datei mit der rechten Maustaste gezogen wurde, dann öffnet sich nach dem Loslassen ein Auswahlmenü zum Kopieren, Verschieben oder Verweis erstellen der Datei.
Das Konzept dürfte bereits von anderen Betriebssystemen her bekannt sein: durch Eintippen der ersten Buchstaben springt die Markierung zu der ersten Datei, die dem eingegebenen Text entspricht. In Haiku wurde dieses Konzept noch einen Schritt weiter entwickelt. Falls keine Datei mit den eingegebenen Buchstaben beginnt, wird die Datei markiert, die die Buchstabenreihe in ihrem Namen enthält; sollte dies auch nicht der Fall sein, so werden noch sämtliche Attribute der Dateien nach dieser Buchstabenreihe durchsucht. Zusätzlich wird noch der eingegebene Text unten links im Tracker-Fenster angezeigt. Wenn hier wieder auf die Anzahl-Anzeige umgeschaltet ist, kann eine neue Suche vorgenommen werden.
+
+
Im obigen Beispiel wäre ein reine Suche nach den ersten Buchstaben eines Dateinamens nicht sinnvoll, da sehr viele Dateien mit "Haiku logo" beginnen. Unter Haiku jedoch wird nach Eingabe von "web" sofort zum ersten Vorkommen in der Datei " Haiku logo - website" gesprungen.
Im Menü Window können drei verschiedene Ansichten für das Tracker-Fenster eingestellt werden:
+
+
Icon View (ALT1) - Große Icons; die Größe kann im dazugehörigen Untermenü oder über die Tastenkombination ALT+ / ALT- eingestellt werden.
+
Mini Icon View (ALT2) - Kleine Icons.
+
List View (ALT3) - Eine detaillierte Liste der Dateien; hier ist es möglich die unterschiedlichen Attribute zu den Dateien anzeigen zu lassen. (mehr dazu im Abschnitt Attributes.)
+
+
Das Window-Menü hat noch weitere Einträge:
+
+
Resize Window (ALTY) - Ändert die Fenstergröße auf einen sinnvollen Wert.
+
Clean Up (ALTK) - Die Icons werden an einem unsichtbaren Raster ausgerichtet; bei zusätzlichem Drücken von SHIFT ändert sich der Menüpunkt zu Clean Up All und die Icons werden zusätzlich noch alphabetisch sortiert.
+
Select... (SHIFTALTA) - Wählt Dateien anhand einer Regular Expression aus.
+
Close (ALTW) - Schließt das Tracker-Fenster; bei zusätzlichem Drücken von SHIFT ändert sich der Menüpunkt zu Close All und alle Tracker-Fenster in allen Workspaces werden geschlossen.
+
Close All in Workspace (ALTQ) - Schließt alle Tracker-Fenster im akutellen Workspace; hilfreich, wenn man die Taste OPT nicht drückte, als man durch die Verzeichnisse navigierte und nun der gesamte Arbeitsplatz voll von Tracker-Fenstern ist.
+
+
Wenn man nicht alle Icons mittels Clean Up (ALTK) neu ausrichten möchte, sondern nur einige, dann kann man diese markieren und sie - beigedrückter ALT-Taste verschieben. Sie werden dann am Raster ausgerichtet.
+
Die restlichen Unterpunkte sind hinreichend selbsterklärend. Genauer soll jedoch auf den Punkt Einstellunge ("Preferences") eingegangen werden:
Über Window | Preferences... wird ein Fenster geöffnet, dessen zahlreiche Einstellungen sich stellenweise nicht sofort erschließen. Da jedoch alle Einstellungen direkt angewendet werden, kann man die Änderungen sofort erkennen. Hier eine kurze Erklärung zu den nicht ganz offensichtlichen Einstellungen:
+
+
Desktop - Hier kann ausgewählt werden, ob jedes eingebundene Laufwerk für sich am Arbeitsplatz angezeigt wird, oder alle zusammen in einem Tracker-Fenster, das mit dem Icon "Disks" repräsentiert wird.
+
Windows - Wenn man Single Window Navigation markiert, wird jeder geöffnete Ordner im gleichen Fenster, statt in seinem eigenen angezeigt. Diese Einstellung unterscheidet sich zu der oben erwähnten Möglichkeit, einen Ordner bei gedrückter OPT-Taste zu öffnen, da hier die individuellen Einstellungen zu Anzeige und Position des Fensters verloren gehen.
+
+
+
+
Auch wenn die Ein-Fenster-Navigation sich vielleicht vertrauter anfühlt, sollte man der ursprünglichen Navigation von Haiku eine Chance geben, da es durchaus sein kann, dass man hiermit schneller navigiert. Andererseits bietet nur diese Einstellung die Möglichkeit, einen Navigator einzublenden, in dem man "vor" und "zurück", sowie ein Verzeichnis höher gehen und einen neuen Verzeichnispfad hineinkopieren kann.
+
Date and Time - Einstellung des Datumsformats für die Tracker-Fenster.
+
Trash - Die Verhaltensweise beim Löschen einer Datei kann hier eingestellt werden.
+
Volume Icons - Die Farbe des optionalen Füllstandsanzeigers bei den eingebundenen Datenträger kann hier eingestellt werden.
+
+
Dieses Einstellungs-Fenster kann auch mittels Tracker aus den Preferences der Deskbar aufgerufen werden.
Das Kontextmenü zu einer Datei entspricht in weiten Teilen dem Menü File.
+
Die Menüpunkte sind im Großen und Ganzen selbsterklärend.
+
+
Find... - Suche nach einer Datei oder einem Ordner (siehe hierzu näheres unter: Query).
+
New - Erstellt einen neuen Ordner oder eine neue Datei basierend auf einer Vorlage ("template").
+
+
+
+
Wählt man Edit Templates... aus, öffnet sich der Ordner /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Wird in diesem Verzeichnis eine Datei angelegt, wird diese - zusammen mit ihrem Dateityp und sämtlichen Attributen - als Vorlage im Menü New angezeigt. In diesem Beispiel die Datei "Text" mit dem Dateityp text/plain. Unter Filetypes wird näher auf die Dateitypen eingegangen.
+
Open With... - Ein Untermenü mit allen Anwendungen, die diese Datei - besser: diesen Dateityp - öffen können.
+
+
+
+
Die Anwendung, die diese Datei auch öffen würde, wenn man sie doppelt anklickt, ist mit einem Häckchen versehen. Des weitern werden alle Programme gelistet, die diesen Dateityp öffnen können, hier wäre das text/plain. Danach werden die Anwendungen aufgelistet, die den "supertype" - hier wäre das text/* - öffnen. Ganz unten in der Liste sind alle die Programme, die jede Art von Dateityp öffnen können. Wenn man nicht auf eines der gelisteten Programme klickt, sondern auf den Eintrag Open With... direkt, dann öffnet sich folgendes Fenster:
+
+
+
Hier werden nochmals alle Programme aufgelistet, die bereits im Untermenü zu sehen waren, jedoch mit zusätzlichen Informationen. Wenn man ein Programm auswählt und auf Open and Make Preferred klickt, kann man gleichzeitig die bevorzugte Anwendung für diesen Dateityp, hier text/plain setzen.
+
Get Info
+
+
+
In dem sich öffnenden Fenster werden Informationen zu der ausgewählten Datei angezeigt. Ein Klick auf den Dateipfad öffnet ein Trackerfenster. Es besteht hier auch die Möglichkeit, für diese Datei die bevorzugte Anwendung auszuwählen und - wenn das kleine Dreieck geklickt wird - im Weiteren die Dateirechte und den Besitzer der Datei festlegen. (Hinweis: bis Haiku ein Mehr-Benutzer-System ist, "gehören" alle Dateien dem Benutzer "baron"; wer das ist, und warum ihm alle Dateien gehören, erschließt sich nach der Lektüre der "BeOS Bible" von Scott Hacker.)
+
Edit Name, Duplicate and Move to Trash - Hiermit wird der Dateiname geändert, die Datei wird dupliziert oder in den Papierkorb verschoben.
+
Move to, Copy to and Create Link - Über die Navigation durch Untermenüs wird die Datei zum Ziel verschoben, kopiert oder dort ein Verweis zu der Datei erzeugt. Wenn man gleichzeitig SHIFT drück, kann man einen relativen Verweis anlegen.
+
Cut, Copy and Paste - Die Datei wird mittels Zwischenablage ausgeschnitten, kopiert oder eingefügt. Wenn gleichzeitig SHIFT gedrückt wird, beim Aufrufen dieses Menüpunktes, können per Copy/Cut more mehrere Dateien in die Zwischenablage kopiert / ausgeschnitten werden; bei Drücken von SHIFT wird die Datei bei der entsprechenden Auswahl nicht eingefügt, sondern lediglich ein Verweis dazu.
+
Identify - Hiermit wird der Dateityp einer Datei festgestellt. So wird beispielsweise einer mittels wget in das Dateisystem kopierten Datei nicht automatisch ein Dateityp zugeordnet. Hält man SHIFT beim Aufruf des Kontextmenüs, ändert sich dieser Eintrag zu Force Identify, das den Dateityp erkennt und setzt, auch wenn schon eine Bezeichnung besteht.
+
Add-Ons - Öffnet ein Untermenü mit allen für diesen Dateityp zutreffenden Tracker Add-ons.
Wenn man eine Datei kopiert, verschiebt oder löscht, zeigt der Tracker einen Fortschrittsanzeiger an. Werden mehrere Dateioperationen vorgenommen, während andere noch laufen, bekommt jede einen eigenen Anzeiger.
+
+
Rechter Hand sind Schaltflächen zum Pausieren der Dateioperation oder zum Abbrechen dieser. Ein Pausieren kann dann sinnvoll sein, wenn man einen große Anzahl von Dateien bewegt und dadurch die Festplatte stark beschäftigt. Währenddessen sind alle weiteren Zugriffe auf die Festplatte zeitlich verzögert.
Mit dem Twitcher kann auf einfache Weise zwischen laufenden Anwendungen und ihren Fenstern gewechselt werden.
+
+
Mit CTRLTAB wechselt man zwischen der aktuellen und der zuletzt aktiven Anwendung. Wenn CTRLTAB schnell mehrfach gedrückt wird, wechselt man durch alle Anwendungen. Durch Drücken und Halten von CTRLTAB kann man mittels wiederholtem Drücken von TAB oder ← / → zum gewünschten Programm wechseln. Zu einem speziellen Fenster einer Anwendung gelangt man, durch Drücken von ↑ oder ↓ wenn das Anwendungs-Icon hinterlegt ist.
+
Man kann durch alle Fenster einer Anwendung im aktuellen Workspace wechsenl, indem man CTRL~ drückt. Die Tilde ist je nach Tastaturlayout an unterschiedlichen Stellen; im Deutschen ist sie neben der Return-Taste).
+
Es ist auch möglich, den Twitcher über CTRLTAB aufzurufen, und dann das gewünschte Programm, beziehungsweise das Programmfenster mit der Maus auszuwählen; hierbei ist aber die CTRL-Taste gedrückt zu halten.
+
Der Twitcher hat zusätzlich noch einige Tastaturkürzel:
+
+
ESC
Beendet den Twitcher und das letzte aktive Programm ist wieder aktiviert.
Workshop: Dateitypen, Attribute, Index und Queries
+
+
In diesem Workshop wird gezeigt, wie sinnvoll Attributes, Queries, der Index und eigene Filetypes sein können. Als Beispiel werden wir eine DVD-Datenbank erstellen.
Zuerst sollten wir uns Gedanken machen, welche Dateitypen und Attribute benötigt werden. Ursprünglich war geplant, Bookmark-Dateien mit einem Link zum Eintrag des Films in der IMdB zu verwenden. Da aber Haiku bislang noch keinen Browser hat, der mit solchen Bookmark-Dateien umgehen kann (im Gegensatz zu NetPositive unter BeOS), verwenden wir ein JPEG-Bild für das DVD-Cover.
+An dieses Bild hängen wir eine Reihe von Attributen. Hier müssen wir uns entscheiden, welche Art von Attributen wir verwenden - Zahlen oder Text - und welche davon in einer Suchabfrage gefunden werden sollen.
+
Sinnvoll sind zum Beispiel diese Attribute:
+
+
Film-Titel
+
Genre
+
URL zur IMdB
+
Regisseur / Schauspieler
+
Handlung
+
Wertung (von 1 bis 10)
+
Koordinaten im DVD-Regal, sodass die DVD auch tatsächlich gefunden werden kann.
In Filetypes klicken wir auf Add... unterhalb der hierarchischen Liste der Dateitypen. In dem dann öffnenden Dialogfenster legen wir fest, zu welcher MIME-Gruppe der neue Dateityp gehört oder ob es sich um eine gänzlich neue Gruppe handelt. Unser Dateityp soll die interne Bezeichnung ("Internal Name") DVDdb bekommen und unter "applications" abgelegt werden.
+
+
Jetzt öffnet sich ein neues Fenster für den neu angelegten Dateityp DVDdb:
Ein Doppelklick auf das Icon öffnet Icon-O-Matic um darin ein neues Icon zu erstellen. Natürlich kann auch ein bereits bestehenden Icon in das Feld gezogen werden.
Unter "File Recognitions" können Dateiendungen eingegeben werden, die typisch für diesen Dateityp sind. Da wir in unserem Beispiel dies nicht benötigen, wird es außer Acht gelassen.
Dieses Auswahlmenü zeigt alle Anwendungen, die diesen Dateityp verwenden können. Hier kann ausgewählt werden, welches Programm gestartet wird, wenn eine Datei diesen Typs doppelt angeklickt wird.
+
+
Select...
öffnet ein Dialogfenster zur Auswahl der Anwendung; in unserem Beispiel wählen wir ShowImage um das DVD-Cover anzuzeigen.
+
Same as...
öffnet ein Dialogfenster, in dem man eine Datei auswählen kann, die bereits die bevorzugte Anwendung verwendet, die auch hier verwendet werden soll.
Unter "Extra Attributes" geben wir alle zusätzlichen Attribute ein, die wir oben festgelegt haben. Ein Klick auf Add... öffnet dieses Fenster:
+
+
+
Attribute Name - Erscheint als Spaltenkopf im Tracker-Fenster
+
Internal Name - Wird für die Indizierung und Suche verwendet.
+
Type - Beschreibt die Art des Attributs und entsprechend wie es gesucht werden kann.
+
+
String - normaler Text
+
Boolean - für die binären Werte 0 und 1
+
Integerfür ganzzahlige Werte diesen Umfangs:
+
+
8 bit: ± 255
+
16 bit: ± 65,535
+
32 bit: ± 4,294,967,295
+
64 bit: ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615
+
+
+
Float - Fließkommazahlen einfacher Genauigkeit
+
Double - Fließkommazahlen doppelter Genauigkeit
+
Time - Zeit und Datum-Werte
+
+
+
+
+
Visible - Nur wenn diese Option markiert ist, kann das Attribut im Tracker gesehen / angezeigt werden; da unsere DVD-Datenbank angezeigt werden soll, setzten wir das Kreuz mit diesen Einstellungen:
+
Display As - auf "Default" (Standard) belassen. Zukünftig sind hier weitere Möglichkeiten wie Fortschrittsbalken oder Sterne geplant
+
Editable - hiermit kann das Attribut direkt im Tracker ergänzt werden
+
Width - die Breite der Spalte des Attributs im Tracker-Fenster
+
Alignment - die Ausrichtung des Attribut-Wertes in der Spalte im Tracker: linksbündig, zentriert oder rechtsbündig
+
+
Jetzt müssen diese Werte für die Attribute eingegeben werden:
Bevor wir unsere DVD-Datenbank mit Daten befüllen, müssen wir noch einige Attribute in den Index aufnehmen. Nur so stehen sie für die Suche in Haiku, den Queries zur Verfügung. Um mit Scott Hacker, dem Autor der BeOS-Bible zu sprechen: "Es können so viele Attribute wie nur gewünscht in den Index aufgenommen werden, Doch man sollte es nicht übertreiben." - eine sinnvolle Auswahl sollte also getroffen werden.
+
Wir nehmen diese Attribute in den Index auf:
+
+
Internal Name
Attribute type
+
DVDdb:title
text
+
DVDdb:genre
text
+
DVDdb:cast
text
+
DVDdb:rating
int-32
+
+
+
Um dies zu erreichen, müssen wir im Terminal die folgenden Befehle der Reihe nach eingeben:
Nachdem nun alles vorbereitet ist, können wir damit beginnen, die Datenbank zu befüllen.
+Da jeder Eintrag eine Bilddatei mit dem DVD-Cover sein soll, speichern wir zu jedem Film, den wir in die Datenbank (einem Ordner) aufnehmen eine dazugehörige JPEG-Datei.
+
Wenn wir den Ordner öffnen, sehen wird ein ganz normales Tracker-Fenster mit einer Bild-Datei darin. Mit einem Rechtsklick auf diese Datei und der Auswahl Add On | FileType setzen wir nun den Dateityp dieses Bildes auf application/DVDdb. Näheres zu den Dateitypen hier: Filetypes
+
Jetzt aktivieren wir alle DVDdb-Attribute aus dem Menü Attributes und sortieren sie nach unseren Vorlieben:
+
+
Mit einem Klick auf ein leeres Attribut (oder ALTE) können wir die entsprechenden Werte eingeben. Mittels TAB und SHIFTTAB können wir von Attribut zu Attribut springen.
+
Um einen neuen Eintrag anzulegen kopieren wir entweder ein neues Bild in das Verzeichnis, oder wir verwenden den Menüpunkt "File | New..." indem wir eine leere Datei mit dem Dateityp "applications/DVDdb" und dem Dateinamen "DVDdb" im Ordner /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates anlegen.
+
Jetzt befindet sich bei eine Rechtsklick im Trackerfenster unter New... ein neuer Eintrag neben dem standardmäßigen "New folder".
Nach mehreren Stunden stupidem Befüllen der Attribute haben wir nun eine kleine Datenbank, in der wir nach Herzenslust suchen können. Zum Beispiel nach allen Filmen mit Christina Ricci, die wir mit "7" oder besser bewertet haben.
+
Für die Suchergebnisse kann man ebenfalls eine sinnvolles Layout der Attribute festlegen.
+Nachdem die Spalten im DVDdb-Ordner so eingestellt wurden, wie sie für das Suchergebnis sinnvoll sind, kopiert man diese mittels Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Darauf hin ist in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates ein neuer Ordner anzulegen, der nach group/filetype benannt wird, wobei der Schrägstrich durch einen Unterstrich zu ersetzten ist; in unserem Fall also "applications_DVDdb".
+
Öffne den neuen Ordner und kopiere das Attibute-Layout mit Attributes | Paste Layout. Voilà:
Workspaces sind virtuelle Arbeitsflächen, mit eigener Auflösung, Farbtiefe und eigenem Hintergrund. Es können bis zu 32 dieser Workspaces in den Screen Einstellungen konfiguriert werden.
Der Workspace kann mit einem Klick auf das Workspace Applet (zu sehen im Bild oben), oder mit der Tastenkombination ALTFx gewechselt werden; "x" ist dabei die Workspace-Nummer. Organisiert man seine Workspaces in Viererreihen, kann die Anordnung der Fx Tasten auf der Tastatur nachgeahmt werden.
+Das Klicken auf eine Anwendung in der Deskbar bringt einen ebenfalls auf den entsprechenden Workspace.
+
Eine andere komfortable Möglichkeit ist mit STRGALT←/→/↑/↓ räumlich durch die Spalten und Reihen der verfügbaren Workspaces zu navigieren. Hält man dabei zusätzlich SHIFT gedrückt, wird das aktive Fenster auf den neuen Workspace mitgenommen.
+
Zwischen dem aktuellen und letzten Workspace kann man mit ALT^ hin und her wechseln. Welches Zeichen das genau ist, hängt vom verwendeten Tastaturlayout ab - es ist immer die Taste unter ESC. Auch hier nimmt man das aktive Fenster mit, hält man dabei SHIFT gedrückt.
+
BePDF is a fast launching PDF viewer. Besides viewing, it supports annotating and user-defined bookmarking for unencrypted PDFs. It's fully localized for 20 languages at the moment with additional languages being easily added via text files.
Documentation is available as HTML or PDF. The latter will also open from the menu Help | Show Help....
"Scripting" is the technique of automating procedures by stringing together commands and saving it all as text files, so called "scripts". Every time you run such a script, the commands are processed one after the other just like they would if you entered them into the Terminal by hand.
Scripts can range from simply executing a few commands in a specific order to sophisticated pieces of code that solve complex tasks.
Since scripts rely naturally a lot on the shell they are interpreted by, you should first familiarize yourself with the BASH that's used by Haiku. There are many resources online as it's a widely used shell. One nice document is Johan Jansson's Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
After you've learned a few basics about working in the shell, it's time to slowly ease yourself into the world of scripting. Again, you'll find loads of tutorials and reference material online as well as in bookstores. A very nice introduction that's practically tailor-made for Haiku is the online available Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900kb) of Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible.
In Haiku, the system makes of course also use of scripting. Booting and shutting down are typical scripting procedures. These defined sequences can be augmented by the user with certain user scripts.
If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Otherwise simply add your commands where in the process you want them to be executed.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript will be executed after the system has finished its boot process. For example, you could launch a number of programs that would then be automatically started on every boot up:
# Start LaunchBox
/boot/system/apps/LaunchBox &
@@ -69,27 +78,25 @@ If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Ot
A simple alternative to the above for launching applications at boot up is to put links to them in the /boot/home/config/boot/launch directory. This can be done simply by right-clicking on the application you wish to have started automatically, going to Create Link and then navigating to the above directory.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript will be executed as the first step in the shutdown process. If the script returns a non-zero exit status, the shutdown is aborted.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript is executed as the last step in the shutdown process. Note, that most parts of the system have terminated by the time this script is executed.
Haiku's Boot Loader can help when you experience hardware related problems or want to choose which Haiku installation to start, if you have more than one (maybe on an installation CD or USB stick).
It's also handy after you installed a software component that acts up and prevents you from booting the system to remove it again. The Disable user add-ons option that's mentioned below, will start Haiku without loading user installed components, e.g. a driver.
-
To enter the Boot Loader options, you have to press and keep holding the SHIFT key before the beginning of Haiku's boot process. If you have a boot manager installed, you can start holding the SHIFT key before invoking the boot entry for Haiku. If Haiku is the only operating system installed, you can start pressing SHIFT while you still see boot messages from the BIOS.
+
To enter the Boot Loader options, you have to press the SPACE BAR right at the beginning of the boot process. It's easy to miss so you best keep hitting the key until it shows up.
Once it's there, you're offered three menus:
-
Select boot volume
Choose which Haiku installation to start.
+
Select boot volume
Choose which Haiku installation to start.
Select safe mode options
-
There are several options to try in case of hardware related trouble. When moving the selection bar to an option, a short explanation appears at the bottom of the screen.
-
- Safe mode
-- Disable user add-ons
-- Disable IDE DMA
-- Use fail-safe video mode
-- Don't call the BIOS
-- Disable APM
-- Disable ACPI
-- Disable IO-APIC [only available when IO-APIC is detected]
-- Disable LOCAL APIC [only available when LOCAL APIC is detected]
-- Disable SMP [only available when more than one CPU core is detected]
-- Enable serial debug output
-- Enable on screen debug output
+
There are several options to try in case of hardware related trouble. When moving the selection bar to an option, a short explanation appears at the bottom of the screen.
+
- Safe mode
+- Disable user add-ons
+- Disable IDE DMA
+- Use fail-safe video mode
+- Don't call the BIOS
+- Disable APM
+- Disable ACPI
+- Disable IO-APIC
+- Enable serial debug output
+- Enable on screen debug output
-
Select fail-safe video mode
If you had to activate the option Use fail-safe video mode, you can set resolution and color depth.
+
Select fail safe video mode
If you had to activate the option Use fail-safe video mode, you can set resolution and color depth.
After activating one or more options, you return to the main menu and continue booting, which presents you with this boot screen:
@@ -69,25 +77,25 @@ It's also handy after you installed a software component that acts up and preven
If everything works OK, one symbol after another quickly lights up.
The different symbols roughly correspond to these boot stages:
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
+
+
You find the Workspaces applet with the other Desktop Applets in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.
+Change Workspace Count... will open the Screen preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).
+
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure Show Replicants is activated in the Deskbar menu).
To move a window, you grab it in the Workspaces applet and simply drag it to another workspace. This has the advantage, that you can move it without leaving your current desktop. Of course, that only works well when there aren't too many windows in a workspace and your target isn't obscured by other windows. Another possibility is to grab a window by its tab and just holding on to it while switching workspaces with ALTFx.
+
For more information on workspaces in general and more keyboard shortcuts, see topic Workspaces.
Haiku is not a multi-user system yet. Once it is though, every user has her own home folder that is not accessible to anyone else. Every application or added component like Tracker Add-Ons, Translators etc. as well as any data that's supposed to be shared between different users, go here.
Haiku is not a multi-user system yet. Once it is though, every user has her own home folder that is not accessible to anyone else. Every application or added component like Tracker Add-Ons, Translators etc. as well as any data that's supposed to be shared between different users, has to be put under /boot/common/.
This folder belongs to you. Here you can create and delete files and folders as you wish. However, you shouldn't mess too much with the ~/config/ directory and its subfolders. You could delete e.g. the ~/config/settings/ folder without damaging the operating system itself, but who wants to lose all his configurations and application settings? In any case, the system warns you with the at the top mentioned alert.
Besides the ~/config/add-ons/ folder, which mirrors the system's add-ons folder for additional components as described above, there are a few other folders of interest. (By the way, the tilde ("~") is a shortcut for your home folder, so you don't always have to write "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
-
~/mail
+
~/mail
By default, this is where your mails are kept.
-
~/queries
+
~/queries
Queries are stored, by default temporarily for 7 days, in this folder.
-
~/config/be/
-
Again from our BeOS legacy, the be folder contains what's shown in the Deskbar menu. You can add and remove items either with the Deskbar configuration panel or by putting files, folders or links into this folder directly.
+
~/config/be/
+
Again from our BeOS legacy, the be folder contains what's shown in the Deskbar menu. You can add and remove items by putting files, folders, links or queries into this folder.
-
~/config/bin/
+
~/config/bin/
Complements the system's /boot/system/bin/ folder and holds all your command line programs.
-
~/config/boot/
+
~/config/boot/
This folder is the place for User Scripts that are executed before or after the system boots up or shuts down.
-
~/config/boot/launch/
+
~/config/boot/launch/
Links to programs or documents in this folder are automatically launched on every boot-up.
-
~/config/fonts/
+
~/config/fonts/
Simply copy a TrueType or Postscript font into this folder and its usable right away.
-
~/config/settings/
+
~/config/settings/
This folder contains the settings to all applications and a few configurations for the system. Some applications manage their settings in their own subfolders, others simply put their configuration file in there.
-
~/config/settings/beos_mime/
+
~/config/settings/beos_mime/
In this MIME database Haiku keeps track of all the different filetypes and their settings.
-
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/
+
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/
There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here!
-
~/config/settings/Tracker/
-
Here are some interesting subfolders:
+
~/config/settings/Tracker/
+
Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders:
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Show and arrange all attributes and the window size to your liking. Every new folder you create will use it as a template.
@@ -126,16 +135,15 @@ If you do want to know more about how things tick in Haiku, have a look at this
Tracker New Template/
Add a template for any filetype that's then available from Tracker's File | New... menu. See topic Tracker: Working with files.
Installation of Haiku during (pre-) alpha releases can be somewhat tricky, considering it's current development state. With this installation guide, you will learn many of the most common methods to get Haiku installed, whether it be on a USB stick, a partition or running it in a virtual machine. More advanced topics like building Haiku from source will also be explained in detail, so also beginners are be able to follow.
-All these somewhat complicated installation methods won't be necessary once Haiku R1 is released. Probably even before that when Haiku enters the beta phase.
Before explaining the many ways of getting Haiku installed, a little introduction to booting methods could be helpful. This information isn't Haiku specific, it describes the general booting process found in many OSes.
-It's not essential to know these details, so feel free to skip this part if you're not interested in the technical background.
You can try out Haiku without having to make room for it for a separate partition. A virtual machine simulates a specific hardware configuration within your familiar operating system and allows you to run Haiku in a window without having to reboot. It's also a good way to deal with incompatible hardware until Haiku gains the needed driver support.
When you turn on a BIOS based (as opposed to firmware based) system, which is still the most common today, the first thing loaded will be the BIOS. It is like a small operating system of its own and has the purpose of configuring the system hardware and provide an environment that a more high level operating system can work with. For example it configures PCI devices, harddrive controllers, USB, the processor itself and sets up ACPI tables in main memory.
-Current BIOSes are quite a bit more advanced than they were in the past, commonly having support for USB keyboards and USB mass storage to allow operating in so called legacy free configurations (i.e. without the old PS/2 input and maybe without some of the more traditional PC architecture components).
-OK, not going into more detail as that's not essential here.
-
So when the BIOS has done its job, it will try to find a MBR on any of the harddisk-like medias or other boot method specific block on other media (El-Torito on CDs/DVDs for example). Something like a USB memory stick is regarded as being harddisk-like, because it really is emulating a SCSI harddisk to the system. When it finds a boot record, it then loads that into memory and instructs the CPU to start execution of the instructions present.
-
-
The Master Boot Record
-
Generally this is just the first block of any harddisk-like medium, usually 512 bytes in length. It contains boot code in the first part and the partition table at the end of the block. What you have there as boot code depends on what boot manager you have installed. You have either installed a boot manager explicitly, for example GRUB or BeOS' bootman, or it was implicitly installed for you when partitioning the device (during Windows setup for example).
-Boot managers range from totally simple ones that are just enough to find the partition marked active and jump to the partition boot code of said partition, to almost complete operating systems with editing capabilities and other fancy features.
-
-
The Partition Boot Record
-
Additionally to the Master Boot Record, there can also be a partition boot record. It's located at the start of a partition and contains further boot code. Depending on the boot manager you are using and how you configured it, this boot code will be executed or not. In the case of Haiku the partition boot code does locate the /boot/system/system/zbeos" file which then starts the operating system boot process. Additionally it contains the partition offset needed to access this partition during boot. A wrong value for that offset is probably one of the most common reason why a Haiku installation doesn't start to boot.
-
As mentioned, whether or not the partition boot code is used depends on the boot manager and boot manager configuration. If you take GRUB installed as boot manager in the MBR and booting Linux. GRUB knows how to handle most Linux filesystems and it does know how to load and start a Linux kernel off of it. Therefore it can directly load Linux without the need for any additional boot code.
-However GRUB does neither know how to handle BFS and find the zbeos boot loader, nor would it really know how to execute it. Therefore you cannot use GRUB to directly boot Haiku.
-Instead you need to chainload the partition boot code of the BFS partition, as it knows how to handle both the BFS and zbeos.
-
-
The Boot Loader
-
After the boot loader (zbeos in case of BeOS/Haiku) has been found and loaded into memory, it is executed. The boot loader is the one providing you with the Haiku boot menu when pressing the space bar in early boot and is the one detecting basic system configuration. It also contains the logic to find and load the kernel (kernel_intel on BeOS and kernel_x86 on Haiku) as well as some boot modules required. Boot modules include the bus managers, bus and device drivers required by the kernel to successfully access the boot volume to load the rest of the modules and execute anything it needs to fully boot the system.
-If you boot to an ATA harddisk it would require for example the IDE or ATA bus manager, the harddisk controller driver and the helper modules used by them. Booting from USB would require the USB bus manager, the host controller drivers and the usb_disk driver for example. The boot loader also provides the kernel with configuration information and info about initial memory layout for example. This data passing between the boot loader and the kernel is specific to Haiku and the Haiku revision, it is possible that the information passed changes from one revision to another. This also makes it obvious that a zbeos from a BeOS installation cannot work with a Haiku kernel. Likewise using a BeOS bootfloppy that provides such a zbeos is not going to boot Haiku.
-
-
The Kernel
-
Once the kernel is loaded and starts executing it sets up a working environment. Memory management, bootstrapping and configuring non-boot CPUs, timers, interrupts, filesystems, module infrastructure, drivers... Everything that is needed for a fully working system and has not yet been loaded. Once this environment is set up, the kernel will start the bootscript, that then launches the different servers to provide a usable userland.
If you can't or don't want to go through building from source, you can also install an already built image. You'll have to download a raw image for that, not a VMWare image. Note that these are test images, they are not complete distributions that include a lot of software, both to keep the size and complexity of building them down.
-
-
Installing on a partition
-
After you have downloaded the raw image, you need to get this image to the partition or medium you intend to install it to. Under BeOS, Linux or basically everything except Windows you can use dd to just copy it over, using the partition or drive as a target.
-
-
Under BeOS to partition X on the master on the first channel:
Under Linux to partition X on the first hard disk:
-
dd if=/path/to/image of=/dev/hdaX
-
-
Make extra sure that you have the right partition picked there, as these commands are destructive. Recheck with a partitioning tool to verify for example. Note that you'll probably need administrative rights under Linux, so use sudo or su to execute these commands.
-
-
If you want to put the image at the absolute start of the drive (so that you don't need an additional boot manager), make sure that you write to the whole raw drive and not to a partition. You do that by specifying a raw device instead of a partition. Under Linux you would for example omit the partition number resulting in sdb instead of sdb1. Under BeOS you would pick the .../raw path instead of one with a number. If you use such a command, you overwrite the MBR containing the partition table. This means, that all the partitions on that drive will become inaccessible (not only the first part of the drive). So be sure that you want to do such a destructive operation!
-
-
Under Windows things are sadly a bit more complicated. You can try dd for Windows or use a tool like Flashnul to get the image to a partition or USB drive. You should find the tools on the Internet, go back to the USB section to learn how to use Flashnul to copy a Haiku image.
-
-
Note that when you just copy over an image to a partition or drive, you won't be able to use the full size of the target partition/drive. The image was built with a certain size (256MB currently) which is the size of the filesystem inside the image. So there's no real point in making a 10GB partition available for it, it won't be usable.
-
-
Copying the contents of a pre-built image
-
Instead of copying the image itself you can also make a separate BFS partition yourself and then copy over the contents of the image to that partition. You will need a platform supporting BFS to do that obviously, which leaves you with two possible options. Either you use a version of BeOS to do the setup with DriveSetup or mkbfs or you use Haiku itself with Installer or DriveSetup.
-Once you've created and initialized the target partition you can mount the image (using tools like Mount Image or through the Terminal) and copy over all the files. If you are under Haiku, you can just as well use Installer to make a duplicate of your currently booted installation.
-
-
Making it bootable
-
When you just create a plain partition and initialize it to a BFS filesystem or if you copy over a complete Haiku image, this doesn't necessarily make the partition bootable. The partition boot record may be missing, or the partition offset could be misconfigured. The prebuilt images for example contain a partition offset of 0 for example, since they are not actually partitioned. They only consist of a direct BFS filesystem, so the offset to that is 0. This will work in exactly one case, where you don't actually put it into a partition. If you for example copy such an image directly to a USB drive starting from 0, overwriting the MBR (destroying all partitions already there), then this will boot. If you however copy an image to the first partition on your hard disk, this will not work out of the box, as the boot code in the partition boot record won't find the desired filesystem at offset 0 (that's where the MBR still is).
-
-
To make sure a partition boot record is there and it contains the right partition offset, you can use the tool makebootable. It will do both, write the partition boot code to the beginning of the partition and detect and write the partition offset to where it is needed. You can use the makebootable from BeOS if you have a BeOS installation that has access to the partition in question. To do that, mount the volume you have Haiku installed to and use:
-
-
makebootable /HaikuMountpoint
-
-
Where /HaikuMountpoint is where you have mounted your Haiku volume to. Note that the BeOS' makebootable can be used, because the partition boot record does only load the zbeos boot loader. As Haiku does provide a zbeos as well and there is no information passed from the partition boot code to the boot loader, this is compatible between BeOS and Haiku and you can use a BeOS' makebootable with a Haiku boot loader and the other way around.
-
-
If you already have some Haiku medium capable of booting Haiku (like a USB drive) you could also boot into Haiku and run makebootable from there. Note that there is currently a bug that will require you to run it from the location it resides in like so:
-
-
cd /bin
-makebootable /MountpointOfNewHaikuInstallation
-
-
If you are on Linux or another build platform that has support for makebootable and have the sources available you can run:
-
-
jam run ":<build>makebootable" /dev/sdaX
-
-
Where the /dev/sdaX is the partition that is supposed to be made bootable. Under Windows this is currently not possible.
-
-
Configuring the boot manager
-
When the partition itself is bootable, i.e. contains a partition boot record and the correct partition offset, there needs to be a way to get it executed. If you use a boot manager like GRUB, you need to instruct it to load from that partition. You do that for GRUB by adding an entry to its menu.lst usually located at /boot/grub/menu.lst. The following would instruct it to switch to the partition and then just chainload the partition boot record:
-
-
title Haiku
-rootnoverify (hd0,3)
-chainloader +1
-
-
That would work if you installed to disk "0" and partition "3". Note that the GRUB naming is one-off the Linux one, so if you have it installed to /dev/sda4 that would translate to disk "0" (sda == 0, sdb == 1, ...) and partition "3" (4 - 1).
-
-
In case you are using the BeOS boot manager, just re-run the bootman command and add the new Haiku partition to the boot menu.
-
-
If you have another boot manager consult its documentation on how to chainload partitions, most should support such a thing, possibly named a bit different. In doubt just add an entry for the partition, probably this will cause it to chainload, even if not explicitly named so.
After the initial checkout (also in case not the entire tree was checked out successfully) you can fetch source code updates with the following command in your repository's root folder:
-
svn update
-
-
-
Installing the cross-compiler
-
Download the Haiku cross-compiler and extract it to /boot (for example by setting the Destination in Expander to just /boot). Then you need to configure your tree to use this cross compiler. Go to the root folder of your checked out Haiku repository and invoke the configure script with the --cross-tools-prefix option like this:
Be careful to include all of the string up to and including the last dash, as all the cross compiler tools have this prefix (they are for example called i586-pc-haiku-ar). You need to specify this prefix everytime you run configure.
-
-
Building the source
-
-
You can now start the build process with:
-
-
jam
-
-
Note:this will just build any target that is found in the tree. This is usually not that useful, as many parts might not build and are not required. So optionally, a target can be specified by adding a target name. For example, jam app_server will only build the app_server target. Normally though you will want to build an image or installation using the commands below. Add the -a option to rebuild the whole source or only the specified target in case jam didn't notice source changes.
-
-
Building an image
-
-
You can build a Haiku image with:
-
jam haiku-image
-
-
This will place a file named haiku.image into the generated/ folder.
-
-
To build an image for testing in VMWare:
-
jam haiku-vmware-image
-
-
This will place a file named haiku.vmdk into the generated/ folder.
-
-
Instead of building an image, you may install Haiku on a mounted partition using:
-
HAIKU_INSTALL_DIR=/target_folder jam install-haiku
The following will show you step by step how to get Haiku's source code and build tools, how to compile it all and how to generate either a VMWare image or directly install onto a partition or USB drive. You'll also learn how to exchange data with an image or an installation on it's partition.
-
Note:This guide is based on Ubuntu 8.10, but should generally work the same way on all other Linux distributions. Some known differences for other distributions are mentionned. Some changes may apply.
-
-
Downloading the tools and the Haiku source
-
-
Install all needed packages:
-
-
Debian & Ubuntu
-
-
On Ubuntu you can do so by clicking here, or use the command line:
If there are any errors while checking out the source, just cd into the trunk directory and type svn update to get any missed files.
-This is also how you update the code in the future.
-
-
Build the cross compiler tools (GCC 2.95):
-
cd ~/develop/haiku/trunk
-./configure --build-cross-tools ../buildtools/
-
To build with GCC 4.x the configure line changes to:
-
./configure --build-cross-tools-gcc4 x86 ../buildtools/
-
But keep in mind this will produce a Haiku installation which is not compatible with BeOS.
-
-
-
-
To download all code changes from now on, simply enter the haiku/trunk/ folder and type:
-
svn update
-
-
Customizing UserBuildConfig
-
-
Now you could already start to build RAW or VMWare images. Before we come to that, however, let's have a look at the UserBuildConfig that can be used to customize and automate some things.
-
-
In haiku/trunk/build/jam/ there's a UserBuildConfig.ReadMe that explains various options. Don't simply rename it and use it as UserBuildConfig!
-
You start by duplicating the UserBuildConfig.sample and removing the .sample suffix to get your UserBuildConfig. From the .ReadMe you can copy interesting parts into your config and customize them there.
-
-
-
First, this line is needed for the optional "OpenSSH" package:
-
HAIKU_IMAGE_HOST_NAME = "TEST" ;
-
-
There are several optional software packages available, that are dowloaded at build time if they haven't been so already. For a list of all available packages, see haiku/trunk/build/jam/OptionalPackages. Here's an example:
Now the block that sets the defaults for timezone and keymap:
-
# Add symlink/file (timezone and keymap settings) to the image.
-AddSymlinkToHaikuImage home config settings
- : /boot/system/etc/timezones/Europe/Paris : timezone ;
-AddFilesToHaikuImage home config settings : <keymap>German
- : Key_map ;
-
The build process can be fine tuned until it fits your needs. You could create your own folder haiku/trunk/user_data/ and put files there that are then copied or unzipped into the image. Zipping is important when dealing with Haiku files and their attributes, because zipping them up will preserve them on non-BFS partitions.
-For example:
-
-
# Zip up your emails between each system update and place the archive into the
-# user_data folder to be automatically put back when building the new image.
-UnzipArchiveToHaikuImage home
- : $(HAIKU_TOP)/user_data/mail.zip ;
-
The first line defines the location in the image where the archive will be unzipped (here: /boot/home/). Deeper hierarchies are separated with a blank instead of the usual "/" (see the setting of the timezone above).
-The second line is the location of the zip file. $(HAIKU_TOP) is the lowest level of the checked out source tree, normally haiku/trunk/.
-
In the same way, you use CopyDirectoryToHaikuImage and AddFilesToHaikuImage to copy whole directories or single files into the image.
-
-
The above commands are executed when building any kind of image. "Build Profiles" provide the means to set commands specifically for different configurations.
-These are two profiles, one for building and installing an image directly onto a partition (and in that case add the optional development package) and the other to generate a 900mb VMWare image:
-
DefineBuildProfile disk : disk : "/dev/sda7" ;
-DefineBuildProfile vmware : vmware-image ;
-
-switch $(HAIKU_BUILD_PROFILE) {
- case "disk" : {
- AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages Development ;
- }
-
-
- case "vmware" : {
- HAIKU_IMAGE_SIZE = 900 ;
- }
-
-}
-
The first line is especially important and dangerous: "/dev/sda7"
-The so defined partition will be irretrievably overwritten!
-
-
Before you use this profile, you should make sure that it's really the correct partition on the right harddisk or USB-stick, for example by using Ubuntu's partition editor GParted.
-
-
-
-
Here's the complete UserBuildConfig once more:
-
# Quick start file for UserBuildConfig. Copy it and uncomment and edit the
-# lines you want. See UserBuildConfig.ReadMe for details.
-
-# Optional package OpenSSH needs this variable set
-HAIKU_IMAGE_HOST_NAME = "TEST" ;
-
-# Add these optional packages.
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages Beam ;
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages BeHappy ;
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages BePDF ;
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages Firefox ;
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages NetSurf ;
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages OpenSSL ;
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages OpenSSH ;
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages Pe ;
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages Vision ;
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages Welcome ;
-AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages WonderBrush ;
-
-# Add symlink/file (timezone and keymap settings) to the image.
-AddSymlinkToHaikuImage home config settings
- : /boot/system/etc/timezones/Europe/Paris : timezone ;
-AddFilesToHaikuImage home config settings : German
- : Key_map ;
-
-DefineBuildProfile disk : disk : "/dev/sda7" ;
-DefineBuildProfile vmware : vmware-image ;
-
-switch $(HAIKU_BUILD_PROFILE) {
- case "disk" : {
- AddOptionalHaikuImagePackages Development ;
- }
-
-
- case "vmware" : {
- HAIKU_IMAGE_SIZE = 900 ;
- }
-
-}
-
-
Note:When building onto a USB memory stick, you wouldn't specify the partition number in the disk entry (ex. /dev/sdb instead of /dev/sdb1). This will erase your whole flash drive and it's partitions, so be cautious to use the correct drive name!
-
-
Besides these user build profiles, there are also official release profiles, see ReleaseBuildProfiles in the same folder. The profiles alpha-raw and alpha-vmware will build all officially planned components for the alpha release. They are invoked just like the user profiles, see Building a VMWare Image a bit further down.
-
-
-
Building/installing Haiku Images
-
-
Thanks to our UserBuildConfig it's all quite simple now.
-
-
Installing on a partition/USB-stick
-
-
To install Haiku directly onto a partition/USB-stick, you have to set the according read and write permissions.
-When installing to a hard drive partition, replace the drive name and use:
Note that the read permission is set for the whole disk (1st line) while the write permission is limited to one specific partition (2nd line).
-
-
When installing to a USB flashdrive, replace the drive name, and type:
-
sudo chmod o+rw /dev/sdb
-
-
-
Now the Haiku image is built and installed on the partition:
-
-
jam -q @disk
-
-
Installing to its own partition offers some interesting possibilities:
-
jam -q @disk update-all
-
-
This updates all of the system, but leaves the home folder untouched, so all your data and settings will still be there. Note that optional packages will not be updated in this install mode.
-
-
You can also decide to only update certain components:
-
jam -q @disk update {components}
-
-
Just replace the {components} with the program/component to be updated, e.g. kernel, StyledEdit or libmedia.so or more than one, separated with blanks. haiku/build/jam/HaikuImage lists all possible "targets".
If you are using the UserBuildConfig from above, just enter:
-
jam -q @vmware
-
-
The resulting image can be run in VMPlayer with an associated .vmx file (There's also a .vmx file in haiku/3rdparty/vmware/).
-
-
-
Booting with GRUB
-
-
If you installed Haiku directly onto a USB-stick, you just have to make sure the boot order in the BIOS looks first for USB devices to have Haiku boot right up from the stick.
-
-
If Haiku was installed on a partition on your hard drive, you have to adjust the boot loader accordingly. This is how it's done with GRUB:
-
-
sudo gedit /boot/grub/menu.lst
-
-
You'll note that GRUB uses a different naming strategy for hard drives than Linux.
-
-
With GRUB it's: (hdN,n)
-
All harddisks start with "hd"
-"N" is the hard disk number, starting with "0".
-"n is the partition number, also starting with "0".
-The first logical partition always has the number 4, regardless of the number of primary partitions.
-
-
If you're still unsure, check out the GRUB manual.
-
-
As an example:
-
-
/dev/sda7 would be (hd0,6) in GRUB.
-
-
Now using your own hard drive number, type this entry in /boot/grub/menu.lst:
-
-
# Haiku on /dev/sda7
-title Haiku
-rootnoverify (hd0,6)
-chainloader +1
-
-
Save, reboot and choose "Haiku" in the GRUB menu at boot-up.
-
-
-
Accessing images/partitions
-
-
Using build profiles has another advantage: You can mount a VMWare image or the partition of a Haiku installation to transfer data. If you were using the UserBuildConfig above, you could navigate to haiku/trunk/ and simply enter:
-
jam @disk mount
-
-
or
-
jam @vmware mount
-
You are now in the bfs_shell. Enter help to get a list of all supported commands:
-
fssh:/> help supported commands:
-cd - change current directory
-chmod - change file permissions
-cp - copy files and directories
-exit - quit the shell
-help - list supported commands
-info - prints volume informations
-ln - create a hard or symbolic link
-ls - list files or directories
-mkdir - create directories
-mkindex - create an index
-query - query for files
-quit - quit the shell
-rm - remove files and directories
-sync - syncs the file system
-
It all works pretty much like in your normal bash shell (besides there's sadly neither tab-completion nor command history).
-
-The one thing to remember: You have to prefix every local path (your Linux partition) with a ":".
-
Here's an example to copy the file .bash_history from Haiku to your Linux partition:
-
fssh:/> cd myfs/home
-fssh:/myfs/home> cp .bash_history :/home/humdinger/
Even if Mac OS X is Unix based, building Haiku on it still requires some tweaks.
-These instructions were tested on Mac OS X 10.5.5 (Leopard). They may not work on older versions of Mac OS X (Tiger, Panther etc.)
-
-
Requirements
-
-
You will need the Xcode Tools: use the installer on your Mac OS X Install DVD, or download the latest version from Apple Developer Connection (free registration required).
-
-
You must be logged in as administrator to install some tools.
-
MacPorts will also be required (see Step 3 for installation tips)
-
-
-
Step 1: Case-sensitive disk image
-
-
The Mac OS file system, HFS+, is case-insensitive by default. This causes troubles during the build of some Haiku components, because of wrong headers inclusion ("String.h" (from Haiku) instead of "string.h" (from the system) for
-instance). If your Mac OS X partition is not in case-sensitive HFS+ (which is very
-likely), you need to create a case-sensitive disk image and put Haiku
-buildtools and source code on it.
-
-
1) Open Disk Utility (in /Application/Utilities)
-2) Click "New Image", and enter the following parameters:
-
-
Volume name: You should enter a short name without special character or spaces.
-
Volume size: the minimum volume size is 2.68 Gb, the recommended size is the double. Do not worry about making the image bigger, since only the consumed space will be used on your hard drive.
-
Volume format: Mac OS Extended (Case-sensitive, Journaled)
-
Encryption: You should say "none", unless you really want to slow down Haiku building…
-
Partitions: (Tiger users will not have this - just skip it): Choose No partition map.
-
Image format: Choose “sparse disk image”.
-
-
-
-
-
The image is automatically mounted on the Desktop. If you want to remount it later, just double-click on the image file.
-
-
Step 2: Fetching the buildtools and the Haiku source code
-
-
Open a Terminal (in /Application/Utilities), and enter:
-
cd /Volumes/Haiku/
-
-
/Volumes/Haiku refers here (and in
-all this tutorial) to the mounted disk image name. I named it "Haiku",
-so if you chose another name, use it instead of "Haiku" after
-/Volumes/.
You should now have two folders "haiku" and "buildtools" into the mounted disk image.
-
-
To update your code from now on, go to the haiku/trunk/ folder and type:
-
svn update
-
-
Step 3: Install required software
-
-
First, install MacPorts (A standard Installer package is provided)
-
-
Close your Terminal, and enter in a new one:
-
sudo port install gnuregex gawk wget
-
-
You will be prompted for the administrator password of the current account - Do not worry if nothing you type shows after the Password prompt, this is intended.
-
-
If you get an error "port: command not found", the MacPorts shell configuration is probably not taken into account. You probably have a ~/.bash_profile or ~/.bash_login file overwriting MacPorts config located in ~/.profile. When a "login shell" starts up, it reads the file "/etc/profile" and then "~/.bash_profile" or "~/.bash_login" or "~/.profile" (whichever one exists - it only reads one of these, checking for them in the order mentioned). Check the file used by Bash (in the mentioned order) and add these lines to the used file:
To save the file and quit the editor, type CTRLX, Y and ENTER. If you are using another shell, take a look a the shell documentation to see which file is parsed at login, and add the required commands.
-
-
You can now retry the command in a new Terminal:
-
sudo port install gnuregex gaw wget
-
-
After MacPorts finished installing the tools, install the modified Haiku jam:
-
cd /Volumes/Haiku/buildtools/jam
-make
-sudo ./jam0 install
-[Enter your password]
-cd ..
-
-
Reopen a new Terminal, and enter:
-
jam -v
.
-
-
You should get:
-
Jam 2.5-haiku-20080327. OS=MACOSX. Copyright 1993-2002 Christopher Seiwald.
-
-
Step 4: Let's Patch
-
-
With your favorite text editor, open the file: [Mounted Disk Image]/buildtools/legacy/gcc/config.guess
*:FreeBSD:*:*)
- if test -x /usr/bin/objformat -a "elf" = "`/usr/bin/objformat`"; then
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-freebsdelf
- else
- echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-freebsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*//'`
- fi
-exit 0 ;;
-
-
Warning! When you copy-paste preformatted text from a web page, some versions of Safari replace every space with a no-break space. You can use the search/replace function of your text editor to replaces these "spaces" with real ones. (or copy the text by hand... or use another browser).
-
-
Save the file, and open:
-[Mounted Disk Image]/buildtools/legacy/gcc/Makefile.in
cd /Volumes/Haiku/haiku
-./configure --build-cross-tools ../buildtools
-
-
If you want to build Haiku with GCC4, use :
-
./configure --build-cross-tools-gcc4 x86 ../buildtools/
-
-
If you do not now which one you should use, choose gcc2 : Original BeOS R5 binaries (and many Haiku optional packages) will not run on a gcc4 build.
-
-
./configure has some more options, use this command to list them:
-
./configure --help
-
-
After some time, you should get:
-
binutils and gcc for cross compilation have been built successfully!
-
-
Step 6: Customizing the UserBuildConfig
-
-
Now you could already start to build RAW or VMWare images. Before we come to that, however, let's have a look at the UserBuildConfig that can be used to customize and automate some things.
-
-
In trunk/haiku/build/jam/ there's a UserBuildConfig.ReadMe that explains various options. Don't simply rename it and use it as UserBuildConfig!
-
-You start by duplicating the UserBuildConfig.sample and the remove the .sample suffix to get your UserBuildConfig. From the .ReadMe you can copy interesting parts into your config and customize them there.
-
-
Step 7: Building Haiku
-
-
Since on-disk install from Mac OS X does not seems possible at this time, you will need to use an emulation or virtualisation software.
-
-
Instructions for VMWare Fusion:
-
The command:
-
cd /Volumes/Haiku/haiku
-jam -q haiku-vmware-image
-
-
will build a VMWare disk image:
-[Mounted Disk Image]/haiku/generated/haiku.vmdk.
-
-
To use it, follow these steps:
-
-
-
Create a folder at the root of the disk image.
-
Copy [Mounted Disk Image]/3rdparty/vmware/haiku.vmx inside this folder, and edit the copy.
-
Change ide0:0.fileName = "haiku.vmdk" to ide0:0.fileName = "../haiku/generated/haiku.vmdk". Save the file.
-
Double-clicking on the file should start VMWare Fusion and launch Haiku.
-
-
-
VMWare will create some files in the folder you put haiku.vmx. If you want easy access to the virtual machine file, make an alias of the haiku.vmx file (or put it into the Dock). Launching this alias will mount the disk image and start the VM, automatically.
Booting Haiku from a USB memory stick is currently one of the best ways to test out the operating system. No changes will be made to your computer, so you can test a pre-Alpha OS without any worries. It is also the easiest method to install Haiku, so it is recommended for beginners. The installation process differs from a Unix system (This includes many operating systems like Linux, Mac OS X, FreeBSD and such) to that of Windows.
-
-
You will need a small USB memory stick (512MB should be more than enough) that you are ready to erase and a recent HDD raw image. Note that these are test images, they are not complete distributions that include a lot of software. Future releases will include a more complete set of software, obviously. Your motherboard should also support booting from USB Drives (most recent computers do).
Now that you've downloaded the raw image, you will need to expand this image on your USB Drive you intend to install it to. You will first need to know the name of your drive (something like /dev/sdb, /dev/disk1 or a variant).
-
-
First connect your flash drive.
-
Under Linux, open your shell and type:
-
fdisk -l
-
-
On Mac OS X, open the terminal (Utilities > Terminal) and type:
-
df -hl
-
-
The output should resemble something like,
-
-
Disk /dev/sda: 4034 MB, 4034838528 bytes
-255 heads, 63 sectors/track, 490 cylinders
-Units = cylinders of 16065 * 512 = 8225280 bytes
-Disk identifier: 0x000740f4
-
-Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System
-/dev/sda1 * 1 462 3710983+ 83 Linux
-/dev/sda2 463 490 224910 5 Extended
-/dev/sda5 463 490 224878+ 82 Linux swap / Solaris
-
-Disk /dev/sdb: 16.1 GB, 16139354112 bytes
-255 heads, 63 sectors/track, 1962 cylinders
-Units = cylinders of 16065 * 512 = 8225280 bytes
-Disk identifier: 0xf26d47c4
-
-or
-
-
Filesystem Size Used Avail Capacity Mounted on
-/dev/disk0s2 186Gi 112Gi 74Gi 61% /
-/dev/disk1s1 1.9Gi 265Mi 1.6Gi 14% /Volumes/KINGSTON
-
-
Now you need to use the dd tool to extract the raw image to your USB Key. Make sure you have the right drive selected here, since this will erase all data on the specified location. Recheck with a partition tool to verify for example. You might need administrative rights, so add the sudo or su command before the next step to run the process as administrator (a password will be required).
-
-
Note:You will want to put the image at the absolute start of the drive, make sure that you write to the whole raw drive and not to a partition. You do that by specifying a raw device instead of a partition. Under Linux you would for example omit the partition number resulting insdbinstead ofsdb1. Under BeOS you would pick the.../rawpath instead of one with a number. If you use such a command, you overwrite the MBR containing the partition table of your USB memory stick. This means, that all the partitions on that drive will become inaccessible (not only the first part of the drive). So be sure that you want to do such a destructive operation!
-
-
Still in the terminal, enter:
-
dd if=/path/to/image of=/dev/sdb
-
-
Where /dev/sdb stands for your USB memory stick's name found earlier.
-
-
Congratulations! You have just installed Haiku to a USB memory stick. You can now restart your computer to boot from Haiku. Note that you will probably have to enable USB drive booting in your BIOS and change the hard drive boot priority order. If Haiku's splash screen stops in the middle of the icons, and then sends you to Kernel Debug Land, you might have to disable the Plug and Play OS option in your BIOS.
You will need basic knowledge of your command prompt to go through this step-by-step guide. You can type help inside your command prompt to get some information on the required navigation commands.
-
-
You have to download and install the latest Flashnul utility.
-
-
Note:The Flashnul website isn't in English. You can simply click on the "Download" link and then select the upper-most entry (the latest version) to download.
-
-
Extract your raw image zip file and the Flashnul program in the same directory (ex. c:\haiku). Rename the raw image's extension to .img (ex. haiku.img).
-
-
Open your command prompt (go to Start > Run, then type cmd and press ENTER). You will see a black window with a blinking cursor, this is your command line editor (commonly named command prompt or shell).
-
-
Note:If you are using Windows Vista, you will need administrator rights to see the available physical drives. To run the command prompt in administrator mode, go to Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command prompt, right click on the program and select Run as Administrator.
-
-
Navigate to the directory containing your raw image and the Flashnul utility. For example,
-
cd \haiku
-
if the directory is c:\haiku
-
-
You need to find the number of your USB flash drive. This is very important, because if you do not select the right drive, your whole hard drive will be erased. To find out your flashdrive's name, in the command prompt, type:
You are now ready to extract the raw image over the memory stick. Make sure the number you have noted is the one of your flash drive. X being your memory stick's number, type:
-
-
flashnul X -L haiku.img
-
-
And your shell should output:
-
-
Disk PhysicalDrive1 (UNC name: \\.\PhysicalDrive1)
-------------------------------------------------------------[Drive geometry]--
-Cylinders/heads/sectors = 121/255/63
-Bytes per sector = 512
-CHS size = 995258880 (949 Mb)
----------------------------------------------------------------[Device size]--
-Device size = 1000341504 (954 Mb)
-delta to near power of 2 = 73400320 (70 Mb), 7%
-Surplus size = 5082624 (4963 kb)
-
------------------------------------------------[Adapter & Device properties]--
-Bus type = (7) USB
-Removable device = Yes
-Command Queue = Unsupported
-Device vendor = Kingston
-Device name = DataTraveler 2.0
-Revision = PMAP
---------------------------------------------------------------[Hotplug info]--
-
-Device hotplug = Yes
-Media hotplug = No
- Selected operation: load file content
- Selected drive: PhysicalDrive1, 1000341504b (954 Mb)
- THIS OPERATION IS DESTRUCTIVE!!!
- Type 'yes' to confirm operation. All other text will stop it.
- Really destroy data on drive PhysicalDrive1? :yes
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------[Log]--
-Running operation [load file content] for drive PhysicalDrive1
-Writing 0xf9f0000 (250 Mb), 899733 b/s
-image load finished
-----------------------------------------------------------[Operation result]--
-passes: 1
-errors: 0
-write bytes: 262144000 (250 Mb)
-avg. write speed: 899731 (878 kb/s)
- max/min write speed: 0 (0 b/s) / 0 (0 b/s)
-Press ENTER to exit.
-
-
Congratulations! You have just installed Haiku to a USB memory stick. You can now restart your computer to boot from Haiku. Note that you will probably have to enable USB drive booting in your BIOS and change the hard drive boot priority order. If Haiku's splash screen stops in the middle of the icons, and then sends you to Kernel Debug Land, you might have to disable the option Plug and Play OS in your BIOS.
Computer emulation is a very handy tool, not only for users, but also for developers. Obviously running Haiku under native hardware is preferred (due to better performance), but this is not always an option. Manufacturers are often reluctant to release hardware specifications towards developers, and they are therefore often left to the difficult task of writing hardware drivers from scratch - it is a plague and barrier for smaller operating systems. Since Haiku can not possibly support all the hardware available, the release of Haiku disk images that are compatible with leading industry emulators is a logical choice. Also, users may not be confident in natively installing pre-alpha software onto their computers, leaving emulators as a 'safe' and attractive option to test out Haiku.
-
-
Emulators attach to your hardware and usually emulate more common hardware on top. Because the hardware is now the same, and is fixed and consistent, development under emulation can also be consistent - bugs can be easily replicated as well, eliminating suspect hardware. A couple of Haiku developers develop under emulators occasionally and realize their importance towards the development of Haiku.
-
-
Haiku runs very well under several of the major emulators such as Vmware, Virtual Box, and Qemu (has also been shown to run under Parallels and Virtual PC). Most emulators are cross-platform, and can be downloaded from the following locations:
-
-
-
Vmware Player (Free but limited in function; Windows and Linux)
-
Vmware Server (Free with registration; Windows and Linux)
Of all the emulation options, Vmware, Virtual Box, and Qemu are well supported without the need for format conversion or tinkering (should work 'out of the box'). Haiku under Vmware is the fastest emulation option (on a subjective basis), and has driver support for networking, audio, and video. Virtual Box has Vmware disk compatibility yet the audio isn't yet supported.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Haiku under Vmware
-
-
- Haiku under Virtual Box
-
-
- Haiku und Q (Qemu)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Haiku's disk images are usually built on a daily basis, and can be downloaded here:
To use Haiku under Vmware, simply unzip the archive and execute the included *.vmx file.
-
-
VirtualBox:
-
Note:Use the latest version of VirtualBox for the best compatibility, but emulating Haiku in VirtualBox isn't totally supported. Some settings will require you have a specific processor to work. If it isn't the case, you will either have to wait for upgrades (from Haiku and/or VirtualBox) or get a free version of VMWare.
-
-
To use the VMWare disk image under Virtual Box, create a virtual machine (click New) and press next. First name your image (ex. Haiku r28888). Under the Operating System tab, select "other", and for the Version tab, select "other" again. Next, you will have to chose the amount of RAM you wish to allocate to Haiku (512 MB through 1 GB should be enough). Remember your host OS will be deprived from this amount of memory.
-Now in the Virtual Hard Disk section, enable Boot Hard Disk (Primary Master), then click Existing..., click Add, navigate to your VMWare (.vmdk) image and click Open. Select it in the list, and click Select. Now your done creating your Virtual Machine, but you will have to tweak some settings.
-
-
With your new virtual machine selected, click on Settings. Here you can tweak your VM to your likings. Haiku will not boot if the "VT-x/AMD-V" option isn't on. Go to General > Advanced > Enable VT-x/AMD-V and activate the option. Your processor might not support this option, if so, your out of luck for VirtualBox emulation.
-
-
In order to get networking running under Haiku in Virtual Box, under the Network > Adapter 1 tab, change the adapter type to "Intel Pro/1000 MT (82540OEM)". You can use either "NAT" or "Host Interface" under the attached to option. If you choose "Host Interface", you'll then have to select your desired network card in the bottom window ("Host Interfaces")
-
-
Sound doesn't work when emulating Haiku in VirtualBox, so you might as well disable it. I haven't tested the USB ports, but it should work. For more information on the various options you have, refer to (the very complete) VirtualBox User Manual.
-
-
Parallels Desktop:
-
Note:These instructions have been posted in the forums, they are not guaranteed to work, and some issues might arise (like networking). Visit the forums for more information.
-
-
Download a nightly build from the Haiku Build Factory and extract the tar.bz2 file.
-
Move the extracted haiku.image file to the desired directory. Open terminal and navigate to that directory. Type:
Use ImageTool to resize the haiku.hdd file to 120MB.
-
Create a new virtual machine in Parallels, with Guest OS Type as Windows.
-
Set the Hard Drive to the haiku.hdd file that you downloaded.
-
-
-
Qemu:
-
For Qemu, rename the raw disk image to haiku.img and manually configure a virtual machine using that disk image.
-
-
Increasing disk image space - Creating and formatting disks
-
The disk images provided come as 250MB fixed disk images. The disk image's size can't be increased, but one can easily create a new disk with an increased capacity. Under the emulators GUI and virtual machine's settings, you should find an option to add another hard disk.
-Choose which type of disk you would like to create. There are two options:
-
-
Fixed disk: This means the disk's space will be pre-allocated, i.e if you choose to create a 10GB fixed disk, the disk image will occupy 10GB of data on your hard drive.
-
Expanding disk: If you choose to create a 10GB disk image, the disk will appear as it's 10GB under Haiku, but will only actually be as big as the space that's used within Haiku (it grows).
-
-
Once you've created the disk image to a size of your choice, add the secondary disk to your virtual machine and boot Haiku. The disk won't show up until you have formatted it. Navigate to Haiku's DiskSetup application - the disk should be shown (see a 1GB disk added in the screenshot below).
-
-
-
-
Select the disk, and then select Partition | Initialize | Be File System. Select the default variables, and accept the alert messages. Return to the menu and select Partition Mount - another Haiku disk should now be on your desktop (without the leaf logo). Now simply open a Tracker window on the boot disk, and a Tracker window on your newly created disk and copy the contents over (over-writing the home folder on the new disk).
-
-
One final step: Open a Terminal and type:
-
df
-
to see the disk space size & usage on each disk. After selecting the correct disk (probably /Haiku1) type:
-
makebootable Haiku1
-
You can now shutdown the Haiku virtual machine, remove the primary disk image (the Haiku disk image you downloaded) in your virtual machine's preferences, and make sure that the new disk you created is your primary disk now.
Transferring files between your host computer and a Haiku virtual machine
-
There are several ways you can transfer files between the host and guest machines on your computer. Since there is no 'Vmware tools installer' for Haiku, file-sharing between the host and guest isn't built-in, and there's no clipboard sharing. Here are a couple of ways you could share files.
-
-
Transfer files using a disk image: create a disk image with the files you'd like to transfer from your PC to Haiku. In Windows use a utility like Burn At Once, in OS X you could use the the hard drisk utility to make an ISO i.e create a folder called 'test' on your desktop, put the files you want into that folder and execute the command:
(replacing "myusername" with your username). Attach the resultant ISO images in place of your optical disk in your virtual machine preferences.
-
Transfer files over the internet: upload files to an online server you have, and then download them internally through Haiku. Note, Haiku doesn't yet have a web browser included, however, you can use wget.
-
Transfer files between the host and machine: First you'll need to setup a FTP server on your host machine. OS X users can easily do this under their sharing preferences tab. As suggested, you can use wget to download files from your host machine. You could use wput to upload files to your host machine, alternatively, you could use a grahphical client like NetPenguin.
Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/system/documentation/.
-If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
+
Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/home/config/.
+If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
A similar method can be used from any Tracker window:
Click on the area in the lower left, where the number of items is listed, and you'll get submenus for every level above your current location. From there you can drill down through the folders as usual.
Note, that the Desktop is always the topmost level as that is where Tracker shows mounted volumes. So, if you want to go to another disk, you first have to navigate to the top (Desktop) and cross over to your other disk from there.
You'll get the same submenu-navigating when you drag a file over a folder. After a short while of hovering, a submenu pops up and you can drill down to your destination. If you initiated the drag with the right mousebutton, you can choose between copying, moving or linking the file when you release the mouse.
You may be familiar with the concept from file managers of other operating systems: typing the first few letters of a filename will jump to the first file matching these starting characters. Haiku took the idea a step further. If there isn't a file starting with those letters it will jump to the first file including the string anywhere in its name. And if there's nothing with the string in its filename, the attributes are searched next.
In the above example, there are many files starting with "Haiku logo", rendering simpler approaches to typing ahead quite useless. In Haiku however, typing "web" jumps right to its first occurence in "Haiku logo - website". The characters you enter appear in the bottom left corner where you normally find the item count of all files in the folder. A second after entering a character, the display jumps back to normal and you're ready for a new type ahead search.
Tracker windows offer three different viewing modes from the Window menu:
-
Icon View (ALT1) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with ALT+/ALT-.
-
Mini Icon View (ALT2) - Small icons.
-
List View (ALT3) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide available attributes. (See topic Attributes.)
+
Icon View (ALT1) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with ALT+/ALT-.
+
Mini Icon View (ALT2) - Small icons.
+
List View (ALT3) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide available attributes. (See topic Attributes.)
The Window menu offers a number of other functions:
-
Resize Window (ALTY) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
-
Clean Up (ALTK) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Clean Up All which additionally sorts all icons alphabetically.
Close (ALTW) - Closes the window. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Close All which closes every Tracker window.
-
Close All in Workspace (ALTQ) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
+
Resize Window (ALTY) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
+
Clean Up (ALTK) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Clean Up All which additionally sorts all icons alphabetically.
Close (ALTW) - Closes the window. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Close All which closes every Tracker window.
+
Close All in Workspace (ALTQ) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
-
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete Clean Up (ALTK). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
+
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete Clean Up (ALTK). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.
Window | Preferences... opens a panel that offers a number of settings that, where not obvious, should become clear once tried out. Since all settings are applied live, you'll immediately see the changes.
So, in short, the not so obvious settings:
@@ -130,17 +139,17 @@ If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where yo
This panel, by the way, is also available as Tracker from Deskbar's Preferences.
When invoked on a selected file, most of the File menu commands are also offered in the context menu by right-clicking that file.
As usual the commands are pretty clear.
-
Find... - Find a file or folder. See topic Query for more info.
+
Find... - Find a file or folder. See topic Query for more info.
New - Create a new folder or any other file based on a template.
-
>
+
Choosing Edit Templates... opens the folder /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the New menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype text/plain. See topic Filetypes for more info.
Open With... - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
@@ -161,23 +170,22 @@ If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where yo
Add-Ons - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic Tracker Add-ons for more information.
When you copy, move or delete files, Tracker shows its progress with a status window. If you initiate more than one transaction, each job gets its own status display.
To the right are two buttons to pause or stop a transaction entirely. Sometimes it can be useful to temporarily pause a large transaction. For example, you may need to quickly launch a large application. Copying large amounts of data chokes your harddisk's IO bandwidth and thus delays your workflow.
Before diving into all the applications that come with Haiku, let's have a more detailed look at how to install and uninstall programs you downloaded somewhere, for example from a site mentioned on the Welcome page.
+
Debería únicamente desempaquetar e instalar archivos dentro de Haiku. Si se extrae un paquete dentro de Linux o Windows, por ejemplo, y sólo se copia el folder sobre Haiku posteriormente, todos los atributos vitales se eliminarían, porque esos sistemas operativos no manejan normalmente metainformación.
El software de Haiku viene siempre empaquetado. La mayor parte de las veces es un fichero ZIP, pero a veces algunos paquetes antiguos de BeOS vienen en formato Software Valet's PKG. Software Valet era capaz de ejecutar automáticamente scripts de instalación, así que tras hacer doble clic, sólo tenía que seleccionar el directorio de destino, y él se encargaba del resto.
+Si es un fichero ZIP, al hacer doble clic se abre Expander donde también se debe poner el directorio de destino y descomprimirlo. Tal como se explica en la sección Esquema del sistema de ficheros, ese destino puede ser:
+
+
/boot/common/apps/
para aplicaciones disponibles para todos los usuarios.
+
/boot/home/apps/
para aplicaciones sólamente disponibles para usted.
+
+
Esta distinción será relevante sólamente cuando Haiku tenga soporte multiusuario, por supuesto.
+
Una vez el fichero está descomprimido, debería echar un vistazo al directorio recién creado. A menudo se encuentran ficheros ReadMe (léame) u otra documentación de interés.
+
Algunos programas necesitan mayor configuración. Por ejemplo, los Tracker Add-Ons (extensiones de Tracker), Traductores u otros componentes de mejora del sistema tienen que ser colocados en los directorios correctos. En ambos casos encontrará un pequeño fichero script (a menudo con la extensión .sh) como install que simplemente tiene abrir mediante doble clic y ellos se harán cargo del resto.
+Algunas veces encontrará directorios enlazados al destino correcto llamados "arrastre [nombre de fichero] aquí...". Así que tan sólo tiene que seguir esa instrucción y habrá finalizado.
+
De todas formas, en la mayor parte de casos, nada de lo explicado es necesario, y sólo será necesario descomprimir.
+Mire la sección Deskbar o LaunchBox para ver cómo se añaden accesos directos a su recién instalada aplicación.
Si la instalación se realizó con un script de instalación, es bastante probable que haya un script de desinstalación también. En ese caso, basta con que haga doble clic sobre él.
+En cualquier otro caso, la desinstalación se lleva a cabo simplemente borrando la carpeta de la aplicación.
+
Esto, por supuesto, deja atrás posibles ficheros de configuración en el directorio ~/config/settings. Esto puede ser a propósito, por si quiere mantener la configuración en caso de que vuelva a instalar el programa en un futuro. De la misma forma, cuando la instalación se ha realizado mediante los directorios "arrastrar [nombre de fichero] aquí...", esos ficheros son abandonados.
+
Una forma de ver rápidamente todos los ficheros relacionados con una aplicación es hacer una búsqueda con una parte significativa del nombre de la aplicación. Esto dará como resultado el binario de la aplicación, su directorio de instalación y sus ficheros de configuración así como posibles enlaces en el Deskbar, etc. Simplemente seleccione todos los ficheros relevantes y bórrelos.
Haiku viene con un conjunto pequeño de aplicaciones esenciales. Podrá encontrarlas en /boot/system/apps/ o /boot/common/apps/. Las aplicaciones que no son iniciadas con frecuencia con un doble clic en un fichero de datos (ej.: ShowImage para ficheros de imagen) se pueden encontrar en el menú Applications (Aplicaciones) del Deskbar.
Aparte de los programas listados más arriba, los cuales están mantenidos por el proyecto Haiku, hay algunas aplicaciones esenciales incluídas en un sistema Haiku estándar. Los errores y solicitudes de mejoras deben enviarse al mantenedor de esa aplicación en particular.
Se pueden rastrear los recursos del sistema al abrir el Monitor de actividades y activar los diferentes elementos de interés.
+
+
+
Al dar clic derecho en la ventana, se puede conmutar el desplegado de toda clase de recursos:
+Memoria Usada/en Caché, Espacio de intercambio, Uso de CPU, Recepción/Envío de red, fallos de página, Semáforos, Puertos, Hilos, Equipos, Aplicaciones corriendo, Tamaño en bruto/texto del portapapeles, Nodos de medios.
+
Debajo de los gráficos hay una leyenda (puede ocultarse desde el menú contextual). Pueden cambiarse sus colores así como el color del fondo de las gráficas vía arrastrar y soltar, o arrastrar y soltar de cualquier seleccionador de color, p.ej., desde Icon-O-Matic.
+
Puede agregar más vistas desde el menú File (archivo) si se llena demasiado.
+
El menú Settings (Configuración) abre un panel donde se puede cambiar el intervalo de actualización.
+
Cada vista tiene su propio manejador Replicante y así puede ordenarse, por ejemplo, en el Escritorio.
BePDF es un visor de PDF de rápida apertura. Además de visualizar, soporta anotaciones y marcaje de páginas definido por el usuario para PDFs sin cifrar. Está completamente traducido a 20 idiomas al momento y pueden agregarse idiomas adicionales mediante archivos de texto.
+
La documentación está disponible en formato HTML o PDF. Este último también está debajo del menú Ayuda | Mostrar ayuda....
BeZillaBrowser está basado en el código fuente de Mozilla y utiliza parches para mejorar la velocidad, estabilidad y otros aspectos gráficos. Actualmente, todas las versiones de BeZilla utilizan la rama CVS de Mozilla 1.8. Puede enviar informes de error de este port a HaikuPorts.
+
Como los navegadores de Mozilla son extensamente utilizados en muchas plataformas, encontrará una plétora de guías y consejos en la red. Puede comenzar viendo http://support.mozilla.com/.
+
BeZilla todavía no es capaz de imprimir. Por suerte, existe una extensión, html2pdf que utiliza un servicio en línea para generar un PDF a partir de la página actual. Tras la instalación, hay un pequeño símbolo de PDF en la barra de estado, que cuando se hace clic, abre una nueva ventana con un enlace ofreciendo "Descargar PDF".
+Caveat: Sólo funciona con páginas en línea, no con los documentos almacenados localmente.
~/cd/* - Almacena los detalles de todos los CD's identificados.
+
+
+
+
+
+
El uso es el que podría esperarse viendo los botones de control.
+Active el botónRepeat (repetición) a la izquierda de Shuffle (desordenar) para repetir el CD completo.
+
Si necesita mayor control, como por ejmplo listas de reproducción, pruebe MediaPlayer.
CharacterMap le mostrará el código UTF-8 de cada carácter que soporte una tipo de letra.
+
+
A la izquierda se ven los bloques estandarizados, junto con una función de filtro. Opcionalmente, se puede seleccionar también Show Private Blocks (Mostrar bloquees privados) desde el menú View (Vista). El cuadro de la derecha muestra los caracteres actuales del bloque seleccionado, utilizando el tipo de letra especificada en el menú Font (Tipo de letra). Debajo se puede cambiar el tamaño de letra, y debajo, se muestran los valores en hexadecimal, decimal y UTF-8 de los caracteres que estén bajo el puntero del ratón.
+
Se puede arrastrar y soltar un caracter directamente del mapa de carateres a un editor de texto, o hacer clic derecho sobre uno bien para Copiar Caracter (ALTC) o Copiar como cadena de escape Unicode (SHIFTALTC). Resultando en o bien € o \xe2\x82\xac.
Con CodyCam se pueden tomar imágenes en un intervalo de tiempo especificado provenientes de una cámara web o cualquier otro dispositivo de vídeo y guardarlo vía FTP.
+
+
A la izquierda, bajo la previsualización, se puede cambiar el nombre del fichero. Éste tendrá un sufijo con un número para cada imagen tomada. Debajo se puede decidir en qué formato será grabado y el intervalo de tiempo en el cual las imágenes serán tomadas.
+
A la derecha se puede elegir o bien FTP o sFTP (si SSH está disponible) e introducir los datos necesarios para guardar las imágenes en el servidor.
DeskCalc es una calculadora simple que sin embargo tiene algunas características agradables que no están aparentemente a primera vista.
+
+
+
DeskCalc entiende mucho más que lo que su simple teclado numérico sugiere.
+Además de los operadores +, -, *, /, %, ^ y las costantes pi y e se soportan las siguientes funciones matemáticas:
+acos, asin, atan, atan2, ceil, cos, cosh, exp, floor, log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, tanh.
+
Respecto a la entrada de datos del usuario, DeskCalc es muy tolerante:
+/, :, \ se interpretan todos como operadores de división,
+*, x son símbolos válidos para multiplicación.
+También, tenga en cuenta que . y , se consideran puntos flotantes, lo que significa que no debe usarlos como separadores de millares.
+
El clic derecho ofrece estas opciones:
+
+
Enable Num Lock on start up
automáticamente activa el
+bloque numérico cuando se inicia DeskCalc
+
Show Keypad
oculta el teclado numérico cuando está desactivado
+
+
Se puede retamañar la calculadora hasta que se ajuste a sus necesidades y luego colocarla como Replicante dentro del Escritorio vía arrastrar y colocar el símbolo en la esquina inferior derecha. Asegúrese que Show Replicants esté activado en el Deskbar.
+
El teclado numérico se puede clorear con un movimiento de arrastrar y colocar desde cualquier pozo de color, p. ej., desde Icon-O-Matic.
+
You can move up and down in a history of past calculations with ↑ and ↓.
+
Se pueden seleccionar los contenidos de DeskCalc y arrastrar y colocar a cualquier aplicación. O se puede arrastrar dentro de una ventana de Tracker o al Escritorio y un achivo de texto con ese recorte se creará allí.
+
Y mucho mejor, la operación inversa también es posible:
+Cree recortes como se describe en varias etapas de su cálculo y regrese a ellas arrastrando y soltándolas de regreso a DeskCalc.
+O puede arrastrar y colocar un cálculo directamente de un correo electrónico a DeskCalc.
+
DeskCalc puede usarse en la Terminal. Sólo ponga la expresión en comillas dobles, como en el siguiente ejemplo:
DiskProbe es un editor hexadecimal para ver y alterar datos de un archivo o en un dispositivo a nivel de bytes. Es una herramienta a muy bajo nivel, y por lo tanto, si no se es cuidadoso, puede ocasionar graves daños.
+
Trabaje siempre con una copia de seguridad del archivo y sea especialmente cuidadoso cuando tabaje directamente sobre un dispositivo.
+
Al iniciar DiskProbe se le preguntará primero por el archivo o dispositivo sobre el que desea trabajar. Posteriormente, le aparecerá esta interfaz:
+
+
The main view shows always one block of data, the size of which can be adjusted with View | BlockSize. To the left is the offset to the start of the block, in the middle the data as HEX values and to the right the same as ASCII symbols.
+You can move from block to block with the slider above or with ALT← and ALT→ and switch between the HEX and ASCII columns with TAB.
+
Block | Selection will not only show the selection with different endianess (and in HEX or decimal, set by View | Base), it will also interprete the selection as a block offset that you can jump to. It will be grayed out if the position is outside of the file/device.
+This is a handy feature mostly when looking at file systems, as they often contain pointers to other blocks.
+
If the file you're probing includes attributes, the Attributes menu can be used to open any of them in a new DiskProbe window. Here's the copyright attribute of the AboutSystem application:
+
+
Depending on the kind of attribute, you'll get a different editor tab besides the always present Raw Editor. For example, there are editors for strings and MIME types or an icon viewer for the vectoricon attribute.
DiskUsage exhibe gráficamente el uso del espacio de los volúmenes.
+Es una herramienta muy útil para contestar la pregunta, "¿Qué pasó con todo mi espacio?"
+
+
The concentric circles represent different levels in the file system hierarchy. Above, the circle in the center represents the /boot/home/ folder. Each segment of the ring immediately outside that circle is a file or folder under /boot/home/. Every segment farther outside brings you one level deeper in the file hierarchy. You may have to resize the window to accommodate very deep folders.
+
Above the graphic is a pop-up menu that lets you switch between all mounted volumes. Before the disk usage of a volume can be displayed, it has to be scanned. As this can take a while for larger disks, you can examine another volume while that scan is done in the background.
+
+
If the graphical representation of a file or folder comprises less than about 2° of a circle, it is excluded from the display.
+
The number of files that's reported for a folder includes files in subfolders too. A folder counts as a file.
+
DiskUsage ignores symbolic links.
+
+
As you move the mouse over a segment, information about that file or folder appears in the status bar at the bottom.
+
Right-clicking a segment offers a context menu to Get Info, Open (with Tracker), Open With another suitable application or Rescan that particular folder.
+Left-clicking a segment makes that file/folder the center circle.
+Left-clicking the center circle moves you up one level.
+
You can drag files and folders from DiskUsage to other applications or to the Desktop or other Tracker windows for copying. Vice versa, dropped volumes and folders on DiskUsage's window will zoom directly to them, making them the new center circle.
DriveSetup es una herramienta para crear, borrar e inicializar particiones. Por ahora no puede redimensionar ni mover particiones existentes, así que es necesario o un volumen sin particionar (ta vez un disco externo USB u otro disco duro) o modificar la configuración inicial con una herramienta como GParted LiveCD para proveer de espacio otra partición.
+
+
En la zona superior se muestra una repesentación gráfica de todas las particiones existentes en el interior del dispositivo elegido de la lista de abajo. Hay un máximo de 4 particiones primarias, cada una de las cuales puede contener un cierto número de particiones lógicas. Es posible manejar la lista con el control +/- que aparece, si es necesario, frente al dispoitivo en cuestión para visualizar los detalles de cada partición lógica.
+
Se puede seleccionar una partición de la lista y montarla o desmontarla con las órdenes menú Partición o presionando ALTM o ALTU.
+
Es posible borrar completamente una partición con Partición | Borrar.
+Lo que devuelve el siguiente aviso:
+
Tratar asuntos de creación/borrado/iniciación de particiones es una tarea muy peligrosa. Compruebe siempre dos veces para asegurarse de que está trabajando con la partición adecuada, y guarde siempre una copia de seguridad actualizada de sus datos ¡sólo por si algo sale mal!
Si pretende usar un disco completo como partición única, por ejemplo un pendrive o una tarjeta Flash, puede saltar se el proceso de creación de particiones y poceder directamente a Inicialización.
+
Cuando se encuentra un espacio sin formatear en un dispositvo como el de la imagen superior <vacío>, es posible crear una nueva partición desde Partición | Crear...(ALTC).
+
+
Este cuadro de diálogo permite ajustar el tamaño y el tipo de la partición. Seleccione Be File System
+Si se desea usar la partición para una instalación de Haiku o si se quieren usar sobre ella todas las características interesantes de Haiku, como atributos y consultas. Tenga en cuenta que otros sistemas operativos a lo mejor no son capaces de acceder a tal partición.
+
Si ha creado una partición primaria en vez de otra partición lógica, el cuadro de diálogo superior también muestra un cuadro seleccionable Active Partition. Se tendrá que seleccionar tal opción si se va a usar esa partición para lanzar una instalación de Haiku.
+
Antes de que se pueda usar, o incluso montar la nueva partición, debe ser inicializada con un sistema de archivos.
Sólamente se pueden inicializar particiones que no estén montadas a través del menú Partctión | Inicializar.
+
+
Aquí se selecciona el nombre para la partición y el tamaño de sus bloques de datos. Se recomiendan 2048 bytes por bloque, pero es posible escoger un tamaño inferior o superior si es necesario por alguna razón concreta.
+¡La Inicialización eliminará todos los datos de la partición!
Sin entrada, normalmente ejecutado al clicar dos veces sobre un archivo soportado.
+
Ubicación:
/boot/system/apps/Expander
+
Configuración:
~/config/settings/Expander_Settings
+
+
+
Expander es una pequeña herramienta para desempaquetar rápidamente la mayoría de los ficheros comprimidos comunes, entre ellos los: zip, gzip, bzip2, rar y tar.gz.
+Sólo clique dos veces sobre un archivo comprimido para ver esta simple interfaz:
+
+
+
Fuente
ALTS
abre un cuadro de diálogo para localizar un fichero comprimido a desempaquetar.
+
Destino
ALTD
abre un cuadro de diálogo para escoger el destino.
+
Expandir
ALTE
empieza la descompresión. Puede cancelarse con ALTK.
+
+
Es posible cambiar la lista de visualización del archivo marcando o no la opción Mostrar Contenido, o presionando ALTL.
+
Expander sólamente puede descomprimir archivos completos.
+No es posible seleccionar archivos individuales para descomprimir o añadir/eliminar archivos al fichero comprimido.
+
Editar | Preferenceias... or ALTP abre un panel de preferencias que ofrece algunas configuraciones útiles para regular el comportamiento de Expander.
+Las opciones se autoexplican:
Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
+Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
+
+
Bitmap
SVG
HVIF
+
+
1,024 byte + 256 byte
7,192 byte
768 byte
+
+
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
+
This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType Add-On on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
+
Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.
Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
+
Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
+For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
+
+
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
+
+
To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the Shape menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the Properties view.
A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure, the path is selected in the path list.
+
+
Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+
+
+
+
To get from "A" to "B", you have to transform some points from corner-points to curve-points. That's done by holding ALT while clicking on a point and dragging out the handles. This results in a symmetrical Bezier: the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click&drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
+Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
+
+
To move a point, simply click&drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
+To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
+Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
+
+
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move point(s)
+
Insert point
+
Add point
+
Delete point CTRL
+
Corner↔Bezier ALT
+
Select points SHIFT
+
+
+
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
+
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
+
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
+
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
+
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add Rectangle and Add Circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
+
+
+
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
+
Clean Up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
+
Rotate Indices Right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
+
A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
+
+
+
+
When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move
+
Resize
+
Rotate
+
Move rotation point
+
+
+
+
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.
The Shape menu offers the before mentioned possibility to Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path&Style and to Duplicate or Remove a shape. Then, there is:
+
+
Reset Transformation
Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.
+
Freeze Transformation
When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used Options | Snap to Grid to set the points at precise pixel borders.
+If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
+With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
+
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its Min LOD and above its Max LOD.
+
So, if you set a shape's Min LOD to 0.0 and the Max LOD to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
+
The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
+For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
+Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
+
+
You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag&dropping it into the list of styles.
+
If you go for a gradient, you set the type (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag&drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
+Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
+
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
There's your usual menu bar at the top, File, Edit, Options. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
+
File | Save As... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
+
+
File | Export As... opens a familiar save panel with a file format dropdown menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+
+
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
+
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
+
HVIF Source Code
Saves as source code used by programmers
+
SVG
Saves as SVG
+
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
+
PNG Set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
+
BEOS:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
+
META:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
A few things you should keep in mind when working with Icon-O-Matic and some general tips for its usage:
+
+
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, colors and shadows.
+
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
+
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
+
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
+
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag&drop or copy&paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
+
If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
+
You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click&drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click&drag while holding SPACE.
The Installer is used to copy Haiku onto another volume.
+Upon launch it displays a start window with important information. It's not a mindless EULA you're used to click away in the blink of an eye, it states:
+
+
This is alpha-quality software. Make backups or suffer the consequences!
+
The Installer needs a prepared partition. You may have to use a GParted LiveCD or a similar tool until Haiku's DriveSetup is mature enough to handle this task.
+
Haiku can be added manually to the bootmanager GRUB. In short, you have add an entry to /boot/grub/menu.lst of your Linux installation, similar to this:
+
# Haiku on /dev/sda7
+title Haiku
+rootnoverify (hd0,6)
+chainloader +1
+
+
+
Once you acknowledged with Continue, you're presented with the main window:
+
+
In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.
+The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.
+
Clicking the little expander widget will Show Optional Packages, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.
+
You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on Setup partitions... to open DriveSetup and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.
+
Begin starts the installation procedure, which basically copies everything but the home/ and common/ folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.
+
At the end of the installation procedure, the partition is automatically made bootable. However, it can happen that some other operating system or partitioning tool (accidentally) overwrites the boot sector of your Haiku volume. In this case, boot your installation CD and start the Installer. Select your Haiku boot partition from the Onto: Please Choose Target menu and click Write Boot Sector to make it bootable again.
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
+
At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 32x32 pixel square around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
+
Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
+You can move the red outline with the CURSOR keys.
+
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALTH. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
+They can also be moved with the CURSOR keys. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
+
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with OPTCURSOR keys.
+
Clicking on the pop-up menu gives you a number of options:
+
+
Save Image
ALTS
Saves the current display as a resource file.
+
Copy Image
ALTC
Copies the current display to the clipboard.
+
Hide/Show Info
ALTT
Toggles the display of all the additional information.
+
Add a Crosshair
ALTH
Adds a crosshair you can drag around.
+
Remove a Crosshair
ALTSHIFTH
Removes the last added crosshair.
+
Hide/Show Grid
ALTG
Toggles the overlayed grid.
+
Freeze/Unfreeze image
ALTF
Stops/continues updating the magnification area.
+
Stick Coordinates
ALTI
Keeps updating the magnification area, but don't follow the mouse pointer any more.
+
Make Square
ALT/
Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.
+
Decrease Window Size
ALT-
Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
+
Increase Window Size
ALT+
Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
Pe is a sophisticated editor, with its syntax highlighting targeted mainly at programmers and HTML writers. Originally created by Maarten Hekkelmann, it's been open sourced and maintained by Haiku developers. A bugtracker and more information is available at the Pe project page.
+
Find out more about Pe's features in its local documentation.
People is a simple contact database using the attributes of Haiku's filesystem to store addresses and other contact information. Every contact is saved as one Person file with its data in separate attributes. All are indexed and therefore searchable with a query.
+
+
+
+
The Group attribute at the bottom allows assigning a person to one or more groups. Useful for "mass mailing" a number of people who, for example, work on a specific project. The pop-up menu offers all currently existing groups. If a person belongs to more than one group, the group names are delimited with a ",".
+
+
These Person files are usually all saved in /boot/home/people/. To get a list of all your contacts, just open your people folder and display all attributes of interest. If you choose to organize your Person files in different folders, just use a query to display them all in one window.
+
+
+
+
You can treat these files like any other: You can sort according to attributes (even a second sorting order by holding SHIFT while clicking) and of course delete, duplicate or rename Person files. Even the contact information can be edited directly: Clicking on an attribute (or ALTE) to edit works just like renaming a file. Once you're in edit mode, TAB and SHIFTTAB will jump from column to column.
PoorMan is a nice little webserver that's extremly easy to set up. Naturally it doesn't offer any advanced features like other heavy duty server software, it's after all only a poor man's webserver.
+
Upon its first launch, PoorMan asks for the folder that is about to be served to the web. If you go with the Default, a new folder /boot/home/public_html is created for you. As a start page a HTML file named by default index.html has to be present there.
+
PoorMan presents itself with a simple console that logs its activity. Then, there's status information if the server is running, which folder is being served, and a hit counter. Settings are changed with Edit | Settings...:
+
+
+
The settings panel is divided into three tabs:
+
In Site you can select another folder to serve, enter another start page and have the option to send a file listing if the start page isn't present.
+Logging lets you de/activate logging to the console or optionally to a separate logfile.
+The Advanced tab holds the setting for the maximum simultaneous connections.
+
The menu items of the console window are all self-explanatory. With them you can e.g. save (parts) of the console output, clear the console or logging file and start/stop the server or clear the hit counter.
+
+
If you want to try out if PoorMan's working, choose /boot/apps/BePDF/docs/ as folder and index.html as start page. Then point your browser to the URL 127.0.0.1, which is your local host.
Besides normal screenshots taken via PRINT, which puts a PNG of the current screen into /boot/home/, this application provides some useful options.
+
+
Starting Screenshot will take a screenshot as usual, but offers from its main window controls to set filename, format and folder before saving the image.
+
The Options dialog has a few more settings:
+
+
Besides the obvious, toggle between taking the whole screen or just the active window, including the window border and the mouse pointer, you can enter a delay before a screenshot is taken. Of course, this delay takes only effect if you take a new shot by pressing Take Screenshot.
+
+
+
+Taking a screenshot from Terminal
+
The Screenshot application is also usable from Terminal or a script.
+Screenshot --help shows the familiar options as parameters:
+
+
~> Screenshot --help
+
+Screenshot [OPTION]... Creates a bitmap of the current screen
+
+OPTION
+ -o, --options Show options window first
+ -m, --mouse-pointer Include the mouse pointer
+ -b, --border Include the window border
+ -w, --window Capture the active window instead of the entire screen
+ -d, --delay=seconds Take screenshot after specified delay [in seconds]
+ -s, --silent Saves the screenshot without showing the app window
+ overrides --options, saves to home folder as png
+
+Note: OPTION -b, --border takes only effect when used with -w, --window
+
StyledEdit es el editor de texto simple de Haiku. Aunque guarda archivos en formato de texto plano, se escriben atributos adicionales para tener capacidades de formato limitadas cuando se vea con StyledEdit.
+
+
Si le interesa, así es como esos atributos adicionales se ven cuando se examina en la Terminal con listattr:
+
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+ Int-32 4 "be:encoding"
+MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Int-32 4 "wrap"
+ Int-32 4 "alignment"
+ Raw Data 1048 "styles"
+
+1071 bytes total in attributes.
+
Como se puede ver, todas las opciones de formato desde el menú de StyledEdit están presentes: line wrapping (on/off) y alignment (left/center/right), cada uno en un atributo. Los estilos (tipo de letra, tamaño, color) de cada letra aplicada a dentro de otra.
+
Ya que estos atributos son una característica del sistema de archivos BFS, significa que no sólo otras plataformas verán un archivo de texto plano, sino que el formato se perderá cuando se guarde en una partición no BFS. Los atributos de arriba sencillamente se eliminarían y lo que queda es un archivo de texto plano ordinario.
+
En cualquier caso, es buena idea tener la posibilidad de texto coloreado en distintas fuentes y tamaños mientras sea un archivo de texto normal. Un archivo ReadMe.txt, por ejemplo, es de esta manera legible en un shell en cualquier plataforma y todavía tiene un estilo de bit cuando se muestre con doble clic desde Haiku.
+
Actually using StyledEdit is so simple, we'll skip explaining every mundane menu item. Just write down your text then select the words you'd like to format and apply font, size and color from the Font menu. Line wrapping and alignment from the Document menu only work on the whole file.
~/config/settings/Terminal_settings
+~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+
+
+
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
+
Please refer to the topic on Scripting for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.
You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALTN from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open another tab with ALTT.
+
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window Size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
+
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
+
+
+
Settings | Preferences opens a panel where you can set font type, font size and the different text and background colors. You can save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal.
+Pressing OK will save the current settings as default.
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/etc/.
+
+
.profile
+
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
+
The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
The .inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:
+
+
Insert Path
Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.
+
Change Directory
Changes to the folder of the dragged file.
+
Create Link Here
Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Move Here
Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Copy Here
Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
+
You can open any file with its preferred application with the command open [filename]. This also works with the representation of the current (".") and parent ("..") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:
Vision es un cliente de IRC desarrollador originalmente para BeOS. La documentación y el bug tracker están dispoibles en la web de Vision.
+
Se puede obtener ayuda de otros usuarios de Haiku y desarrolladores en los canales de Haiku disponibles en varios idiomas.
+El más frecuentado es el de habla inglesa #haiku en irc.freenode.org.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/userguide/es/applications/vlc.html b/userguide/es/applications/vlc.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..04b5b3aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/userguide/es/applications/vlc.html
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ VLC media player
+
+
+
+
+
El reproductor de medios VLC es el port de este reproductor de medios multiplataforma largamente usado. Más información se puede encontar en el sitio Web de VideoLAN.
WonderBrush es un editor gráfico de bitmaps y vestores. Puede encontrar más información y talleres de trabajo en la web de YellowBites y en la documentación local.
Los atributos son campos de datos que pertenecen a un archivo o fichero pero no son parte de él. Por ejemplo, no cuentan en el tamaño del fichero y pueden ser copiados o modificados sin tocar el archivo en sí mismo. El sistema utiliza estos atributos para almacenar, por ejemplo, el tamaño, tipo de fichero, o fecha de la última modificación. Esto es similar a otros sistemas operativos y sus sistemas de archivos.
+
Lo que es diferente es que se puede añadir cualquier tipo de atributo a cualquier fichero y mostrarlo o hacerlo editable en una ventana del Tracker. Tan sólo tiene que definir el tipo de atributo que quiere añadir a un tipo de fichero (por ejemplo un string o texto, un integer o número entero o una fecha) darle una descripción y un nombre.
+
El fichero en sí mismo ni siquiera necesita contenido. Mire estos ficheros tipo Persona por ejemplo:
+
+
+
Como se puede observar, todos estos son ficheros de tamaño cero con atributos adjuntos. Este es el atributo de correo electrónico de "John Nox" siendo editado directamente en Tracker.
+
Si se indexan estos atributos, como tipo Persona, tipo correo electrónico, o ficheros de sonido, que se indexan predeterminadamente, serán también localizables mediante el sistema de búsqueda rápida de Haiku.
Los atributos se muestran de forma muy similar a una base de datos o una hoja de cálculo. Utilizando a Tracker se puede elegir qué atributos mostrar (columnas) y ordenar las listas de archivos (filas) respectivamente.
+
Para hacerlo, abra una ventana de Tracker, haga clic en el menú de Attributes (Atributos) y seleccione los atributos que desee que se muestren. Otra forma de hacerlo es hacer clic derecho en la cabecera de la columna y marcar los elementos en el menú contextual. Se pueden reordenar las columnas con un simple movimiento de arrastrar y soltar en la cabecera de la columna. Mover las columnas fuera de una ventana es una forma rápida de deshacerse de las columnas que no necesite.
+
Hacer doble clic en la línea entre dos atributos de una cabecera redimensionará automáticamente la columna a su ancho óptimo.
+
Haga clic en una cabecera de columna para activar o desactivar el orden de clasificación ascendente o descendente. Se puede establecer un modo de clasificación secundario pulsando la tecla SHIFT mientras se hace clic en una cabecera de columna. Al hacer esto se puede, por ejemplo, ordenar los archivos tipo Persona por compañía, y ordenar éste por nombre de contacto. El tipo de orden secundario se marca mediante un indicador de color claro añadido a la cabecera.
+
Editar estos atributos es tan sencillo como renombrar el archivo: se puede, o bien hacer clic en una entrada, o bien pulsar ALTE y moverse entre los atributos con TAB y SHIFT + TAB. La tecla ESC sale del modo de edición sin guardar los cambios.
Si prefiere utilizar la línea de comandos o tiene pensado trabajar con muchos archivos utilizando scritpting, hay varias órdenes para controlar los atributos desde la terminal.
listattr muestra una lista de los atributos de un archivo, pero no muestra los contenidos de los mismos.
+
usage: listattr 'filename' ['filename' ...]
+
Captura de pantalla de ejemplo:
+
~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters
+File: Clara Botters
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Text 14 "META:name"
+ Text 6 "META:nickname"
+ Text 1 "META:company"
+
+ Text 18 "META:address"
+ Text 8 "META:city"
+ Text 1 "META:state"
+ Text 1 "META:zip"
+ Text 1 "META:country"
+
+ Text 1 "META:hphone"
+ Text 13 "META:wphone"
+ Text 1 "META:fax"
+ Text 19 "META:email"
+ Text 1 "META:url"
+
+ Text 5 "META:group"
+ Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le"
+
+131 bytes total in attributes.
+
Además de todos los atributos"META:*" que mantienen la información de los contactos, hay dos atributos que se administran por el sistema:
+
+
BEOS:TYPE mantiene el tipo de archivo como un string MIME, en este caso "application/x-person". El atributo determina el icono predeterminado y la aplicación que abre el archivo cuando, p. ej., se hace doble clic en él.
+
"_trk/pinfo_le" es el atributo con el cual Tracker mantiene récord de la posición del icono de un archivo.
+
Note la diagonal invertida después de "Clara". En la terminal se debe usar notación de "escape" en carácteres especiales como '"*\$?!. El espacio entre "Clara" y "Botters" también es uno de ellos. Por lo tanto la diagonal invertida está en realidad junto al carácter espacio, y no después de "Clara".
addattr agrega un atributo a un archivo y/o la llena con un valor.
+
usage: addattr [-t type] attr value file1 [file2...]
+ or: addattr [-f value-from-file] [-t type] attr file1 [file2...]
+
+ Type is one of:
+ string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, raw
+ or a numeric value (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...)
+ The default is "string"
+
Así que digamos que nuestra querida Clara consiguió un trabajo con la multinacional Barkelbaer Inc., y se llene el atributo "Company" anteriormente vacío con esa información (la cual es del tipo "string"):
+
~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters
rmattr remueve completamente un atributo de un archivo.
+
+
usage: rmattr [-p] attr filename1 [filename2...]
+ 'attr' is the name of an attribute of the file
+ If '-p' is specified, 'attr' is regarded as a pattern.
+
Aunque en la práctica sería suficiente sólo con no llenar el atributo "Fax", se puede removerlo completamente del archivo de Clara escribiendo:
"Scripting" es la técnica de automatizar procesos concatenando órdenes y guardándolas como un fichero de texto, llamados "scripts". Cada vez que se inicia un script, las órdenes son procesadas una tras otra como si se hubiesen escrito en la Terminal a mano.
+Los scripts van desde simples ejecuciones de órdenes en un orden específico hasta sofisticados trozos de código que resuelven tareas complejas.
Ya que los scripts dependen instintivamente del shell en el que se ejecutan, primero debería familiarizarse con el BASH utilizado en Haiku. Existen muchos recursos en línea ya que es un tipo de shell comúnmente utilizado. Un buen documento es Introducción a Bash - Un tutorial de bash bajo BeOS escrito por Johan Jansson's.
Después de que haya aprendido algunas cosas básicas acerca de cómo trabajar en la shell, es hora de introducirse lentamente en el mundo del scripting. De nuevo, se encontrará con montones de tutoriales y referencias en línea así como en librerías. Una buena introducción que está prácticamente realizada para Haiku es el Capítulo de Scripting (PDF, 900kb) de la Biblia del Hacker de BeOS.
En Haiku, el sistema hace uso también del scripting. El inicio y el apagado son típicos procedimientos de scripting. Estas secuencias definidas pueden ser aumentadas por el usuario mediante ciertos scripts de usuario.
+Si todavía no existen, tendrá que crear los ficheros necesarios usted mismo. En caso contrario, simplemente añada las órdenes donde quiere que se ejecuten durante el proceso.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript será ejecutado después de que el sistema haya terminado su proceso de arranque. Por ejemplo, puede lanzar programas que serían iniciados automáticamente en cada arranque:
Recuerde que debe finalizar cada orden mediante un "&" para iniciarlo como un proceso en segundo plano, o el script se detendrá hasta que esa orden haya sido finalizada (en este caso, hasta que la aplicaciones iniciada se cierre de nuevo).
+
+
Una alternativa sencilla a lo mostrado anteriormente para lanzar aplicaciones en el inicio es poner enlaces a las mismas en directorio /boot/home/config/boot/launch. Esto se puede hacer simplemeetne mediante un clic derecho en la aplicación que quiere que se inicie automáticamente yendo a Create Link (Crear enlace) y luego navegar al directorio mostrado antes.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript será ejecutado como el primer paso en el proceso de apagado. Si el script devuelve un estado de salida diferente de cero, el proceso de apagado es abortado.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript es ejecutado como el último paso en el proceso de apagado. Hay que tener en cuanta que la mayor parte de los componentes de sistema ya han sido finalizados en el momento que se ejecuta este script.
El cargador de arranque de Haiku puede ayudarle cuando experimente problemas de hardware o quiera elegir qué instalación de Haiku quiere iniciar, si dispone de más de una (seguramente en un CD de instalación o unidad USB).
+También viene muy bien para cuando ha instalado algún componente de software que actúa previniendo el arranque del sistema. para desinstalarlo. La opción Disable user add-ons (Deshabilitar los add-ons de usuario) que se menciona mas abajo, iniciará Haiku sin cargar nunguno de los componentes instalados por el usuario, por ejemplo, un controlador.
+
Para entrar en las opciones del cargador de arranque, debe presionar la tecla BARRA ESPACIADORA justo al principio de la secuencia de arranque. Es fácil no hacerlo a tiempo, así que lo mejor es que mantenga presionada la tecla hasta que se muestre.
+
+
Una vez que esté ahí, se ofrecen tres menús:
+
+
Seleccionar volumen de arranque
Elija qué instalación de Haiku desea iniciar.
+
Seleccionar opciones de modo seguro
+
Existen muchas opciones para probar en caso de que tenga un problema de hardware. Mientras se mueve el selector a una opción, una pequeña explicación aparecerá en la parte inferior de la pantalla.
+
- Modo seguro
+- Deshabilitar add-ons (extensiones) de usuario
+- Deshabilitar IDE DMA
+- Utilizar modo de vídeo a prueba de fallos
+- No llamar a la BIOS
+- Deshabilitar APM
+- Deshabilitar ACPI
+- Deshabilitar IO-APIC
+- Habilitar la salida de debug en serie
+- Habilitar la salida de debug por pantalla
+
+
Seleccionar modo de vídeo a prueba de fallos
Si ha activado la opción Utilizar modo de vídeo a prueba de fallos, puede configurar la resolución y la profundidad de color.
+
+
+
Tras activar una o más opciones, saldrá de nuevo al menú principal y continuará iniciando, que se presentará con esta pantalla de arranque:
+
+
+
Si todo funcionar bien, se deben iluminar un símbolo tras otro rápidamente.
+Los deferentes símbolos se corresponden con estas etapas de inicio:
A continuación, encontrará la documentación de los aspectos más importantes de Haiku. Naturalmente, completar y extender la documentación es un proceso constante. Si encuentra errores, desea sugerir alguna sección o incluso quiere colaborar o ayudar con las traducciones de la guía de usuario, sírvase contactarnos en la lista de correo de la documentación. Si le interesa ayudar con traducciones, encontará información sobre ello en el Wiki de Guía de Usuario i18n.
Existen algunos pequeños juegos y aplicaciones de demostración para su entretenimiento. La mayor parte de las demostraciones están enfocadas a desarrolladores que estén interesados en aprender del código, el cual es código abierto como todo en Haiku.
La Barra de Escritorio es el pequeño panel situado por defecto en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla. Es la versión que tiene Haiku de la Barra de Tareas de Windows con su botón "Inicio". Contiene el menú "Deskbar" , desde el que se pueden iniciar aplicaciones, acceder a la configuración de preferencias, a la bandeja del sistema con un reloj y otras herramientas debajo, y una lista de las programas actualmente en ejecución debajo.
+
+
Se puede mover la Barra de Escritorio a cualquier esquina o a lo largo del borde superior o inferior de la pantalla tomando la zona resaltada por una lado de la bandeja del sistema y arrastándola/ajustándola a la nueva posición. Se puede plegar también en una disposición más compacta arrastrándola y modificando su tamaño; soltando la zona resaltada sobre el menú "Barra de Escritorio"
Mostrar Replicantes - Muestra/esconde el pequeño widget Replicante que se usa para trasladarlo, removerlo o accesar a su menú contextual.
+
Montar - Ofrece las mismas opciones que cuando se invoca al dar clic derecho en el Escritorio (vea Montar Volúmenes).
+
Preferencias del Deskbar (Barra de Escritorio) - Abre un panel para configurar el Deskbar (mirar abajo).
+
Apagar - Ofrece la opción de Reiniciar o Apagar el Sistema.
+
Documentos, Carpetas, Aplicaciones Recientes - Lista de los últimos documentos, carpetas y aplicaciones a las que se ha accedido recientemente (ver Preferencias del Deskbar abajo).
+
Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, Preferences - Enlista las aplicaciones, demos, applets y preferencias (vea Preferencias del Deskbar más abajo).
+
+
+
+Preferencias del Deskbar
+
+
+
Menú
+Aquí se puede definir la cantidad de documentos, carpetas y aplicaciones recientes que se muestran por el menú en el Deskbar.
+ El botón de Editar menú... abre la carpeta /boot/home/config/be/. Dentro se encuentran los archivos y carpetas que se exhiben en el Deskbar. Las secciones predeterminadas son Applications (aplicaciones), Demos, Deskbar Applets (applets del Deskbar), y Preferences (preferencias).
+Se pueden quitar o agregar secciones como enlaces a aplicaciones, documentos o búsquedas, copiando o quitándolos de esta carpeta.
+
Es todavía más fácil el arrastrar un archivo, carpeta o búsqueda guardada y ponerlo donde se desee dentro del Deskbar.
+
Ventana
+
+
Always on Top
El Deskbar siempre permanece encima de las demás ventanas.
+
Auto Raise
El Deskbar se manda hasta arriba si el puntero del ratón lo toca.
+
+
Aplicaciónes
+
+
Sort Running Applications
Ordena la lista de aplicaciones activas alfabéticamente.
+
Tracker always First
Aun si la lista está ordenada alfabéticamente, Tracker siempre ocupará la primera posición de la lista.
+
Show Application Expander
Agrega un pequeño widget para mostrar/esconder todas las ventanas de un programa directamente bajo su entrada en el Deskbar.
+
Expand New Applications
Las ventanas de programas recién abiertas se expandirán automáticamente debajo de su entrada en el Deskbar.
Entre otras cosas, el área de sistema hospeda al reloj. Haga clic izquierdo para cambiar entre la fecha y la hora, dé clic derecho para ocultarlo/mostrarlo o lanzar el panel Hora para seleccionarla.
+Aquí se puede también lanzar un calendario que también aparezca, cuando se sostiene el botón izquierdo del ratón sobre el reloj por un pequeño período de tiempo.
+
Cualquier programa puede instalar un icono en el área de sistema para proporcionar una interfaz al usuario. El sistema de correo electrónico, por mencionar alguno, muestra un símbolo diferente cuando hay correo sin leer y ofrece un menú contextual para, p. ej., crear o verificar el correo nuevo. El Controlador de Procesos es otro ejemplo que usa un icono en el área de sistema para proporcionar información (CPU, uso de memoria) y ofrece un menú contextual.
Se puede cambiar a una aplicación concreta en ejecución haciendo clic en su entrada en el Deskbar y seleccionando una de sus ventanas desde el submenú. Dando clic con el botón derecho se puede minimizar o cerrar una ventana o la aplicación completa.
+
Si se activaron los Expanders en las selecciones del Deskbar, se puede expandir/colapsar la lista de ventanas directamente bajo una entrada de aplicación.
+
Enfrente de cada ventana de aplicación hay un símbolo que proporciona información sobre su estado. Un símbolo brillante significa que una ventana está visible, uno oscuro, que está minimizado. Tres líneas enfrente a un símbolo muestra que no está en el espacio de trabajo actual.
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag&drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
+
+
All options are reached from the context menu:
+
+
Add Button Here
Adds an empty button.
+
Clear Button
Empties a button.
+
Remove Button
Removes a button.
+
Settings
+- Horizontal Layout
+- Icon size
+- Ignore Double-click
+- Show Window Border
+- Auto Raise
+- Show On All Workspaces
+Aligns the buttons horizontally.
+Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.
+Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.
+Shows the window border.
+LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge.
+Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace.
+
Pad
+- New
+- Clone
+- Close
+Add a new pad.
+Duplicate the current pad.
+Close the current pad.
+
LaunchBox
+- About...
+- Quit
+Shows the About window.
+Quits all LaunchBox pads.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - Guarda la posición de la ventana.
+
+
+
+
Puede encontrar el applet de espacios de trabajo junto con los demás applets de escritorio en el Deskbar. El applet muestra una versión en miniatura de todos los espacios de trabajo. Hay muchas opciones disponibles desde el menú contextual de la ventana del applet, que son bastante autoexplicativas.
+Change Workspace Count... (cambiar espacios de trabajo) abrirá las preferencias de pantalla donde podrá configurar el número de espacios de trabajo y su distribución (cuántas filas y columnas).
+
Debido a que el applet es un Replicante, puede redimensionar la ventana a su gusto y luego arrastrarla y soltarla mediante su manejador en el escritorio (asegúrese de que Show Replicants (mostrar replicantes) está activado en el menú).
Para mover una ventana, arrástrela desde el applet de espacios de trabajo y muévala a otro espacio de trabajo. Esto tiene la ventaja de poder mover ventanas sin abandonar el espacio de trabajo actual. Por supuesto, esto sólo funciona correctamente cuando no hay demasiadas ventanas en un espacio de trabajo y la ventana objetivo no está oculta por otras ventanas. Otra posibilidad es arrastrar una ventana por su pestaña y mantenerla mientras se cambia de espacio de trabajo mediante ALTFx.
+
Para más información sobre espacios de trabajo en general y atajos de teclado, vea el tema Espacios de trabajo.
El sistema de archivos de Haiku es muy transparente, siempre intenta usar nombres lógicos para sus archivos y carpetas que no confundan el usuario. Los archivos y carpetas que son de importancia para el sistema para funcionar apropiadamente se protegen de la modificación accidental, mostrando uno de estos avisos:
+
+
+
El segundo aviso se muestra cuando se intenta renombrar o borrar algo en la jerarquía del sistema. El botón "Do it" (hágalo) sólo se puede presionar solamente mientras se sujeta la tecla MAYÚSCULAS.
+
Generalmente, hay tres ramas separadas en la carpeta raíz del volumen de inicio del sistema:
+
+
/boot/system/
pertenece al sistema. ¡No tocar!
+
/boot/common/
contiene los archivos compartidos entre usuarios.
+
/boot/home/
es la carpeta personal del usuario, donde se mantiene la información y las preferencias personales.
Under Haiku's predecessor BeOS, this folder was named /boot/beos/. You may still find it in some older documentation (e.g. in the original BeBook).
+Whatever it's named, you should not alter what's inside. Every update of Haiku can add, remove or overwrite anything within it. If you want to add functionality, maybe with other Tracker Add-Ons or Translators or maybe another hardware driver, you install these things under your own /boot/home/ hierarchy or, if it's supposed to be for every user, under /boot/common/. As long as Haiku isn't multi-user, this distinction has no apparent effect, as there's only one user with one home folder. But since there will be support for more users than one eventually, it makes sense to learn the right way from the start.
+
So, let's say you want to install a new Translator for the latest image format, you don't simply copy it into the respective system folder. Remember: Don't touch!
+Instead, you put it into the mirrored hierarchy under /boot/common/ or /boot/home/config/.
+
In our example the location for Translators in the system folder would be
This has another advantage: If the component you have installed messes things up (which is possible as you install hardware drivers like this, too) you are able to choose "Disable User Add-Ons" from the Boot Loader menu and are thus always able to boot without the offending component.
+
Most of the time, however, you won't have to deal with these things at all, since every software that comes from a trusted source should include an installation routine that handles these things.
+
+
Haiku todavía no es un sistema multiusuario. Una vez que lo sea, todos los usuarios tendrán su propia carpeta dentro de home que no se accederá a nadie más. Todas las aplicaciones y componentes adicionales como add-ons del Tracker (administrador y navegador de archivos), traductores, etc., así como cualquier información que se deba compartir entre distintos usuarios, tiene se ubicarse dentro de /boot/common/.
This folder belongs to you. Here you can create and delete files and folders as you wish. However, you shouldn't mess too much with the ~/config/ directory and its subfolders. You could delete e.g. the ~/config/settings/ folder without damaging the operating system itself, but who wants to lose all his configurations and application settings? In any case, the system warns you with the at the top mentioned alert.
+
Besides the ~/config/add-ons/ folder, which mirrors the system's add-ons folder for additional components as described above, there are a few other folders of interest. (By the way, the tilde ("~") is a shortcut for your home folder, so you don't always have to write "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
+
+
~/mail
+
By default, this is where your mails are kept.
+
+
~/queries
+
Queries are stored, by default temporarily for 7 days, in this folder.
+
+
~/config/be/
+
Again from our BeOS legacy, the be folder contains what's shown in the Deskbar menu. You can add and remove items by putting files, folders, links or queries into this folder.
+
+
~/config/bin/
+
Complements the system's /boot/system/bin/ folder and holds all your command line programs.
+
+
~/config/boot/
+
This folder is the place for User Scripts that are executed before or after the system boots up or shuts down.
+
+
~/config/boot/launch/
+
Links to programs or documents in this folder are automatically launched on every boot-up.
+
+
~/config/fonts/
+
Simply copy a TrueType or Postscript font into this folder and its usable right away.
+
+
~/config/settings/
+
This folder contains the settings to all applications and a few configurations for the system. Some applications manage their settings in their own subfolders, others simply put their configuration file in there.
+
+
~/config/settings/beos_mime/
+
In this MIME database Haiku keeps track of all the different filetypes and their settings.
+
+
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/
+
There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here!
+
+
~/config/settings/Tracker/
+
Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders:
+
+
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Show and arrange all attributes and the window size to your liking. Every new folder you create will use it as a template.
+
+
DefaultQueryTemplates/
You can define the layout of query result windows for certain filetypes. See topic Query: The result window.
Other than Windows, Haiku doesn't rely on the 3-letter file extension for a file type (e.g. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). This method is only a last resort fallback. Haiku uses MIME types just like it's custom on the internet.
+
While there's no reason to use file extensions in Haiku, remember to add them to files you want to share with users of other operating systems, e.g. over email, uploading to a server or via exchange of an USB drive. Otherwise their system may not recognize the file type.
You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the Add-Ons | Filetype add-on from the right-click context menu.
The above is a PNG file, it's MIME string image/png. Let's say you definitely know that it's not a PNG but a GIF. You can change that either by entering the correct MIME string by hand or with one of the two buttons below the textbox:
+
+
Select...
shows a hierarchical list of filetypes where you navigate to image | GIF Image.
+
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the filetype you're looking for.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
+
+
The Default Application is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons Select... and Same As... which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype Add-On of a file that contains an icon and drag&drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
If you invoke the Filetype Add-On on an executable (here: StyledEdit), you'll get a different dialog:
+
+
On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.
+
Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:
+
+
Single Launch
Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side.
+
Multiple Launch
Many instances of the app can run simultaneously.
+
Exclusive Launch
Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time.
+
Args Only
Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages.
+
Background App
The app won't appear in Twitcher or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.
+
+
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's Open with... context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
+
At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.
The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
+
All filetypes and their configurations are stored in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Before you start experimenting, it may be prudent to make a backup of that folder...
La interfaz gráfica de Haiku es una parte integral del sistema. A diferencia de sistemas operativos basados en UNIX, Haiku no tiene administrador de ventanas por separado y arrancar el sistema simplemente en una terminal de shell de línea de comandos no es posible. Siendo el foco de Haiku el usuario de escritorio, esto no se considera necesario.
+
As you probably have experience with other graphical environments, let's skip over the standards like menus, right-click context menus, drag&drop etc. Let's have a look at the few unique aspects of Haiku's GUI instead.
+
+
There are only a few things in Haiku's GUI that aren't obvious and deserve an explanation.
+
+
The Deskbar is Haiku's "Start" menu and taskbar, if you will. See topic Deskbar.
+
The yellow tab offers more than just a program's name or a document's filename:
+
You can move it by holding the SHIFT key while dragging it to another position, enabling you to stack a number of windows and conveniently access them by their named tab.
+
You minimize a window with a double-click on its tab (or with CTRLALTM). A such hidden window can be accessed by its entry in the Deskbar or the Twitcher.
+
You can send a window to the back with a right-click on its tab (or its border).
+
The close button.
+
The "zoom" button (or CTRLALTZ). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size. It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.
+
The resize corner. Dragging anywhere else on a window's border will move the window.
+
+
While holding CTRLALT, you can click anywhere into a window to move it with the left mouse button; the right mouse button sends it to the back.
When opening or saving a file from any application, a panel like this opens:
+
+
It has all the usual things: A list of files of the current folder to choose from, in case of a save panel, a text field to enter a filename and a pop-up menu for different file formats and their settings.
+You can enter parent folders with the pop-up menu above the file listing.
+
If you already have a Tracker window with the location for a file open, you can simply drag either any file or the folder-representation (i.e. the symbol to the far right in its menu bar) into the panel. This changes the panel to that new location.
Many shortcuts in open and save panels are the same used in Tracker. Besides the commands that are also available through the File menu, there are a few not that obvious:
The Favorites menu in open and save panels provides recently visited folders and favorite locations that you can set up yourself. As indicated by the little arrow, you can also use these locations to navigate further down the hierarchy via submenus.
+
+
To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose Favorites | Add Current Folder. From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose Favorites | Configure Favorites... and delete its entry.
+All Favorites are kept in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. So you might as well add and remove links to files and folders there directly.
Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to Show Replicants is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:
+
+
The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag&drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.
+A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's About window and to Remove Replicant.
+
Should you experience difficulties with a Replicant on the Desktop and just can't get rid of it, delete ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. Unfortunately, this will remove all Replicants from the Desktop.
Attributes and Queries are key features of Haiku. While attributes are useful on their own, to display additional information on a file, for a query on them, they need to be indexed. It puts them into a lookup table, which in turn makes queries lightning fast.
+The index is part of the filesystem and is kept for every volume/partition separately.
+
+
+Indexing commands in Terminal
+
There are several commands to manage the index:
+
+
lsindex - Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition.
+These are the attributes that are indexed by default:
mkindex - Adds an attribute to the index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute>
+Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume to which the index will be added,
+ defaults to current volume.
+ -t, --type=TYPE the type of the attribute being indexed. One of "int",
+ "llong", "string", "float", or "double".
+ Defaults to "string".
+ --copy-from path to volume to copy the indexes from.
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being created
+
+
+
Only new files with that attribute come automatically into the index!
+Existing files have to be added manually by copying them and deleting the originals after that. Alternatively you can use the command reindex.
+
+
+
reindex - Puts the attributes of existing files into the newly created index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories>
+ -r enter directories recursively
+ -v verbose output
+ -f create/update all indices from the source volume,
+ "attr" is the path to the source volume
+
+
+
+
rmindex - Removes an attribute from the index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME
+
+Removes the index named INDEX_NAME from a disk volume. Once this has been
+done, it will no longer be possible to use the query system to search for
+files with the INDEX_NAME attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume from which the index will be
+ removed
+ -h, --help display this help and exit
+ -p, --pattern INDEX_NAME is a pattern
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being removed
+
+INDEX_NAME is the name of a file attribute.
+
+If no volume is specified, the volume of the current directory is assumed.
By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALTC and ALTV integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRLC quits the running process.
+
In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide will always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
+
If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
Additionally to the general shortcuts, here are some more for navigating with Tracker:
+
+
ALT↑
Opens the parent folder.
+
ALT↓ or ENTER
Opens the selected folder.
+
OPT
Holding it while opening a folder will automatically close the parent folder. This also works when navigating with the mouse.
+
MENU
Opens the Deskbar menu (leave with ESC).
+
ALTZ
Undo last action. The undo history is only limited by the available memory. Note, this only works for actions on the file itself, changed attributes and permission settings can't be undone with this. Also, once a file is removed from Trash it's gone for good.
Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press TAB once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press TAB twice to have all matches listed.
+
↑/↓
Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands.
+
CTRLR
Bash history. All the commands you enter
+are stored in the file ~/.bash_history. Press CTRLR and start to enter a command and you'll be provided with the first match from the bash history. Keep pressing CTRLR until you find the right command line and press ENTER to execute it.
You can add or remove items to/from a selection by holding down a modifier key while clicking on a entry (or file in case of Tracker).
+
+
SHIFT
This will select everything between the first selected item and the one you click on.
+
ALT
Adds or removes the item you're clicking on from the selection.
+
+
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
+The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
While a key philosophy of Haiku is to cut down on options and have sensible defaults instead, there are some things that have to be configured or can be set to individual preference. You find all panels in Deskbar's Preferences menu.
En la primera ficha, Colores, puede cambiar los colores de diferentes partes de la interfaz de usuario. El pozo de colores acepta arrastrar y colocar desde otros programas, permitiéndole arrastrar colores, p. ej., de WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic o del panel Backgrounds (Fondos).
La segunda ficha, Antialiasing, proporciona diferentes selecciones sobre cómo las cosas se renderean en la pantalla.
+
+
+
+Glyph hinting (Glifos insinuados)
+
Cuando Glyph hinting se activa, se alinean todas las letras de tal manera que sus orillas vertical y horizontal descansan exactamente entre dos pixeles. El resultado es un contraste prefecto, especialmente cuando se trata con negro sobre blanco. El texto aparece más preciso. También hay una seleccion para "Únicamente tipos de letra monoespaciados"; es especialmente útil para dispositivos de baja resolución como netbooks. Las fuentes pequeñas pueden verse muy mal cuando la definición adicional (hinting) está encendida, pero con esta selección puede todavía sacar ventaja de la definición adicional para editores de texto y la Terminal.
+
Vea la diferencia que la definición adicional hace con estas capturas de pantalla aumentadas:
+
+
Definición adicional: apagada
Definición adicional: encendida
+
+
Debe señalarse que todas las ventanas Magnify (aumentadas) en esta página son por supuesto renderadas en sí mismas con las opciones diferentes también. Así que se puede obtener una impresión en el mundo real de las selecciones al comparar, por ejemplo, el título de la ficha amarilla en negrita o el texto "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+
+
+
+Tipos de Antialiasing
+
Otra técnica para mejorar el renderado es el Antialias, el cual soporta todos los gráficos de vector así como texto. Suaviza las líneas al cambiar el color de ciertos pixeles. Hay dos métodos para eso:
+
Grayscale (escala de grises) cambia la intensidad de los pixeles en la orilla.
+LCD subpixel hace un mejor trabajo todavía, especialmente con monitores LCD (de alta resolución). En lugar de la intensidad de un pixel, cambia su color el cual mueve una orilla por una fracción de pixel, porque las pantallas LCD producen cada pixel con un componente rojo, verde y azul.
+
De nuevo, los dos métodos diferentes con capturas de pantalla aumentadas:
+
+
Escala de grises, definición adicional: apagada
Subpixel LCD, definición adicional: apagada
+
+
El antialias basado en subpixel agrega un brillo ligeramente coloreado a los objetos. Algo que no todos toleran. En Haiku se pueden combinar los dos métodos de antialias y encontrar la selección adecuada al usar una guía de selección.
+
El antialias basado en subpixel en combinación con el glyph hinting se sujeta a una patente de software y por ello no está disponible predeterminadamente. Dependiendo en dónde viva, puede tener una versión desbloqueada. Disculpe por ello. Consulte con su representante local.
+
Si activa el suavizado adicional más el renderado de subpixel LCD cambiando archivos fuente y recompilando, así es como se ve, comparado al suavizado adicional con escala de grises:
+
+
Escala de grises, definición adicional: encendida
Subpixel de LCD, definición adicional: encendida
+
+
+
Al fondo del panel hay dos botones:
+
+
Defaults
Selecciona todo a los valores predeterminados.
+
Revert
Trae de vuelta las selecciones que estaban activas cuando se inició el cuadro de diálogo de preferencias Apariencia (Appearance).
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - Guarda la posición de la ventana.
+
+
Puede configurar un color o una imagen como fondo para cada directorio y en el Escritorio para cada espacio de trabajo.
+
+
+
El menú desplegable superior muestra si los cambios realizados están siendo aplicados al espacio de trabajo actual, a todos los espacios de trabajo, a un directorio concreto, o por defecto a cualquier directorio nuevo.
+
Debajo se puede seleccionar una imagen o seleccionar None si sólamente quiere un fondo de color. Las imágenes también pueden ser desplazadas, redimensionadas y soltadas dentro del cuadro de previsualización a la izquierda.
+
Si utiliza una imagen, debe decidir el lugar donde va a ponerla:
+
+
Manual
permite especificar las coordenadas. Puede arrastrar la imagen por el cuadro de previsualización de la izquierda o introducir las coordenadas X e Y manualmente.
+
Center (centrar)
centra la imagen en el medio de la pantalla.
+
Scale to fit (escalar hasta ajustar)
estira la imagen independientemente de su proporción hasta que rellena la pantalla.
+
Tile (mosaico)
rellena la pantalla mediante repeticiones de la imagen.
+
+
Si está activo Icon label outline (borde de etiqueta de icono) se pondrá un fino contorno alrededor de las etiquetas de icono.
+
Si el texto de la etiqueta de un icono es blanco o negro, depende de la configuración en el selector de color. Un color oscuro pone el texto en blanco, un color claro, pondrá el texto en negro. De esa manera, si configura una imagen muy brillante para el fondo, debería configurar también el selector de color a un color muy brillante para que las etiquetas de los iconos sean legibles en negro (o usar la opción anterior de poner borde)
+El color seleccionado se refleja también en el applet de Espacios de Trabajo, el cual ignora las imágenes como fondos.
+
+
Revert
devuelve la configuración al estado en el que estaba cuando abrió las preferencias de fondo.
~/config/settings/* - Cada Traductor crea su propio archivo de configuración en esta ubicación cuando se modifican sus valores por defecto.
+~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Almacena la posición de la ventana.
+
+
Todas las aplicaciones tienen la capacidad de abrir y guardar cualquier formato de archivo para el cual haya un Traductor instalado. Los ajustes de estos traductores se configuran en las preferencias de DataTranslations.
+
+
+
Dependiendo de sus capacidades, cada Traductor ofrece distintas posibilidades de configuración. El mínimo es un botón de Información... que abrirá una ventana con los créditos y el directorio de instalación.
+La siguiente tabla da una visión general de los traductores por defecto y sus opciones más útiles.
+
+
Imágenes BMP
Color real (24 bits), sin compresión ni transparencia
+
Imágenes EXR
Formato de alto rango dinámico (HDR) de la ILM
+
Imágenes GIF
Color indexado (8 bits), compresión sin pérdida de información, transparencia
+Puede reducirse el tamaño de archivo limitando el número de colores usados y la paleta.
+Pueden guardarse imágenes con transparencia, bien de forma automática usando el canal alfa o bien ajustando manualmente el valor RGB del color que queremos definir como transparente.
+
Imágenes JPEG2000
Color real (24 bits), comprimido, sin transparencia
+Normalmente solo se ajusta la calidad de salida.
+
Imágenes JPEG
Color real (24 bits), comprimido, sin transparencia
+Aparte de la calidad de salida también puede ajustarse el suavizado de la imagen, lo que disminuirá los artefactos de compresión aunque puede producir una imagen algo borrosa.
+
Imágenes PCX
Color real (24 bits), sin compresión ni transparencia. PC Paintbrush Exchange format
+
Imágenes PNG
Color real (32 bits), compresión sin pérdida de información, transparencia
+
Imágenes PPM
Color real (24 bits), sin compresión ni transparencia. Portable PixMap format
+
Imágenes RAW
Hasta 48 bits, sin compresión ni transparencia
+
Archivos de texto RTF
Texto con formato
+
Imágenes SGI
Color real (24 bits), compresión opcional sin pérdida de información, transparencia
+
Archivos de StyledEdit
Texto con formato
+
Imágenes TGA
Color real (32 bits), compresión opcional sin pérdida de información, transparencia
+
Imágenes TIFF
Color real (24 bits), compresión opcional sin pérdida de información, capas, transparencia
+
Imágenes WonderBrush
Color real (32 bits), capas, transparencia, datos vectoriales y rasterizados
+
+
+
Los formatos GIF (hasta 256 colores) o PNG (millones de colores) suelen ser los que dan mejor resultado para guardar capturas de pantalla, dibujos en blanco y negro, gráficas y otras imágenes con pocos colores o de dimensiones reducidas. El formato JPEG, por ejemplo, produce artefactos de compresión sin una reducción apreciable del tamaño de archivo.
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
+The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
+You start by clicking the Add button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
+
+
First, declare the Account Type which is either Receive Mail Only, Send Mail Only, or the most usual type, Send and Receive Mail. Then you set how you get your mail, via POP3 or IMAP.
+
Now you enter your E-mail Address, Login Name and Password, give an Account Name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real Name.
+
If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses and the following information is already filled in automatically. If that is not the case, just follow this guide and fill in the details to your e-mail account accordingly.
Click on Incoming under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.
+
+
From the pop-up menu you choose the protocol used by your provider. IMAP and POP3 are supported.
+
Next is the Mail Server address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+
Then you enter your login information, Username and Password, and if necessary change the Login Type from the default Plain Text to APOP for authentication.
+
If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to Leave mail on server and only Remove mail from server when deleted locally.
+
If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to Remove mail from server when deleted locally. You can specify a Top Mailbox Folder to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
+
The New Mail Notification offers different methods to announce the arrival of new mail. Try different settings to see what works best for you.
+
You can change the Location of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
+
Last on this page, you can opt to only Partially download messages that are larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
Click on Outgoing under your account's name to set up how e-mails are sent.
+
+
As with incoming mail, you can also change the Location of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
+
Next is the SMTP Server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+
If you need to login, you change the Login Type to ESMTP and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with POP3 before SMTP for identification.
If you want to filter your incoming email, you click on E-Mail Filters under your account's name to set up automatic sorting. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other. You can rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.
+Besides the R5 Daemon Filter that's used for backward compatibility, there are two other Incoming Mail Filters you can add.
+
+
+
+Spam Filter
+
+
The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
+You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
+Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
+
Together with the following Match Header filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+
+
+
+Match Header
+
+
This filter compares a header to a search pattern and performs some action when it matches.
+With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are available:
+
+
Name
+
the name of the sender
+
From
+
the e-mail address of the sender
+
To
+
your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account)
+
Reply To
+
the e-mail address replies are sent to
+
When
+
the date and time the mail was received
+
Subject
+
the subject line
+
Cc
+
addresses of anyone receiving a carbon copy (Cc)
+
Account
+
the name of the e-mail's account
+
Status
+
The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail.
+
Priority
+
is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent")
+
Thread
+
essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd:
+
Classification Group
+
depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"
+
Spam/Genuine Estimate
+
this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.
+
+
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
+
With the pop-up menu below it, you assign an action when the pattern matches. You can move or delete a mail, set the status to "Read" or anything else or set the e-mail account you'll reply with.
+
+
+
+Outgoing Mail Filters
+
At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
+ It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
+
+
Under Mail Checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
+If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that Only When Dial-Up is Connected and also Schedule Outgoing Mail When Dial-Up is Disconnected to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
+
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up Never, While Sending, While Sending and Receiving or Always.
+
Make sure to Start Mail Services on Startup or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
+
Edit Mailbox Menu... will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
+
From that menu, you can also Create New Message..., Check For Mail Now or Edit Preferences....
+
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/fonts
+~/config/settings/Font_settings - Almacena la posición de la ventana.
+
+
+
+
Haiku define tres tipos de letra estándar para diferentes propósitos. Puede seleccionar entre plano, en negritas y fuentes ajustadas y tamaños que se usan a lo largo del sistema. Además de estos, hay también una configuración separada para el tipo de letra usada en los menús.
+
+
Defaults
Selecciona todo a los valores predeterminados.
+
Revert
regresa a las selecciones que estaban activas cuando se abrió el cuadro de diálogo Fonts.
Puede instalar nuevos tipos de letra copiándolos en su directorio de usuario respectivo, p. ej. /boot/common/fonts/ o /boot/home/config/fonts/ (vea el tema Disposición del sistema de archivos).
Selecciona la velocidad de repetición y el retardo para que una tecla presionada comience a repetirse. Puede probar las selecciones en el campo de texto en la parte inferior.
+
+
Defaults
Selecciona todo a los valores predeterminados.
+
Revert
regresa las selecciones que estuvieron activas cuando se abrió el cuadro de diálogo de preferencias Keyboard.
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Location of user modified keymaps.
+~/config/settings/Key_map
+
+
+
+
To the right, the Keymap window shows a representation of your keyboard. When you press a key, the corresponding key is darkened and the assigned symbol is entered into the Sample and Clipboard text field at the bottom. From there you can also copy and paste it into a document.
+Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but are also useful when looking for a special symbol used in other languages. For example, you can switch the keymap to "French", find the "ç" and copy it into your mail to François. (Though you'll find the "cedil" also in other keymaps...)
+
Pressing modifier keys like SHIFT, CONTROL or OPTION changes the displayed keyboard accordingly.
+
Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
+
Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+
+
Select Dead Keys
for setting the above mentioned blue keys.
+
Switch Shortcut Key...
for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT).
+
+
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap via drag&drop in the keyboard representation: a left-click-drag copies a key, a right-click-drag exchanges the two keys.
+When you're done you can save the result from the menu File | Save.... Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via File | Open....
+
To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the Layout menu.
+
The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the Font menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
+
Finally, there's a Revert button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
+
You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
+
keymap -d MyKeymap
+
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
+At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use e.g. SpicyKeys.
+
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+
keymap -l MyKeymap
+
This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
Set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click. A middle-click is also simulated by clicking left and right button together. Useful for notebooks, which mostly don't have a 3rd button.
+
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration.
+
Focus follows mouse means, that you don't have to click into a window to activate it. There are three modes:
+
+
Enabled
The window under the mouse pointer is always activated automatically, but doesn't pop to the front.
+
Warping
Choosing a window from Deskbar or the Twitcher will have the mouse pointer glide smoothly toward it.
+
Instant-Warping
Choosing a window from Deskbar or the Twitcher will have the mouse pointer jump instantly toward it.
+
+
All settings are immediately applied.
+
+
Defaults
Selecciona todo a los valores predeterminados.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
En la parte superior, se puede seleccionar cuál adaptador de red configurar.
+
Enseguida se puede especificar si se obtiene la red automáticamente (vía DHCP) o si se esté usando una dirección estática. Si es la última, tendrá que llenar los campos IP Address, Netmask, Gateway y DNS Servers manualmente. De lo contario el panel mostrará las direcciones actualmente seleccionadas con DHCP.
+
+
Revert
regresa las configuraciones que estaban activas cuando se inició el panel de preferencias Network.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode.
+~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Each of your workspaces can have its own resolution and color depth.
+
+
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other two menus contain all supported resolution and depth settings.
+
After clicking on Apply, the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
+
To the left, you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
+
Revert brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
The top checkbox enables/disables the screen saver.
+With the slider below it, you control after how long an idle time the screen saver kicks in.
+
+
The next two sliders are only usable after you activated their checkboxes:
+One slider determines after how many minutes the screen is powered off.
+The other, after how many minutes you need a password to unlock your machine.
+
+
By clicking into different corners of the two screens at the bottom, you tell the system when to immediately start the screen saver or when to prevent it from kicking in when you rest the mouse in the indicated corner. Click in the middle of the screens to disable that feature again.
+
The second tab shows a list of all installed screen saver modules and their individual settings. You can test your settings with the Test button below the list and add modules with the Add... button beside it. Other ways to install new screen savers is by a simple drag&drop into the list. Of course, you can also copy/delete a module's file in its respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/add-ons/screensavers/ or /boot/home/config/add-ons/screensavers/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
+
Es posible asignar sonidos a ciertos eventos del sistema. Simplemente seleccione el evento de la lista y escoja un sonido del menú desplegable.
+
+
Ninguno
silencia un evento.
+
Otro...
abre un panel para buscar y añadir un sonido que aún no esté deisponible en el menú.
+
Se puede uar cualquier formato soportado por el sistema. Si MediaPlayer puede ocuparse de él, podrá cualquier otro programa.
+Puede "pre-escuchar" el sonido de un evento seleccionándolo y usando los botones Reproducir and Parar.
~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings
+~/config/settings/timezone - Un enlace a la zona horaria actual /boot/system/etc/timezones/*/*
+~/config/settings/Time_settings - Almacena la posición de la ventana del panel.
+
+
El panel de las preferencias horarias está dividido en dos pestañas:
A la izquierda, se puede configurar el día del mes simplemente clicando sobre él en el calendario. Puede cambiar el mes y el año clicando sobre él y usando las flechas (hacia arriba/ hacia abajo) hasta el correcto, o las teclas del cursor sobre el teclado.
+
De una forma similar, se configura la hora. Hay dos modos de funcionamiento para el reloj:
Simplemente encuentre y seleccione su localización en el menú desplegable y la lista de ciudades y presione Configurar Time Zone (Zona Horaria) para seleccionar su zona.
+
Revertir recupera la configuración que estaba activa cuando inició las preferencias de Time(Hora).
El panel de preferencias de Tracker está disponible también en todas y cada una de las ventanas de Tracker dentro del menú Window | Preferences.... Sus funciones se abordan en el tema sobre Tracker.
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory
+~/config/settings/VM_data - Almacena la posición de la ventana.
+
+
La memoria virtual permite al sistema intercambiar memoria hacia el disco duro, si la RAM pudiera usarse más sensiblemente para otras cosas. Así, incluso si se tuvieran montones de RAM, el proporcionar memoria virtual nunca es una mala idea.
+
+
Se puede seleccionar el espacio inclusive a una cantidad mayor del tamaño de la memoria física si se necesita. Con los discos duros tan grandes de hoy, asignar el tamaño de memoria física no debiera ser un problema. De cualquier forma, se puede ajustar rápidamente el tamaño si el espacio libre se acabara alguna vez. En ese caso tabmién se debiera dar un vistazo a DiskUsage para averiguar qué se está comiendo el espacio en disco.
+
Normalmente, el archivo de intercambio se escribe en su partición de arranque. Si a menudo se sobrecarga el disco debido al sistema de memoria virtual esté intercambiando constantemente de memoria, puede probar el usar un disco duro separado para el archivo de intercambio. Simplemente otra partición en el mismo disco duro con el sistema/información no le ayudará.
+Aumentar su RAM es por supuesto el camino más efectivo a seguir...
+
+
Defaults
Selecciona todo a los valores predeterminados.
+
Revert
regresa las selecciones que estaban activas cuando se inició el cuadro de diálogo de preferencias VirtualMemory.
A query is a file search based on file attributes and can be performed within Tracker or in Terminal. Queries are saved in /boot/home/queries/ and by default last seven days before being purged. Note, these aren't static result lists of your search, but are the query formulas which trigger a new search whenever you open them.
+Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can drill down a saved query just like any folder by right-clicking on it and navigating through the submenus.
You start a query by invoking the Find... menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is ALTF. You're presented with the Find window:
+
+
+
Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as Query Template.
+
Narrow down your search from All files and folders to specific file types.
+
Define the search method:
+
by Name - a basic search by file or folder name
+
by Attribute - an advanced search, you specify search terms for one or more attributes
+
by Formula - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term
+
Select which drives to search on.
+
Enter the search term.
+
The expander hides/unhides the additional options.
+
Uncheck the Temporary checkbox if you don't want this query self-destruct after 7 days.
+
Check if your query is supposed to Include trash.
+
Optionally, enter a name for this query if you want to save it.
+
You can drag&drop the icon anywhere to save a query. Doing that with the right mouse button, offers the option to save as template.
If you simply want to find all files and folders on your mounted disks that match a certain pattern, simply leave the search method at by Name, enter the search term into the text box and press ENTER.
You can create more advanced queries by searching within the attributes of specific file types. For that to work, these attributes have to be indexed.
+
+
You start by setting the filetype from All files and folders to, for example, Text | E-mail and change the search method to by Attribute.
+
This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons Add and Remove under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With Add and Remove you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
+
Let's do an email query as an example:
+
+
This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Botters has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "vibraphone" or "skepticality".
+As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
+A good way to cut down the number of search results.
Typing in a formula query by hand is daunting and really quite unpractical. It still has its uses.
+
Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to by Formula mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
You could copy and paste the string into an email, forum or IRC for others to use or debug.
+
You can use this method to construct a query in Attribute mode and then switch to Formula mode, to comfortably generate a search string to use for a query in Terminal or a script.
+
You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
After you start a search, the Find window will be replaced by a result window. Here is an example that queried for "server":
+
+
Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:
+
+
You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.
+
With File | Edit Query or ALTG you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
+
A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with Attributes | Paste Layout.
If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
+By using the Save Query as Template menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
+
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
Con CTRLALTDEL se solicita la visualización del Team Monitor, donde están listados todos los programas en ejecución en ese momento.
+
+
Los programas que han sido ejecutados por el sistema están en azul, y aquellos iniciados por el usuario, en negro.
+Las aplicaciones que no responden, lo que suele ser signo de que el programa está colgado, están marcadas en rojo. Se puede terminar la ejecución de un programa seleccionándolo y presionando el botón Terminar Aplicación.
+
Se puede solicitar un Terminal pulsando OPTALTT.
+
Si el Tracker o la Barra de Escritorio dejaron de funcionar correctamente se muestra un nuevo botón (a lo mejor es necesario cesar la ejecución de todo el equipo que no responde):Reiniciar el Escritorio reinicia el Tracker y/o la Barra de Escritorio.
Applications can install add-ons so they can be invoked easily on a selection of files from Tracker. Only the add-ons that can handle a specific filetype are presented under Add-Ons from the context menu or the File menu of a Tracker window. Some add-ons don't necessarily need a file to work on and are thus always present.
+
Tracker Add-Ons, or links to applications that can act as add-ons, can be installed in three different locations (see topic Filesystem layout):
+
+
/boot/system/system/add-ons/Tracker/
for system provided add-ons.
+
/boot/common/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons available to every user.
+
/boot/home/config/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons only available to yourself.
+
+
The file name of an add-on can be suffixed with a dash and capital letter, and is then available via keyboard shortcut. For example, Open Target Folder-T opens with ALTOPTT.
+Of course, you have to take care of possible shortcut collisions when deciding on a shortcut. You can't have the same for different add-ons.
These Tracker Add-Ons come with every Haiku installation:
+
+
Background-B
+
Opens the Background preferences to change the color or image of the Desktop or any folder. Invoked on an image file the Background panel is launched with that image already loaded as a potential background.
+
DiskUsage-I
+
Starts the DiskUsage application with the according folder as basis.
+
FileType-F
+
Invoked on a file, opens its specific FileType panel, otherwise the general FileTypes preferences are launched.
+
Open Target Folder-O
+
Can only be used on a linked file and opens the folder that file lives in.
+
TextSearch-G
+
Starts the TextSearch application to look for a string in the selected folder (and its subfolders).
+
ZipOMatic-Z
+
A selection of files will be added to a zip archive, invoked without a selection opens a panel to create an archive via drag&drop.
The Tracker is the graphical interface to all your files. It let's you create new files and folders or find, launch or rename as well as copy or delete existing ones.
+
Being an application like any other (the Desktop with its icons is really just a fullscreen window in the background), Tracker appears with its windows in the Deskbar and can be quit and restarted. The easiest way to quit and restart a crashed or frozen Tracker (or a wayward Deskbar) is to call the Team Monitor.
In order to access a harddisk, CD, USB stick etc., you first have to mount the volume, that is, let the system know it's there. This is done with a right-click on the Desktop or an already mounted volume (like the boot disk) and choosing the volume from the Mount submenu. You find the same Mount menu in the Deskbar.
+
+
There are also Mount Settings so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.
+The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.
+
Before you disconnect e.g. a harddrive or USB stick, make sure you have successfully unmounted the volume. This guarantees that all data transfer has finished. Otherwise you may lose data or corrupt the disk!
By default, when you double-click a folder, Tracker opens a new window while leaving the parent window open. This can quickly lead to an overcrowded desktop.
+You can prevent that by holding down the OPT key, which automatically closes the parent window.
+This is also true for keyboard navigation. For more on that, see topic Shortcuts and key combinations.
+
Moving through your folders is one of Trackers main purposes, just like the file managers on other platforms. Haiku's Tracker has some unique features that will help you doing that efficiently.
Instead of double-clicking your way down folder after folder, there's a better way to drill down:
+
+
+
Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/home/config/.
+If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
+
A similar method can be used from any Tracker window:
+
+
Click on the area in the lower left, where the number of items is listed, and you'll get submenus for every level above your current location. From there you can drill down through the folders as usual.
+
Note, that the Desktop is always the topmost level as that is where Tracker shows mounted volumes. So, if you want to go to another disk, you first have to navigate to the top (Desktop) and cross over to your other disk from there.
+
You'll get the same submenu-navigating when you drag a file over a folder. After a short while of hovering, a submenu pops up and you can drill down to your destination. If you initiated the drag with the right mousebutton, you can choose between copying, moving or linking the file when you release the mouse.
You may be familiar with the concept from file managers of other operating systems: typing the first few letters of a filename will jump to the first file matching these starting characters. Haiku took the idea a step further. If there isn't a file starting with those letters it will jump to the first file including the string anywhere in its name. And if there's nothing with the string in its filename, the attributes are searched next.
+
+
In the above example, there are many files starting with "Haiku logo", rendering simpler approaches to typing ahead quite useless. In Haiku however, typing "web" jumps right to its first occurence in "Haiku logo - website". The characters you enter appear in the bottom left corner where you normally find the item count of all files in the folder. A second after entering a character, the display jumps back to normal and you're ready for a new type ahead search.
Tracker windows offer three different viewing modes from the Window menu:
+
+
Icon View (ALT1) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with ALT+/ALT-.
+
Mini Icon View (ALT2) - Small icons.
+
List View (ALT3) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide available attributes. (See topic Attributes.)
+
+
The Window menu offers a number of other functions:
+
+
Resize Window (ALTY) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
+
Clean Up (ALTK) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Clean Up All which additionally sorts all icons alphabetically.
Close (ALTW) - Closes the window. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Close All which closes every Tracker window.
+
Close All in Workspace (ALTQ) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
+
+
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete Clean Up (ALTK). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
+
The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.
Window | Preferences... opens a panel that offers a number of settings that, where not obvious, should become clear once tried out. Since all settings are applied live, you'll immediately see the changes.
+ So, in short, the not so obvious settings:
+
+
Desktop - Decide if all mounted disks appear directly on the Desktop or in a window after clicking a single Disk icon sitting on the Desktop.
+
Windows - You can set Single Window Navigation, i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of it's parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the OPT key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size.
+
+
+
+
Before you switch Tracker to Single Window Navigation mode, because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a Navigator where you can enter or copy&paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.
+
Date and Time - Set date and time formats.
+
Trash - Set the behavior when deleting a file.
+
Volume Icons - Set the color of an optional indicator of free space that's shown besides a disk's icon.
+
+
This panel, by the way, is also available as Tracker from Deskbar's Preferences.
When invoked on a selected file, most of the File menu commands are also offered in the context menu by right-clicking that file.
+
As usual the commands are pretty clear.
+
+
Find... - Find a file or folder. See topic Query for more info.
+
New - Create a new folder or any other file based on a template.
+
+
+
+
Choosing Edit Templates... opens the folder /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the New menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype text/plain. See topic Filetypes for more info.
+
Open With... - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
+
+
+
+
The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type text/plain. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here text/*. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the Open With... entry instead, a panel opens:
+
+
+
Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the Open and Make Preferred button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here text/plain.
+
Get Info
+
+
+
The panel presents info on the selected file and lets you set the default application and, after you expanded that part of the panel, permissions and owner. Clicking on the path will open it in a Tracker window.
+
Edit Name, Duplicate and Move to Trash - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.
+
Move to, Copy to and Create Link - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.
+
Cut, Copy and Paste - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding SHIFT while invoking the menu you can Copy/Cut more files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding SHIFT you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.
+
Identify - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with wget which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu changes the item to Force Identify which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.
+
Add-Ons - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic Tracker Add-ons for more information.
When you copy, move or delete files, Tracker shows its progress with a status window. If you initiate more than one transaction, each job gets its own status display.
+
+
To the right are two buttons to pause or stop a transaction entirely. Sometimes it can be useful to temporarily pause a large transaction. For example, you may need to quickly launch a large application. Copying large amounts of data chokes your harddisk's IO bandwidth and thus delays your workflow.
The Twitcher is a task switcher to jump between running applications and their windows.
+
+
Just tap CTRLTAB to switch between the current and the last application/window. Tapping CTRLTAB very quickly will switch between all applications. Or press and hold CTRLTAB to go through all running applications by repeatedly hitting TAB or ←/→. If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as described and then go through its open windows with the ↑/↓ keys.
+
You cycle through all an applications visible windows on the current workspace with CTRL~ (which, depending on the keymap you're using, is the key below ESC).
+
It's also possible to invoke the Twitcher with CTRLTAB and then use the mouse to choose the application/window you'll jump to when releasing the CTRL key.
+
The Twitcher also offers a few more advanced keyboard shortcuts:
+
+
ESC
Aborts the twitching and returns to the formerly active window.
+
Q
Quits the selected application.
+
H
Hides all windows of the selected application.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/userguide/es/workshop-filetypes+attributes.html b/userguide/es/workshop-filetypes+attributes.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2af5adb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/userguide/es/workshop-filetypes+attributes.html
@@ -0,0 +1,226 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Taller de trabajo: Tipos de archivo, Atributos, Indices, y consultas
+
+
+
+
+
Taller de trabajo: Tipos de archivo, Atributos, Indices, y consultas
+
+
Este es un taller de trabajo para mostrar el uso de los Atributos, Consultas, la Indexación y Tipos de archivo personalizados. Como ejemplo, construiremos una base de datos para llevar un registro de nuestra colección de DVDs.
Primero decida qué tipo de archivo y atributos cubrirá nuestras necesidades. Originariamente, yo quise utilizar un archivo de marcadores con un enlace a la página de la película en IMdB, pero Haiku no dispone de un navegador "marcable" como el NetPositive de BeOS en este momento, así que se me ocurrió esto: el archivo en sí mismo sería una imagen JPEG para la carátula de la película.
+A eso añadimos unos poco atributos. Aquí tendremos que decidir si queremos consultarlo más tarde (entonces tendremos que añadirlo al índice) y además, qué tipo de atributo deberá ser. Los números (int, float) pueden ser evaluados de forma diferente al texto (</=/> vs. es/contiene/comienza por).
+
Aquí están los atributos que me gustaría ver para mis DVDs:
+
+
Título de la película
+
Género
+
URL a, por ejemplo, IMdB
+
Director/Personal
+
Argumento
+
Mi puntuación del 1 al 10
+
Coordenadas en mi estantería, por ejemplo, A2, B3, así también puedo encontrar el DVD en la vida real :)
Start the Filetypes preferences, and click on the Add... button below the hierarchical list on the left. A small dialog opens and you specify in which MIME Group your new filetype will reside. You can also create a completely new group. Let's put it into "applications" and set the "Internal Name" to DVDdb.
+
+
Ahora, un panel para su nuevo tipo de archivo DVDdb se abre:
Double-click the icon well to open Icon-O-Matic to design an icon for your filetype. You can also drag&drop an icon from the icon well of another type, maybe as starting point for a modified version.
Puede añadir sufijos tales como .txt, .jpg, .mp3 para reconocer archivos por extensión. Resulta útil cuando se trabaja con archivos de sistemas que no tienen tipos MIME. No lo necesitaremos para nuestro ejemplo.
Este menú muestra una lista de todos los aplicaciónes que pueden usar este tipa de file. Puede definir la programa que abre este file especifico cuando lo da clic doble.
+
+
Select...
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
+
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
Here we enter all the custom attributes we decided on in our preparations. Clicking the Add... button opens a panel:
+
+
+
Attribute Name - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.
+
Internal Name - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.
+
Type - Defines the value the attribute can hold and therefore how it can be queried.
+
+
String for normal text
+
Boolean for binary data: 0 or 1
+
Integer for integer numbers with different ranges:
+
+
8 bit: ± 255
+
16 bit: ± 65,535
+
32 bit: ± 4,294,967,295
+
64 bit: ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615
+
+
+
Float for floatingpoint numbers, single precision
+
Double for floatingpoint numbers, double precision
+
Time for time and date format
+
+
+
+
+
Visible - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:
+
Display As - Leave on "Default". In the future more option will become available, e.g. a bar or stars for a rating etc.
+
Editable - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker.
+
Width - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window.
+
Alignment - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned.
Before we start entering data in our little DVD database, we should add certain attributes to the Index. Only indexed attributes can use Haiku's fast Queries.
+So, what will we be searching in the future? We probably won't ask "What's in the B4 coordinate in my shelf?" or "Does the IMdB URL or the plot of the movie contain the word 'pope-shenooda'?".
+
This leaves these attributes:
+
+
Nombre interno
Tipo de atributo
+
DVDdb:title
text
+
DVDdb:genre
text
+
DVDdb:cast
text
+
DVDdb:rating
int-32
+
+
+
To index them, we open a Terminal and simply add one attribute after the other:
Now, everything's set and we can begin putting some data into our base.
+Since our basic file is a cover image, we go to some online resource like IMdB, look for our first movie and save the cover or movie poster in a new folder where we want to keep our DVDdb files.
+
Opening that folder we see a typical Tracker window with one JPEG in it. Right-clicking it, we change its filetype to application/DVDdb with the Filetype Addon. There's more info on this in the Filetypes document.
+
Now, we activate all our DVDdb attributes from the Attributes menu of the Tracker window and rearrange the columns to our taste:
+
+
By clicking on a yet empty attribute (or pressing ALTE) we enter editing mode and fill each attribute. With TAB and SHIFTTAB you can navigate between attributes.
+
In our example, we usually start with a downloaded JPG cover and change its type to applications/DVDdb. There's another elegant way to produce a file to work with. Just copy an empty file of our filetype to /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates and rename it to DVDdb.
+
Right-clicking into a Tracker window, you'll find a new entry under New... besides the default "New folder".
Several hours of grunt work later, we have a nice little database that you can query to find all your Christina Ricci movies that have a 7+ rating... :)
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.
+Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder and rename it to group/filetype, replacing slashes with underscores; in our case "applications_DVDdb".
+
Open the new folder and paste in the layout with Attributes | Paste Layout. Voilà:
Los espacios de trabajo son escritorios virtuales completos, con su propia resolución, profundidad de color y fondo de pantalla. Hasta 32 de estos espacios de trabajo se pueden configurar desde las preferencias de pantalla.
Puede cambiar de espacios de trabajo, bien haciendo clic en el applet de espacios de trabajo (el cual se ve en la imagen de ariba), o utilizando el atajo de teclado ALTFx, donde "x" es el número del espacio de trabajo. Es buena idea organizar los espacios de trabajo en filas de cuatro, para imitar la distribución de las teclas Fx en el teclado.
+También, dar click en la aplicación o en una de sus ventanas en el Deskbar, le enviará al espacio de trabajo en el que está.
+
Otra forma cómoda de hacerlo es utilizar CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ para moverse espacialmente entre las filas y columnas de los espacios de trabajo disponibles. Si adicionalmente se presiona MAYÚSCULAS, la ventana activa se moverá con usted hacia el nuevo espacio de trabajo.
+
Puede alternar entre dos espacios de trabajo con ALT~ (que, dependiendo del mapa de teclado que esté usando, es la tecla debajo de ESC, que tendrá que pulsar dos veces para obtener ~).
Avant de nous intéresser aux applications fournies avec Haiku, voyons en détail comment installer et désinstaller des programmes que vous auriez téléchargé, par exemple depuis un des sites web mentionnés sur la page de bienvenue.
+
+
Pour installer un paquet vous ne devez décompresser
+l'archive que dans Haiku. Si vous vous contentez de copier dans Haiku un dossier que vous avez extrait d'un paquet sous, par exemple, Linux ou Windows, alors tous les attributs indispensables seront perdus, puisque ces systèmes d'exploitations ne gèrent pas les méta-données.
Les programmes pour Haiku sont fournis sous forme d'archive. La plupart du temps il s'agit d'un ZIP, mais certains anciens programmes BeOS sont distribués sous forme Software Valet (paquet au format PKG). Software Valet pouvait exécuter automatiquement des scripts d'installation, donc après un double clic et la sélection du dossier de destionation, tout devrait se passer automatiquement.
+S'il s'agit d'une archive ZIP, un double-clic ouvrira Expander qui vous permettra de choisir la destination et de lancer la décompression. Comme indiqué dans la section Structure du système de fichiers, cette destination est soit
+
+
/boot/common/apps/
pour les applications disponibles pour tous les utilisateurs
+
/boot/home/apps/
pour les applications seulement disponibles pour vous-même
+
+
Bien sûr, cette distinction deviendra utile uniquement lorsque Haiku supportera les utilisateurs multiples.
+
Une fois l'archive extraite, jetez un œil dans le dossier créé. Vous y trouverez souvent des fichiers ReadMe (Lisez-moi) ou d'autres documents intéressants.
+
Certain programmes nécessitent des étapes de configuration supplémentaires. C'est le cas des extensions du Tracker, des Filtres et d'autres composants d'amélioration du système qui doivent être placés dans les bons dossiers. L'archive contiendra souvent un script (généralement avec le suffixe .sh) nommé install sur lequel vous pourrez double-cliquer pour que l'installation s'effectue automatiquement.
+Vous pourrez aussi y trouver des liens vers les dossiers de destinations appropriés nommés "drag [filename] here..." (déposer [nom de fichier] ici). Suivez simplement ces instructions, et l'installation sera terminée.
+
Généralement, rien de tout cela ne sera nécessaire et vous aurez terminé après avoir décompressé l'archive.
+Consultez les sujets Deskbar ou LaunchBox pour savoir comment créer des raccourcis vers vos applications nouvellement installées.
Si l'installation a été effectuée par un script, il y a des chances pour qu'un script de désinstallation soit aussi présent. Dans ce cas, double-cliquez sur ce script et vous aurez terminé.
+Sinon, vous pouvez vous contenter de supprimer le dossier de l'application.
+
Bien sûr, après cette opération les fichiers de configuration de l'application, stockés dans le dossier ~/config/settings seront encore présents. Ceci peut être utile si vous comptez réinstaller le programme dans le futur (si ce n'est pas le cas, vous pouvez les supprimer). De plus, quand l'installation a nécessité de déposer des éléments sur des dossiers "drag [filename] here...", ils seront également conservés.
+
Une manière d'obtenir la liste de tous les fichiers de l'application est de faire une requête sur une partie significative du nom de l'application. Ceci révèlera le fichier exécutable de l'application, son dossier d'installation, des liens vers cette application depuis la Deskbar, etc… Sélectionnez simplement les fichiers appropriés et supprimez-les.
Haiku est fourni avec un certain nombre d'applications légères mais essentielles. Vous les trouverez dans les dossiers /boot/system/apps/ ou /boot/common/apps/. Les applications qui ne sont généralement pas lancées par un double-clic sur un fichier sont présentes dans le menu Applications de la Deskbar.
En plus des applications listées ci-dessus, qui sont toutes maintenues par le projet Haiku, quelques applications supplémentaires sont fournies. Les rapports de bogues et suggestions pour ces applications doivent être envoyés à leurs mainteneurs respectifs.
Vous pouvez surveillez l'utilisation des ressources système en ouvrant ActivityMonitor et en activant les éléments qui vous intéressent.
+
+
En effectuant un clic droit dans la fenêtre, vous pouvez activer ou désactiver l'affichage de tous les types de ressources :
+Used/Cached Memory (Mémoire utilisée/mémoire cache), Swap Space (Espace d'échange), CPU Usage (Utilisation du processeur), Network Receive/Send (Envoi/réception réseau), Page faults (défauts de pages), Semaphores (Sémaphores), Ports, Threads, Teams, Running Applications (Applications en cours), Raw/Text Clipboard Size (Taille du presse-papier), Media Nodes (Nœuds média).
+
En dessous du graphique se trouve une légende (que vous pouvez désactiver depuis le menu contextuel). Vous pouvez changer les couleurs des éléments et du fond du graphique par glisser-déposer depuis un sélecteur de couleur, comme celui d'Icon-O-Matic.
+
Vous pouvez ajouter des vues supplémentaires depuis le menu
+File si la vue courante est trop chargée.
+
Le menu Settings ouvre un panneau où vous pouvez définir l'intervalle de mise à jour.
+
Chaque vue est dotée d'une poignée de Réplicant et peut donc être placée, par exemple, sur le Bureau.
BePDF est un visualisateur PDF rapide à se lancer. En plus de la visualisation simple, il support l'ajout de notes et de marque-pages sur les PDF non protégés. Il est traduit en 20 langues (dont le français) et des langues supplémentaires peuvent être facilement ajoutées via des fichiers texte.
+
La documentation de ce logiciel est disponible au format HTML et PDF. Cette dernière est également accessible depuis le menu Help | Show Help... (Aide | Afficher l'aide…).
BeZillaBrowser est un navigateur basé sur le code source de Mozilla, modifié pour améliorer sa vitesse, sa stabilité, et certaines caractéristiques de son interface graphique. Les versions actuelles de ce navigateur sont basées sur la branche CVS de Mozilla 1.8. Vous pouvez fournir des rapports de bogues pour ce portage sur le site HaikuPorts.
+
Les navigateurs Mozilla sont largement utilisés sur de nombreuses plateformes, vous pouvez donc trouver de nombreux guides et d'astuces sur le Web. Vous pouvez commencer par http://support.mozilla.com/.
+
BeZilla ne permet pas encore l'impression. Heureusement, il existe une extension nommée html2pdf qui permet de générer un fichier PDF de la page affichée, en utilisant un service web. Après l'installation, un symbole PDF s'affichera dans la barre de statut; cliquez sur cette icône pour obtenir une fenêtre contenant un lien"Download PDF".
+En revanche, ce service ne fonctionne que pour les pages présentes sur Internet, pas pour vos document stockés localement.
~/cd/* - Conserve les informations des CD déjà identifiés.
+
+
+
+
+
+
L'utilisation ressemble à peu près à ce que vous pouvez attendre en regardant les boutons de contrôle.
+Cochez le bouton Repeat à gauche de Shuffle pour écouter en boucle le CD.
+
Si vous avez besoin de plus de contrôle, comme les playlists, essayez plutôt le MediaPlayer.
CharacterMap affiche les code de tous les caractères UTF-8 qu'une police supporte.
+
+
Vous trouverez dans la zone de gauche les blocs Unicode standards, ainsi qu'une fonction de filtre. Si vous le désirez, vous pouvez aussi activer Show Private Blocks (afficher les blocs privés) depuis le menu View.
+À droite sont affichés les caractères de ces blocs, en utilisant la police de caractères spécifiée dans le menu Font. Vous pouvez modifier la taille d'affichage grâce à l'option Font Size.
+En bas de la fenêtre, le code du caractère situé sous la souris est affiché en hexadécimal, décimal et en code UTF-8.
+
Vous pouvez copier un caractères dans un éditeur de texte, avec Copy Character (ALTC), ou en le faisant
+directement glisser à partir de la table de caractères.vous pouvez aussi le copiez comme une chaîne encodée à l'aide de Copy As Escaped Byte String (ALTMAJC). Selon la méthode choisie, vous obtiendrez, par exemple, soit € soit \xe2\x82\xac.
Avec CodyCam vous prenez des photos intervalle régulier à partir d'une webcam connectée ou de toute autre source vidéo et enregistrez-les via FTP.
+
+
À gauche sous l'aperçu, vous définissez le nom du fichier qui sera suivi par un nombre croissant pour chaque photo prise. Au-dessous, vous choisissez le format de fichier et la vitesse à laquelle les photos sont prises.
+
À droite, vous choisissez FTP ou sFTP (si SSH est disponible) et renseignez les données nécessaires pour sauvegarder les images sur un serveur.
DeskCalc est une calculatrice simple qui a néanmoins quelques fonctionnalités qui ne sont pas visibles au premier regard.
+
+
+
DeskCalc understands much more than its simple keypad suggests.
+Besides the operators +, -, *, /, %, ^ and the constants pi and e the following math functions are supported:
+acos, asin, atan, atan2, ceil, cos, cosh, exp, floor, log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, tanh.
+
When it comes to user input, DeskCalc is quite tolerant:
+/, :, \ are all interpreted as division operators,
+*, x are valid symbols for multiplication.
+Also, be aware that . and , are both considered floating points, which means you mustn't use them as 1000 separators.
+
Right-clicking offers these options:
+
+
Enable Num Lock on start up
automatically activates the number block when launching DeskCalc
+
Show Keypad
hides the keypad when deactivated
+
+
You can resize the calculator until it fits your needs and then put it as Replicant onto the Desktop via drag&drop of the symbol in the bottom right corner. Make sure Show Replicants is activated in the Deskbar.
+
Le clavier peut être coloré en faisant glisser dessus n'importe quelle source de couleur comme par exemple, à partir de Icon-O-Matic.
+
Vous pouvez remonter ou descendre dans l'historique des calculs effectués avec ↑ et ↓.
+
You can select DeskCalc's contents and drag&drop it into any application. Or you drop it into a Tracker window or onto the Desktop and a text file with that clipping is created there.
+
Even better, the reverse is also possible:
+Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag&dropping them back into DeskCalc.
+Or you drag&drop a calculation directly out of an email onto DeskCalc.
+
DeskCalc peut être utilisé dans le Terminal. Il suffit de mettre l'expression entre guillemets, comme ceci :
DiskProbe est un éditeur hexadécimal pour afficher et modifier les données d'un fichier ou d'un périphérique octet par octet. C'est un outil très bas niveau, qui peut donc potentiellement faire vraiment n'importe quoi si vous ne faites pas attention !
+
Travaillez toujours avec une copie de votre fichier, et redoublez de prudence lorsque vous travaillez directement sur un périphérique.
+
Au démarrage de DiskProbe, vous devez d'abord spécifier le fichier ou le périphérique sur lequel vous desirez travailler. Après cela, vous vous retrouvez dans cette interface :
+
+
The main view shows always one block of data, the size of which can be adjusted with View | BlockSize. To the left is the offset to the start of the block, in the middle the data as HEX values and to the right the same as ASCII symbols.
+You can move from block to block with the slider above or with ALT← and ALT→ and switch between the HEX and ASCII columns with TAB.
+
Block | Selection will not only show the selection with different endianess (and in HEX or decimal, set by View | Base), it will also interprete the selection as a block offset that you can jump to. It will be grayed out if the position is outside of the file/device.
+This is a handy feature mostly when looking at file systems, as they often contain pointers to other blocks.
+
If the file you're probing includes attributes, the Attributes menu can be used to open any of them in a new DiskProbe window. Here's the copyright attribute of the AboutSystem application:
+
+
Selon le type d'attribut, vous obtiendrez un onglet éditeur adapté en plus du Raw Editor (données butes) toujours disponible.
+Par exemple, il existe des éditeurs de chaînes, de types MIME ou de visualisation d'icône vectorielle.
DiskUsage shows graphically how the space on your volumes is utilized.
+A useful tool to answer the question, "Where has all my disk space gone?".
+
+
The concentric circles represent different levels in the file system hierarchy. Above, the circle in the center represents the /boot/home/ folder. Each segment of the ring immediately outside that circle is a file or folder under /boot/home/. Every segment farther outside brings you one level deeper in the file hierarchy. You may have to resize the window to accommodate very deep folders.
+
Above the graphic is a pop-up menu that lets you switch between all mounted volumes. Before the disk usage of a volume can be displayed, it has to be scanned. As this can take a while for larger disks, you can examine another volume while that scan is done in the background.
+
+
If the graphical representation of a file or folder comprises less than about 2° of a circle, it is excluded from the display.
+
The number of files that's reported for a folder includes files in subfolders too. A folder counts as a file.
+
DiskUsage ignores symbolic links.
+
+
As you move the mouse over a segment, information about that file or folder appears in the status bar at the bottom.
+
Right-clicking a segment offers a context menu to Get Info, Open (with Tracker), Open With another suitable application or Rescan that particular folder.
+Left-clicking a segment makes that file/folder the center circle.
+Left-clicking the center circle moves you up one level.
+
You can drag files and folders from DiskUsage to other applications or to the Desktop or other Tracker windows for copying. Vice versa, dropped volumes and folders on DiskUsage's window will zoom directly to them, making them the new center circle.
DriveSetup est un outils pour créer, supprimer et initialiser des partitions. Pour le moment, il ne peu pas redimensionner ou déplacer une partition existante, de sorte que vous aurez besoin soit d'un volume avec un espace non partitionné (peut-être un disque USB externe ou un autre disque dur) ou modifier la configuration avec un outil comme GParted LiveCD pour fournir l'espace pour une nouvelle partition.
+
+
Au sommet se trouve une représentation graphique de toutes les partitions à l'intérieur du lecteur choisi dans la liste en dessous.
+Vous pouvez avoir jusqu'à 4 partitions primaires au maximum, chacune d'entre elles pouvant contenir un certain nombre de partitions logiques.
+Vous pouvez développer cette liste avec les contrôles +/- qui apparaissent dans ce cas en face de la partition étendue pour voir les détails de toutes les partitions logiques.
+
Vous pouvez choisir une partition à partir de la liste afin de la monter ou démonter à l'aide des commandes du menu
+Partition ou en appuyant sur ALTM ou ALTU.
+
Vous pouvez également supprimer complètement une partition avec Partition | Delete.
+Ce qui nous amène à ceci :
+
Effectuer des créations/suppression/initialisations de partitions est très dangereux.
+Vérifiez toujours deux fois ce que vous faites, et assurer vous d'avoir une sauvegarde de vos données à jour au cas où quelque chose se passe mal !
Si vous prévoyez d'utiliser le disque entier comme une seule partition, comme par exemple une clé USB ou une carte Compact Flash, vous pouvez sauter la création d'une partition, et procéder directement à l'initialisation.
+
Si vous trouvez un espace non formaté sur un lecteur, comme : <empty>, vous pouvez créer une nouvelle partition dans cet espace avec Partition | Create...(ALTC).
+
+
Cette boîte de dialogue vous invite à ajuster la taille de la partition et son type. Choisissez Be File System si vous voulez utiliser la partition pour une installation Haiku ou si vous souhaitez utiliser sur celle-ci toutes les fonctionnalités intéressantes de Haiku, comme les attributs et les requêtes. Notez que les autres systèmes d'exploitations pourraient ne pas être en mesure d'accéder à une telle partition.
+
Si vous avez créé une partition primaire plutôt qu'une partition logique, la boîte de dialogue ci-dessus affichera également une case à cocher Active Partition. Vous devrez la cocher, si vous voulez utiliser cette partition pour démarrer par défaut sur l'installation de Haiku.
+
Avant de pouvoir utiliser, ou même monter, la partition nouvellement créée, elle doit être initialisée avec un système de fichiers.
Seules les partitions non montées peuvent être initialisés en utilisant le menu Partition | Initialize menu.
+
+
Ici, vous définissez le nom de la partition et sa granularité. Une taille de 2048 octets par bloc est recommandée, mais vous pouvez choisir des tailles plus grandes ou plus petites si vous avez des besoins très spécifiques.
+L'initialisation détruira toutes les données sur cette partition !
Pas d'entrée : normalement, un double clic sur les fichiers pris en charge assure le lancement.
+
Localisation :
/boot/system/apps/Expander
+
Réglages :
~/config/settings/Expander_Settings
+
+
+
Expander est un petit outil pour décompresser rapidement les archives les plus courantes, parmi lesquelles, zip, gzip, bzip2, rar et tar.gz.
+Il suffit de double-cliquer sur une archive pour obtenir cette interface simple :
+
+
+
Source
ALTS
Ouvre la boite de dialogue d'ouverture de fichiers pour vous permettre de trouver l'archive à décompresser.
+
Destination
ALTD
Ouvre la boite de dialogue des fichiers pour définir la destination.
+
Expand
ALTE
démarre la décompression. Celle-ci peut être interrompue avec ALTK.
+
+
Vous pouvez basculer vers l'affichage avec la liste des fichiers en cochant Show Contents ou en pressant ALTL.
+
Expander ne peut décompresser que des archives entières.
+Vous ne pouvez pas extraire ou supprimer de l'archive un fichier seul, ni en ajouter un.
+
Edit | Preferences... ou ALTP ouvre un panneau de préférences qui offre quelques paramètres utiles pour ajuster le comportement de l'Expander.
+Les options parlent d'elles-même :
Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
+Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
+
+
Bitmap
SVG
HVIF
+
+
1,024 octets + 256 octets
7,192 octets
768 octets
+
+
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
+
This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType Add-On on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
+
Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.
Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
+
Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
+For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
+
+
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
+
+
To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the Shape menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the Properties view.
A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure, the path is selected in the path list.
+
+
Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+
+
+
+
To get from "A" to "B", you have to transform some points from corner-points to curve-points. That's done by holding ALT while clicking on a point and dragging out the handles. This results in a symmetrical Bezier: the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click&drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
+Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
+
+
To move a point, simply click&drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
+To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
+Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
+
+
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move point(s)
+
Insert point
+
Add point
+
Delete point CTRL
+
Corner↔Bezier ALT
+
Select points SHIFT
+
+
+
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
+
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
+
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
+
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
+
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add Rectangle and Add Circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
+
+
+
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
+
Clean Up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
+
Rotate Indices Right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
+
A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
+
+
+
+
When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move
+
Resize
+
Rotate
+
Move rotation point
+
+
+
+
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.
The Shape menu offers the before mentioned possibility to Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path&Style and to Duplicate or Remove a shape. Then, there is:
+
+
Reset Transformation
Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.
+
Freeze Transformation
When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used Options | Snap to Grid to set the points at precise pixel borders.
+If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
+With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
+
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its Min LOD and above its Max LOD.
+
So, if you set a shape's Min LOD to 0.0 and the Max LOD to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
+
The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
+For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
+Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
+
+
You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag&dropping it into the list of styles.
+
If you go for a gradient, you set the type (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag&drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
+Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
+
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
There's your usual menu bar at the top, File, Edit, Options. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
+
File | Save As... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
+
+
File | Export As... opens a familiar save panel with a file format dropdown menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+
+
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
+
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
+
HVIF Source Code
Saves as source code used by programmers
+
SVG
Saves as SVG
+
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
+
PNG Set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
+
BEOS:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
+
META:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
A few things you should keep in mind when working with Icon-O-Matic and some general tips for its usage:
+
+
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, colors and shadows.
+
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
+
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
+
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
+
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag&drop or copy&paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
+
If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
+
You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click&drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click&drag while holding SPACE.
Installer est utilisé pour répliquer Haiku sur un nouveau volume.
+Au lancement, il affiche une fenêtre de démarrage qui contient des renseignements importants. Ce n'est pas le stupide CLUF que vous avez l'habitude d'accepter en un clin d'œil, il indique que :
+
+
Ce logiciel en version alpha n'étant pas exempt de défaut, faites des sauvegardes ou vous devrez en assumer les conséquences !
+
Vous devez préparer une partition avant d'utiliser Installer. Vous pouvez utiliser GParted LiveCD ou tout autre outil comparable jusqu'à ce que DriveSetup, l'outil d'Haiku, soit assez mature pour effectuer cette tâche.
+
Haïku peut être ajouté manuellement au gestionnaire d'amorçage GRUB.
+En résumé, vous devez ajouter une entrée dans /boot/grub/menu.lst de votre installation Linux, comme ceci :
+
# Haiku on /dev/sda7
+title Haiku
+rootnoverify (hd0,6)
+chainloader +1
+
+
+
Une fois que vous avez accepté avec Continue, vous arrivez dans la fenêtre principale :
+
+
Dans la première liste déroulante, vous choisissez la source de l'installation. Ce peut être la version d'Haiku actuellement installée, le CD d'installation, ou une clé USB, etc
+La seconde liste déroulante spécifie la destination de l'installation. Cette partition (ou volume) cible qui devra être préalablement allouée à l'aide d'un outil de partitionnement comme GParted, sera complètement écrasée au début de l'installation.
+
En cliquant sur Show Optional Packages, vous développerez, si disponible, les composants complémentaires à installer en plus de la base d'Haiku.
+
Vérifiez une dernière fois la destination que vous avez choisi avant de démarrer le processus d'installation. Cliquez sur Setup partitions... afin d'ouvrir DriveSetup.
+Vous verrez ainsi le nom et l'emplacement des volumes et partitions disponibles.
+
Begin commence la procédure d'installation, en copiant tout, à l'exception des dossiers home/ et common/ sur le volume cible, avant de le rendre bootable.
+
Bien que la partition soit automatiquement rendu amorçable à la fin de la procédure d'installation, il peut arriver que certains autres systèmes d'exploitation ou outil de partitionnement remplacent (accidentellement) le secteur de démarrage de votre volume Haïku. Dans ce cas, amorcez votre système à partir de votre CD d'installation et démarrez Installater. Sélectionnez votre partition Haiku à démarrer dans la liste déroulante Onto: Please Choose Target puis cliquez sur Write Boot Sector pour la rendre à nouveau amorçable.
Magnify montre une version agrandie de la zone autour de votre pointeur de souris.
+
+
At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 32x32 pixel square around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
+
En-dessous, une valeur RVB et hexadécimale représente la couleur du pixel marqué par un contour rouge
+Vous pouvez déplacer le contour rouge avec les touches CURSEUR.
+
Pour mesurer les distances et aligner des objets, vous pouvez ajouter jusqu'à deux cibles bleues avec ALTH.
+Leurs coordonnées X/Y à partir du coin supérieur gauche sont affichés en bas.
+si les deux sont ajoutées, l'affichage sera complété de la distance X/Y entre l'un et l'autre.
+elles peuvent aussi être déplacées avec les touches CURSEUR. La cibles active est marquée d'un "x".
+
Vous pouvez déplacer le pointeur de la souris pixel par pixel avec les touches ALTCURSEUR.
+
un clic sur le menu déroulant vous proposera
+un certain nombre d'options :
+
+
Save Image
ALTS
Saves the current display as a resource file.
+
Copy Image
ALTC
Copies the current display to the clipboard.
+
Hide/Show Info
ALTT
Toggles the display of all the additional information.
+
Add a Crosshair
ALTH
Adds a crosshair you can drag around.
+
Remove a Crosshair
ALTMAJH
Removes the last added crosshair.
+
Hide/Show Grid
ALTG
Affiche la grille en surimpression.
+
Freeze/Unfreeze image
ALTF
Arrête/reprend la mise à jour de la zone d'agrandissement.
+
Stick Coordinates
ALTI
Keeps updating the magnification area, but don't follow the mouse pointer any more.
+
Make Square
ALT/
Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.
+
Decrease Window Size
ALT-
Rétrécit la zone la zone prise en compte autour du pointeur de la souris.
+
Increase Window Size
ALT+
Agrandie la zone prise en compte autour du pointeur de la souris.
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
Pas d'entrée : normalement, un double clic sur les fichiers pris en charge assure le lancement.
+
Localisation :
/boot/system/apps/PackageInstaller
+
Réglages :
aucun
+
+
+
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
Pe est un éditeur sophistiqué, avec sa coloration syntaxique, il est destiné principalement aux programmeurs et aux écrivains HTML. Initialement créé par Maarten Hekkelmann, il a été placé sous licence libre et maintenu par les développeurs de Haïku. Un gestionnaire de bugs et de plus amples informations sont disponibles sur la page du projet Pe.
+
Pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalités de Pe, veuillez consulter sa documentation.
People is a simple contact database using the attributes of Haiku's filesystem to store addresses and other contact information. Every contact is saved as one Person file with its data in separate attributes. All are indexed and therefore searchable with a query.
+
+
+
+
The Group attribute at the bottom allows assigning a person to one or more groups. Useful for "mass mailing" a number of people who, for example, work on a specific project. The pop-up menu offers all currently existing groups. If a person belongs to more than one group, the group names are delimited with a ",".
+
+
These Person files are usually all saved in /boot/home/people/. To get a list of all your contacts, just open your people folder and display all attributes of interest. If you choose to organize your Person files in different folders, just use a query to display them all in one window.
+
+
+
+
You can treat these files like any other: You can sort according to attributes (even a second sorting order by holding SHIFT while clicking) and of course delete, duplicate or rename Person files. Even the contact information can be edited directly: Clicking on an attribute (or ALTE) to edit works just like renaming a file. Once you're in edit mode, TAB and SHIFTTAB will jump from column to column.
PoorMan is a nice little webserver that's extremly easy to set up. Naturally it doesn't offer any advanced features like other heavy duty server software, it's after all only a poor man's webserver.
+
Upon its first launch, PoorMan asks for the folder that is about to be served to the web. If you go with the Default, a new folder /boot/home/public_html is created for you. As a start page a HTML file named by default index.html has to be present there.
+
PoorMan presents itself with a simple console that logs its activity. Then, there's status information if the server is running, which folder is being served, and a hit counter. Settings are changed with Edit | Settings...:
+
+
+
Le panneau de réglages est divisé en trois onglets :
+
In Site you can select another folder to serve, enter another start page and have the option to send a file listing if the start page isn't present.
+Logging lets you de/activate logging to the console or optionally to a separate logfile.
+The Advanced tab holds the setting for the maximum simultaneous connections.
+
The menu items of the console window are all self-explanatory. With them you can e.g. save (parts) of the console output, clear the console or logging file and start/stop the server or clear the hit counter.
+
+
If you want to try out if PoorMan's working, choose /boot/apps/BePDF/docs/ as folder and index.html as start page. Then point your browser to the URL 127.0.0.1, which is your local host.
Besides normal screenshots taken via PRINT, which puts a PNG of the current screen into /boot/home/, this application provides some useful options.
+
+
Starting Screenshot will take a screenshot as usual, but offers from its main window controls to set filename, format and folder before saving the image.
+
The Options dialog has a few more settings:
+
+
Besides the obvious, toggle between taking the whole screen or just the active window, including the window border and the mouse pointer, you can enter a delay before a screenshot is taken. Of course, this delay takes only effect if you take a new shot by pressing Take Screenshot.
+
+
+
+Taking a screenshot from Terminal
+
The Screenshot application is also usable from Terminal or a script.
+Screenshot --help shows the familiar options as parameters:
+
+
~> Screenshot --help
+
+Screenshot [OPTION]... Creates a bitmap of the current screen
+
+OPTION
+ -o, --options Show options window first
+ -m, --mouse-pointer Include the mouse pointer
+ -b, --border Include the window border
+ -w, --window Capture the active window instead of the entire screen
+ -d, --delay=seconds Take screenshot after specified delay [in seconds]
+ -s, --silent Saves the screenshot without showing the app window
+ overrides --options, saves to home folder as png
+
+Note: OPTION -b, --border takes only effect when used with -w, --window
+
Pas d'entrée : normalement, un double clic sur les fichiers pris en charge assure le lancement.
+
Localisation :
/boot/system/apps/ShowImage
+
Réglages :
~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings
+
+
+
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
StyledEdit is Haiku's simple text editor. Although it saves files in plain text format, additional attributes are written in order to have limited formatting capabilities when viewed with StyledEdit.
+
+
If you're interested, this is what those additional attributes look like when examined in Terminal with listattr:
+
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+ Int-32 4 "be:encoding"
+MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Int-32 4 "wrap"
+ Int-32 4 "alignment"
+ Raw Data 1048 "styles"
+
+1071 bytes total in attributes.
+
As you can see, all the formatting options from StyledEdit's menu are present: line wrapping (on/off) and alignment (left/center/right), each in one attribute. Styles (font, size, color) of each letter mangled into another.
+
Because these attributes are a file system feature of BFS, this means that not only other platforms just see a plain text file, it also follows, that the formatting will be lost when a file is stored on a non-BFS partition. The above attributes are simply stripped and what's left is the ordinary, plain text file.
+
In any case, it's a nice idea having the possibility of colored text in different fonts and sizes while still being a normal text file. A ReadMe.txt, for example, is therefore readable in a shell on any platform and still has a bit of style when viewed via double-click from Haiku.
+
Actually using StyledEdit is so simple, we'll skip explaining every mundane menu item. Just write down your text then select the words you'd like to format and apply font, size and color from the Font menu. Line wrapping and alignment from the Document menu only work on the whole file.
~/config/settings/Terminal_settings
+~/.profile - ajoute/remplace les paramètres /boot/system/etc/profile par défaut.
+~/.inputrc - ajoute/remplace les paramètres /boot/system/etc/inputrc par défaut.
+
+
+
Le Terminal est l'interface de Haiku à bash, le Bourne Again Shell.
+
Please refer to the topic on Scripting for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.
You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALTN from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open another tab with ALTT.
+
Une fenêtre du Terminal peut être redimensionnée comme toute autre fenêtre ou en utilisant le menu Settings | Window Size. ALTENTRÉE permet de basculer en mode plein écran.
+
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
+
+
+
Settings | Preferences opens a panel where you can set font type, font size and the different text and background colors. You can save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal.
+Pressing OK will save the current settings as default.
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/etc/.
+
+
.profile
+
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
+
The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
The .inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:
+
+
Insert Path
Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.
+
Change Directory
Changes to the folder of the dragged file.
+
Create Link Here
Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Move Here
Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Copy Here
Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
+
You can open any file with its preferred application with the command open [filename]. This also works with the representation of the current (".") and parent ("..") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
Vision est un client IRC originellement développé pour BeOS. Une documentation est un traqueur de bogues consacrés à ce programme sont disponibles sur le site web de Vision.
+
Vous pouvez obtenir l'aide d'utilisateurs et de développeurs de Haiku sur les canaux IRC de Haiku dans plusieurs langues.
+Le canal le plus fréquenté est #haiku at irc.freenode.org (anglophone).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/userguide/fr/applications/vlc.html b/userguide/fr/applications/vlc.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3715b84a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/userguide/fr/applications/vlc.html
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ VLC media player
+
+
+
+
+
WonderBrush est un éditeur d'images bitmap et vectorielles. Pour obtenir plus d'informations et des ateliers consacrés à ce logiciel, consultez le site Web YellowBites
+ et la documentation locale.
Les attributs sont des champs de données associés à un fichier, mais qui ne font pas partie intégrante de ce fichier, c'est à dire qu'ils ne sont pas comptés dans sa taille et qu'ils peuvent être copiés ou modifier sans modifier le fichier lui-même.
+Le système utilise ces attributs pour enregistrer entre autres la taille des fichiers, leur type et leur date de modification. Ceci est similaire au fonctionnement d'autre systèmes d'exploitation et de leurs systèmes de fichiers.
+
En plus de ce mécanisme commun, Haiku vous permet d'ajouter n'importe quel attribut à n'importe quel fichier et de l'afficher ou de l'éditer dans une fenêtre Tracker. Vous devez juste définir le type d'attribut (chaîne de caractères, entier, date...) que vous voulez ajouter à un type de fichier donné et lui donner un nom et une description.
+
Les fichiers en eux-même n'ont pas besoin de contenir quoi que ce soit. Par exemple, jetez un œil à ces fichiers People :
+
+
+
Comme vous pouvez le voir, ce sont tous des fichiers vides (de taille 0) avec des attributs attachés, comme par exemple l'attribut "E-mail" de "John Nox" qui est en cours d'édition directement depuis le Tracker.
+
Si ces attributs sont indexés, ce qui est par défaut le cas des fichiers People, Email et audio, ils pourront être recherchés via le système de requêtes rapide de Haiku.
Les attributs sont affichés de manière similaire à celle d'une base de données ou d'un feuille de calcul. Le Tracker vous permet de choisir quels attributs (colonnes) afficher et comment trier les fichiers (lignes) d'après ceux-ci.
+
Pour ce faire, ouvrez une fenêtre Tracker, cliquez sur le menu Attributes et sélectionnez les attributs que vous voulez afficher. Vous pouvez également effectuer un clic droit sur l'en-tête de la fenêtre et cocher les éléments dans le menu contextuel. Vous pouvez réarranger les colonnes par un simple glisser-déposer, et supprimer celles inutiles en les glissant hors de la fenêtre.
+
Double-cliquez sur la ligne entre deux attributs dans l'en-tête pour redimensionner une colonne à sa taille optimale.
+
Cliquez l'en-tête d'une colonne pour basculer l'ordre d'affichage entre croissant et décroissant.
+Vous pouvez mettre en place un ordre de tri secondaire en pressant la touche MAJ tout en cliquant sur un en-tête. De cette manière, vous pouvez par exemple trier vos fichiers People par compagnie, puis par nom de contact. Voyez la capture d'écran précédente pour un exemple. L'ordre de recherche secondaire est indiqué par un indicateur grisé à côté du titre de l'en-tête.
+
Il est aussi facile d'éditer ces attributs que les noms des fichiers : Cliquez sur un champ, ou bien tapez ALTE et déplacez-vous entre les attributs avec les touches TAB et MAJTAB. ESC Permet de quitter le mode édition sans sauvegarder les changements.
Si vous préférez utiliser la ligne de commande ou souhaitez modifier un grand nombre d'attribut à l'aide de scripts shell, vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs commandes de contrôle d'attributs depuis un Terminal.
En l'appelant sur un des fichiers de l'exemple précédent, voici le résultat :
+
~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters
+File: Clara Botters
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Text 14 "META:name"
+ Text 6 "META:nickname"
+ Text 1 "META:company"
+
+ Text 18 "META:address"
+ Text 8 "META:city"
+ Text 1 "META:state"
+ Text 1 "META:zip"
+ Text 1 "META:country"
+
+ Text 1 "META:hphone"
+ Text 13 "META:wphone"
+ Text 1 "META:fax"
+ Text 19 "META:email"
+ Text 1 "META:url"
+
+ Text 5 "META:group"
+ Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le"
+
+131 bytes total in attributes.
+
Hormis les attributs "META:*" qui contiennent les informations sur le contact en question, deux attributs sont directement gérés par le système :
+
+
BEOS:TYPE indique le type du fichier, sous forme de type MIME, ici "application/x-person". Il permet de déterminer l'icône du fichier et l'application utilisée pour l'ouvrir quand vous double-cliquez dessus.
+
"_trk/pinfo_le" est utilisé par le Tracker pour mémoriser la position de l'icône du fichier.
+
Notez l'antislash après "Clara". Dans le Terminal, vous devez "échapper" certains caractères spéciaux comme '"*\$?!. L'espace entre "Clara" et "Botters" est aussi un caractère spécial. On place donc un antislash devant celui-ci pour qu'il se comporte comme un caractère normal.
addattr ajoute un attribut à un fichier et/ou définit sa valeur.
+
usage: addattr [-t type] attribut valeur fichier1 [fichier2...]
+ or: addattr [-f valeur-depuis-fichier] [-t type] attribut fichier1 [fichier2...]
+
+ Le type peut être:
+ string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, raw
+ ou une valeur numérique (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...)
+ Le type par défaut est "string"
+
Donc si par exemple Clara vient de commencer à travailler pour la multinationale Barkelbaer Inc., vous pourrez remplir le champ "Company" qui était vide avec cette information (qui est de type "string", chaîne de caractères) :
+
~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters
rmattr supprime complètement un attribut d'un fichier.
+
+
usage: rmattr [-p] attribut fichier1 [fichier2...]
+ 'attribut' est le nom d'un attribut du fichier.
+ Si '-p' est spécifié, 'attribut' est considéré comme un motif de recherche.
+
Même s'il serait suffiant de ne pas remplir l'attribut "Fax", vous pouvez le supprimer complètement du fichier de Clara en tapant :
Les "scripts" sont des fichiers texte contenant des commandes, permettant d'automatiser l'exécution de ces commandes.
+Lorsque vous lancez un script, chacune des commande est exécuté l'une après l'autres, comme si vous les aviez entrées manuellement dans le Terminal.
+Les scripts peuvent aussi bien être utilisés pour simplement exécuter quelques commandes que pour écrire de véritables programmes réalisant des tâches complexes.
Etant donné que les scripts dépendent naturellement du shell (interpréteur de commandes) qui les exécute, vous devriez d'abord vous familiariser avec le shell Bash qui est fourni avec Haiku. Celui-ci étant très utilisé, de nombreuses ressources sont disponibles en ligne. Par exemple, vous pouvez consulter ce document de Johan Jansson : Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS (en anglais).
Après avoir avoir commencé votre découverte du shell, vous pourrez entrer dans le monde des scripts. À nouveau, vous pourrez trouver de nombreux tutoriels et références, en ligne ou non. Une bonne introduction, relativement bien adaptée à Haiku est disponible au chapitre Scripts (PDF, 900kb) de la “Bible BeOS” de Scot Hacker (en anglais).
Le système Haiku lui-même utilise un certain nombre de scripts. Les procédures de démarrage et d'arrêt sont gérés par ces derniers. Vous pouvez compléter ces processus à l'aide de scripts utilisateur.
+Si les scripts mentionnés n'existent pas, vous devrez les créer vous-même. Sinon, ajoutez simplement les commandes que vous souhaitez à l'endroit désiré.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript sera exécuté après que le système ait terminé son processus de démarrage.
+Par exemple, vous pouvez demander le lancement automatique de certains programmes à chaque démarrage :
N'oubliez pas de terminer la commande par un "&" (ce qui lance le processus concerné en tâche de fond), sinon le script restera bloqué jusqu'à ce que la commande se termine (c'est à dire quand le programme lancé sera fermé).
+
+
Une autre manière de faire ceci est de placer des liens vers les applications à lancer dans le dossier /boot/home/config/boot/launch. Ceci peut être fait en effectuant un clic droit sur l'application que vous voulez lancer automatiquement, en choisissant Create Link (créer un lien) et en allant jusqu'au dossier mentionné.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript sera exécuté au début du processus d'arrêt. Si ce script renvoie une valeur de retour non nulle, l'arrêt sera annulé.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript sera exécuté à la fin du processus d'arrêt. Veuillez noter que la majorité des services du système auront déjà été arrêtés à ce stade.
Le chargeur de démarrage de Haiku peut vous aider à résoudre certains problèmes de support matériel, et à choisir quelle installation de Haiku démarrer si vous en avez plusieurs (par exemple sur un CD d'installation ou sur une clef USB).
+Il peut également s'avérer utile si un composant logiciel que vous avez installé empêche le démarrage de votre ordinateur : l'option Disable user add-ons mentionnée ci-dessous démarrera Haiku sans charger les composants (généralement des pilotes) en question.
+
Pour accéder aux options du chargeur de démarrage, vous devez appuyer sur la touche ESPACE juste après le début du démarrage. Le délai étant très court, le plus simple est d'appuyer dessus de manière répétée jusqu'à ce que le menu apparaisse.
+
+
Ceci fait, vous aurez accès à trois menus :
+
+
Select boot volume
Vous permet de sélectionner l'installation de Haiku à démarrer.
+
Select safe mode options
+
Ces options sont utiles en cas de problème relatif au support matériel. Si vous placez le curseur de sélection sur une option, une courte description de celle-ci s'affichera en bas de l'écran.
+
- Safe mode (Mode de démarrage minimal)
+- Disable user add-ons (Désactiver les extensions utilisateur)
+- Disable IDE DMA (Désactiver l'optimisation DMA du bus IDE)
+- Use fail-safe video mode (Mode vidéo sans échec)
+- Don't call the BIOS (Eviter les appels au BIOS)
+- Disable APM (Désactiver la gestion d'énergie APM)
+- Disable ACPI (Désactiver la gestion d'énergie avancée ACPI)
+- Disable IO-APIC (Désactiver le gestionnaire d'interruptions IO-APIC)
+- Enable serial debug output (Envoyer les messages de déboguage sur le port série)
+- Enable on screen debug output
+(Afficher les messages de déboguage sur l'écran)
+
Select fail safe video mode
Si vous avez activé l'option Use fail-safe video mode, vous pouvez utiliser ce menu pour choisir une résolution et une profondeur de couleur.
+
+
+
Après avoir activé une ou plusieurs options, vous pourrez retourner au menu principal et continuer le démarrage. Pendant celui-ci, un écran de démarrage sera affiché :
+
+
+
Si tout fonctionne correctement, chaque symbole devrait s'illuminer, l'un après l'autre.
+Ces symboles correspondent grossièrement aux étapes de démarrage suivantes :
+
+
Atome
Initialisation du noyau et des modules.
+
Disque dur avec loupe
Création du système de fichier racine (/) et montage du système de fichiers devfs (/dev).
+
Carte d'extension
Initialisation du gestionnaire de périphériques.
+
Disque de démarrage
Montage du disque de démarrage.
+
Puce
Activation des fonctionnalités spécifiques au processeur.
Vous trouverez ci-dessous des informations sur les principaux aspects de Haiku. La complétion et l'extension de la documentation se fait bien sûr en continu. Si vous trouvez des erreurs, souhaitez faire des suggestions où même contribuer à l'écriture ou la traduction de ce guide, veuillez rentrer en contact avec la liste de diffusion consacrée à la documentation.
+Si vous êtes intéressé pour contribuer à la traduction, vous trouverez sur i18n User Guide Wiki des informations sur ce point.
Il existe de sympathiques petits jeux et applications de démonstration pour votre divertissement. La majorités ce ces programmes sont destinés aux développeurs qui sont intéressés par l'apprentissage du code, Tout est bien sûr open source comme le reste de Haiku.
La Deskbar est le petit panneau qui se trouve par défaut dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran. C'est la version Haiku de la barre des tâches Windows avec le bouton Démarrer. Elle contient menu Deskbar, d'où vous pouvez lancer les applications et les préférences, dessous, un cartouche héberge une horloge ainsi que d'autres outils, et en bas, la liste des programmes en cours.
+
+
Vous pouvez déplacer la Deskbar dans l'un des coins ou le long d'une bordure de l'écran en la saisissant par la zone d'accroche qui se trouve à coté du cartouche. Vous pouvez aussi la réduire en une présentation plus compacte en faisant glisser zone d'accroche sur le menu de la Deskbar.
Show Replicants - Affiche/cache le petit gadget du Réplicant que vous utilisez pour le déplacer, le supprimer ou accéder à son menu contextuel.
+
Mount - Offre les mêmes options que lorsqu'il est appelé par un clic droit sur le bureau (voir le montage des volumes).
+
Deskbar Preferences... - Ouvre le panneau de configuration de la Deskbar (voir ci-dessous).
+
Shutdown - Propose les options de redémarrage (Restart System) et d'extinction (Power Off).
+
Recent Documents, Folders, Applications - Liste des derniers documents, dossiers et applications ouverts récemment (voir Deskbar Preferences ci-dessous).
+
Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, Preferences - Liste des applications installées, démos, appliquettes et préférences (voir Deskbar Preferences ci-desssous).
+
+
+
+Préférences de la Deskbar
+
+
+
Menu
+Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.
+The button Edit Menu... opens the folder /boot/home/config/be/. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, and Preferences.
+You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.
+
It's even easier to simply drag a file, folder or saved query and drop it where you want it into the Deskbar.
+
Window
+
+
Always on Top
The Deskbar always stays above all other windows.
+
Auto Raise
The Deskbar pops to the front if the mouse pointer touches it.
+
+
Applications
+
+
Sort Running Applications
Sorts the list of running programs alphabetically.
+
Tracker always First
Even if you sort alphabetically, the Tracker entry always stays first in the list.
+
Show Application Expander
Provides a small widget to show/hide all windows of a program directly under its entry in the Deskbar.
+
Expand New Applications
Newly launched programs have their windows automatically expanded under their entry in the Deskbar.
Entre autres choses, le cartouche héberge l'horloge. Un clic gauche dessus fait basculer entre la date et l'heure. Un clic droit dessus vous permettra de la cacher, de l'afficher ou de lancer les préférences de l'heure pour en définir les paramètres.
+Ici, vous pouvez également lancer un calendrier qui apparaît aussi, lorsque vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton gauche de la souris sur l'horloge un petit moment.
+
Tout programme peut installer une icône dans le cartouche pour fournir une interface à l'utilisateur. Le système de courrier électronique, par exemple, montre un symbole différent quand il ya du courrier non lu et offre un menu contextuel pour, par exemple créer ou vérifier les nouveaux messages. ProcessController est un autre exemple qui installe son icône dans le cartouche pour fournir des informations (utilisation du CPU et de la mémoire) et dispose d'un menu contextuel.
Vous pouvez changer pour une application spécifique en cours d'exécution en cliquant sur son entrée dans la barre de Bureau et de choisir une de ses fenêtres, dans le sous-menu. Par un clic droit vous pouvez réduire ou fermer une fenêtre ou l'application entière.
+
Si vous avez activé l'élargissement (Application Expanders) dans les paramètres de la Deskbar, vous pouvez agrandir / réduire les fenêtres directement dans la liste sous l'entrée d'une application.
+
En face de chaque fenêtre, on trouve un symbole qui fourni des informations sur son état. Un symbole lumineux signifie qu'une fenêtre est visible, un sombre qu'elle est minimisée. Trois lignes devant le symbole indique que ce n'est pas sur l'espace de travail actuel.
Pour organiser les raccourcis vers vos applications préférées ou vers vos documents vous pouvez démarrer une ou plusieurs appliquettes LaunchBox.
+vous choisissez pour chacune d'elle, si elle est affichée seulement sur l'espace de travail actuel ou sur tous.
+Elles peuvent également servir à ouvrir rapidement un document dans une application spécifique.
+Par exemple, pour ouvrir un fichier HTML dans un éditeur de texte, plutôt qu'avec son application préférée, le navigateur, faites glisser son icône sur celle de l'éditeur dans la LaunchBox.
+
+
Toutes les options sont accessibles depuis le menu contextuel :
+
+
Add Button Here
Ajoute un bouton vide.
+
Clear Button
Vide un bouton.
+
Remove Button
Supprime un bouton.
+
Settings
+- Horizontal Layout
+- Icon size
+- Ignore Double-click
+- Show Window Border
+- Auto Raise
+- Show On All Workspaces
+Aligns the buttons horizontally.
+Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.
+Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.
+Shows the window border.
+LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge.
+Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace.
+
Pad
+- New
+- Clone
+- Close
+Add a new pad.
+Duplicate the current pad.
+Close the current pad.
+
LaunchBox
+- About...
+- Quit
+Shows the About window.
+Quits all LaunchBox pads.
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - Conserve la position de la fenêtre du panneau de configuration.
+
+
+
+
You find the Workspaces applet with the other Desktop Applets in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.
+Change Workspace Count... will open the Screen preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).
+
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure Show Replicants is activated in the Deskbar menu).
To move a window, you grab it in the Workspaces applet and simply drag it to another workspace. This has the advantage, that you can move it without leaving your current desktop. Of course, that only works well when there aren't too many windows in a workspace and your target isn't obscured by other windows. Another possibility is to grab a window by its tab and just holding on to it while switching workspaces with ALTFx.
+
For more information on workspaces in general and more keyboard shortcuts, see topic Workspaces.
L'organisation des fichiers est assez transparente dans Haiku. En essayant de toujours utiliser des noms explicites pour les fichiers et les dossiers, l'utilisateur n'a pas besoin de faire de suppositions. Les fichiers et dossiers qui sont importants pour le bon fonctionnement du système, sont protégés des atteintes accidentelles par l'affichage d'une de ces alertes :
+
+
+
Le second message d'alerte apparaît si vous essayez de renommer ou de supprimer quelque chose à l'intérieur du système. Ici, le bouton "Do it" ne deviendra cliquable qu'en maintenant enfoncée la touche MAJ.
+
Généralement, la racine du volume de démarrage se divise en trois dossiers distincts :
+
+
/boot/system/
appartient au système. N'y touchez pas !
+
/boot/common/
contient les fichiers qui sont partagés entre les utilisateurs.
+
/boot/home/
est votre dossier personnel où vous conservez vos données et paramètres.
Under Haiku's predecessor BeOS, this folder was named /boot/beos/. You may still find it in some older documentation (e.g. in the original BeBook).
+Whatever it's named, you should not alter what's inside. Every update of Haiku can add, remove or overwrite anything within it. If you want to add functionality, maybe with other Tracker Add-Ons or Translators or maybe another hardware driver, you install these things under your own /boot/home/ hierarchy or, if it's supposed to be for every user, under /boot/common/. As long as Haiku isn't multi-user, this distinction has no apparent effect, as there's only one user with one home folder. But since there will be support for more users than one eventually, it makes sense to learn the right way from the start.
+
Admettons que vous vouliez installer un nouveau traducteur pour le dernier format d'image. Ne le copiez surtout pas dans le dossier système approprié. Rappelez-vous : vous ne devez pas y toucher !
+Placez le plutôt dans l'une des hiérarchie miroir sous /boot/common/ ou /boot/home/config/.
+
Dans notre exemple, l'emplacement des traducteurs dans le système serait le dossier
+
/boot/system/add-ons/Translators/
+
Ainsi, le dossier "miroir" de l'utilisateur est soit
Cela a un autre avantage: si le composant que vous avez installé sème la pagaille (ce qui est possible comme les pilotes de matériel s'installent aussi de cette manière) vous pouvez choisir "Disable User Add-Ons" dans le menu du Chargeur de démarrage, et ainsi, vous êtes toujours en mesure de démarrer sans le composant fautif.
+
La plupart du temps, cependant, vous n'aurez pas à vous en préoccuper, car tous les logiciels fiables comprennent une routine d'installation qui gère ces choses.
+
+
Pour le moment Haiku n'est pas un système multi-utilisateurs. Néanmoins, quand il le sera, chaque utilisateur aura son propre dossier personnel (home) inaccessible aux autres. Toutes les applications ou composants ajoutés, comme les extensions du Tracker, les traducteurs et les données qui sont censés être partagés entre différents utilisateurs, doivent être placés sous /boot/common/.
This folder belongs to you. Here you can create and delete files and folders as you wish. However, you shouldn't mess too much with the ~/config/ directory and its subfolders. You could delete e.g. the ~/config/settings/ folder without damaging the operating system itself, but who wants to lose all his configurations and application settings? In any case, the system warns you with the at the top mentioned alert.
+
Besides the ~/config/add-ons/ folder, which mirrors the system's add-ons folder for additional components as described above, there are a few other folders of interest. (By the way, the tilde ("~") is a shortcut for your home folder, so you don't always have to write "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
+
+
~/mail
+
Par défaut, c'est là que vos mails sont conservés.
+
+
~/queries
+
Par défaut, les Requêtes sont temporairement stockées dans ce dossier pendant 7 jours.
+
+
~/config/be/
+
Again from our BeOS legacy, the be folder contains what's shown in the Deskbar menu. You can add and remove items by putting files, folders, links or queries into this folder.
+
+
~/config/bin/
+
Complète le dossier système /boot/system/bin/ et contient tous vos programmes en ligne de commande.
+
+
~/config/boot/
+
This folder is the place for User Scripts that are executed before or after the system boots up or shuts down.
+
+
~/config/boot/launch/
+
Les liens vers les programmes ou les documents contenus dans ce dossier sont automatiquement lancés à chaque démarrage.
+
+
~/config/fonts/
+
Il suffit de copier une police TrueType ou PostScript dans ce dossier pour quelle devienne disponible de partout.
+
+
~/config/settings/
+
Ce dossier contient les paramètres de toutes les applications et quelques configurations pour le système. Certaines applications gèrent leurs paramètres dans leurs propres sous-dossiers, d'autres mettre simplement leur fichier de configuration ici.
+
+
~/config/settings/beos_mime/
+
Dans cette base de données MIME, Haiku conserve tous les différents types de fichiers et leurs paramètres.
+
+
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/
+
There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here!
+
+
~/config/settings/Tracker/
+
Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders:
+
+
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Affichez et organisez les attributs comme vous aimez, et définissez la taille de fenêtre. Chaque nouveau dossier que vous créez l'utilise comme modèle.
+
+
DefaultQueryTemplates/
Vous pouvez définir la disposition des fenêtres de résultat de requête pour certains types de fichiers. Voir Requêtes : La fenêtre de résultats.
Ajouter un modèle pour tout type de fichier. il sera laors disponible dans le menu File | New... du Tracker. voir le sujet Tracker : gérer vos fichiers.
Haiku ne se base pas comme Windows sur les 3 lettres de l'extension du nom du fichier pour déterminer son type (par example .txt, .jpg, .mp3).
+Cette méthode de secours n'est utilisé qu'en dernier ressort.
+Haiku utilise un type MIME comme c'est l'usage sur Internet.
+
Même si il n'y a aucune raison d'utiliser les extensions de fichier dans Haiku, n'oubliez pas de les ajouter aux fichiers que vous souhaitez partager avec les utilisateurs d'un autres systèmes d'exploitation, par exemple quand vous envoyer un e-mail, quand vous le copiez vers un serveur ou sur une clé USB. Le cas échéant, leur système pourrait ne pas reconnaître le type du fichier.
You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the Add-Ons | Filetype add-on from the right-click context menu.
Ce qui précède est un fichier PNG qui a pour chaîne MIME image/png. Disons que vous savez que ce n'est pas un PNG mais un GIF. Vous pouvez modifier le type en entrant
+la chaîne MIME correcte à la main, ou en utilisant l'un des deux boutons sous la zone de texte :
+
+
Select...
affiche la liste hiérarchique des types de fichiers dans lesquels vous pouvez naviguez jusqu'à image | GIF Image.
+
Same as...
Ouvre une boite de dialogue fichier dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir n'importe quel fichier du type que vous rechercher.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
+
+
The Default Application is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons Select... and Same As... which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype Add-On of a file that contains an icon and drag&drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
If you invoke the Filetype Add-On on an executable (here: StyledEdit), you'll get a different dialog:
+
+
En haut, plutôt qu'une chaîne MIME normalisée, vous verrez la signature unique de l'application. Elle permettra au système de trouver où se trouve le programme.
+
En dessous, vous trouverez plusieurs drapeaux qui contrôlent le comportement des applications :
+
+
Single Launch
Une seule instance de l'application peut être exécutée par fichier exécutable.
+Néanmoins, si vous avez deux copies de cette application, elles peuvent fonctionner côte à côte.
+
Multiple Launch
Plusieurs instances de l'application peuvent s'exécuter simultanément.
+
Exclusive Launch
Il n'est autorisé qu'une seule instance avec cette signature d'application à la fois.
+
Args Only
Indique que l'application ne répond pas aux messages.
+
Background App
L'application n'apparaitra pas dans Twitcher ou dans la liste des applications en cours de la Deskbar.
+
+
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's Open with... context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
+
Au bas, vous trouverez la version et le copyright. Comme la signature de l'application, ils sont remplis par l'auteur de l'Application et ne devraient pas être modifiés.
The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
+
Tous les types de fichiers et leurs configurations sont conservés dans /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Avant de commencer vos expérimentations, il peut être prudent de faire une sauvegarde de ce dossier...
Haiku's graphical user interface is an integral part of the system. Unlike Unix-based operating systems, there's no separate window manager and booting just into a command line shell is not possible. Haiku's focus being on the desktop user, this is just not considered necessary.
+
Comme vous avez sans doute déjà expérimenté d'autres environnements graphiques, nous allons sauter les standards tels que les menus, les menus contextuels sur clic droit, le glissé&déposé, etc Regardons plutôt les quelques aspects uniques de l'interface graphique de Haiku.
+
+
Il n'y a que peu de choses dans l'interface graphique de Haïku qui ne sont pas évidentes et qui méritent une explication.
+
+
La Deskbar est un peu le menu "Démarrer" et la barre des tâches. Voir le sujet Deskbar.
+
L'onglet jaune ne sert pas seulement à afficher le nom du programme ou du document :
+
Vous pouvez le déplacer en maintenant la touche MAJ enfoncée tout en le faisant glisser à une autre position, ce qui vous permet d'empiler un nombre de fenêtres et d'y avoir accès facilement par un onglet nommé.
+
Vous pouvez minimiser un fenêtre avec un double-clic sur son onglet (ou avec CTRLALTM). Une fenêtre ainsi cachée peut être accédée via son entrée dans la Deskbar ou dans Twitcher.
+
Vous pouvez envoyer une fenêtre à l'arrière plan avec un clic droit sur son onglet (ou sa bordure).
+
Le bouton de fermeture.
+
The "zoom" button (or CTRLALTZ). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size. It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.
+
Le coin de redimensionnement. Tirer la bordure d'une fenêtre d'un autre endroit déplacera la fenêtre.
+
+
Tout en pressant CTRLALT, vous pouvez cliquer n'importe où dans une fenêtre avec le bouton gauche de la souris pour la déplacer alors que le bouton droit de la souris l'enverra à l'arrière plan.
Lorsque vous ouvrez ou enregistrez un fichier à partir d'une application, un panneau comme celui-ci apparait :
+
+
It has all the usual things: A list of files of the current folder to choose from, in case of a save panel, a text field to enter a filename and a pop-up menu for different file formats and their settings.
+You can enter parent folders with the pop-up menu above the file listing.
+
If you already have a Tracker window with the location for a file open, you can simply drag either any file or the folder-representation (i.e. the symbol to the far right in its menu bar) into the panel. This changes the panel to that new location.
De nombreux raccourcis dans les panneaux Ouvrir et Enregistrer sont les mêmes que ceux utilisés dans le Tracker. En plus des commandes qui sont également disponibles via le menu File, il y en a quelques unes moins évidentes :
The Favorites menu in open and save panels provides recently visited folders and favorite locations that you can set up yourself. As indicated by the little arrow, you can also use these locations to navigate further down the hierarchy via submenus.
+
+
To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose Favorites | Add Current Folder. From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose Favorites | Configure Favorites... and delete its entry.
+All Favorites are kept in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. So you might as well add and remove links to files and folders there directly.
Les réplicants sont de petites applications autonomes, qui peuvent être intégrés dans d'autres programmes. Pour peu que l'option Show Replicants soit activée dans la Deskbar, vous reconnaîtrez une partie réplicable d'une application par sa petite poignée, généralement situé dans son coin inférieur droit.
+
+
L'endroit le plus important qui accepte les réplicants est le bureau : faites-y simplement glisser leur petite poignée.
+Le Réplicant fait maintenant partie du bureau, et l'application d'origine n'a pas besoin d'être démarrée pour que cela fonctionne.
+Un clic droit sur la poignée d'un Réplicant ouvrira un menu contextuel, où About vous affichera une fenêtre avec l'application d'origine, et d'où vous pourrez supprimer le Réplicant (Remove Replicant).
+
Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec un Replicant sur le bureau et que vous ne pouvez pas vous en débarrasser, supprimez ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. Malheureusement, cela enlèvera tout les réplicants du bureau.
Les attributs et les requêtes sont des caractéristiques clés de Haiku. Alors que les attributs sont utiles par eux même, pour afficher des informations supplémentaires d'un fichier, ils doivent être indexés pour faire l'objet d'une requête. Ainsi, ils sont classés dans une liste, ce qui rend les requêtes rapides comme l'éclair.
+L'indexation fait partie du système de fichiers et est conservée dans chaque volume ou partition séparément.
+
+
Commandes d'indexation dans le Terminal
+
Il existe plusieurs commandes pour gérer les indexes :
+
+
lsindex - Affiche les attributs indexés sur le volume ou la partition actuel.
+Voici les attributs qui sont indexés par défaut :
mkindex - Ajoute l'indexation d'un attribut à un volume ou à une partition.
+
+
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute>
+Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume to which the index will be added,
+ defaults to current volume.
+ -t, --type=TYPE the type of the attribute being indexed. One of "int",
+ "llong", "string", "float", or "double".
+ Defaults to "string".
+ --copy-from path to volume to copy the indexes from.
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being created
+
+
+
Seuls les nouveaux fichiers portant cet attribut sont pris en compte automatiquement dans l'index !
+Les fichiers existants doivent être ajoutés manuellement en les copiant et en supprimant les originaux par la suite. Sinon, vous pouvez utiliser l'outil reindex.
+
+
reindex - Insère les attributs des fichiers existants dans l'indexation nouvellement créée sur le volume ou la partition.
+
+
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories>
+ -r enter directories recursively
+ -v verbose output
+ -f create/update all indices from the source volume,
+ "attr" is the path to the source volume
+
+
+
+
rmindex - Retire l'indexation d'un attribut à un volume ou à une partition.
+
+
Usage: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME
+
+Removes the index named INDEX_NAME from a disk volume. Once this has been
+done, it will no longer be possible to use the query system to search for
+files with the INDEX_NAME attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume from which the index will be
+ removed
+ -h, --help display this help and exit
+ -p, --pattern INDEX_NAME is a pattern
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being removed
+
+INDEX_NAME is the name of a file attribute.
+
+If no volume is specified, the volume of the current directory is assumed.
By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALTC and ALTV integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRLC quits the running process.
+
In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide will always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
+
If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
Additionally to the general shortcuts, here are some more for navigating with Tracker:
+
+
ALT↑
Ouvre le dossier parent.
+
ALT↓ or ENTRÉE
Ouvre le dossier sélectionné.
+
ALT
Holding it while opening a folder will automatically close the parent folder. This also works when navigating with the mouse.
+
MENU
Ouvre le menu de la deskbar (sortie avec ESC).
+
ALTZ
Undo last action. The undo history is only limited by the available memory. Note, this only works for actions on the file itself, changed attributes and permission settings can't be undone with this. Also, once a file is removed from Trash it's gone for good.
fait défiler d'une ligne vers le haut ou vers le bas la sortie du Terminal.
+
MAJPageUp/PageDown
fait défiler d'une page vers le haut ou vers le bas la sortie du Terminal.
+
TAB
Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press TAB once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press TAB twice to have all matches listed.
+
↑/↓
Remonte ou descend dans la liste de l'historique des commandes entrées précédemment.
+
CTRLR
Bash history. All the commands you enter
+are stored in the file ~/.bash_history. Press CTRLR and start to enter a command and you'll be provided with the first match from the bash history. Keep pressing CTRLR until you find the right command line and press ENTER to execute it.
Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des éléments de/à une sélection en appuyant sur une touche de modification en cliquant sur une entrée (ou un fichier dans le cas du Tracker).
+
+
MAJ
Cela permet de sélectionner tout les éléments entre le premier sélectionné et celui sur lequel vous cliquez.
+
ALT
Ajoute ou retire l'élément sur lequel vous cliquez de la sélection.
+
+
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
+The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
While a key philosophy of Haiku is to cut down on options and have sensible defaults instead, there are some things that have to be configured or can be set to individual preference. You find all panels in Deskbar's Preferences menu.
Dans le premier onglet, Couleurs, vous pouvez régler les couleurs de différentes parties de l'interface utilisateur. La palette de couleurs accepte les glisser-déposer de couleurs depuis d'autres programmes, ce qui vous permettra de glisser des couleurs depuis par exemple WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic, ou les préférences Backgrounds.
Le deuxième onglet, Lissage, permet de régler la manière dont les éléments graphiques sont rendus à l'écran.
+
+
+
+Hinting de glyphes
+
Si activé, Hinting de glyphes aligne les lettres de manière à ce que leurs bords horizontaux soient situés entre deux pixels. Ceci permet un meilleur contraste, en particulier pour le texte en noir sur blanc. Ce dernier apparaît plus net. Le réglage "Fontes en pas fixe seulement" est spécialement utile pour les écrans à base résolution comme ceux des netbooks. Sur ceux ci le hinting peut donner un mauvais résultats avec des polices de petite taille, mais avec ce réglage vous pourrez conserver les avantages du hinting dans les éditeurs de texte et le Terminal.
+
Voyez les différences induites par le hinting entre ces deux captures d'écrans agrandies :
+
+
Hinting désactivé
Hinting activé
+
+
Notez que ces captures d'écran de l'application Magnify sont bien sûr réalisées avec des réglages de hinting différents. Vous pouvez donc voir l'effet du réglage sur le texte de l'onglet jaune et celui de la fenêtre ("33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel").
+
+
+
+Type de lissage
+
Une autre technique d'amélioration de rendu est le lissage, qui concerne aussi bien les graphismes vectoriels que le texte. Il adoucit les lignes en changeant la couleur de certains pixels.
+Il y a deux méthodes:
+
Niveaux de gris change la luminosité des pixels des bords.
+Sous-pixel LCD donnera un meilleur rendu sur les écrans LCD haute résolution. Au lieu de changer l'intensité du pixel, il change sa couleur, ce qui permet de déplacer le bord d'un élément d'une fraction de pixel (car sur les écrans LCD les composantes rouge, vert et bleu sont séparées).
+
À nouveau, voici les deux méthodes présentées sur deux captures d'écran :
+
+
Niveaux de gris, hinting désactivé
LCD subpixel, lissage activé
+
+
Le lissage sous-pixel ajoute une bordure colorées aux objets, que vous pourriez ne pas apprécier. Dans Haiku, vous pouvez mélanger les deux méthodes de lissage et trouver le bon réglage pour vous en déplaçant un curseur.
+
Le lissage sous-pixel combiné au hinting est soumis à un brevet logiciel et n'est donc pas disponible par défaut. Désolé. En fonction de votre lieu de résidence, vous pourrez peut-être vous procurer une version débridée. Parlez-en à vos représentants.
+
Si vous activez le hinting et le lissage sous-pixel en modifiant les sources de Haiku et en recompilant l'ensemble, voici ce que vous obtiendrez par rapport au hinting avec niveaux de gris :
+
+
Niveaux de gris, hinting activé
LCD sous-pixel, hinting activé
+
+
+
En bas du panneau, vous trouverez deux boutons :
+
+
Défaut
restaure toutes les valeurs par défaut.
+
Revert
rétablit les réglages qui étaient actifs quand vous avez lancé les préférences d'Apparence.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - Enregistre la position du panneau de préférences
+
+
Vous pouvez définir une couleur, ou une image de fond pour chaque fenêtre ou espace de travail.
+
+
+
Le menu déroulant en haut de la fenêtre indique si vos changements s'appliquent à l'espace de travail courant, à tous les espaces, à la fenêtre d'un dossier spécifique ou aux nouveaux dossiers créés.
+
En dessous, vous pouvez choisir une image de fond. Sélectionnez None si vous voulez juste un fond coloré. Vous pouvez également glisser-déposer une image sur l'écran de prévisualisation à gauche de la fenêtre.
+
Si vous utilisez une image, vous pouvez choisir sa position :
+
+
Manual
vous permet de choisir les coordonnées. Vous pouvez déplacer manuellement l'image ou entrer les valeurs X et Y manuellement.
+
Center
centre l'image au milieu de l'écran.
+
Scale to fit
élargit l'image pour qu'elle occupe tout l'écran (sans conserver son rapport hauteur/largeur)
+
Tile
répète l'image sur tout l'écran.
+
+
Si vous cochez Icon label outline, un fin contour sera affiché autour du nom des icônes.
+
La couleur du nom lui-même dépend de la couleur de fond choisie. Ce sera le blanc si vous choisissez une couleur sombre, le noir si il s'agit d'une couleur claire. Par conséquent, si vous utilisez une image de fond très claire, vous devriez aussi choisir une couleur de fond claire afin que les noms d'icônes soient affichés en noir (et donc plus lisibles), ou utiliser l'option d'affichage du contour ci-dessus.
+La couleur choisie est aussi utilisée pour l'appliquette Workspaces : celle-ci ne prend pas en compte les images de fond.
+
+
Revert
rétablit les réglages qui étaient actifs lrosque vous avez démarré les préférences Backgrounds.
~/config/settings/* - Chaque traducteur crée son propre fichier de paramètres ici quand vous changez ses paramètres par défaut.
+~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Conserve les positions de la fenêtre du panneau de configuration
+
+
Chaque application a la capacité d'ouvrir et d'enregistrer tous les formats de fichier pour lequel il y a un traducteur installé. Les paramètres de ces traducteurs peuvent être configurés dans le panneau de préférences DataTranslations.
+
+
+
En fonction de ses aptitudes, chaque traducteur vous proposera des réglages différents. Au minimum, vous obtiendrez un bouton Info... qui ouvre une fenêtre avec les crédits et le chemin d'installation.
+Le tableau suivant donne un aperçu des traducteurs par défaut avec leurs options les plus utiles.
+
+
BMP Images
24 bits, non compressé, sans transparence
+
EXR Images
Format d'image à grande gamme dynamique (HDR), conçu par ILM
+
GIF Images
8 bits, compression sans pertes, transparence
+Vous pouvez réduire la taille des fichiers GIF en réduisant le nombre de couleurs et la taille de la palette.
+Vous pouvez enregistrer des images avec transparence, soit en utilisant un canal alpha, soit en choisissant manuellement la valeur RVB qui sera transparente.
+
JPEG2000 Images
24 bits, compression avec pertes, pas de transparence
+Le paramètre le plus important est celui réglant la qualité de sortie.
+
JPEG Images
24 bits, compression avec pertes, pas de transparence
+En plus du réglage de qualité de sortie, vous pouvez activer l'adoucissement (smoothing) qui réduira les artefacts mais peut rendre l'image légèrement floue.
+
PCX Images
24 bits, non compressé, pas de transparence — Format d'échange Paintbrush
+
PNG Images
32 bits, compression sans perte, avec transparence
+
PPM Images
24 bit, non compressé, pas de transparence — Format Portable PixMap
+
RAW Images
jusqu'à 48 bits, non compressé, pas de transparence
+
RTF Text Files
Texte avec mise en forme
+
SGI Images
24 bits, compression sans pertes optionnelle, transparence
+
StyledEdit Files
Texte avec mise en forme
+
TGA Images
32 bits, compression sans pertes optionnelle, transparence
+
TIFF Images
24 bits, compression sans pertes optionnelle, transparence
Les copies d'écran, les graphiques, les dessins en noir et blanc et d'autres image avec peu de couleurs devraient être de préférence enregistrées en GIF (jusqu'à 256 couleurs) ou PNG (milions de couleurs). Si vous choisissez le format JPEG, par exemple, l'image compressée présentera des artéfacts, sans gain réelle sur la taille compressée.
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
+The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
+You start by clicking the Add button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
+
+
First, declare the Account Type which is either Receive Mail Only, Send Mail Only, or the most usual type, Send and Receive Mail. Then you set how you get your mail, via POP3 or IMAP.
+
Now you enter your E-mail Address, Login Name and Password, give an Account Name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real Name.
+
If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses and the following information is already filled in automatically. If that is not the case, just follow this guide and fill in the details to your e-mail account accordingly.
Click on Incoming under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.
+
+
From the pop-up menu you choose the protocol used by your provider. IMAP and POP3 are supported.
+
Next is the Mail Server address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+
Then you enter your login information, Username and Password, and if necessary change the Login Type from the default Plain Text to APOP for authentication.
+
If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to Leave mail on server and only Remove mail from server when deleted locally.
+
If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to Remove mail from server when deleted locally. You can specify a Top Mailbox Folder to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
+
The New Mail Notification offers different methods to announce the arrival of new mail. Try different settings to see what works best for you.
+
You can change the Location of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
+
Last on this page, you can opt to only Partially download messages that are larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
Click on Outgoing under your account's name to set up how e-mails are sent.
+
+
As with incoming mail, you can also change the Location of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
+
Next is the SMTP Server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+
If you need to login, you change the Login Type to ESMTP and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with POP3 before SMTP for identification.
If you want to filter your incoming email, you click on E-Mail Filters under your account's name to set up automatic sorting. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other. You can rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.
+Besides the R5 Daemon Filter that's used for backward compatibility, there are two other Incoming Mail Filters you can add.
+
+
+
+Filtre anti-pourriel
+
+
The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
+You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
+Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
+
Together with the following Match Header filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+
+
+
+Match Header
+
+
Ce filtre effectue une action quand une entête correspond au modèle recherché.
+Dans la première zone de texte, vous indiquez quel attribut de l'entête vous souhaitez examiner.
+Vous avez le choix entre :
+
+
Name
+
Nom de l'expéditeur
+
From
+
Adresse e-mail de l'expéditeur
+
To
+
votre adresse e-mail (différent pour chacun de vos comptes e-mail)
+
Reply To
+
adresse e-mail à laquelle les réponses sont à expédier
+
When
+
date et heure de réception du courrier
+
Subject
+
objet du message
+
Cc
+
adresse de ceux qui reçoivent un copie carbonne (Cc) du courrier
+
Account
+
nom du compte e-mail
+
Status
+
The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail.
+
Priority
+
Importance que l'émetteur a accordé au message (par exemple : "urgent").
+
Thread
+
Objet du premier message de la conversation. Correspond au "Subject", mais sans les indicateurs "Re:" ou "Fwd:"
+
Classification Group
+
depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"
+
Spam/Genuine Estimate
+
this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.
+
+
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
+
Avec la liste déroulante en dessous, vous affectez une action lorsque le motif est reconnu. Vous pouvez déplacer ou supprimer un mail, modifier son statut, ou encore définir le compte e-mail avec lequel vous répondrez.
+
+
+
+Configurer les filtres d'envoi
+
At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
+ It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
+
+
Under Mail Checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
+If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that Only When Dial-Up is Connected and also Schedule Outgoing Mail When Dial-Up is Disconnected to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
+
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up Never, While Sending, While Sending and Receiving or Always.
+
Make sure to Start Mail Services on Startup or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
+
Edit Mailbox Menu... will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
+
From that menu, you can also Create New Message..., Check For Mail Now or Edit Preferences....
+
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/fonts
+~/config/settings/Font_settings - Conserve la position de la fenêtre du panneau de configuration.
+
+
+
+
Haiku met à disposition 3 polices standards répondant chacune à un besoin différent.
+La taille et le type de police que vous associerez aux types simple, gras et à espacement fixe, seront utilisées dans tout le système.
+Par ailleurs, il existe aussi un réglage séparé de la police utilisée dans les menus.
+
+
Défaut
restaure toutes les valeurs par défaut.
+
Revert
restaure les paramètres qui étaient actifs quand vous êtes entré dans les préférences des polices.
Vous installez de nouvelles polices en les copiant dans leurs dossiers utilisateurs respectifs, i.e. /boot/common/fonts/ ou /boot/home/config/fonts/ (voir le sujet Structure du système de fichiers).
Réglez la vitesse de répétition et le délai à partir duquel une touche enfoncée commence à répéter. Vous pouvez tester vos paramètres dans le champ de texte en bas.
+
+
Défaut
restaure toutes les valeurs par défaut.
+
Revert
restaure les paramètres qui étaient actifs quand vous êtes entré dans les préférences du clavier.
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Dossier où sont conservés les dispositions de claviers modifiés par l'utilisateur.
+~/config/settings/Key_map
+
+
+
+
To the right, the Keymap window shows a representation of your keyboard. When you press a key, the corresponding key is darkened and the assigned symbol is entered into the Sample and Clipboard text field at the bottom. From there you can also copy and paste it into a document.
+Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but are also useful when looking for a special symbol used in other languages. For example, you can switch the keymap to "French", find the "ç" and copy it into your mail to François. (Though you'll find the "cedil" also in other keymaps...)
+
Quand vous pressez les touches modificatrices comme MAJ, CTRL ou OPTION, le clavier affiché est modifié en conséquence.
+
Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
+
Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+
+
Select Dead Keys
for setting the above mentioned blue keys.
+
Switch Shortcut Key...
for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT).
+
+
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap via drag&drop in the keyboard representation: a left-click-drag copies a key, a right-click-drag exchanges the two keys.
+When you're done you can save the result from the menu File | Save.... Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via File | Open....
+
To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the Layout menu.
+
The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the Font menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
+
Finally, there's a Revert button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
+
You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
+
keymap -d MyKeymap
+
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
+At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use e.g. SpicyKeys.
+
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+
keymap -l MyKeymap
+
This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
~/config/settings/Media/*
+~/config/settings/System Audio Mixer
+~/config/settings/MediaPrefs Settings - Conserve la position de la fenêtre du panneau de configuration.
+
+
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
Set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click. A middle-click is also simulated by clicking left and right button together. Useful for notebooks, which mostly don't have a 3rd button.
+
Vous pouvez réorganiser les boutons de la souris en choisissant leur nouvelle affectation dans menu contextuel qui apparait quand vous cliquer au dessus.
+
Les curseurs à droite, vous permettent de régler la vitesse du double-clic, vitesse de la souris et l'accélération.
+
Focus follows mouse means, that you don't have to click into a window to activate it. There are three modes:
+
+
Enabled
La fenêtre sous le pointeur de la souris est automatiquement activée, mais ne passe pas au premier plan.
+
Warping
Choosing a window from Deskbar or the Twitcher will have the mouse pointer glide smoothly toward it.
+
Instant-Warping
Choosing a window from Deskbar or the Twitcher will have the mouse pointer jump instantly toward it.
+
+
Tous les réglages sont appliqués immédiatement.
+
+
Défaut
restaure toutes les valeurs par défaut.
+
Revert
Restaure les réglages qui étaient actifs lorsque vous êtes entré dans le panneau de configuration de la souris.
En haut, vous choisissez la carte réseau à configurer.
+
Ensuite, vous précisez si vous obtenez votre réseau automatiquement (via DHCP) ou si vous utilisez des adresses statiques. Si vous choissez cette dernière solution, vous aurez à remplir l'adresse IP, le masque réseau, la passerelle et les serveurs DNS vous-même. Sinon, le panneau affiche les adresses obtenues avec DHCP.
+
+
Revert
Restaure les paramètres qui étaient actifs lorsque vous avez commencé à modifier les préférences Réseau.
Cette documentation n'est pas encore disponible. Si vous voulez y travailler, veuillez
+l'annoncer sur la Liste de diffusion pour la documentation pour éviter les doublons.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Seulement quand vous êtes en mode VESA.
+~/config/settings/Screen_data - Conserve la position de la fenêtre du panneau de configuration.
+
+
Chaque espace de travail peut avoir sa propre résolution et sa profondeur de couleur.
+
+
La liste déroulante en haut, indique si vos modifications sont appliquées uniquement au bureau virtuel actuel ou à tous.
+Les deux autres listes déroulantes contiennent les résolutions et les profondeurs de couleurs disponibles pour votre carte graphique.
+
Après avoir cliqué sur Apply, le mode graphique est changé et un message d'alerte s'affiche, vous demandant de maintenir ou d'annuler les modifications. Si vous n'avez pas répondu à cette alerte, le mode graphique revient après 12 secondes au réglage précédent. Vous pouvez ne pas voir l'alerte si votre moniteur ne supporte pas le réglage.
+
À gauche, vous pouvez définir le nombre de bureaux virtuels, les disposer en lignes ou en colonnes et ouvrir Backgrounds pour modifier le fond d'écran.
+
Revert restaure les paramètres qui étaient actifs lorsque vous avez démarré le panneau de préférences de l'écran.
La case à cocher en haut Active/désactive l'économiseur d'écran.
+Avec le curseur au-dessous, vous contrôlez le temps d'inactivité au bout duquel l'économiseur d'écran entre en jeu.
+
The next two sliders are only usable after you activated their checkboxes:
+One slider determines after how many minutes the screen is powered off.
+The other, after how many minutes you need a password to unlock your machine.
+
+
By clicking into different corners of the two screens at the bottom, you tell the system when to immediately start the screen saver or when to prevent it from kicking in when you rest the mouse in the indicated corner. Click in the middle of the screens to disable that feature again.
+
The second tab shows a list of all installed screen saver modules and their individual settings. You can test your settings with the Test button below the list and add modules with the Add... button beside it. Other ways to install new screen savers is by a simple drag&drop into the list. Of course, you can also copy/delete a module's file in its respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/add-ons/screensavers/ or /boot/home/config/add-ons/screensavers/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
+
Vous pouvez attribuer des sons à certains événements du système. Il suffit de sélectionner un événement de la liste et de choisir un son dans la liste déroulante en dessous.
+
+
None
rend l'évènement silencieux.
+
Other...
Ouvre une boite de dialogue pour rechercher un nouveau fichier son qui ne serait pas déjà disponible dans la liste déroulante.
+
Vous pouvez utiliser n'importe quel format supporté par le système. Si le MediaPlayer peut le gérer, alors il peut être utilisé par n'importe quel autre programme.
+Vous pouvez écouter un aperçu du son d'un événement en le sélectionnant et en utilisant les boutons Play et Stop.
~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings
+~/config/settings/timezone - Un lien vers le fuseau horaire en cours dans /boot/system/etc/timezones/*/*
+~/config/settings/Time_settings - Conserve la position de la fenêtre du panneau de configuration.
+
+
Le panneau de configuration de l'heure est divisé en 2 onglets :
Sur la gauche, vous pouvez régler le jour du mois en cliquant simplement dessus dans le calendrier. Vous pouvez changer le mois et l'année en cliquant dessus, en utilisant les flèches haut / bas à droite ou les touches fléchées de votre clavier.
+
L'heure se règle de la même manière. Il existe deux modes pour l'horloge :
Selectionnez simplement votre emplacement
+dans la liste déroulante puis dans la liste des villes et appuyez sur Set Time Zone pour définir votre fuseau horaire.
+
Revert restaure les paramètres qui étaient actifs quand vous êtes entré dans le panneau de configuration de l'heure.
Le panneau de préférences Tracker est également disponible depuis n'importe quelle fenêtre Tracker grâce au menu Window | Preferences....
+Ses fonctions sont indiquées sur les pages consacrées au Tracker.
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory
+~/config/settings/VM_data - Enregistre la position du panneau de préférences.
+
+
La mémoire virtuelle permet au système de placer une partie de l'espace mémoire des applications sur le disque dur, si la RAM peut être utilisée pour d'autres tâches plus utiles. Même si vous avez beaucoup de RAM, activer la mémoire virtuelle n'est jamais une mauvaise idée.
+
+
Les disques durs actuels fournissant beaucoup d'espace, vous devriez pouvoir au moins allouer une taille de mémoire virtuelle égale à celle de la mémoire physique, ou d'avantage. Néanmoins, vous pouvez aussi baisser cette taille si l'espace libre sur votre disque dur devient faible. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez utiliser DiskUsage pour trouver ce qui consomme votre espace disque.
+
En temps normal, le fichier d'échange (qui contient la mémoire virtuelle) est écrit sur la partition de démarrage. Les opérations de lecture/écriture sur le disque dur concerné seront ralenties lorsque le système utilisera la mémoire virtuelle. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, vous pouvez essayer d'utiliser une partition sur un autre disque dur pour la mémoire virtuelle. Utiliser une autre partition du disque dur de démarrage ne suffira pas.
+Augmenter la quantité de RAM de votre ordinateur sera bien sûr plus efficace…
+
+
Défaut
restaure toutes les valeurs par défaut.
+
Revert
rétablit les réglages qui étaient actifs quand vous avez démarré les préférences VirtualMemory.
Une requête est une recherche de fichiers basée sur des attributs de fichiers et peut être réalisée dans le Tracker ou dans le Terminal. Les requêtes sont sauvegardées dans /boot/home/queries/ et par défaut, elles sont conservées sept jours avant d'être purgé. Vous remarquez que ce ne sont pas des listes statiques de résultats de vos recherches, mais ce sont des formules de requête qui déclenchent une nouvelle recherche chaque fois que vous les ouvrez.
+Mieux encore, vous n'avez pas à double-cliquer à nouveau pour rafraichir une requête. Vous pouvez explorer une requête enregistrée, tout comme n'importe quel dossier en effectuant un clic droit sur elle et en naviguant dans les sous-menus.
Vous commencez une requête en invoquant le menu Find... à partir du menu de la Deskbar, de n'importe quelle fenêtre du Tracker ou directement à partir du bureau (ce dernier est en fait une fenêtre du Tracker en plein écran). Le raccourci est ALTF. Voici une présentation de la fenêtre de recherche :
+
+
+
Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as Query Template.
+
Réduisez votre recherche de "Tous les fichiers et les dossiers" (All files and folders) à un type de fichier spécifique.
+
Define the search method:
+
by Name - a basic search by file or folder name
+
by Attribute - an advanced search, you specify search terms for one or more attributes
+
by Formula - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term
+
Selection des disques/volumes à interroger.
+
Entrez le terme recherché.
+
Un agrandisseur cache/montre les options supplémentaires.
+
Décochez la case Temporary (Temporaire) si vous ne voulez pas que cette requête s'efface après 7 jours.
+
Cocher si votre requête est supposé inclure la corbeille (Include trash).
+
En option, saisissez un nom pour cette requête si vous souhaitez l'enregistrer.
+
Vous pouvez glisser&déposer l'icône pour sauvegarder la requête. En le faisant avec le bouton droit, vous aurez le choix de sauver le modèle de la requête.
Si vous souhaitez simplement trouver tous les fichiers sur vos disques montés dont le nom correspond à un certain motif, laissez simplement la méthode de recherche "by name", entrez le terme recherché dans la zone de texte et pressez ENTRÉE.
Vous pouvez créer des requêtes plus complexes en faisant une recherche dans les attributs de fichiers d'un type spécifique. Pour que cela fonctionne, ces attributs doivent être indexés.
+
+
You start by setting the filetype from All files and folders to, for example, Text | E-mail and change the search method to by Attribute.
+
This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons Add and Remove under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With Add and Remove you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
+
Faisons par exemple une requête sur un e-mail :
+
+
This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Botters has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "vibraphone" or "skepticality".
+As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
+A good way to cut down the number of search results.
Saisir une formule de requête manuellement est rebutant et assez peu pratique. Elle a néanmoins son utilité.
+
Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to by Formula mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
+
+
la même chose, sous forme de texte, édité pour plus de lisibilité :
Vous pouvez copier et coller la chaîne dans un e-mail, un forum ou sur IRC pour que d'autres puissent l'utiliser ou la déboguer.
+
En construisant une requête en mode Attribute, puis en passant en mode Formula, Vous pouvez générer facilement une chaîne de recherche à utiliser pour une requête dans le Terminal ou dans un script.
+
You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
Après avoir lancé une recherche, la fenêtre de recherche va être remplacée par une fenêtre de résultat. Voici un exemple qui a demandé "server" :
+
+
Hormis leur fond gris, les fenêtres de résultat fonctionnent exactement comme n'importe quelle autre fenêtre du Tracker. Certaines choses méritent d'être noter :
+
+
Vous pouvez ouvrir le dossier dans lequel se trouve le fichier ou le dossier en cliquant deux fois sur l'attribut "Path".
+
With File | Edit Query or ALTG you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
+
A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with Attributes | Paste Layout.
If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
+By using the Save Query as Template menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
+
Où que vous choisissiez d'enregistrer les modèles de requêtes, ils seront énumérés dans la liste des requêtes récentes de la fenêtre recherche.
Avec CTRLALTDEL vous invoquez le Team Monitor qui répertorie tous les programmes en cours..
+
+
Les programmes qui ont été lancés par le système sont en bleu, ceux de l'utilisateur sont en noir.
+Les applications qui ne répondent pas, ce qui signifie souvent que le programme a planté, sont marqués en rouge. Vous pouvez tuer un programme en le sélectionnant et en appuyant sur le bouton Kill Application.
+
Vous pouvez assigner un terminal avec ALTMAJT.
+
Si la barre des tâches ou le Tracker a planté ou gelé, un nouveau bouton apparaît (il vous faudra peut-être tuer la tâche fautive au préalable) : Restart the Desktop redémarrera le Tracker et/ou la barre des tâches pour vous.
Applications can install add-ons so they can be invoked easily on a selection of files from Tracker. Only the add-ons that can handle a specific filetype are presented under Add-Ons from the context menu or the File menu of a Tracker window. Some add-ons don't necessarily need a file to work on and are thus always present.
+
Les extensions du Tracker, ou des liens vers des applications qui peuvent agir en tant que add-ons, peuvent être installés dans trois endroits différents (voir le sujet Structure du système de fichiers):
+
+
/boot/system/system/add-ons/Tracker/
pour les extension fournies par le système.
+
/boot/common/add-ons/Tracker/
Pour les extensions disponibles pour tous les utilisateurs.
+
/boot/home/config/add-ons/Tracker/
pour les extensions seulement disponibles pour vous.
+
+
The file name of an add-on can be suffixed with a dash and capital letter, and is then available via keyboard shortcut. For example, Open Target Folder-T opens with ALTOPTT.
+Of course, you have to take care of possible shortcut collisions when deciding on a shortcut. You can't have the same for different add-ons.
Ces extensions du Tracker sont livrés avec chaque installation Haiku :
+
+
Background-B
+
Opens the Background preferences to change the color or image of the Desktop or any folder. Invoked on an image file the Background panel is launched with that image already loaded as a potential background.
+
DiskUsage-I
+
Starts the DiskUsage application with the according folder as basis.
+
FileType-F
+
Invoked on a file, opens its specific FileType panel, otherwise the general FileTypes preferences are launched.
+
Open Target Folder-O
+
Ne peut être utilisé que sur un fichier lié, pour ouvrir le dossier dans lequel se trouve le fichier cible.
+
TextSearch-G
+
Starts the TextSearch application to look for a string in the selected folder (and its subfolders).
+
ZipOMatic-Z
+
Une sélection de fichiers seront ajoutés à une archive zip. Invoquée sans sélection, un panneau s'ouvre pour créer une archive par glisser&déposé.
The Tracker is the graphical interface to all your files. It let's you create new files and folders or find, launch or rename as well as copy or delete existing ones.
+
Being an application like any other (the Desktop with its icons is really just a fullscreen window in the background), Tracker appears with its windows in the Deskbar and can be quit and restarted. The easiest way to quit and restart a crashed or frozen Tracker (or a wayward Deskbar) is to call the Team Monitor.
In order to access a harddisk, CD, USB stick etc., you first have to mount the volume, that is, let the system know it's there. This is done with a right-click on the Desktop or an already mounted volume (like the boot disk) and choosing the volume from the Mount submenu. You find the same Mount menu in the Deskbar.
+
+
There are also Mount Settings so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.
+The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.
+
Before you disconnect e.g. a harddrive or USB stick, make sure you have successfully unmounted the volume. This guarantees that all data transfer has finished. Otherwise you may lose data or corrupt the disk!
By default, when you double-click a folder, Tracker opens a new window while leaving the parent window open. This can quickly lead to an overcrowded desktop.
+You can prevent that by holding down the OPT key, which automatically closes the parent window.
+This is also true for keyboard navigation. For more on that, see topic Shortcuts and key combinations.
+
Moving through your folders is one of Trackers main purposes, just like the file managers on other platforms. Haiku's Tracker has some unique features that will help you doing that efficiently.
Instead of double-clicking your way down folder after folder, there's a better way to drill down:
+
+
+
Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/home/config/.
+If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
+
vous pouvez utiliser une méthode similaire dans n'importe quelle fenêtre du Tracker :
+
+
Click on the area in the lower left, where the number of items is listed, and you'll get submenus for every level above your current location. From there you can drill down through the folders as usual.
+
Note, that the Desktop is always the topmost level as that is where Tracker shows mounted volumes. So, if you want to go to another disk, you first have to navigate to the top (Desktop) and cross over to your other disk from there.
+
You'll get the same submenu-navigating when you drag a file over a folder. After a short while of hovering, a submenu pops up and you can drill down to your destination. If you initiated the drag with the right mousebutton, you can choose between copying, moving or linking the file when you release the mouse.
You may be familiar with the concept from file managers of other operating systems: typing the first few letters of a filename will jump to the first file matching these starting characters. Haiku took the idea a step further. If there isn't a file starting with those letters it will jump to the first file including the string anywhere in its name. And if there's nothing with the string in its filename, the attributes are searched next.
+
+
In the above example, there are many files starting with "Haiku logo", rendering simpler approaches to typing ahead quite useless. In Haiku however, typing "web" jumps right to its first occurence in "Haiku logo - website". The characters you enter appear in the bottom left corner where you normally find the item count of all files in the folder. A second after entering a character, the display jumps back to normal and you're ready for a new type ahead search.
Les fenêtres du Tracker offrent trois modes d'affichage différent à partir du menu Window :
+
+
Icon View (ALT1) - Grandes icônes, vous pouvez modifier la taille à partir du sous-menu ou bien agrandir/réduire leur taille avec ALT+/ALT-.
+
Mini Icon View (ALT2) - Petites icônes.
+
List View (ALT3) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide available attributes. (See topic Attributes.)
+
+
Le menu Window offre de nombreuses autres fonctions :
+
+
Resize Window (ALTY) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
+
Clean Up (ALTK) - Aligne toutes les icônes sur une grille invisible. Si vous maintenez la touche MAJenfoncée, le menu devient Clean Up All, ce qui en plus, triera toutes les icônes par ordre alphabétique.
Close (ALTW) - Ferme la fenêtre.
+Si vous maintenez la touche MAJ enfoncer, le menu deviendra Close All, ce qui fermera toutes les fenêtres du Tracker.
+
Close All in Workspace (ALTQ) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
+
+
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete Clean Up (ALTK). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
+
The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.
Window | Preferences... opens a panel that offers a number of settings that, where not obvious, should become clear once tried out. Since all settings are applied live, you'll immediately see the changes.
+ So, in short, the not so obvious settings:
+
+
Desktop - Decide if all mounted disks appear directly on the Desktop or in a window after clicking a single Disk icon sitting on the Desktop.
+
Windows - You can set Single Window Navigation, i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of it's parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the OPT key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size.
+
+
+
+
Before you switch Tracker to Single Window Navigation mode, because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a Navigator where you can enter or copy&paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.
+
Date and Time - Règle le format de la date et de l'heure.
+
Trash - Défini le comportement pour une suppression de fichier.
+
Volume Icons - Set the color of an optional indicator of free space that's shown besides a disk's icon.
+
+
This panel, by the way, is also available as Tracker from Deskbar's Preferences.
When invoked on a selected file, most of the File menu commands are also offered in the context menu by right-clicking that file.
+
Comme d'habitude, les commandes sont assez claires.
+
+
Find... - Find a file or folder. See topic Query for more info.
+
New - Create a new folder or any other file based on a template.
+
+
+
+
Choosing Edit Templates... opens the folder /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the New menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype text/plain. See topic Filetypes for more info.
+
Open With... - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
+
+
+
+
The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type text/plain. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here text/*. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the Open With... entry instead, a panel opens:
+
+
+
Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the Open and Make Preferred button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here text/plain.
+
Get Info
+
+
+
The panel presents info on the selected file and lets you set the default application and, after you expanded that part of the panel, permissions and owner. Clicking on the path will open it in a Tracker window.
+
Edit Name, Duplicate and Move to Trash - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.
+
Move to, Copy to and Create Link - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.
+
Cut, Copy and Paste - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding SHIFT while invoking the menu you can Copy/Cut more files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding SHIFT you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.
+
Identify - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with wget which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu changes the item to Force Identify which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.
+
Add-Ons - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic Tracker Add-ons for more information.
When you copy, move or delete files, Tracker shows its progress with a status window. If you initiate more than one transaction, each job gets its own status display.
+
+
To the right are two buttons to pause or stop a transaction entirely. Sometimes it can be useful to temporarily pause a large transaction. For example, you may need to quickly launch a large application. Copying large amounts of data chokes your harddisk's IO bandwidth and thus delays your workflow.
Twitcher est un commutateur de tâches permettant de basculer entre les logiciels actifs et leurs fenêtres.
+
+
Avec CTRLTAB vous basculer de l'application en cours vers l'application ou la fenêtre précédente. Avec CTRL et plusieurs TAB très rapides, vous pourrez commuter entre toutes les applications.
+En maintenant les touches CTRLTAB appuyées, vous pourrez alors naviguer dans la liste de toutes les applications en cours avec les touches TAB ou ←/→.Si vous avez besoin d'accéder à une fenêtre spécifique d'un programme, déplacez vous sur son icône comme cela est décrit plus haut, puis passez à travers ses fenêtres ouvertes avec les touches ↑/↓.
+
Vous parcourez l'ensemble des fenêtres des applications visibles sur l'espace de travail actif avec CTRL2 (ce qui correspond, selon le clavier que vous utilisez, à la touche juste en dessous de ESC).
+
Il est aussi possible d'appeler Twitcher avec CTRLTAB et ensuite d'utiliser la souris pour choisir l'application ou la fenêtre vers laquelle vous serez redirigé quand vous relâcherez la touche CTRL.
+
Twitcher possède en plus quelques raccourcis claviers avancés:
+
+
ESC
Abandonne la commutation et retourne à la fenêtre précédemment active.
+
Q
Quitte l'application selectionnée.
+
H
Cache toutes les fenêtres de l'application sélectionnée.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/userguide/fr/workshop-filetypes+attributes.html b/userguide/fr/workshop-filetypes+attributes.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0dab7988
--- /dev/null
+++ b/userguide/fr/workshop-filetypes+attributes.html
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Atelier : Types de fichiers, Attributs, Index et Requêtes
+
+
+
+
+
Atelier : Types de fichiers, Attributs, Index et Requêtes
+
+
This is a workshop to show the use of Attributes, Queries, the Index and custom Filetypes. As an example, we build a database to keep track of our DVD library.
Let's first decide what filetype and attributes would serve our needs. Originally, I wanted to use a Bookmark file with a link to the movie's IMdB page, but Haiku doesn't have a "bookmarkable" browser like BeOS' NetPositive at the moment, so I came up with this: The file itself will be a JPEG image for the movie cover.
+To that we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to query it later (then we have to add it to the index) and if so, what type of attribute it should be. Numbers (int, float) can be evaluated differently than text (</=/> vs. is/contains/starts with).
+
Here are the attributes I'd like to see for my DVDs:
+
+
Titre du film
+
Genre
+
URL to e.g. IMdB
+
Réalisateur/Acteurs
+
Plot
+
Ma note de 1 à 10
+
Coordinates in my shelf, e.g. A2, B3, so I find the DVD also in Real Life :)
Start the Filetypes preferences, and click on the Add... button below the hierarchical list on the left. A small dialog opens and you specify in which MIME Group your new filetype will reside. You can also create a completely new group. Let's put it into "applications" and set the "Internal Name" to DVDdb.
Double-click the icon well to open Icon-O-Matic to design an icon for your filetype. You can also drag&drop an icon from the icon well of another type, maybe as starting point for a modified version.
You can add suffixes like .txt, .jpg, .mp3 to recognize files by their extention. Useful when working with files from systems without MIME typing. We don't need that for our example.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked.
+
+
Select...
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
+
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
Here we enter all the custom attributes we decided on in our preparations. Clicking the Add... button opens a panel:
+
+
+
Attribute Name - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.
+
Internal Name - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.
+
Type - Defines the value the attribute can hold and therefore how it can be queried.
+
+
String for normal text
+
Boolean for binary data: 0 or 1
+
Integer for integer numbers with different ranges:
+
+
8 bit: ± 255
+
16 bit: ± 65,535
+
32 bit: ± 4,294,967,295
+
64 bit: ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615
+
+
+
Float for floatingpoint numbers, single precision
+
Double for floatingpoint numbers, double precision
+
Time for time and date format
+
+
+
+
+
Visible - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:
+
Display As - Leave on "Default". In the future more option will become available, e.g. a bar or stars for a rating etc.
+
Editable - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker.
+
Width - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window.
+
Alignment - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned.
Before we start entering data in our little DVD database, we should add certain attributes to the Index. Only indexed attributes can use Haiku's fast Queries.
+So, what will we be searching in the future? We probably won't ask "What's in the B4 coordinate in my shelf?" or "Does the IMdB URL or the plot of the movie contain the word 'pope-shenooda'?".
+
This leaves these attributes:
+
+
Nom interne
Type d'attribut
+
DVDdb:title
text
+
DVDdb:genre
text
+
DVDdb:cast
text
+
DVDdb:rating
int-32
+
+
+
To index them, we open a Terminal and simply add one attribute after the other:
Now, everything's set and we can begin putting some data into our base.
+Since our basic file is a cover image, we go to some online resource like IMdB, look for our first movie and save the cover or movie poster in a new folder where we want to keep our DVDdb files.
+
Opening that folder we see a typical Tracker window with one JPEG in it. Right-clicking it, we change its filetype to application/DVDdb with the Filetype Addon. There's more info on this in the Filetypes document.
+
Now, we activate all our DVDdb attributes from the Attributes menu of the Tracker window and rearrange the columns to our taste:
+
+
By clicking on a yet empty attribute (or pressing ALTE) we enter editing mode and fill each attribute. With TAB and SHIFTTAB you can navigate between attributes.
+
In our example, we usually start with a downloaded JPG cover and change its type to applications/DVDdb. There's another elegant way to produce a file to work with. Just copy an empty file of our filetype to /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates and rename it to DVDdb.
+
Right-clicking into a Tracker window, you'll find a new entry under New... besides the default "New folder".
Several hours of grunt work later, we have a nice little database that you can query to find all your Christina Ricci movies that have a 7+ rating... :)
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.
+Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder and rename it to group/filetype, replacing slashes with underscores; in our case "applications_DVDdb".
+
Open the new folder and paste in the layout with Attributes | Paste Layout. Voilà:
Workspaces are virtual desktops, complete with their own resolution, color depth and background. Up to 32 of these workspaces can be set from the Screen preferences.
You switch between workspaces by either clicking into the Workspaces applet (which is seen in the above image) or by using the keyboard shortcut ALTFx, where "x" is the workspace number. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
+Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send you to the workspace it's in.
+
Another very convenient way is to use CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ to navigate spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. If you additionally hold down SHIFT, the active window will move with you to the new workspace.
+
You can switch back and forth between two workspaces with ALT` (the actual key depends on the keymap you're using - it is the key below ESC). Again, holding SHIFT will take the active window with you.
Before diving into all the applications that come with Haiku, let's have a more detailed look at how to install and uninstall programs you downloaded somewhere, for example from a site mentioned on the Welcome page.
+
You should only unpack/install archives within Haiku. If you extract a package under Linux or Windows, for example, and just copy the folder over to Haiku later, all the vital attributes are stripped, because those operating systems don't normally handle meta data.
Haiku software always comes as an archive. Most of the time it's a ZIP, some old BeOS packages come in Software Valet's PKG format. Software Valet was able to automatically execute installation scripts, so after double-clicking you just select a destination folder and everything's taken care of.
+If it's a ZIP archive, double-clicking opens Expander where you also set the destination and unpack it. As explained in the topic Filesystem layout, that destination is either
+
+
/boot/common/apps/
for applications available to every user
+
/boot/home/apps/
for applications only available to yourself
+
+
This distinction will only become relevant once Haiku gets multi-user support, of course.
+
Once the archive is unpacked, you should have a look into the newly created folder. Often you find ReadMe files or other documentation of interest.
+
Some programs need further configurations. For example, Tracker Add-Ons, Translators or other system enhancing components have to be put into the right folders. Either you'll find a little script file (often with the suffix .sh) like install that you simply double click to have all taken care of.
+Sometimes you'll find folders that link to the correct destination named "drag [filename] here...". So, you simply follow that instruction and you're done.
+
Most of the time, however, nothing of the sort is necessary and you're done after unpacking.
+Topics Deskbar or LaunchBox describe how to add shortcuts to your newly installed application.
If the installation was done with an install script, chances are, there's an uninstall script as well. In that case, double-click it and you're done.
+Otherwise, uninstalling is simply done by deleting the application's folder.
+
This, of course, leaves back possible configuration files in your ~/config/settings folder. This may be on purpose, if you want to keep those settings in case you'll install the program again in the future. Also, when the installation involved those "drag [filename] here..." folders, those files are also left behind.
+
One method to quickly get to all the app's files is to do a quick query for a significant part of the application's name. This will reveal the app's binary, its installation folder and its settings as well as possible links in the Deskbar etc. Simply select all relevant files and delete them.
Haiku comes with a set of mostly small but essential applications. You'll find all of them at /boot/system/apps/ or /boot/common/apps/. Applications that are not usually launched by a double-click on a data file (e.g. ShowImage for image files) can be found in the Applications menu of the Deskbar.
Besides the above listed programs, which are all maintained by the Haiku project, there are a few essential applications bundled in a standard Haiku system. Bugs and feature requests for those have to be filed with the particular maintainer.
E' possibile monitorare l'utilizzo delle risorse del sistema lanciando ActivityMonitor e attivando le diverse voci che interessano.
+
+
+
Cliccando con il tasto destro sulla finestra, potete attivare o disattivare la visualizzazione di tutti i tipi di risorse:
+Used/Cached Memory, Swap Space, CPU Usage, Network Receive/Send, Page faults, Semaphores, Ports, Threads, Teams, Running Applications, Raw/Text Clipboard Size, Media Nodes.
+
Sotto i grafici c'è una legenda (nascondibile dal menù contestuale). Potete cambiare i colori dei grafici e quello dello sfondo effettuando il drag&drop da qualsiasi color picker, ad esempio: da Icon-O-Matic.
+
Potete aggiungere più viste dal menù File se i grafici risultano troppo affollati.
+
Il menù Settings apre un pannello in cui potete settare l'intervallo di aggiornamento.
+
Ogni vista ha la sua manina Replicante e cosi può essere sistemata, ad esempio, sul desktop.
BePDF is a fast launching PDF viewer. Besides viewing, it supports annotating and user-defined bookmarking for unencrypted PDFs. It's fully localized for 20 languages at the moment with additional languages being easily added via text files.
+
Documentation is available as HTML or PDF. The latter will also open from the menu Help | Show Help....
BeZillaBrowser è basato sul codice sorgente di Mozilla con alcune modifiche per migliorare velocità, stabilità, e altri aspetti dell'interfaccia grafica. Attualmente, tutti i build di BeZilla usano il ramo CVS di Mozilla 1.8. Potete segnalare i bug di questo port a HaikuPorts.
+
Poiché i browser di Mozilla sono diffi su molte piattaforme, troverete tante guide e consigli sulla rete. Potete iniziare da http://support.mozilla.com/.
+
BeZilla non è ancora in grado di stampare. Per fortuna c'è l'add-on html2pdf che utilizza un servizio online per generare un PDF della pagina visualizzata in quel momento. Dopo l'installazione compare un piccolo simbolo PDF nella barra di stato che, se cliccato, apre una nuova finestra con un link di "Scaricamento PDF".
+Attenzione: funziona solo con pagine online, non coi documenti che avete registrato in locale.
Usage is pretty much what you'd expect from looking at the control buttons.
+Activate the Repeat button to the left of Shuffle to loop the complete CD.
+
If you need more control like playlists, try MediaPlayer instead.
CharacterMap will show you the UTF-8 code of every character a font supports.
+
+
To the left you have the standardized blocks, together with a handy filter function. Optionally, you can choose to also Show Private Blocks from the View menu. The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the Font menu. Below that you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer is displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.
+
You can drag&drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either Copy Character (ALTC) or Copy As Escaped Byte String (SHIFTALTC). Resulting in, e.g. either € or \xe2\x82\xac.
With CodyCam you take pictures at a specified interval from a connected webcam or any other video-in device and save it via FTP.
+
+
To the left under the preview, you set the filename that'll be suffixed with an increasing number for every picture taken. Beneath that you decide on the file format and the rate the pictures are taken.
+
To the right you choose either FTP or sFTP (if SSH is available) and enter the needed data to save the images on a server.
DeskCalc is a simple calculator that nevertheless has some nice features that aren't apparent on first sight.
+
+
+
DeskCalc understands much more than its simple keypad suggests.
+Besides the operators +, -, *, /, %, ^ and the constants pi and e the following math functions are supported:
+acos, asin, atan, atan2, ceil, cos, cosh, exp, floor, log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, tanh.
+
When it comes to user input, DeskCalc is quite tolerant:
+/, :, \ are all interpreted as division operators,
+*, x are valid symbols for multiplication.
+Also, be aware that . and , are both considered floating points, which means you mustn't use them as 1000 separators.
+
Right-clicking offers these options:
+
+
Enable Num Lock on start up
automatically activates the number block when launching DeskCalc
+
Show Keypad
hides the keypad when deactivated
+
+
You can resize the calculator until it fits your needs and then put it as Replicant onto the Desktop via drag&drop of the symbol in the bottom right corner. Make sure Show Replicants is activated in the Deskbar.
+
The keypad can be colored with a drag&drop from any color well, e.g. from Icon-O-Matic.
+
You can move up and down in a history of past calculations with ↑ and ↓.
+
You can select DeskCalc's contents and drag&drop it into any application. Or you drop it into a Tracker window or onto the Desktop and a text file with that clipping is created there.
+
Even better, the reverse is also possible:
+Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag&dropping them back into DeskCalc.
+Or you drag&drop a calculation directly out of an email onto DeskCalc.
+
DeskCalc can be used in Terminal. Just put the expression in double quotes, like this:
DiskProbe is a HEX editor to view and alter data of a file or on a device on a byte-level. It's a very low-level tool and has therefore the potential to really mess things up if you're not careful!
+
Always work with the backup of a file and be extra careful when working directly on a device.
+
When starting DiskProbe you'll first be asked for the file or the device to work on. After that you are presented with this interface:
+
+
The main view shows always one block of data, the size of which can be adjusted with View | BlockSize. To the left is the offset to the start of the block, in the middle the data as HEX values and to the right the same as ASCII symbols.
+You can move from block to block with the slider above or with ALT← and ALT→ and switch between the HEX and ASCII columns with TAB.
+
Block | Selection will not only show the selection with different endianess (and in HEX or decimal, set by View | Base), it will also interprete the selection as a block offset that you can jump to. It will be grayed out if the position is outside of the file/device.
+This is a handy feature mostly when looking at file systems, as they often contain pointers to other blocks.
+
If the file you're probing includes attributes, the Attributes menu can be used to open any of them in a new DiskProbe window. Here's the copyright attribute of the AboutSystem application:
+
+
Depending on the kind of attribute, you'll get a different editor tab besides the always present Raw Editor. For example, there are editors for strings and MIME types or an icon viewer for the vectoricon attribute.
DiskUsage shows graphically how the space on your volumes is utilized.
+A useful tool to answer the question, "Where has all my disk space gone?".
+
+
The concentric circles represent different levels in the file system hierarchy. Above, the circle in the center represents the /boot/home/ folder. Each segment of the ring immediately outside that circle is a file or folder under /boot/home/. Every segment farther outside brings you one level deeper in the file hierarchy. You may have to resize the window to accommodate very deep folders.
+
Above the graphic is a pop-up menu that lets you switch between all mounted volumes. Before the disk usage of a volume can be displayed, it has to be scanned. As this can take a while for larger disks, you can examine another volume while that scan is done in the background.
+
+
If the graphical representation of a file or folder comprises less than about 2° of a circle, it is excluded from the display.
+
The number of files that's reported for a folder includes files in subfolders too. A folder counts as a file.
+
DiskUsage ignores symbolic links.
+
+
As you move the mouse over a segment, information about that file or folder appears in the status bar at the bottom.
+
Right-clicking a segment offers a context menu to Get Info, Open (with Tracker), Open With another suitable application or Rescan that particular folder.
+Left-clicking a segment makes that file/folder the center circle.
+Left-clicking the center circle moves you up one level.
+
You can drag files and folders from DiskUsage to other applications or to the Desktop or other Tracker windows for copying. Vice versa, dropped volumes and folders on DiskUsage's window will zoom directly to them, making them the new center circle.
DriveSetup is a tool to create, delete and initialize partitions. At this time it can't resize or move existing partitions, so that you'll either need an unpartitioned volume (perhaps an external USB drive or another harddisk) or do the initial setup with a tool like the GParted LiveCD to provide the space for another partition.
+
+
At the top is a graphical representation of all partitions inside the device chosen in the list below it. Besides a maximum of 4 primary partitions, each of those can contain a number of extended/logical partitions. You may have to expand such a list with the +/- widget that appears in that case in front of that device to see the details of every logical partition.
+
You can select a partition from the list and mount and unmount them with the commands in the Partition menu or by pressing ALTM or ALTU.
+
You can also completely delete a partition with Partition | Delete.
+Which brings us to this:
+
Dealing with creating/deleting/initializing partitions is very dangerous business. Always check twice to be sure you're working with the right one and always keep an up-to-date backup of your data in case something goes wrong!
If you plan to use the entire drive as one partition, e.g. a USB stick or a Compact Flash card, you can skip the creation of a partition and proceed right to Initializing.
+
When you found unformatted space on a drive, like the above <empty>, you can create a new partition in this space with Partition | Create...(ALTC).
+
+
You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose Be File System if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.
+
If you have created a primary partition instead of just another extended/logical partition within one, the above dialog also displays an Active Partition checkbox. You'll have to check that, if you'll use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.
+
Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be initialized with a filesystem.
Only unmounted partitions can be initialized by using the Partition | Initialize menu.
+
+
Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
+Initializing will destroy all data on that partition!
No entry, normally launched via double-clicking a supported file.
+
Posizione:
/boot/system/apps/Expander
+
Impostazioni:
~/config/settings/Expander_Settings
+
+
+
Expander is a small tool to quickly unpack the most common archives, among them zip, gzip, bzip2, rar and tar.gz.
+Just double-click an archive to see this simple interface:
+
+
+
Source
ALTS
will open a file dialog to find an archive to unpack.
+
Destination
ALTD
will open a file dialog to set the destination.
+
Expand
ALTE
will start the unpacking. It can be aborted with ALTK.
+
+
You can toggle the display of the file listing by un/checking Show Contents or pressing ALTL.
+
Expander can only unpack whole archives.
+You can't select individual files to expand or add/remove files from the archive.
+
Edit | Preferences... or ALTP opens a preference panel that offers some useful settings to adjust Expander's behavior.
+The options are all self-explanatory:
Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
+Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
+
+
Bitmap
SVG
HVIF
+
+
1,024 byte + 256 byte
7,192 byte
768 byte
+
+
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
+
This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType Add-On on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
+
Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.
Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
+
Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
+For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
+
+
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
+
+
To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the Shape menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the Properties view.
A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure, the path is selected in the path list.
+
+
Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+
+
+
+
To get from "A" to "B", you have to transform some points from corner-points to curve-points. That's done by holding ALT while clicking on a point and dragging out the handles. This results in a symmetrical Bezier: the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click&drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
+Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
+
+
To move a point, simply click&drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
+To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
+Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
+
+
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move point(s)
+
Insert point
+
Add point
+
Delete point CTRL
+
Corner↔Bezier ALT
+
Select points SHIFT
+
+
+
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
+
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
+
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
+
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
+
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add Rectangle and Add Circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
+
+
+
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
+
Clean Up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
+
Rotate Indices Right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
+
A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
+
+
+
+
When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move
+
Resize
+
Rotate
+
Move rotation point
+
+
+
+
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.
The Shape menu offers the before mentioned possibility to Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path&Style and to Duplicate or Remove a shape. Then, there is:
+
+
Reset Transformation
Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.
+
Freeze Transformation
When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used Options | Snap to Grid to set the points at precise pixel borders.
+If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
+With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
+
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its Min LOD and above its Max LOD.
+
So, if you set a shape's Min LOD to 0.0 and the Max LOD to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
+
The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
+For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
+Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
+
+
You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag&dropping it into the list of styles.
+
If you go for a gradient, you set the type (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag&drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
+Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
+
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
There's your usual menu bar at the top, File, Edit, Options. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
+
File | Save As... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
+
+
File | Export As... opens a familiar save panel with a file format dropdown menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+
+
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
+
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
+
HVIF Source Code
Saves as source code used by programmers
+
SVG
Saves as SVG
+
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
+
PNG Set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
+
BEOS:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
+
META:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
A few things you should keep in mind when working with Icon-O-Matic and some general tips for its usage:
+
+
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, colors and shadows.
+
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
+
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
+
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
+
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag&drop or copy&paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
+
If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
+
You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click&drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click&drag while holding SPACE.
The Installer is used to copy Haiku onto another volume.
+Upon launch it displays a start window with important information. It's not a mindless EULA you're used to click away in the blink of an eye, it states:
+
+
This is alpha-quality software. Make backups or suffer the consequences!
+
The Installer needs a prepared partition. You may have to use a GParted LiveCD or a similar tool until Haiku's DriveSetup is mature enough to handle this task.
+
Haiku can be added manually to the bootmanager GRUB. In short, you have add an entry to /boot/grub/menu.lst of your Linux installation, similar to this:
+
# Haiku on /dev/sda7
+title Haiku
+rootnoverify (hd0,6)
+chainloader +1
+
+
+
Once you acknowledged with Continue, you're presented with the main window:
+
+
In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.
+The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.
+
Clicking the little expander widget will Show Optional Packages, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.
+
You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on Setup partitions... to open DriveSetup and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.
+
Begin starts the installation procedure, which basically copies everything but the home/ and common/ folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.
+
At the end of the installation procedure, the partition is automatically made bootable. However, it can happen that some other operating system or partitioning tool (accidentally) overwrites the boot sector of your Haiku volume. In this case, boot your installation CD and start the Installer. Select your Haiku boot partition from the Onto: Please Choose Target menu and click Write Boot Sector to make it bootable again.
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
+
At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 32x32 pixel square around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
+
Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
+You can move the red outline with the CURSOR keys.
+
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALTH. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
+They can also be moved with the CURSOR keys. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
+
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with OPTCURSOR keys.
+
Clicking on the pop-up menu gives you a number of options:
+
+
Save Image
ALTS
Saves the current display as a resource file.
+
Copy Image
ALTC
Copies the current display to the clipboard.
+
Hide/Show Info
ALTT
Toggles the display of all the additional information.
+
Add a Crosshair
ALTH
Adds a crosshair you can drag around.
+
Remove a Crosshair
ALTSHIFTH
Removes the last added crosshair.
+
Hide/Show Grid
ALTG
Toggles the overlayed grid.
+
Freeze/Unfreeze image
ALTF
Stops/continues updating the magnification area.
+
Stick Coordinates
ALTI
Keeps updating the magnification area, but don't follow the mouse pointer any more.
+
Make Square
ALT/
Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.
+
Decrease Window Size
ALT-
Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
+
Increase Window Size
ALT+
Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
Pe is a sophisticated editor, with its syntax highlighting targeted mainly at programmers and HTML writers. Originally created by Maarten Hekkelmann, it's been open sourced and maintained by Haiku developers. A bugtracker and more information is available at the Pe project page.
+
Find out more about Pe's features in its local documentation.
People is a simple contact database using the attributes of Haiku's filesystem to store addresses and other contact information. Every contact is saved as one Person file with its data in separate attributes. All are indexed and therefore searchable with a query.
+
+
+
+
The Group attribute at the bottom allows assigning a person to one or more groups. Useful for "mass mailing" a number of people who, for example, work on a specific project. The pop-up menu offers all currently existing groups. If a person belongs to more than one group, the group names are delimited with a ",".
+
+
These Person files are usually all saved in /boot/home/people/. To get a list of all your contacts, just open your people folder and display all attributes of interest. If you choose to organize your Person files in different folders, just use a query to display them all in one window.
+
+
+
+
You can treat these files like any other: You can sort according to attributes (even a second sorting order by holding SHIFT while clicking) and of course delete, duplicate or rename Person files. Even the contact information can be edited directly: Clicking on an attribute (or ALTE) to edit works just like renaming a file. Once you're in edit mode, TAB and SHIFTTAB will jump from column to column.
PoorMan is a nice little webserver that's extremly easy to set up. Naturally it doesn't offer any advanced features like other heavy duty server software, it's after all only a poor man's webserver.
+
Upon its first launch, PoorMan asks for the folder that is about to be served to the web. If you go with the Default, a new folder /boot/home/public_html is created for you. As a start page a HTML file named by default index.html has to be present there.
+
PoorMan presents itself with a simple console that logs its activity. Then, there's status information if the server is running, which folder is being served, and a hit counter. Settings are changed with Edit | Settings...:
+
+
+
The settings panel is divided into three tabs:
+
In Site you can select another folder to serve, enter another start page and have the option to send a file listing if the start page isn't present.
+Logging lets you de/activate logging to the console or optionally to a separate logfile.
+The Advanced tab holds the setting for the maximum simultaneous connections.
+
The menu items of the console window are all self-explanatory. With them you can e.g. save (parts) of the console output, clear the console or logging file and start/stop the server or clear the hit counter.
+
+
If you want to try out if PoorMan's working, choose /boot/apps/BePDF/docs/ as folder and index.html as start page. Then point your browser to the URL 127.0.0.1, which is your local host.
Besides normal screenshots taken via PRINT, which puts a PNG of the current screen into /boot/home/, this application provides some useful options.
+
+
Starting Screenshot will take a screenshot as usual, but offers from its main window controls to set filename, format and folder before saving the image.
+
The Options dialog has a few more settings:
+
+
Besides the obvious, toggle between taking the whole screen or just the active window, including the window border and the mouse pointer, you can enter a delay before a screenshot is taken. Of course, this delay takes only effect if you take a new shot by pressing Take Screenshot.
+
+
+
+Taking a screenshot from Terminal
+
The Screenshot application is also usable from Terminal or a script.
+Screenshot --help shows the familiar options as parameters:
+
+
~> Screenshot --help
+
+Screenshot [OPTION]... Creates a bitmap of the current screen
+
+OPTION
+ -o, --options Show options window first
+ -m, --mouse-pointer Include the mouse pointer
+ -b, --border Include the window border
+ -w, --window Capture the active window instead of the entire screen
+ -d, --delay=seconds Take screenshot after specified delay [in seconds]
+ -s, --silent Saves the screenshot without showing the app window
+ overrides --options, saves to home folder as png
+
+Note: OPTION -b, --border takes only effect when used with -w, --window
+
StyledEdit is Haiku's simple text editor. Although it saves files in plain text format, additional attributes are written in order to have limited formatting capabilities when viewed with StyledEdit.
+
+
If you're interested, this is what those additional attributes look like when examined in Terminal with listattr:
+
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+ Int-32 4 "be:encoding"
+MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Int-32 4 "wrap"
+ Int-32 4 "alignment"
+ Raw Data 1048 "styles"
+
+1071 bytes total in attributes.
+
As you can see, all the formatting options from StyledEdit's menu are present: line wrapping (on/off) and alignment (left/center/right), each in one attribute. Styles (font, size, color) of each letter mangled into another.
+
Because these attributes are a file system feature of BFS, this means that not only other platforms just see a plain text file, it also follows, that the formatting will be lost when a file is stored on a non-BFS partition. The above attributes are simply stripped and what's left is the ordinary, plain text file.
+
In any case, it's a nice idea having the possibility of colored text in different fonts and sizes while still being a normal text file. A ReadMe.txt, for example, is therefore readable in a shell on any platform and still has a bit of style when viewed via double-click from Haiku.
+
Actually using StyledEdit is so simple, we'll skip explaining every mundane menu item. Just write down your text then select the words you'd like to format and apply font, size and color from the Font menu. Line wrapping and alignment from the Document menu only work on the whole file.
~/config/settings/Terminal_settings
+~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+
+
+
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
+
Please refer to the topic on Scripting for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.
You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALTN from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open another tab with ALTT.
+
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window Size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
+
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
+
+
+
Settings | Preferences opens a panel where you can set font type, font size and the different text and background colors. You can save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal.
+Pressing OK will save the current settings as default.
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/etc/.
+
+
.profile
+
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
+
The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
The .inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:
+
+
Insert Path
Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.
+
Change Directory
Changes to the folder of the dragged file.
+
Create Link Here
Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Move Here
Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Copy Here
Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
+
You can open any file with its preferred application with the command open [filename]. This also works with the representation of the current (".") and parent ("..") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:
Vision is an IRC client originally developed for the BeOS. Documentation and a bug tracker are available at the Vision website.
+
You can find help from other Haiku users and developers on Haiku channels in various languages.
+The most frequented is the English speaking #haiku at irc.freenode.org.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/userguide/it/applications/vlc.html b/userguide/it/applications/vlc.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..41e944ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/userguide/it/applications/vlc.html
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ VLC media player
+
+
+
+
+
WonderBrush is an editor for bitmap and vector graphics. Find more information and workshops at the YellowBites website and in the local documentation.
Attributes are data fields that belong to a file but aren't part of that file, e.g. they are not computed into the file size and can be copied or changed without touching the file itself. The system uses these attributes to store e.g. file size, file type or date of the last modification. This is similar to other operating systems and their filesystems.
+
What's different is that you can add any kind of attribute to any file and display it or make it editable in a Tracker window. You just have to define the kind of attribute you want to add to a file type (e.g. string, integer or time) and give it a name and description.
+
The file itself doesn't even need any contents at all. Take a look at these People files for example:
+
+
+
As you can see, these are all 0-sized files with attached attributes, the E-mail attribute of "John Nox" being edited right in Tracker.
+
If you index these attributes, as People, Email or audio files are by default, they are also searchable with Haiku's fast query system.
Attributes are displayed quite similar to a database or spreadsheet. Using Tracker you can choose which attributes to display (columns) and sort file listings (rows) accordingly.
+
To do this, open a Tracker window, click on the Attributes menu, and select the attributes you want to display. Alternatively, simply right-click onto a column heading and mark the items in the context menu. You can rearrange the columns by a simple drag&drop of the column heading. Moving a column out of a window, is a fast way to get rid of columns you don't need.
+
Double-click on the line between two attributes in the heading to automatically resize a column to its optimal width.
+
Click on a column heading to toggle the sorting order from ascending to descending. You can establish a secondary sort order by pressing the SHIFT key while clicking on a column heading. You can sort your People files by company and within that order sort by contact name, for instance. See the above screenshot as an example. The secondary sort order is marked by a lighter colored indicator beside the heading.
+
Editing these attributes is as simple as renaming a file: Either click on an entry or press ALTE and move between the attributes with TAB and SHIFTTAB. ESC leaves the editing mode without applying the changes.
If you prefer to use the commandline or plan to work with many files using scripting, there are several commands for controlling attributes from Terminal.
listattr lists a file's attributes, but doesn't show the contents of the attributes.
+
usage: listattr 'filename' ['filename' ...]
+
From our screenshot example above:
+
~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters
+File: Clara Botters
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Text 14 "META:name"
+ Text 6 "META:nickname"
+ Text 1 "META:company"
+
+ Text 18 "META:address"
+ Text 8 "META:city"
+ Text 1 "META:state"
+ Text 1 "META:zip"
+ Text 1 "META:country"
+
+ Text 1 "META:hphone"
+ Text 13 "META:wphone"
+ Text 1 "META:fax"
+ Text 19 "META:email"
+ Text 1 "META:url"
+
+ Text 5 "META:group"
+ Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le"
+
+131 bytes total in attributes.
+
Besides all the "META:*" attributes that hold the contact's information, there are two attributes that are managed by the system:
+
+
BEOS:TYPE holds the file type as a MIME string, here "application/x-person". It determines the default icon and the application that opens the file when you e.g. double click it.
+
"_trk/pinfo_le" is the attribute with which Tracker keeps track of a file's icon position.
+
Note the backslash after "Clara". In Terminal you have to "escape" special characters like '"*\$?!. The space between "Clara" and "Botters" is also one of those. Therefore the backslash is really in front of the space character, and not after "Clara".
addattr adds an attribute to a file and/or fills it with a value.
+
usage: addattr [-t type] attr value file1 [file2...]
+ or: addattr [-f value-from-file] [-t type] attr file1 [file2...]
+
+ Type is one of:
+ string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, raw
+ or a numeric value (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...)
+ The default is "string"
+
So, say dear Clara took a job with the multi-national Barkelbaer Inc., you fill the formerly empty "Company" attribute with that data (which is of type "string"):
+
~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters
rmattr completely removes an attribute from a file.
+
+
usage: rmattr [-p] attr filename1 [filename2...]
+ 'attr' is the name of an attribute of the file
+ If '-p' is specified, 'attr' is regarded as a pattern.
+
Though in all practicality it would be enough to just not fill the "Fax" attribute, you can completely remove it from Clara's file by typing:
"Scripting" is the technique of automating procedures by stringing together commands and saving it all as text files, so called "scripts". Every time you run such a script, the commands are processed one after the other just like they would if you entered them into the Terminal by hand.
+Scripts can range from simply executing a few commands in a specific order to sophisticated pieces of code that solve complex tasks.
Since scripts rely naturally a lot on the shell they are interpreted by, you should first familiarize yourself with the BASH that's used by Haiku. There are many resources online as it's a widely used shell. One nice document is Johan Jansson's Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
After you've learned a few basics about working in the shell, it's time to slowly ease yourself into the world of scripting. Again, you'll find loads of tutorials and reference material online as well as in bookstores. A very nice introduction that's practically tailor-made for Haiku is the online available Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900kb) of Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible.
In Haiku, the system makes of course also use of scripting. Booting and shutting down are typical scripting procedures. These defined sequences can be augmented by the user with certain user scripts.
+If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Otherwise simply add your commands where in the process you want them to be executed.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript will be executed after the system has finished its boot process. For example, you could launch a number of programs that would then be automatically started on every boot up:
Remember to end a command with an "&" to start it as a background process, or the script will halt until that command has finished (in this case: the launched app was closed again).
+
+
A simple alternative to the above for launching applications at boot up is to put links to them in the /boot/home/config/boot/launch directory. This can be done simply by right-clicking on the application you wish to have started automatically, going to Create Link and then navigating to the above directory.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript will be executed as the first step in the shutdown process. If the script returns a non-zero exit status, the shutdown is aborted.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript is executed as the last step in the shutdown process. Note, that most parts of the system have terminated by the time this script is executed.
Il Boot Loader di Haiku può essere di aiuto quando hai problemi con l'hardware o vuoi scegliere quale installazione di Haiku far partire, se ne hai più di una (può essere da un CD di installazione o una penna USB).
+Può tornare anche utile dopo che hai installato un componente software e che ti impedisce di caricare il sistema operativo. L'opzione Disable user add-ons (disabilita i componenti utente) che è discussa più avanti, farà partire Haiku senza caricare i componenti installati dall'utente, per esempio un driver.
+
+
Per entrare nelle opzioni del Boot Loader, devi premere la BARRA SPAZIATRICE giusto all'inizio del processo di boot. E' facile sbagliare quidi risulta utile tenerla premuta finche non si vede.
+
+
Una volta che si è caricato, ti si presenteranno tre menu:
+
+
Select boot volume (seleziona il disco di avvio)
Sceglie quale installazione di Haiku caricare.
+
Select safe mode options (seleziona le opzioni di modalità sicura)
+
Ci sono diverse opzioni da tentare in caso di problemi con l'hardware. Quando sposti la barra di selezione su un'opzione una breve descrizione compare sul margine inferiore dello schermo.
+
-Safe mode (modalità sicura)
+-Disable user add-ons (disabilita le aggiunte utente)
+-Disable IDE-DMA (disabilita i DMA dell'IDE)
+-Usa fail-safe video mode (Usa le modalità video sicure)
+-Don't call the BIOS (Non chiamare il BIOS)
+-Disable APM (Disabilita l'APM)
+-Disable ACPI (Disabilita l'ACPI)
+-Disabilita IO-APIC (Disabilita l'IO-APIC)
+-Enable serial bebug output (Abilita i messaggi di debug) - Enable on screen debug output (Abilita lo schermo di output del debug)
+
+
Select fail safe video mode (Seleziona modalità video sicure)
Se devi attivare l'opzione Use fail-safe video mode (Seleziona modalità video sicure), puoi impostare la profondità di colore e la risoluzione video.
+
+
+
Dopo aver attivato una o più opzioni, puoi tornare tornare al menu principale e continuare il caricamento, che si presenterà con questa schermata di avvio:
+
+
+
+
Se tutto funziona nel modo corretto, si illumineranno una dopo l'altra le icone nella schermata.
+Le diverse icone corrispondono approssimativamente a diverse fasi di caricamento dell'OS e sono:
+
+
Atomo
Inizializza i moduli.
+
La lente di ingrandimento sul disco
Crea il rootfs (/) e monta devfs (/dev).
+
Scheda elettronica
Inizializza il device manager.
+
Disco di avvio
Monta il disco di boot.
+
Il chip
Carica i moduli specifici della CPU.
+
La cartella
Finisce di inizializzare il sottosistema.
+
Il razzo
Inizia a caricare i boot scripts che fanno partire il sistema.
Below, you'll find the documentation of the most important aspects of Haiku. Naturally, completing and extending the documentation is a continuing process. If you find errors, would like to suggest topics or maybe even contribute yourself, please get in touch on the documentation mailing list. If you're interested in helping with translations, you'll find information on that at the i18n User Guide Wiki.
There are some nice little games and demo applications for your entertainment. Most of the demos are targeted to developers who are interested in learning from the code, which is of course open source as is everything Haiku.
The Deskbar is the little panel that by default is located in the upper right corner of the screen. It's Haiku's version of Windows' taskbar with its Start button. It contains the Deskbar menu from where you can start applications and preferences, a tray with a clock and other tools below that and a list of currently running programs at the bottom.
+
+
You can move the Deskbar to any corner or as a bar along the upper or lower border of the screen by gripping the knobbly area on one side of the tray and drag&drop it into the new position. You can also fold it into a more compact layout by drag&dropping the knobbly area onto the Deskbar menu.
Show Replicants - Shows/hides the little Replicant widget you use to drag it around, remove or access its context menu.
+
Mount - Offers the same options as when invoked by right-clicking the Desktop (see Mounting Volumes).
+
Deskbar Preferences... - Opens a panel to configure the Deskbar (see below).
+
Shutdown - Offers options to either Restart System or Power Off.
+
Recent Documents, Folders, Applications - List of the last recently opened documents, folders and applications (see Deskbar Preferences below).
+
Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, Preferences - List of installed applications, demos, applets and preferences (see Deskbar Preferences below).
+
+
+
+Deskbar Preferences
+
+
+
Menu
+Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.
+The button Edit Menu... opens the folder /boot/home/config/be/. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, and Preferences.
+You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.
+
It's even easier to simply drag a file, folder or saved query and drop it where you want it into the Deskbar.
+
Window
+
+
Always on Top
The Deskbar always stays above all other windows.
+
Auto Raise
The Deskbar pops to the front if the mouse pointer touches it.
+
+
Applications
+
+
Sort Running Applications
Sorts the list of running programs alphabetically.
+
Tracker always First
Even if you sort alphabetically, the Tracker entry always stays first in the list.
+
Show Application Expander
Provides a small widget to show/hide all windows of a program directly under its entry in the Deskbar.
+
Expand New Applications
Newly launched programs have their windows automatically expanded under their entry in the Deskbar.
Among other things, the tray is housing the clock. Left-click it to toggle between date and time. Right-click it to hide/show it or launch the Time preferences to set it.
+Here you can also launch a calendar that also appears, when you hold down the left mouse button on the clock for a little time.
+
Any program can install an icon in the tray to provide an interface to the user. The email system, for instance, shows a different symbol when there's unread mail and offers a context menu to e.g. create or check for new mail. ProcessController is another example that uses its icon in the tray to provide information (CPU/memory usage) and to offer a context menu.
You can change to a specific running application by clicking on its entry in the Deskbar and choosing (one of) its windows, from the submenu. By right-clicking you can minimize or close a window or the entire application.
+
If you activated Expanders in the Deskbar settings, you can expand/collapse the list of windows directly under an application's entry.
+
In front of every application's windows is a symbol providing info on its state. A bright symbol means a window is visible, a dark one that it's minimized. Three lines in front of a symbol shows that it's not on the current workspace.
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag&drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
+
+
All options are reached from the context menu:
+
+
Add Button Here
Adds an empty button.
+
Clear Button
Empties a button.
+
Remove Button
Removes a button.
+
Settings
+- Horizontal Layout
+- Icon size
+- Ignore Double-click
+- Show Window Border
+- Auto Raise
+- Show On All Workspaces
+Aligns the buttons horizontally.
+Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.
+Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.
+Shows the window border.
+LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge.
+Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace.
+
Pad
+- New
+- Clone
+- Close
+Add a new pad.
+Duplicate the current pad.
+Close the current pad.
+
LaunchBox
+- About...
+- Quit
+Shows the About window.
+Quits all LaunchBox pads.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
+
+
You find the Workspaces applet with the other Desktop Applets in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.
+Change Workspace Count... will open the Screen preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).
+
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure Show Replicants is activated in the Deskbar menu).
To move a window, you grab it in the Workspaces applet and simply drag it to another workspace. This has the advantage, that you can move it without leaving your current desktop. Of course, that only works well when there aren't too many windows in a workspace and your target isn't obscured by other windows. Another possibility is to grab a window by its tab and just holding on to it while switching workspaces with ALTFx.
+
For more information on workspaces in general and more keyboard shortcuts, see topic Workspaces.
Haiku's filesystem layout is quite transparent, trying to always use non-cryptic names for files and folders, that don't leave the user guessing. Files and folders that are important for the system to function properly, are protected from accidental tempering by showing one of these alerts:
+
+
+
The second alert pops up if you try to rename or delete something in the system hierarchy. Here, the "Do it" button will only become clickable when you're holding down the SHIFT key.
+
Generally, there are three separate branches springing from the root folder of the boot volume:
+
+
/boot/system/
belongs to the system. Don't touch!
+
/boot/common/
holds files that are shared between users.
+
/boot/home/
is your personal folder where you keep your data and settings.
Under Haiku's predecessor BeOS, this folder was named /boot/beos/. You may still find it in some older documentation (e.g. in the original BeBook).
+Whatever it's named, you should not alter what's inside. Every update of Haiku can add, remove or overwrite anything within it. If you want to add functionality, maybe with other Tracker Add-Ons or Translators or maybe another hardware driver, you install these things under your own /boot/home/ hierarchy or, if it's supposed to be for every user, under /boot/common/. As long as Haiku isn't multi-user, this distinction has no apparent effect, as there's only one user with one home folder. But since there will be support for more users than one eventually, it makes sense to learn the right way from the start.
+
So, let's say you want to install a new Translator for the latest image format, you don't simply copy it into the respective system folder. Remember: Don't touch!
+Instead, you put it into the mirrored hierarchy under /boot/common/ or /boot/home/config/.
+
In our example the location for Translators in the system folder would be
This has another advantage: If the component you have installed messes things up (which is possible as you install hardware drivers like this, too) you are able to choose "Disable User Add-Ons" from the Boot Loader menu and are thus always able to boot without the offending component.
+
Most of the time, however, you won't have to deal with these things at all, since every software that comes from a trusted source should include an installation routine that handles these things.
+
+
Haiku is not a multi-user system yet. Once it is though, every user has her own home folder that is not accessible to anyone else. Every application or added component like Tracker Add-Ons, Translators etc. as well as any data that's supposed to be shared between different users, has to be put under /boot/common/.
This folder belongs to you. Here you can create and delete files and folders as you wish. However, you shouldn't mess too much with the ~/config/ directory and its subfolders. You could delete e.g. the ~/config/settings/ folder without damaging the operating system itself, but who wants to lose all his configurations and application settings? In any case, the system warns you with the at the top mentioned alert.
+
Besides the ~/config/add-ons/ folder, which mirrors the system's add-ons folder for additional components as described above, there are a few other folders of interest. (By the way, the tilde ("~") is a shortcut for your home folder, so you don't always have to write "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
+
+
~/mail
+
By default, this is where your mails are kept.
+
+
~/queries
+
Queries are stored, by default temporarily for 7 days, in this folder.
+
+
~/config/be/
+
Again from our BeOS legacy, the be folder contains what's shown in the Deskbar menu. You can add and remove items by putting files, folders, links or queries into this folder.
+
+
~/config/bin/
+
Complements the system's /boot/system/bin/ folder and holds all your command line programs.
+
+
~/config/boot/
+
This folder is the place for User Scripts that are executed before or after the system boots up or shuts down.
+
+
~/config/boot/launch/
+
Links to programs or documents in this folder are automatically launched on every boot-up.
+
+
~/config/fonts/
+
Simply copy a TrueType or Postscript font into this folder and its usable right away.
+
+
~/config/settings/
+
This folder contains the settings to all applications and a few configurations for the system. Some applications manage their settings in their own subfolders, others simply put their configuration file in there.
+
+
~/config/settings/beos_mime/
+
In this MIME database Haiku keeps track of all the different filetypes and their settings.
+
+
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/
+
There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here!
+
+
~/config/settings/Tracker/
+
Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders:
+
+
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Show and arrange all attributes and the window size to your liking. Every new folder you create will use it as a template.
+
+
DefaultQueryTemplates/
You can define the layout of query result windows for certain filetypes. See topic Query: The result window.
Other than Windows, Haiku doesn't rely on the 3-letter file extension for a file type (e.g. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). This method is only a last resort fallback. Haiku uses MIME types just like it's custom on the internet.
+
While there's no reason to use file extensions in Haiku, remember to add them to files you want to share with users of other operating systems, e.g. over email, uploading to a server or via exchange of an USB drive. Otherwise their system may not recognize the file type.
You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the Add-Ons | Filetype add-on from the right-click context menu.
The above is a PNG file, it's MIME string image/png. Let's say you definitely know that it's not a PNG but a GIF. You can change that either by entering the correct MIME string by hand or with one of the two buttons below the textbox:
+
+
Select...
shows a hierarchical list of filetypes where you navigate to image | GIF Image.
+
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the filetype you're looking for.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
+
+
The Default Application is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons Select... and Same As... which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype Add-On of a file that contains an icon and drag&drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
If you invoke the Filetype Add-On on an executable (here: StyledEdit), you'll get a different dialog:
+
+
On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.
+
Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:
+
+
Single Launch
Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side.
+
Multiple Launch
Many instances of the app can run simultaneously.
+
Exclusive Launch
Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time.
+
Args Only
Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages.
+
Background App
The app won't appear in Twitcher or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.
+
+
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's Open with... context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
+
At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.
The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
+
All filetypes and their configurations are stored in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Before you start experimenting, it may be prudent to make a backup of that folder...
Haiku's graphical user interface is an integral part of the system. Unlike Unix-based operating systems, there's no separate window manager and booting just into a command line shell is not possible. Haiku's focus being on the desktop user, this is just not considered necessary.
+
As you probably have experience with other graphical environments, let's skip over the standards like menus, right-click context menus, drag&drop etc. Let's have a look at the few unique aspects of Haiku's GUI instead.
+
+
There are only a few things in Haiku's GUI that aren't obvious and deserve an explanation.
+
+
The Deskbar is Haiku's "Start" menu and taskbar, if you will. See topic Deskbar.
+
The yellow tab offers more than just a program's name or a document's filename:
+
You can move it by holding the SHIFT key while dragging it to another position, enabling you to stack a number of windows and conveniently access them by their named tab.
+
You minimize a window with a double-click on its tab (or with CTRLALTM). A such hidden window can be accessed by its entry in the Deskbar or the Twitcher.
+
You can send a window to the back with a right-click on its tab (or its border).
+
The close button.
+
The "zoom" button (or CTRLALTZ). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size. It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.
+
The resize corner. Dragging anywhere else on a window's border will move the window.
+
+
While holding CTRLALT, you can click anywhere into a window to move it with the left mouse button; the right mouse button sends it to the back.
When opening or saving a file from any application, a panel like this opens:
+
+
It has all the usual things: A list of files of the current folder to choose from, in case of a save panel, a text field to enter a filename and a pop-up menu for different file formats and their settings.
+You can enter parent folders with the pop-up menu above the file listing.
+
If you already have a Tracker window with the location for a file open, you can simply drag either any file or the folder-representation (i.e. the symbol to the far right in its menu bar) into the panel. This changes the panel to that new location.
Many shortcuts in open and save panels are the same used in Tracker. Besides the commands that are also available through the File menu, there are a few not that obvious:
The Favorites menu in open and save panels provides recently visited folders and favorite locations that you can set up yourself. As indicated by the little arrow, you can also use these locations to navigate further down the hierarchy via submenus.
+
+
To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose Favorites | Add Current Folder. From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose Favorites | Configure Favorites... and delete its entry.
+All Favorites are kept in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. So you might as well add and remove links to files and folders there directly.
Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to Show Replicants is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:
+
+
The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag&drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.
+A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's About window and to Remove Replicant.
+
Should you experience difficulties with a Replicant on the Desktop and just can't get rid of it, delete ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. Unfortunately, this will remove all Replicants from the Desktop.
Attributes and Queries are key features of Haiku. While attributes are useful on their own, to display additional information on a file, for a query on them, they need to be indexed. It puts them into a lookup table, which in turn makes queries lightning fast.
+The index is part of the filesystem and is kept for every volume/partition separately.
+
+
+Indexing commands in Terminal
+
There are several commands to manage the index:
+
+
lsindex - Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition.
+These are the attributes that are indexed by default:
mkindex - Adds an attribute to the index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute>
+Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume to which the index will be added,
+ defaults to current volume.
+ -t, --type=TYPE the type of the attribute being indexed. One of "int",
+ "llong", "string", "float", or "double".
+ Defaults to "string".
+ --copy-from path to volume to copy the indexes from.
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being created
+
+
+
Only new files with that attribute come automatically into the index!
+Existing files have to be added manually by copying them and deleting the originals after that. Alternatively you can use the command reindex.
+
+
+
reindex - Puts the attributes of existing files into the newly created index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories>
+ -r enter directories recursively
+ -v verbose output
+ -f create/update all indices from the source volume,
+ "attr" is the path to the source volume
+
+
+
+
rmindex - Removes an attribute from the index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME
+
+Removes the index named INDEX_NAME from a disk volume. Once this has been
+done, it will no longer be possible to use the query system to search for
+files with the INDEX_NAME attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume from which the index will be
+ removed
+ -h, --help display this help and exit
+ -p, --pattern INDEX_NAME is a pattern
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being removed
+
+INDEX_NAME is the name of a file attribute.
+
+If no volume is specified, the volume of the current directory is assumed.
By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALTC and ALTV integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRLC quits the running process.
+
In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide will always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
+
If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
Additionally to the general shortcuts, here are some more for navigating with Tracker:
+
+
ALT↑
Opens the parent folder.
+
ALT↓ or ENTER
Opens the selected folder.
+
OPT
Holding it while opening a folder will automatically close the parent folder. This also works when navigating with the mouse.
+
MENU
Opens the Deskbar menu (leave with ESC).
+
ALTZ
Undo last action. The undo history is only limited by the available memory. Note, this only works for actions on the file itself, changed attributes and permission settings can't be undone with this. Also, once a file is removed from Trash it's gone for good.
Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press TAB once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press TAB twice to have all matches listed.
+
↑/↓
Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands.
+
CTRLR
Bash history. All the commands you enter
+are stored in the file ~/.bash_history. Press CTRLR and start to enter a command and you'll be provided with the first match from the bash history. Keep pressing CTRLR until you find the right command line and press ENTER to execute it.
You can add or remove items to/from a selection by holding down a modifier key while clicking on a entry (or file in case of Tracker).
+
+
SHIFT
This will select everything between the first selected item and the one you click on.
+
ALT
Adds or removes the item you're clicking on from the selection.
+
+
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
+The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
While a key philosophy of Haiku is to cut down on options and have sensible defaults instead, there are some things that have to be configured or can be set to individual preference. You find all panels in Deskbar's Preferences menu.
In the first tab, Colors, you can change the colors of different parts of the user interface. The color well accepts drag&drops from other programs, letting you drag colors over from e.g. WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic or the Backgrounds panel.
The second tab, Antialiasing, provides different settings for how things are rendered on screen.
+
+
+
+Glyph hinting
+
An activated Glyph hinting aligns all letters in such a way that their vertical and horizontal edges rest exactly between two pixels. The result is a perfect contrast, especially when dealing with black on white. Text appears crisper. There's also a setting for Monospaced Fonts Only that's especially helpful with low resolution devices like netbooks. Small fonts can look pretty bad when hinting is turned on, but with this setting you still have the advantage of hinting for text editors and Terminal.
+
See the difference hinting makes with these magnified screenshots:
+
+
Hinting: off
Hinting: on
+
+
It should be pointed out that all the Magnify windows on this page are of course rendered themselves with the different options as well. So, you get a real world impression of the settings by comparing, for example, the bold yellow tab title or the text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+
+
+
+Antialiasing type
+
Another technique to improve rendering is Antialiasing, which supports all vector graphics as well as text. It smooths lines by changing the color of certain pixels. There are two methods for that:
+
Grayscale changes the intensity of pixels at the edge.
+LCD subpixel does an even better job, especially with (high resolution) LCD monitors. Instead of the intensity of a pixel, it changes its color which moves an edge by a fraction of a pixel, because LCD displays produce every pixel with a red, green and blue component.
+
Again, the two different methods with magnified screenshots:
+
+
Grayscale, Hinting: off
LCD subpixel, Hinting: off
+
+
Subpixel based antialiasing adds a slight colored shine to objects. Something not everyone tolerates. In Haiku you can mix the two antialiasing methods and find the right setting for you by using a slider.
+
The subpixel based antialiasing in combination with the glyph hinting is subject of a software patent and is therefore not available by default. Depending on where in the world you live, you may get an unlocked version. Sorry about that. Talk with your representative.
+
If you do activate hinting plus LCD subpixel rendering by changing the source and recompiling, this is how it looks compared to hinting with Grayscale:
+
+
Grayscale, Hinting: on
LCD subpixel, Hinting: on
+
+
+
At the bottom of the panel are two buttons:
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Annulla
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Appearance preferences.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - stores the panel's window position
+
+
You can set a color or an image as background for every folder and the Desktop for every workspace.
+
+
+
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied to the current workspace only, all workspaces, a specific folder or as default for every new folder.
+
Below that you can assign an image or select None if you want simply a colored background. Images can also be drag&dropped onto the preview to the left.
+
If you are using an image, you have to decide on the placement:
+
+
Manuale
lets you specify the coordinates. You can drag the picture around in the preview to the left or enter X and Y manually.
+
Centrata
centers the picture in the middle of the screen.
+
Estendi
enlarges the picture with no regard to its aspect ratio until it fills the screen.
+
Tile
fills the screen by repeating the picture.
+
+
Activating Icon label outline puts a thin contour around icon labels.
+
Whether an icon label's actual text is black or white depends on the setting of the color picker. A dark color sets the text to white, a light color to black. So, if you assign a very bright image to the background, you should also set the color picker to a bright color in order to have icon labels readable in black. (Or use the outline option above.)
+The selected color is also reflected in the Workspaces applet, which ignores images as backgrounds.
+
+
Annulla
Ripristina le impostazioni iniziali all'appertura della preferences Backgrounds
~/config/settings/* - Every Translator creates its own settings file here after you've changes its defaults.
+~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Every application has the ability to open and save every file format for which there's a Translator installed. The settings for these Translators are configured in the DataTranslations preferences.
+
+
+
Depending on its capabilities, each Translator offers different settings. At least you'll get an Info... button that opens a window with the credits and the installation path.
+The following table gives an overview of the default Translators and their most useful options.
+
+
BMP Images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency
+
EXR Images
ILM's high dynamic-range (HDR) format
+
GIF Images
8bit, lossless compression, transparency
+You can reduce the filesize by limiting the number of used colors and the palette.
+You can write images with transparency, either by automatically using the alpha channel or by setting the RGB value that will be transparent by hand.
+
JPEG2000 Images
24bit, compressed, no transparency
+Here, you normally only care about the output quality.
+
JPEG Images
24bit, compressed, no transparency
+Besides the output quality you can also set a smoothing that will lessen compression artefacts but can blur the picture a little.
+
PCX Images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, PC Paintbrush Exchange format
+
PNG Images
32bit, lossless compression, transparency
+
PPM Images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, Portable PixMap format
Screenshots, charts, black&white drawings and other images with few used colors, as well as small pictures are best saved as GIF (up to 256 colors) or PNG (millions of colors). JPEG, for example, introduces compression artefacts without gain in smaller filesize.
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
+The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
+You start by clicking the Add button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
+
+
First, declare the Account Type which is either Receive Mail Only, Send Mail Only, or the most usual type, Send and Receive Mail. Then you set how you get your mail, via POP3 or IMAP.
+
Now you enter your E-mail Address, Login Name and Password, give an Account Name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real Name.
+
If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses and the following information is already filled in automatically. If that is not the case, just follow this guide and fill in the details to your e-mail account accordingly.
Click on Incoming under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.
+
+
From the pop-up menu you choose the protocol used by your provider. IMAP and POP3 are supported.
+
Next is the Mail Server address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+
Then you enter your login information, Username and Password, and if necessary change the Login Type from the default Plain Text to APOP for authentication.
+
If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to Leave mail on server and only Remove mail from server when deleted locally.
+
If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to Remove mail from server when deleted locally. You can specify a Top Mailbox Folder to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
+
The New Mail Notification offers different methods to announce the arrival of new mail. Try different settings to see what works best for you.
+
You can change the Location of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
+
Last on this page, you can opt to only Partially download messages that are larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
Click on Outgoing under your account's name to set up how e-mails are sent.
+
+
As with incoming mail, you can also change the Location of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
+
Next is the SMTP Server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+
If you need to login, you change the Login Type to ESMTP and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with POP3 before SMTP for identification.
If you want to filter your incoming email, you click on E-Mail Filters under your account's name to set up automatic sorting. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other. You can rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.
+Besides the R5 Daemon Filter that's used for backward compatibility, there are two other Incoming Mail Filters you can add.
+
+
+
+Spam Filter
+
+
The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
+You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
+Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
+
Together with the following Match Header filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+
+
+
+Match Header
+
+
This filter compares a header to a search pattern and performs some action when it matches.
+With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are available:
+
+
Name
+
the name of the sender
+
From
+
the e-mail address of the sender
+
To
+
your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account)
+
Reply To
+
the e-mail address replies are sent to
+
When
+
the date and time the mail was received
+
Subject
+
the subject line
+
Cc
+
addresses of anyone receiving a carbon copy (Cc)
+
Account
+
the name of the e-mail's account
+
Status
+
The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail.
+
Priority
+
is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent")
+
Thread
+
essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd:
+
Classification Group
+
depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"
+
Spam/Genuine Estimate
+
this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.
+
+
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
+
With the pop-up menu below it, you assign an action when the pattern matches. You can move or delete a mail, set the status to "Read" or anything else or set the e-mail account you'll reply with.
+
+
+
+Outgoing Mail Filters
+
At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
+ It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
+
+
Under Mail Checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
+If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that Only When Dial-Up is Connected and also Schedule Outgoing Mail When Dial-Up is Disconnected to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
+
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up Never, While Sending, While Sending and Receiving or Always.
+
Make sure to Start Mail Services on Startup or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
+
Edit Mailbox Menu... will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
+
From that menu, you can also Create New Message..., Check For Mail Now or Edit Preferences....
+
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/fonts
+~/config/settings/Font_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
+
+
Haiku defines three standard fonts for different purposes. You set plain, bold and fixed font types and sizes that will be used throughout the system. Besides these, there's also a separate setting for the font used in menus.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Annulla
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Fonts preferences.
You install new fonts by copying them into their respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/fonts/ or /boot/home/config/fonts/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Location of user modified keymaps.
+~/config/settings/Key_map
+
+
+
+
To the right, the Keymap window shows a representation of your keyboard. When you press a key, the corresponding key is darkened and the assigned symbol is entered into the Sample and Clipboard text field at the bottom. From there you can also copy and paste it into a document.
+Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but are also useful when looking for a special symbol used in other languages. For example, you can switch the keymap to "French", find the "ç" and copy it into your mail to François. (Though you'll find the "cedil" also in other keymaps...)
+
Pressing modifier keys like SHIFT, CONTROL or OPTION changes the displayed keyboard accordingly.
+
Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
+
Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+
+
Select Dead Keys
for setting the above mentioned blue keys.
+
Switch Shortcut Key...
for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT).
+
+
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap via drag&drop in the keyboard representation: a left-click-drag copies a key, a right-click-drag exchanges the two keys.
+When you're done you can save the result from the menu File | Save.... Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via File | Open....
+
To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the Layout menu.
+
The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the Font menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
+
Finally, there's a Revert button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
+
You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
+
keymap -d MyKeymap
+
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
+At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use e.g. SpicyKeys.
+
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+
keymap -l MyKeymap
+
This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
Set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click. A middle-click is also simulated by clicking left and right button together. Useful for notebooks, which mostly don't have a 3rd button.
+
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration.
+
Focus follows mouse means, that you don't have to click into a window to activate it. There are three modes:
+
+
Enabled
The window under the mouse pointer is always activated automatically, but doesn't pop to the front.
+
Warping
Choosing a window from Deskbar or the Twitcher will have the mouse pointer glide smoothly toward it.
+
Instant-Warping
Choosing a window from Deskbar or the Twitcher will have the mouse pointer jump instantly toward it.
+
+
All settings are immediately applied.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Annulla
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
At the top, you choose which network adapter to configure.
+
Then you specify if you get your network automatically (via DHCP) or if you're using static addresses. If it's the latter, you'll have to fill out IP Address, Netmask, Gateway and DNS Servers yourself. Otherwise the panel will show the addresses currently set with DHCP.
+
+
Annulla
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Network preferences.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode.
+~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Each of your workspaces can have its own resolution and color depth.
+
+
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other two menus contain all supported resolution and depth settings.
+
After clicking on Apply, the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
+
To the left, you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
+
Revert brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
The top checkbox enables/disables the screen saver.
+With the slider below it, you control after how long an idle time the screen saver kicks in.
+
+
The next two sliders are only usable after you activated their checkboxes:
+One slider determines after how many minutes the screen is powered off.
+The other, after how many minutes you need a password to unlock your machine.
+
+
By clicking into different corners of the two screens at the bottom, you tell the system when to immediately start the screen saver or when to prevent it from kicking in when you rest the mouse in the indicated corner. Click in the middle of the screens to disable that feature again.
+
The second tab shows a list of all installed screen saver modules and their individual settings. You can test your settings with the Test button below the list and add modules with the Add... button beside it. Other ways to install new screen savers is by a simple drag&drop into the list. Of course, you can also copy/delete a module's file in its respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/add-ons/screensavers/ or /boot/home/config/add-ons/screensavers/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
+
You can assign sounds to certain events in the system. Just select the event from the list and choose a sound from the pop-up menu below.
+
+
None
will silence an event.
+
Other...
will open a file panel to find a new sound that isn't yet in the menu.
+
You can use any format that's supported by the system. If MediaPlayer can deal with it, so can any other program.
+You can "pre-hear" an event's sound by selecting it and using the Play and Stop buttons.
~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings
+~/config/settings/timezone - A link to the current timezone in /boot/system/etc/timezones/*/*
+~/config/settings/Time_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
The panel of the Time preferences is split into two tabs:
On the left side, you can set the day of the month by simply clicking on it in the calendar. You change the month and year by clicking on it and using the up/down arrows to the right or the cursor keys on your keyboard.
+
Similarly, you set the time. There are two modes for the clock:
The Tracker preference panel is also available from every Tracker window with the menu Window | Preferences....
+Its functions are discussed in the topic on Tracker.
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory
+~/config/settings/VM_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Virtual memory let's the system swap out memory to harddisk, if the RAM can be used more sensibly for other things. So, even if you have lots of RAM, providing virtual memory is never a bad idea.
+
+
You can set the size to even more than your physical memory size if needed. With today's huge harddisks, assigning the physical memory size shouldn't be a problem. Still, you can quickly adjust the size if your free space ever runs low. In that case you should also have a look at DiskUsage to find out what's eating up your diskspace.
+
Normally, the swap file's written to your boot partition. If you often run into disk thrashing due to the virtual memory system swapping memory in and out, you can try to use a separate harddisk for you swap file. Simply another partition on the same harddisk with your system/data won't help.
+Upgrading your RAM is of course the most effective way to go...
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Annulla
brings back the settings that were active when you started the VirtualMemory preferences.
A query is a file search based on file attributes and can be performed within Tracker or in Terminal. Queries are saved in /boot/home/queries/ and by default last seven days before being purged. Note, these aren't static result lists of your search, but are the query formulas which trigger a new search whenever you open them.
+Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can drill down a saved query just like any folder by right-clicking on it and navigating through the submenus.
You start a query by invoking the Find... menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is ALTF. You're presented with the Find window:
+
+
+
Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as Query Template.
+
Narrow down your search from All files and folders to specific file types.
+
Define the search method:
+
by Name - a basic search by file or folder name
+
by Attribute - an advanced search, you specify search terms for one or more attributes
+
by Formula - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term
+
Select which drives to search on.
+
Enter the search term.
+
The expander hides/unhides the additional options.
+
Uncheck the Temporary checkbox if you don't want this query self-destruct after 7 days.
+
Check if your query is supposed to Include trash.
+
Optionally, enter a name for this query if you want to save it.
+
You can drag&drop the icon anywhere to save a query. Doing that with the right mouse button, offers the option to save as template.
If you simply want to find all files and folders on your mounted disks that match a certain pattern, simply leave the search method at by Name, enter the search term into the text box and press ENTER.
You can create more advanced queries by searching within the attributes of specific file types. For that to work, these attributes have to be indexed.
+
+
You start by setting the filetype from All files and folders to, for example, Text | E-mail and change the search method to by Attribute.
+
This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons Add and Remove under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With Add and Remove you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
+
Let's do an email query as an example:
+
+
This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Botters has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "vibraphone" or "skepticality".
+As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
+A good way to cut down the number of search results.
Typing in a formula query by hand is daunting and really quite unpractical. It still has its uses.
+
Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to by Formula mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
You could copy and paste the string into an email, forum or IRC for others to use or debug.
+
You can use this method to construct a query in Attribute mode and then switch to Formula mode, to comfortably generate a search string to use for a query in Terminal or a script.
+
You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
After you start a search, the Find window will be replaced by a result window. Here is an example that queried for "server":
+
+
Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:
+
+
You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.
+
With File | Edit Query or ALTG you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
+
A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with Attributes | Paste Layout.
If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
+By using the Save Query as Template menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
+
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
With CTRLALTDEL you invoke the Team Monitor which lists all currently running programs.
+
+
Programs that were launched by the system are blue, those started by the user black.
+Applications that are unresponsive, which is often a sign the program has crashed, are marked red. You can kill a program by selecting it and pressing the Kill Application button.
+
You can summon a Terminal with OPTALTT.
+
If your Tracker or Deskbar crashed or froze, a new button appears (you may have to kill the offending team first): Restart the Desktop will restart Tracker and/or Deskbar for you.
Applications can install add-ons so they can be invoked easily on a selection of files from Tracker. Only the add-ons that can handle a specific filetype are presented under Add-Ons from the context menu or the File menu of a Tracker window. Some add-ons don't necessarily need a file to work on and are thus always present.
+
Tracker Add-Ons, or links to applications that can act as add-ons, can be installed in three different locations (see topic Filesystem layout):
+
+
/boot/system/system/add-ons/Tracker/
for system provided add-ons.
+
/boot/common/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons available to every user.
+
/boot/home/config/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons only available to yourself.
+
+
The file name of an add-on can be suffixed with a dash and capital letter, and is then available via keyboard shortcut. For example, Open Target Folder-T opens with ALTOPTT.
+Of course, you have to take care of possible shortcut collisions when deciding on a shortcut. You can't have the same for different add-ons.
These Tracker Add-Ons come with every Haiku installation:
+
+
Background-B
+
Opens the Background preferences to change the color or image of the Desktop or any folder. Invoked on an image file the Background panel is launched with that image already loaded as a potential background.
+
DiskUsage-I
+
Starts the DiskUsage application with the according folder as basis.
+
FileType-F
+
Invoked on a file, opens its specific FileType panel, otherwise the general FileTypes preferences are launched.
+
Open Target Folder-O
+
Can only be used on a linked file and opens the folder that file lives in.
+
TextSearch-G
+
Starts the TextSearch application to look for a string in the selected folder (and its subfolders).
+
ZipOMatic-Z
+
A selection of files will be added to a zip archive, invoked without a selection opens a panel to create an archive via drag&drop.
The Tracker is the graphical interface to all your files. It let's you create new files and folders or find, launch or rename as well as copy or delete existing ones.
+
Being an application like any other (the Desktop with its icons is really just a fullscreen window in the background), Tracker appears with its windows in the Deskbar and can be quit and restarted. The easiest way to quit and restart a crashed or frozen Tracker (or a wayward Deskbar) is to call the Team Monitor.
In order to access a harddisk, CD, USB stick etc., you first have to mount the volume, that is, let the system know it's there. This is done with a right-click on the Desktop or an already mounted volume (like the boot disk) and choosing the volume from the Mount submenu. You find the same Mount menu in the Deskbar.
+
+
There are also Mount Settings so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.
+The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.
+
Before you disconnect e.g. a harddrive or USB stick, make sure you have successfully unmounted the volume. This guarantees that all data transfer has finished. Otherwise you may lose data or corrupt the disk!
By default, when you double-click a folder, Tracker opens a new window while leaving the parent window open. This can quickly lead to an overcrowded desktop.
+You can prevent that by holding down the OPT key, which automatically closes the parent window.
+This is also true for keyboard navigation. For more on that, see topic Shortcuts and key combinations.
+
Moving through your folders is one of Trackers main purposes, just like the file managers on other platforms. Haiku's Tracker has some unique features that will help you doing that efficiently.
Instead of double-clicking your way down folder after folder, there's a better way to drill down:
+
+
+
Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/home/config/.
+If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
+
A similar method can be used from any Tracker window:
+
+
Click on the area in the lower left, where the number of items is listed, and you'll get submenus for every level above your current location. From there you can drill down through the folders as usual.
+
Note, that the Desktop is always the topmost level as that is where Tracker shows mounted volumes. So, if you want to go to another disk, you first have to navigate to the top (Desktop) and cross over to your other disk from there.
+
You'll get the same submenu-navigating when you drag a file over a folder. After a short while of hovering, a submenu pops up and you can drill down to your destination. If you initiated the drag with the right mousebutton, you can choose between copying, moving or linking the file when you release the mouse.
You may be familiar with the concept from file managers of other operating systems: typing the first few letters of a filename will jump to the first file matching these starting characters. Haiku took the idea a step further. If there isn't a file starting with those letters it will jump to the first file including the string anywhere in its name. And if there's nothing with the string in its filename, the attributes are searched next.
+
+
In the above example, there are many files starting with "Haiku logo", rendering simpler approaches to typing ahead quite useless. In Haiku however, typing "web" jumps right to its first occurence in "Haiku logo - website". The characters you enter appear in the bottom left corner where you normally find the item count of all files in the folder. A second after entering a character, the display jumps back to normal and you're ready for a new type ahead search.
Tracker windows offer three different viewing modes from the Window menu:
+
+
Icon View (ALT1) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with ALT+/ALT-.
+
Mini Icon View (ALT2) - Small icons.
+
List View (ALT3) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide available attributes. (See topic Attributes.)
+
+
The Window menu offers a number of other functions:
+
+
Resize Window (ALTY) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
+
Clean Up (ALTK) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Clean Up All which additionally sorts all icons alphabetically.
Close (ALTW) - Closes the window. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Close All which closes every Tracker window.
+
Close All in Workspace (ALTQ) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
+
+
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete Clean Up (ALTK). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
+
The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.
Window | Preferences... opens a panel that offers a number of settings that, where not obvious, should become clear once tried out. Since all settings are applied live, you'll immediately see the changes.
+ So, in short, the not so obvious settings:
+
+
Desktop - Decide if all mounted disks appear directly on the Desktop or in a window after clicking a single Disk icon sitting on the Desktop.
+
Windows - You can set Single Window Navigation, i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of it's parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the OPT key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size.
+
+
+
+
Before you switch Tracker to Single Window Navigation mode, because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a Navigator where you can enter or copy&paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.
+
Date and Time - Set date and time formats.
+
Trash - Set the behavior when deleting a file.
+
Volume Icons - Set the color of an optional indicator of free space that's shown besides a disk's icon.
+
+
This panel, by the way, is also available as Tracker from Deskbar's Preferences.
When invoked on a selected file, most of the File menu commands are also offered in the context menu by right-clicking that file.
+
As usual the commands are pretty clear.
+
+
Find... - Find a file or folder. See topic Query for more info.
+
New - Create a new folder or any other file based on a template.
+
+
+
+
Choosing Edit Templates... opens the folder /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the New menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype text/plain. See topic Filetypes for more info.
+
Open With... - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
+
+
+
+
The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type text/plain. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here text/*. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the Open With... entry instead, a panel opens:
+
+
+
Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the Open and Make Preferred button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here text/plain.
+
Get Info
+
+
+
The panel presents info on the selected file and lets you set the default application and, after you expanded that part of the panel, permissions and owner. Clicking on the path will open it in a Tracker window.
+
Edit Name, Duplicate and Move to Trash - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.
+
Move to, Copy to and Create Link - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.
+
Cut, Copy and Paste - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding SHIFT while invoking the menu you can Copy/Cut more files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding SHIFT you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.
+
Identify - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with wget which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu changes the item to Force Identify which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.
+
Add-Ons - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic Tracker Add-ons for more information.
When you copy, move or delete files, Tracker shows its progress with a status window. If you initiate more than one transaction, each job gets its own status display.
+
+
To the right are two buttons to pause or stop a transaction entirely. Sometimes it can be useful to temporarily pause a large transaction. For example, you may need to quickly launch a large application. Copying large amounts of data chokes your harddisk's IO bandwidth and thus delays your workflow.
The Twitcher is a task switcher to jump between running applications and their windows.
+
+
Just tap CTRLTAB to switch between the current and the last application/window. Tapping CTRLTAB very quickly will switch between all applications. Or press and hold CTRLTAB to go through all running applications by repeatedly hitting TAB or ←/→. If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as described and then go through its open windows with the ↑/↓ keys.
+
You cycle through all an applications visible windows on the current workspace with CTRL~ (which, depending on the keymap you're using, is the key below ESC).
+
It's also possible to invoke the Twitcher with CTRLTAB and then use the mouse to choose the application/window you'll jump to when releasing the CTRL key.
+
The Twitcher also offers a few more advanced keyboard shortcuts:
+
+
ESC
Aborts the twitching and returns to the formerly active window.
Workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries
+
+
This is a workshop to show the use of Attributes, Queries, the Index and custom Filetypes. As an example, we build a database to keep track of our DVD library.
Let's first decide what filetype and attributes would serve our needs. Originally, I wanted to use a Bookmark file with a link to the movie's IMdB page, but Haiku doesn't have a "bookmarkable" browser like BeOS' NetPositive at the moment, so I came up with this: The file itself will be a JPEG image for the movie cover.
+To that we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to query it later (then we have to add it to the index) and if so, what type of attribute it should be. Numbers (int, float) can be evaluated differently than text (</=/> vs. is/contains/starts with).
+
Here are the attributes I'd like to see for my DVDs:
+
+
Movie title
+
Genre
+
URL to e.g. IMdB
+
Director/Cast
+
Plot
+
My rating from 1 to 10
+
Coordinates in my shelf, e.g. A2, B3, so I find the DVD also in Real Life :)
Start the Filetypes preferences, and click on the Add... button below the hierarchical list on the left. A small dialog opens and you specify in which MIME Group your new filetype will reside. You can also create a completely new group. Let's put it into "applications" and set the "Internal Name" to DVDdb.
Double-click the icon well to open Icon-O-Matic to design an icon for your filetype. You can also drag&drop an icon from the icon well of another type, maybe as starting point for a modified version.
You can add suffixes like .txt, .jpg, .mp3 to recognize files by their extention. Useful when working with files from systems without MIME typing. We don't need that for our example.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked.
+
+
Select...
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
+
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
Here we enter all the custom attributes we decided on in our preparations. Clicking the Add... button opens a panel:
+
+
+
Attribute Name - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.
+
Internal Name - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.
+
Type - Defines the value the attribute can hold and therefore how it can be queried.
+
+
String for normal text
+
Boolean for binary data: 0 or 1
+
Integer for integer numbers with different ranges:
+
+
8 bit: ± 255
+
16 bit: ± 65,535
+
32 bit: ± 4,294,967,295
+
64 bit: ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615
+
+
+
Float for floatingpoint numbers, single precision
+
Double for floatingpoint numbers, double precision
+
Time for time and date format
+
+
+
+
+
Visible - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:
+
Display As - Leave on "Default". In the future more option will become available, e.g. a bar or stars for a rating etc.
+
Editable - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker.
+
Width - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window.
+
Alignment - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned.
Before we start entering data in our little DVD database, we should add certain attributes to the Index. Only indexed attributes can use Haiku's fast Queries.
+So, what will we be searching in the future? We probably won't ask "What's in the B4 coordinate in my shelf?" or "Does the IMdB URL or the plot of the movie contain the word 'pope-shenooda'?".
+
This leaves these attributes:
+
+
Internal Name
Attribute type
+
DVDdb:title
text
+
DVDdb:genre
text
+
DVDdb:cast
text
+
DVDdb:rating
int-32
+
+
+
To index them, we open a Terminal and simply add one attribute after the other:
Now, everything's set and we can begin putting some data into our base.
+Since our basic file is a cover image, we go to some online resource like IMdB, look for our first movie and save the cover or movie poster in a new folder where we want to keep our DVDdb files.
+
Opening that folder we see a typical Tracker window with one JPEG in it. Right-clicking it, we change its filetype to application/DVDdb with the Filetype Addon. There's more info on this in the Filetypes document.
+
Now, we activate all our DVDdb attributes from the Attributes menu of the Tracker window and rearrange the columns to our taste:
+
+
By clicking on a yet empty attribute (or pressing ALTE) we enter editing mode and fill each attribute. With TAB and SHIFTTAB you can navigate between attributes.
+
In our example, we usually start with a downloaded JPG cover and change its type to applications/DVDdb. There's another elegant way to produce a file to work with. Just copy an empty file of our filetype to /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates and rename it to DVDdb.
+
Right-clicking into a Tracker window, you'll find a new entry under New... besides the default "New folder".
Several hours of grunt work later, we have a nice little database that you can query to find all your Christina Ricci movies that have a 7+ rating... :)
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.
+Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder and rename it to group/filetype, replacing slashes with underscores; in our case "applications_DVDdb".
+
Open the new folder and paste in the layout with Attributes | Paste Layout. Voilà:
Workspaces are virtual desktops, complete with their own resolution, color depth and background. Up to 32 of these workspaces can be set from the Screen preferences.
You switch between workspaces by either clicking into the Workspaces applet (which is seen in the above image) or by using the keyboard shortcut ALTFx, where "x" is the workspace number. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
+Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send you to the workspace it's in.
+
Another very convenient way is to use CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ to navigate spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. If you additionally hold down SHIFT, the active window will move with you to the new workspace.
+
You can switch back and forth between two workspaces with ALT` (the actual key depends on the keymap you're using - it is the key below ESC). Again, holding SHIFT will take the active window with you.
Before diving into all the applications that come with Haiku, let's have a more detailed look at how to install and uninstall programs you downloaded somewhere, for example from a site mentioned on the Welcome page.
+
You should only unpack/install archives within Haiku. If you extract a package under Linux or Windows, for example, and just copy the folder over to Haiku later, all the vital attributes are stripped, because those operating systems don't normally handle meta data.
Haiku software always comes as an archive. Most of the time it's a ZIP, some old BeOS packages come in Software Valet's PKG format. Software Valet was able to automatically execute installation scripts, so after double-clicking you just select a destination folder and everything's taken care of.
+If it's a ZIP archive, double-clicking opens Expander where you also set the destination and unpack it. As explained in the topic Filesystem layout, that destination is either
+
+
/boot/common/apps/
for applications available to every user
+
/boot/home/apps/
for applications only available to yourself
+
+
This distinction will only become relevant once Haiku gets multi-user support, of course.
+
Once the archive is unpacked, you should have a look into the newly created folder. Often you find ReadMe files or other documentation of interest.
+
Some programs need further configurations. For example, Tracker Add-Ons, Translators or other system enhancing components have to be put into the right folders. Either you'll find a little script file (often with the suffix .sh) like install that you simply double click to have all taken care of.
+Sometimes you'll find folders that link to the correct destination named "drag [filename] here...". So, you simply follow that instruction and you're done.
+
Most of the time, however, nothing of the sort is necessary and you're done after unpacking.
+Topics Deskbar or LaunchBox describe how to add shortcuts to your newly installed application.
If the installation was done with an install script, chances are, there's an uninstall script as well. In that case, double-click it and you're done.
+Otherwise, uninstalling is simply done by deleting the application's folder.
+
This, of course, leaves back possible configuration files in your ~/config/settings folder. This may be on purpose, if you want to keep those settings in case you'll install the program again in the future. Also, when the installation involved those "drag [filename] here..." folders, those files are also left behind.
+
One method to quickly get to all the app's files is to do a quick query for a significant part of the application's name. This will reveal the app's binary, its installation folder and its settings as well as possible links in the Deskbar etc. Simply select all relevant files and delete them.
Haiku comes with a set of mostly small but essential applications. You'll find all of them at /boot/system/apps/ or /boot/common/apps/. Applications that are not usually launched by a double-click on a data file (e.g. ShowImage for image files) can be found in the Applications menu of the Deskbar.
Besides the above listed programs, which are all maintained by the Haiku project, there are a few essential applications bundled in a standard Haiku system. Bugs and feature requests for those have to be filed with the particular maintainer.
You can track system resources by launching the ActivityMonitor and activating different items of interest.
+
+
+
By right-clicking into the window, you can toggle the display of all kinds of resources:
+Used/Cached Memory, Swap Space, CPU Usage, Network Receive/Send, Page faults, Semaphores, Ports, Threads, Teams, Running Applications, Raw/Text Clipboard Size, Media Nodes.
+
Below the graph is a legend (hideable from the context menu). You can change the colors and that of the graph's background via drag&drop from any color picker, e.g. from Icon-O-Matic.
+
You can add more views from the File menu if it gets too crowded.
+
The Settings menu opens a panel to set the update interval.
+
Each view has it's own Replicant handle and can thus be arranged, for example, on the Desktop.
BePDF is a fast launching PDF viewer. Besides viewing, it supports annotating and user-defined bookmarking for unencrypted PDFs. It's fully localized for 20 languages at the moment with additional languages being easily added via text files.
+
Documentation is available as HTML or PDF. The latter will also open from the menu Help | Show Help....
BeZillaBrowser is based on Mozilla's source code and uses patches to improve speed, stability, and other UI aspects. Currently, all BeZilla builds use Mozilla's 1.8 CVS Branch. You can file bug reports of this port at the HaikuPorts.
+
As the Mozilla browsers are very widely used on many platforms, you'll find a plethora of guides and tips online. You could start from http://support.mozilla.com/.
+
BeZilla isn't able to print yet. Luckily, there's the add-on html2pdf that uses an online service to generate a PDF from the currently displayed page. After installation, there's a little PDF symbol in the status bar that, once clicked, opens a new window with a link offering to "Download PDF".
+Caveat: It only works with online pages, not with your locally stored documents.
Usage is pretty much what you'd expect from looking at the control buttons.
+Activate the Repeat button to the left of Shuffle to loop the complete CD.
+
If you need more control like playlists, try MediaPlayer instead.
CharacterMap will show you the UTF-8 code of every character a font supports.
+
+
To the left you have the standardized blocks, together with a handy filter function. Optionally, you can choose to also Show Private Blocks from the View menu. The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the Font menu. Below that you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer is displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.
+
You can drag&drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either Copy Character (ALTC) or Copy As Escaped Byte String (SHIFTALTC). Resulting in, e.g. either € or \xe2\x82\xac.
With CodyCam you take pictures at a specified interval from a connected webcam or any other video-in device and save it via FTP.
+
+
To the left under the preview, you set the filename that'll be suffixed with an increasing number for every picture taken. Beneath that you decide on the file format and the rate the pictures are taken.
+
To the right you choose either FTP or sFTP (if SSH is available) and enter the needed data to save the images on a server.
DeskCalc is a simple calculator that nevertheless has some nice features that aren't apparent on first sight.
+
+
+
DeskCalc understands much more than its simple keypad suggests.
+Besides the operators +, -, *, /, %, ^ and the constants pi and e the following math functions are supported:
+acos, asin, atan, atan2, ceil, cos, cosh, exp, floor, log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, tanh.
+
When it comes to user input, DeskCalc is quite tolerant:
+/, :, \ are all interpreted as division operators,
+*, x are valid symbols for multiplication.
+Also, be aware that . and , are both considered floating points, which means you mustn't use them as 1000 separators.
+
Right-clicking offers these options:
+
+
Enable Num Lock on start up
automatically activates the number block when launching DeskCalc
+
Show Keypad
hides the keypad when deactivated
+
+
You can resize the calculator until it fits your needs and then put it as Replicant onto the Desktop via drag&drop of the symbol in the bottom right corner. Make sure Show Replicants is activated in the Deskbar.
+
The keypad can be colored with a drag&drop from any color well, e.g. from Icon-O-Matic.
+
You can move up and down in a history of past calculations with ↑ and ↓.
+
You can select DeskCalc's contents and drag&drop it into any application. Or you drop it into a Tracker window or onto the Desktop and a text file with that clipping is created there.
+
Even better, the reverse is also possible:
+Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag&dropping them back into DeskCalc.
+Or you drag&drop a calculation directly out of an email onto DeskCalc.
+
DeskCalc can be used in Terminal. Just put the expression in double quotes, like this:
DiskProbe is a HEX editor to view and alter data of a file or on a device on a byte-level. It's a very low-level tool and has therefore the potential to really mess things up if you're not careful!
+
Always work with the backup of a file and be extra careful when working directly on a device.
+
When starting DiskProbe you'll first be asked for the file or the device to work on. After that you are presented with this interface:
+
+
The main view shows always one block of data, the size of which can be adjusted with View | BlockSize. To the left is the offset to the start of the block, in the middle the data as HEX values and to the right the same as ASCII symbols.
+You can move from block to block with the slider above or with ALT← and ALT→ and switch between the HEX and ASCII columns with TAB.
+
Block | Selection will not only show the selection with different endianess (and in HEX or decimal, set by View | Base), it will also interprete the selection as a block offset that you can jump to. It will be grayed out if the position is outside of the file/device.
+This is a handy feature mostly when looking at file systems, as they often contain pointers to other blocks.
+
If the file you're probing includes attributes, the Attributes menu can be used to open any of them in a new DiskProbe window. Here's the copyright attribute of the AboutSystem application:
+
+
Depending on the kind of attribute, you'll get a different editor tab besides the always present Raw Editor. For example, there are editors for strings and MIME types or an icon viewer for the vectoricon attribute.
DiskUsage shows graphically how the space on your volumes is utilized.
+A useful tool to answer the question, "Where has all my disk space gone?".
+
+
The concentric circles represent different levels in the file system hierarchy. Above, the circle in the center represents the /boot/home/ folder. Each segment of the ring immediately outside that circle is a file or folder under /boot/home/. Every segment farther outside brings you one level deeper in the file hierarchy. You may have to resize the window to accommodate very deep folders.
+
Above the graphic is a pop-up menu that lets you switch between all mounted volumes. Before the disk usage of a volume can be displayed, it has to be scanned. As this can take a while for larger disks, you can examine another volume while that scan is done in the background.
+
+
If the graphical representation of a file or folder comprises less than about 2° of a circle, it is excluded from the display.
+
The number of files that's reported for a folder includes files in subfolders too. A folder counts as a file.
+
DiskUsage ignores symbolic links.
+
+
As you move the mouse over a segment, information about that file or folder appears in the status bar at the bottom.
+
Right-clicking a segment offers a context menu to Get Info, Open (with Tracker), Open With another suitable application or Rescan that particular folder.
+Left-clicking a segment makes that file/folder the center circle.
+Left-clicking the center circle moves you up one level.
+
You can drag files and folders from DiskUsage to other applications or to the Desktop or other Tracker windows for copying. Vice versa, dropped volumes and folders on DiskUsage's window will zoom directly to them, making them the new center circle.
DriveSetup is a tool to create, delete and initialize partitions. At this time it can't resize or move existing partitions, so that you'll either need an unpartitioned volume (perhaps an external USB drive or another harddisk) or do the initial setup with a tool like the GParted LiveCD to provide the space for another partition.
+
+
At the top is a graphical representation of all partitions inside the device chosen in the list below it. Besides a maximum of 4 primary partitions, each of those can contain a number of extended/logical partitions. You may have to expand such a list with the +/- widget that appears in that case in front of that device to see the details of every logical partition.
+
You can select a partition from the list and mount and unmount them with the commands in the Partition menu or by pressing ALTM or ALTU.
+
You can also completely delete a partition with Partition | Delete.
+Which brings us to this:
+
Dealing with creating/deleting/initializing partitions is very dangerous business. Always check twice to be sure you're working with the right one and always keep an up-to-date backup of your data in case something goes wrong!
If you plan to use the entire drive as one partition, e.g. a USB stick or a Compact Flash card, you can skip the creation of a partition and proceed right to Initializing.
+
When you found unformatted space on a drive, like the above <empty>, you can create a new partition in this space with Partition | Create...(ALTC).
+
+
You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose Be File System if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.
+
If you have created a primary partition instead of just another extended/logical partition within one, the above dialog also displays an Active Partition checkbox. You'll have to check that, if you'll use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.
+
Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be initialized with a filesystem.
Only unmounted partitions can be initialized by using the Partition | Initialize menu.
+
+
Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
+Initializing will destroy all data on that partition!
No entry, normally launched via double-clicking a supported file.
+
Location:
/boot/system/apps/Expander
+
Settings:
~/config/settings/Expander_Settings
+
+
+
Expander is a small tool to quickly unpack the most common archives, among them zip, gzip, bzip2, rar and tar.gz.
+Just double-click an archive to see this simple interface:
+
+
+
Source
ALTS
will open a file dialog to find an archive to unpack.
+
Destination
ALTD
will open a file dialog to set the destination.
+
Expand
ALTE
will start the unpacking. It can be aborted with ALTK.
+
+
You can toggle the display of the file listing by un/checking Show Contents or pressing ALTL.
+
Expander can only unpack whole archives.
+You can't select individual files to expand or add/remove files from the archive.
+
Edit | Preferences... or ALTP opens a preference panel that offers some useful settings to adjust Expander's behavior.
+The options are all self-explanatory:
Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
+Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
+
+
Bitmap
SVG
HVIF
+
+
1,024 byte + 256 byte
7,192 byte
768 byte
+
+
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
+
This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType Add-On on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
+
Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.
Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
+
Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
+For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
+
+
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
+
+
To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the Shape menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the Properties view.
A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure, the path is selected in the path list.
+
+
Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+
+
+
+
To get from "A" to "B", you have to transform some points from corner-points to curve-points. That's done by holding ALT while clicking on a point and dragging out the handles. This results in a symmetrical Bezier: the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click&drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
+Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
+
+
To move a point, simply click&drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
+To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
+Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
+
+
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move point(s)
+
Insert point
+
Add point
+
Delete point CTRL
+
Corner↔Bezier ALT
+
Select points SHIFT
+
+
+
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
+
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
+
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
+
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
+
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add Rectangle and Add Circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
+
+
+
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
+
Clean Up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
+
Rotate Indices Right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
+
A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
+
+
+
+
When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move
+
Resize
+
Rotate
+
Move rotation point
+
+
+
+
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.
The Shape menu offers the before mentioned possibility to Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path&Style and to Duplicate or Remove a shape. Then, there is:
+
+
Reset Transformation
Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.
+
Freeze Transformation
When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used Options | Snap to Grid to set the points at precise pixel borders.
+If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
+With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
+
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its Min LOD and above its Max LOD.
+
So, if you set a shape's Min LOD to 0.0 and the Max LOD to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
+
The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
+For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
+Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
+
+
You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag&dropping it into the list of styles.
+
If you go for a gradient, you set the type (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag&drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
+Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
+
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
There's your usual menu bar at the top, File, Edit, Options. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
+
File | Save As... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
+
+
File | Export As... opens a familiar save panel with a file format dropdown menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+
+
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
+
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
+
HVIF Source Code
Saves as source code used by programmers
+
SVG
Saves as SVG
+
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
+
PNG Set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
+
BEOS:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
+
META:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
A few things you should keep in mind when working with Icon-O-Matic and some general tips for its usage:
+
+
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, colors and shadows.
+
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
+
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
+
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
+
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag&drop or copy&paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
+
If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
+
You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click&drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click&drag while holding SPACE.
The Installer is used to copy Haiku onto another volume.
+Upon launch it displays a start window with important information. It's not a mindless EULA you're used to click away in the blink of an eye, it states:
+
+
This is alpha-quality software. Make backups or suffer the consequences!
+
The Installer needs a prepared partition. You may have to use a GParted LiveCD or a similar tool until Haiku's DriveSetup is mature enough to handle this task.
+
Haiku can be added manually to the bootmanager GRUB. In short, you have add an entry to /boot/grub/menu.lst of your Linux installation, similar to this:
+
# Haiku on /dev/sda7
+title Haiku
+rootnoverify (hd0,6)
+chainloader +1
+
+
+
Once you acknowledged with Continue, you're presented with the main window:
+
+
In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.
+The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.
+
Clicking the little expander widget will Show Optional Packages, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.
+
You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on Setup partitions... to open DriveSetup and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.
+
Begin starts the installation procedure, which basically copies everything but the home/ and common/ folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.
+
At the end of the installation procedure, the partition is automatically made bootable. However, it can happen that some other operating system or partitioning tool (accidentally) overwrites the boot sector of your Haiku volume. In this case, boot your installation CD and start the Installer. Select your Haiku boot partition from the Onto: Please Choose Target menu and click Write Boot Sector to make it bootable again.
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
+
At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 32x32 pixel square around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
+
Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
+You can move the red outline with the CURSOR keys.
+
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALTH. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
+They can also be moved with the CURSOR keys. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
+
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with OPTCURSOR keys.
+
Clicking on the pop-up menu gives you a number of options:
+
+
Save Image
ALTS
Saves the current display as a resource file.
+
Copy Image
ALTC
Copies the current display to the clipboard.
+
Hide/Show Info
ALTT
Toggles the display of all the additional information.
+
Add a Crosshair
ALTH
Adds a crosshair you can drag around.
+
Remove a Crosshair
ALTSHIFTH
Removes the last added crosshair.
+
Hide/Show Grid
ALTG
Toggles the overlayed grid.
+
Freeze/Unfreeze image
ALTF
Stops/continues updating the magnification area.
+
Stick Coordinates
ALTI
Keeps updating the magnification area, but don't follow the mouse pointer any more.
+
Make Square
ALT/
Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.
+
Decrease Window Size
ALT-
Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
+
Increase Window Size
ALT+
Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
Pe is a sophisticated editor, with its syntax highlighting targeted mainly at programmers and HTML writers. Originally created by Maarten Hekkelmann, it's been open sourced and maintained by Haiku developers. A bugtracker and more information is available at the Pe project page.
+
Find out more about Pe's features in its local documentation.
People is a simple contact database using the attributes of Haiku's filesystem to store addresses and other contact information. Every contact is saved as one Person file with its data in separate attributes. All are indexed and therefore searchable with a query.
+
+
+
+
The Group attribute at the bottom allows assigning a person to one or more groups. Useful for "mass mailing" a number of people who, for example, work on a specific project. The pop-up menu offers all currently existing groups. If a person belongs to more than one group, the group names are delimited with a ",".
+
+
These Person files are usually all saved in /boot/home/people/. To get a list of all your contacts, just open your people folder and display all attributes of interest. If you choose to organize your Person files in different folders, just use a query to display them all in one window.
+
+
+
+
You can treat these files like any other: You can sort according to attributes (even a second sorting order by holding SHIFT while clicking) and of course delete, duplicate or rename Person files. Even the contact information can be edited directly: Clicking on an attribute (or ALTE) to edit works just like renaming a file. Once you're in edit mode, TAB and SHIFTTAB will jump from column to column.
PoorMan is a nice little webserver that's extremly easy to set up. Naturally it doesn't offer any advanced features like other heavy duty server software, it's after all only a poor man's webserver.
+
Upon its first launch, PoorMan asks for the folder that is about to be served to the web. If you go with the Default, a new folder /boot/home/public_html is created for you. As a start page a HTML file named by default index.html has to be present there.
+
PoorMan presents itself with a simple console that logs its activity. Then, there's status information if the server is running, which folder is being served, and a hit counter. Settings are changed with Edit | Settings...:
+
+
+
The settings panel is divided into three tabs:
+
In Site you can select another folder to serve, enter another start page and have the option to send a file listing if the start page isn't present.
+Logging lets you de/activate logging to the console or optionally to a separate logfile.
+The Advanced tab holds the setting for the maximum simultaneous connections.
+
The menu items of the console window are all self-explanatory. With them you can e.g. save (parts) of the console output, clear the console or logging file and start/stop the server or clear the hit counter.
+
+
If you want to try out if PoorMan's working, choose /boot/apps/BePDF/docs/ as folder and index.html as start page. Then point your browser to the URL 127.0.0.1, which is your local host.
Besides normal screenshots taken via PRINT, which puts a PNG of the current screen into /boot/home/, this application provides some useful options.
+
+
Starting Screenshot will take a screenshot as usual, but offers from its main window controls to set filename, format and folder before saving the image.
+
The Options dialog has a few more settings:
+
+
Besides the obvious, toggle between taking the whole screen or just the active window, including the window border and the mouse pointer, you can enter a delay before a screenshot is taken. Of course, this delay takes only effect if you take a new shot by pressing Take Screenshot.
+
+
+
+Taking a screenshot from Terminal
+
The Screenshot application is also usable from Terminal or a script.
+Screenshot --help shows the familiar options as parameters:
+
+
~> Screenshot --help
+
+Screenshot [OPTION]... Creates a bitmap of the current screen
+
+OPTION
+ -o, --options Show options window first
+ -m, --mouse-pointer Include the mouse pointer
+ -b, --border Include the window border
+ -w, --window Capture the active window instead of the entire screen
+ -d, --delay=seconds Take screenshot after specified delay [in seconds]
+ -s, --silent Saves the screenshot without showing the app window
+ overrides --options, saves to home folder as png
+
+Note: OPTION -b, --border takes only effect when used with -w, --window
+
StyledEdit is Haiku's simple text editor. Although it saves files in plain text format, additional attributes are written in order to have limited formatting capabilities when viewed with StyledEdit.
+
+
If you're interested, this is what those additional attributes look like when examined in Terminal with listattr:
+
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+ Int-32 4 "be:encoding"
+MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Int-32 4 "wrap"
+ Int-32 4 "alignment"
+ Raw Data 1048 "styles"
+
+1071 bytes total in attributes.
+
As you can see, all the formatting options from StyledEdit's menu are present: line wrapping (on/off) and alignment (left/center/right), each in one attribute. Styles (font, size, color) of each letter mangled into another.
+
Because these attributes are a file system feature of BFS, this means that not only other platforms just see a plain text file, it also follows, that the formatting will be lost when a file is stored on a non-BFS partition. The above attributes are simply stripped and what's left is the ordinary, plain text file.
+
In any case, it's a nice idea having the possibility of colored text in different fonts and sizes while still being a normal text file. A ReadMe.txt, for example, is therefore readable in a shell on any platform and still has a bit of style when viewed via double-click from Haiku.
+
Actually using StyledEdit is so simple, we'll skip explaining every mundane menu item. Just write down your text then select the words you'd like to format and apply font, size and color from the Font menu. Line wrapping and alignment from the Document menu only work on the whole file.
~/config/settings/Terminal_settings
+~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+
+
+
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
+
Please refer to the topic on Scripting for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.
You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALTN from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open another tab with ALTT.
+
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window Size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
+
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
+
+
+
Settings | Preferences opens a panel where you can set font type, font size and the different text and background colors. You can save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal.
+Pressing OK will save the current settings as default.
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/etc/.
+
+
.profile
+
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
+
The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
The .inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:
+
+
Insert Path
Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.
+
Change Directory
Changes to the folder of the dragged file.
+
Create Link Here
Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Move Here
Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Copy Here
Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
+
You can open any file with its preferred application with the command open [filename]. This also works with the representation of the current (".") and parent ("..") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:
Vision is an IRC client originally developed for the BeOS. Documentation and a bug tracker are available at the Vision website.
+
You can find help from other Haiku users and developers on Haiku channels in various languages.
+The most frequented is the English speaking #haiku at irc.freenode.org.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/userguide/jp/applications/vlc.html b/userguide/jp/applications/vlc.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7ba6930a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/userguide/jp/applications/vlc.html
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ VLC media player
+
+
+
+
+
WonderBrush is an editor for bitmap and vector graphics. Find more information and workshops at the YellowBites website and in the local documentation.
Attributes are data fields that belong to a file but aren't part of that file, e.g. they are not computed into the file size and can be copied or changed without touching the file itself. The system uses these attributes to store e.g. file size, file type or date of the last modification. This is similar to other operating systems and their filesystems.
+
What's different is that you can add any kind of attribute to any file and display it or make it editable in a Tracker window. You just have to define the kind of attribute you want to add to a file type (e.g. string, integer or time) and give it a name and description.
+
The file itself doesn't even need any contents at all. Take a look at these People files for example:
+
+
+
As you can see, these are all 0-sized files with attached attributes, the E-mail attribute of "John Nox" being edited right in Tracker.
+
If you index these attributes, as People, Email or audio files are by default, they are also searchable with Haiku's fast query system.
Attributes are displayed quite similar to a database or spreadsheet. Using Tracker you can choose which attributes to display (columns) and sort file listings (rows) accordingly.
+
To do this, open a Tracker window, click on the Attributes menu, and select the attributes you want to display. Alternatively, simply right-click onto a column heading and mark the items in the context menu. You can rearrange the columns by a simple drag&drop of the column heading. Moving a column out of a window, is a fast way to get rid of columns you don't need.
+
Double-click on the line between two attributes in the heading to automatically resize a column to its optimal width.
+
Click on a column heading to toggle the sorting order from ascending to descending. You can establish a secondary sort order by pressing the SHIFT key while clicking on a column heading. You can sort your People files by company and within that order sort by contact name, for instance. See the above screenshot as an example. The secondary sort order is marked by a lighter colored indicator beside the heading.
+
Editing these attributes is as simple as renaming a file: Either click on an entry or press ALTE and move between the attributes with TAB and SHIFTTAB. ESC leaves the editing mode without applying the changes.
If you prefer to use the commandline or plan to work with many files using scripting, there are several commands for controlling attributes from Terminal.
listattr lists a file's attributes, but doesn't show the contents of the attributes.
+
usage: listattr 'filename' ['filename' ...]
+
From our screenshot example above:
+
~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters
+File: Clara Botters
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Text 14 "META:name"
+ Text 6 "META:nickname"
+ Text 1 "META:company"
+
+ Text 18 "META:address"
+ Text 8 "META:city"
+ Text 1 "META:state"
+ Text 1 "META:zip"
+ Text 1 "META:country"
+
+ Text 1 "META:hphone"
+ Text 13 "META:wphone"
+ Text 1 "META:fax"
+ Text 19 "META:email"
+ Text 1 "META:url"
+
+ Text 5 "META:group"
+ Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le"
+
+131 bytes total in attributes.
+
Besides all the "META:*" attributes that hold the contact's information, there are two attributes that are managed by the system:
+
+
BEOS:TYPE holds the file type as a MIME string, here "application/x-person". It determines the default icon and the application that opens the file when you e.g. double click it.
+
"_trk/pinfo_le" is the attribute with which Tracker keeps track of a file's icon position.
+
Note the backslash after "Clara". In Terminal you have to "escape" special characters like '"*\$?!. The space between "Clara" and "Botters" is also one of those. Therefore the backslash is really in front of the space character, and not after "Clara".
addattr adds an attribute to a file and/or fills it with a value.
+
usage: addattr [-t type] attr value file1 [file2...]
+ or: addattr [-f value-from-file] [-t type] attr file1 [file2...]
+
+ Type is one of:
+ string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, raw
+ or a numeric value (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...)
+ The default is "string"
+
So, say dear Clara took a job with the multi-national Barkelbaer Inc., you fill the formerly empty "Company" attribute with that data (which is of type "string"):
+
~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters
rmattr completely removes an attribute from a file.
+
+
usage: rmattr [-p] attr filename1 [filename2...]
+ 'attr' is the name of an attribute of the file
+ If '-p' is specified, 'attr' is regarded as a pattern.
+
Though in all practicality it would be enough to just not fill the "Fax" attribute, you can completely remove it from Clara's file by typing:
"Scripting" is the technique of automating procedures by stringing together commands and saving it all as text files, so called "scripts". Every time you run such a script, the commands are processed one after the other just like they would if you entered them into the Terminal by hand.
+Scripts can range from simply executing a few commands in a specific order to sophisticated pieces of code that solve complex tasks.
Since scripts rely naturally a lot on the shell they are interpreted by, you should first familiarize yourself with the BASH that's used by Haiku. There are many resources online as it's a widely used shell. One nice document is Johan Jansson's Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
After you've learned a few basics about working in the shell, it's time to slowly ease yourself into the world of scripting. Again, you'll find loads of tutorials and reference material online as well as in bookstores. A very nice introduction that's practically tailor-made for Haiku is the online available Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900kb) of Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible.
In Haiku, the system makes of course also use of scripting. Booting and shutting down are typical scripting procedures. These defined sequences can be augmented by the user with certain user scripts.
+If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Otherwise simply add your commands where in the process you want them to be executed.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript will be executed after the system has finished its boot process. For example, you could launch a number of programs that would then be automatically started on every boot up:
Remember to end a command with an "&" to start it as a background process, or the script will halt until that command has finished (in this case: the launched app was closed again).
+
+
A simple alternative to the above for launching applications at boot up is to put links to them in the /boot/home/config/boot/launch directory. This can be done simply by right-clicking on the application you wish to have started automatically, going to Create Link and then navigating to the above directory.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript will be executed as the first step in the shutdown process. If the script returns a non-zero exit status, the shutdown is aborted.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript is executed as the last step in the shutdown process. Note, that most parts of the system have terminated by the time this script is executed.
Haiku's Boot Loader can help when you experience hardware related problems or want to choose which Haiku installation to start, if you have more than one (maybe on an installation CD or USB stick).
+It's also handy after you installed a software component that acts up and prevents you from booting the system to remove it again. The Disable user add-ons option that's mentioned below, will start Haiku without loading user installed components, e.g. a driver.
+
To enter the Boot Loader options, you have to press the SPACE BAR right at the beginning of the boot process. It's easy to miss so you best keep hitting the key until it shows up.
+
+
Once it's there, you're offered three menus:
+
+
Select boot volume
Choose which Haiku installation to start.
+
Select safe mode options
+
There are several options to try in case of hardware related trouble. When moving the selection bar to an option, a short explanation appears at the bottom of the screen.
+
- Safe mode
+- Disable user add-ons
+- Disable IDE DMA
+- Use fail-safe video mode
+- Don't call the BIOS
+- Disable APM
+- Disable ACPI
+- Disable IO-APIC
+- Enable serial debug output
+- Enable on screen debug output
+
+
Select fail safe video mode
If you had to activate the option Use fail-safe video mode, you can set resolution and color depth.
+
+
+
After activating one or more options, you return to the main menu and continue booting, which presents you with this boot screen:
+
+
+
If everything works OK, one symbol after another quickly lights up.
+The different symbols roughly correspond to these boot stages:
Below, you'll find the documentation of the most important aspects of Haiku. Naturally, completing and extending the documentation is a continuing process. If you find errors, would like to suggest topics or maybe even contribute yourself, please get in touch on the documentation mailing list. If you're interested in helping with translations, you'll find information on that at the i18n User Guide Wiki.
There are some nice little games and demo applications for your entertainment. Most of the demos are targeted to developers who are interested in learning from the code, which is of course open source as is everything Haiku.
The Deskbar is the little panel that by default is located in the upper right corner of the screen. It's Haiku's version of Windows' taskbar with its Start button. It contains the Deskbar menu from where you can start applications and preferences, a tray with a clock and other tools below that and a list of currently running programs at the bottom.
+
+
You can move the Deskbar to any corner or as a bar along the upper or lower border of the screen by gripping the knobbly area on one side of the tray and drag&drop it into the new position. You can also fold it into a more compact layout by drag&dropping the knobbly area onto the Deskbar menu.
Show Replicants - Shows/hides the little Replicant widget you use to drag it around, remove or access its context menu.
+
Mount - Offers the same options as when invoked by right-clicking the Desktop (see Mounting Volumes).
+
Deskbar Preferences... - Opens a panel to configure the Deskbar (see below).
+
Shutdown - Offers options to either Restart System or Power Off.
+
Recent Documents, Folders, Applications - List of the last recently opened documents, folders and applications (see Deskbar Preferences below).
+
Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, Preferences - List of installed applications, demos, applets and preferences (see Deskbar Preferences below).
+
+
+
+Deskbar Preferences
+
+
+
Menu
+Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.
+The button Edit Menu... opens the folder /boot/home/config/be/. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, and Preferences.
+You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.
+
It's even easier to simply drag a file, folder or saved query and drop it where you want it into the Deskbar.
+
Window
+
+
Always on Top
The Deskbar always stays above all other windows.
+
Auto Raise
The Deskbar pops to the front if the mouse pointer touches it.
+
+
Applications
+
+
Sort Running Applications
Sorts the list of running programs alphabetically.
+
Tracker always First
Even if you sort alphabetically, the Tracker entry always stays first in the list.
+
Show Application Expander
Provides a small widget to show/hide all windows of a program directly under its entry in the Deskbar.
+
Expand New Applications
Newly launched programs have their windows automatically expanded under their entry in the Deskbar.
Among other things, the tray is housing the clock. Left-click it to toggle between date and time. Right-click it to hide/show it or launch the Time preferences to set it.
+Here you can also launch a calendar that also appears, when you hold down the left mouse button on the clock for a little time.
+
Any program can install an icon in the tray to provide an interface to the user. The email system, for instance, shows a different symbol when there's unread mail and offers a context menu to e.g. create or check for new mail. ProcessController is another example that uses its icon in the tray to provide information (CPU/memory usage) and to offer a context menu.
You can change to a specific running application by clicking on its entry in the Deskbar and choosing (one of) its windows, from the submenu. By right-clicking you can minimize or close a window or the entire application.
+
If you activated Expanders in the Deskbar settings, you can expand/collapse the list of windows directly under an application's entry.
+
In front of every application's windows is a symbol providing info on its state. A bright symbol means a window is visible, a dark one that it's minimized. Three lines in front of a symbol shows that it's not on the current workspace.
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag&drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
+
+
All options are reached from the context menu:
+
+
Add Button Here
Adds an empty button.
+
Clear Button
Empties a button.
+
Remove Button
Removes a button.
+
Settings
+- Horizontal Layout
+- Icon size
+- Ignore Double-click
+- Show Window Border
+- Auto Raise
+- Show On All Workspaces
+Aligns the buttons horizontally.
+Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.
+Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.
+Shows the window border.
+LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge.
+Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace.
+
Pad
+- New
+- Clone
+- Close
+Add a new pad.
+Duplicate the current pad.
+Close the current pad.
+
LaunchBox
+- About...
+- Quit
+Shows the About window.
+Quits all LaunchBox pads.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
+
+
You find the Workspaces applet with the other Desktop Applets in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.
+Change Workspace Count... will open the Screen preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).
+
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure Show Replicants is activated in the Deskbar menu).
To move a window, you grab it in the Workspaces applet and simply drag it to another workspace. This has the advantage, that you can move it without leaving your current desktop. Of course, that only works well when there aren't too many windows in a workspace and your target isn't obscured by other windows. Another possibility is to grab a window by its tab and just holding on to it while switching workspaces with ALTFx.
+
For more information on workspaces in general and more keyboard shortcuts, see topic Workspaces.
Haiku's filesystem layout is quite transparent, trying to always use non-cryptic names for files and folders, that don't leave the user guessing. Files and folders that are important for the system to function properly, are protected from accidental tempering by showing one of these alerts:
+
+
+
The second alert pops up if you try to rename or delete something in the system hierarchy. Here, the "Do it" button will only become clickable when you're holding down the SHIFT key.
+
Generally, there are three separate branches springing from the root folder of the boot volume:
+
+
/boot/system/
belongs to the system. Don't touch!
+
/boot/common/
holds files that are shared between users.
+
/boot/home/
is your personal folder where you keep your data and settings.
Under Haiku's predecessor BeOS, this folder was named /boot/beos/. You may still find it in some older documentation (e.g. in the original BeBook).
+Whatever it's named, you should not alter what's inside. Every update of Haiku can add, remove or overwrite anything within it. If you want to add functionality, maybe with other Tracker Add-Ons or Translators or maybe another hardware driver, you install these things under your own /boot/home/ hierarchy or, if it's supposed to be for every user, under /boot/common/. As long as Haiku isn't multi-user, this distinction has no apparent effect, as there's only one user with one home folder. But since there will be support for more users than one eventually, it makes sense to learn the right way from the start.
+
So, let's say you want to install a new Translator for the latest image format, you don't simply copy it into the respective system folder. Remember: Don't touch!
+Instead, you put it into the mirrored hierarchy under /boot/common/ or /boot/home/config/.
+
In our example the location for Translators in the system folder would be
This has another advantage: If the component you have installed messes things up (which is possible as you install hardware drivers like this, too) you are able to choose "Disable User Add-Ons" from the Boot Loader menu and are thus always able to boot without the offending component.
+
Most of the time, however, you won't have to deal with these things at all, since every software that comes from a trusted source should include an installation routine that handles these things.
+
+
Haiku is not a multi-user system yet. Once it is though, every user has her own home folder that is not accessible to anyone else. Every application or added component like Tracker Add-Ons, Translators etc. as well as any data that's supposed to be shared between different users, has to be put under /boot/common/.
This folder belongs to you. Here you can create and delete files and folders as you wish. However, you shouldn't mess too much with the ~/config/ directory and its subfolders. You could delete e.g. the ~/config/settings/ folder without damaging the operating system itself, but who wants to lose all his configurations and application settings? In any case, the system warns you with the at the top mentioned alert.
+
Besides the ~/config/add-ons/ folder, which mirrors the system's add-ons folder for additional components as described above, there are a few other folders of interest. (By the way, the tilde ("~") is a shortcut for your home folder, so you don't always have to write "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
+
+
~/mail
+
By default, this is where your mails are kept.
+
+
~/queries
+
Queries are stored, by default temporarily for 7 days, in this folder.
+
+
~/config/be/
+
Again from our BeOS legacy, the be folder contains what's shown in the Deskbar menu. You can add and remove items by putting files, folders, links or queries into this folder.
+
+
~/config/bin/
+
Complements the system's /boot/system/bin/ folder and holds all your command line programs.
+
+
~/config/boot/
+
This folder is the place for User Scripts that are executed before or after the system boots up or shuts down.
+
+
~/config/boot/launch/
+
Links to programs or documents in this folder are automatically launched on every boot-up.
+
+
~/config/fonts/
+
Simply copy a TrueType or Postscript font into this folder and its usable right away.
+
+
~/config/settings/
+
This folder contains the settings to all applications and a few configurations for the system. Some applications manage their settings in their own subfolders, others simply put their configuration file in there.
+
+
~/config/settings/beos_mime/
+
In this MIME database Haiku keeps track of all the different filetypes and their settings.
+
+
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/
+
There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here!
+
+
~/config/settings/Tracker/
+
Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders:
+
+
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Show and arrange all attributes and the window size to your liking. Every new folder you create will use it as a template.
+
+
DefaultQueryTemplates/
You can define the layout of query result windows for certain filetypes. See topic Query: The result window.
Other than Windows, Haiku doesn't rely on the 3-letter file extension for a file type (e.g. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). This method is only a last resort fallback. Haiku uses MIME types just like it's custom on the internet.
+
While there's no reason to use file extensions in Haiku, remember to add them to files you want to share with users of other operating systems, e.g. over email, uploading to a server or via exchange of an USB drive. Otherwise their system may not recognize the file type.
You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the Add-Ons | Filetype add-on from the right-click context menu.
The above is a PNG file, it's MIME string image/png. Let's say you definitely know that it's not a PNG but a GIF. You can change that either by entering the correct MIME string by hand or with one of the two buttons below the textbox:
+
+
Select...
shows a hierarchical list of filetypes where you navigate to image | GIF Image.
+
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the filetype you're looking for.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
+
+
The Default Application is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons Select... and Same As... which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype Add-On of a file that contains an icon and drag&drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
If you invoke the Filetype Add-On on an executable (here: StyledEdit), you'll get a different dialog:
+
+
On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.
+
Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:
+
+
Single Launch
Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side.
+
Multiple Launch
Many instances of the app can run simultaneously.
+
Exclusive Launch
Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time.
+
Args Only
Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages.
+
Background App
The app won't appear in Twitcher or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.
+
+
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's Open with... context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
+
At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.
The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
+
All filetypes and their configurations are stored in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Before you start experimenting, it may be prudent to make a backup of that folder...
Haiku's graphical user interface is an integral part of the system. Unlike Unix-based operating systems, there's no separate window manager and booting just into a command line shell is not possible. Haiku's focus being on the desktop user, this is just not considered necessary.
+
As you probably have experience with other graphical environments, let's skip over the standards like menus, right-click context menus, drag&drop etc. Let's have a look at the few unique aspects of Haiku's GUI instead.
+
+
There are only a few things in Haiku's GUI that aren't obvious and deserve an explanation.
+
+
The Deskbar is Haiku's "Start" menu and taskbar, if you will. See topic Deskbar.
+
The yellow tab offers more than just a program's name or a document's filename:
+
You can move it by holding the SHIFT key while dragging it to another position, enabling you to stack a number of windows and conveniently access them by their named tab.
+
You minimize a window with a double-click on its tab (or with CTRLALTM). A such hidden window can be accessed by its entry in the Deskbar or the Twitcher.
+
You can send a window to the back with a right-click on its tab (or its border).
+
The close button.
+
The "zoom" button (or CTRLALTZ). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size. It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.
+
The resize corner. Dragging anywhere else on a window's border will move the window.
+
+
While holding CTRLALT, you can click anywhere into a window to move it with the left mouse button; the right mouse button sends it to the back.
When opening or saving a file from any application, a panel like this opens:
+
+
It has all the usual things: A list of files of the current folder to choose from, in case of a save panel, a text field to enter a filename and a pop-up menu for different file formats and their settings.
+You can enter parent folders with the pop-up menu above the file listing.
+
If you already have a Tracker window with the location for a file open, you can simply drag either any file or the folder-representation (i.e. the symbol to the far right in its menu bar) into the panel. This changes the panel to that new location.
Many shortcuts in open and save panels are the same used in Tracker. Besides the commands that are also available through the File menu, there are a few not that obvious:
The Favorites menu in open and save panels provides recently visited folders and favorite locations that you can set up yourself. As indicated by the little arrow, you can also use these locations to navigate further down the hierarchy via submenus.
+
+
To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose Favorites | Add Current Folder. From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose Favorites | Configure Favorites... and delete its entry.
+All Favorites are kept in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. So you might as well add and remove links to files and folders there directly.
Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to Show Replicants is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:
+
+
The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag&drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.
+A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's About window and to Remove Replicant.
+
Should you experience difficulties with a Replicant on the Desktop and just can't get rid of it, delete ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. Unfortunately, this will remove all Replicants from the Desktop.
Attributes and Queries are key features of Haiku. While attributes are useful on their own, to display additional information on a file, for a query on them, they need to be indexed. It puts them into a lookup table, which in turn makes queries lightning fast.
+The index is part of the filesystem and is kept for every volume/partition separately.
+
+
+Indexing commands in Terminal
+
There are several commands to manage the index:
+
+
lsindex - Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition.
+These are the attributes that are indexed by default:
mkindex - Adds an attribute to the index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute>
+Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume to which the index will be added,
+ defaults to current volume.
+ -t, --type=TYPE the type of the attribute being indexed. One of "int",
+ "llong", "string", "float", or "double".
+ Defaults to "string".
+ --copy-from path to volume to copy the indexes from.
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being created
+
+
+
Only new files with that attribute come automatically into the index!
+Existing files have to be added manually by copying them and deleting the originals after that. Alternatively you can use the command reindex.
+
+
+
reindex - Puts the attributes of existing files into the newly created index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories>
+ -r enter directories recursively
+ -v verbose output
+ -f create/update all indices from the source volume,
+ "attr" is the path to the source volume
+
+
+
+
rmindex - Removes an attribute from the index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME
+
+Removes the index named INDEX_NAME from a disk volume. Once this has been
+done, it will no longer be possible to use the query system to search for
+files with the INDEX_NAME attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume from which the index will be
+ removed
+ -h, --help display this help and exit
+ -p, --pattern INDEX_NAME is a pattern
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being removed
+
+INDEX_NAME is the name of a file attribute.
+
+If no volume is specified, the volume of the current directory is assumed.
By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALTC and ALTV integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRLC quits the running process.
+
In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide will always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
+
If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
Additionally to the general shortcuts, here are some more for navigating with Tracker:
+
+
ALT↑
Opens the parent folder.
+
ALT↓ or ENTER
Opens the selected folder.
+
OPT
Holding it while opening a folder will automatically close the parent folder. This also works when navigating with the mouse.
+
MENU
Opens the Deskbar menu (leave with ESC).
+
ALTZ
Undo last action. The undo history is only limited by the available memory. Note, this only works for actions on the file itself, changed attributes and permission settings can't be undone with this. Also, once a file is removed from Trash it's gone for good.
Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press TAB once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press TAB twice to have all matches listed.
+
↑/↓
Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands.
+
CTRLR
Bash history. All the commands you enter
+are stored in the file ~/.bash_history. Press CTRLR and start to enter a command and you'll be provided with the first match from the bash history. Keep pressing CTRLR until you find the right command line and press ENTER to execute it.
You can add or remove items to/from a selection by holding down a modifier key while clicking on a entry (or file in case of Tracker).
+
+
SHIFT
This will select everything between the first selected item and the one you click on.
+
ALT
Adds or removes the item you're clicking on from the selection.
+
+
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
+The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
While a key philosophy of Haiku is to cut down on options and have sensible defaults instead, there are some things that have to be configured or can be set to individual preference. You find all panels in Deskbar's Preferences menu.
In the first tab, Colors, you can change the colors of different parts of the user interface. The color well accepts drag&drops from other programs, letting you drag colors over from e.g. WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic or the Backgrounds panel.
The second tab, Antialiasing, provides different settings for how things are rendered on screen.
+
+
+
+Glyph hinting
+
An activated Glyph hinting aligns all letters in such a way that their vertical and horizontal edges rest exactly between two pixels. The result is a perfect contrast, especially when dealing with black on white. Text appears crisper. There's also a setting for Monospaced Fonts Only that's especially helpful with low resolution devices like netbooks. Small fonts can look pretty bad when hinting is turned on, but with this setting you still have the advantage of hinting for text editors and Terminal.
+
See the difference hinting makes with these magnified screenshots:
+
+
Hinting: off
Hinting: on
+
+
It should be pointed out that all the Magnify windows on this page are of course rendered themselves with the different options as well. So, you get a real world impression of the settings by comparing, for example, the bold yellow tab title or the text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+
+
+
+Antialiasing type
+
Another technique to improve rendering is Antialiasing, which supports all vector graphics as well as text. It smooths lines by changing the color of certain pixels. There are two methods for that:
+
Grayscale changes the intensity of pixels at the edge.
+LCD subpixel does an even better job, especially with (high resolution) LCD monitors. Instead of the intensity of a pixel, it changes its color which moves an edge by a fraction of a pixel, because LCD displays produce every pixel with a red, green and blue component.
+
Again, the two different methods with magnified screenshots:
+
+
Grayscale, Hinting: off
LCD subpixel, Hinting: off
+
+
Subpixel based antialiasing adds a slight colored shine to objects. Something not everyone tolerates. In Haiku you can mix the two antialiasing methods and find the right setting for you by using a slider.
+
The subpixel based antialiasing in combination with the glyph hinting is subject of a software patent and is therefore not available by default. Depending on where in the world you live, you may get an unlocked version. Sorry about that. Talk with your representative.
+
If you do activate hinting plus LCD subpixel rendering by changing the source and recompiling, this is how it looks compared to hinting with Grayscale:
+
+
Grayscale, Hinting: on
LCD subpixel, Hinting: on
+
+
+
At the bottom of the panel are two buttons:
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Appearance preferences.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - stores the panel's window position
+
+
You can set a color or an image as background for every folder and the Desktop for every workspace.
+
+
+
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied to the current workspace only, all workspaces, a specific folder or as default for every new folder.
+
Below that you can assign an image or select None if you want simply a colored background. Images can also be drag&dropped onto the preview to the left.
+
If you are using an image, you have to decide on the placement:
+
+
Manual
lets you specify the coordinates. You can drag the picture around in the preview to the left or enter X and Y manually.
+
Center
centers the picture in the middle of the screen.
+
Scale to fit
enlarges the picture with no regard to its aspect ratio until it fills the screen.
+
Tile
fills the screen by repeating the picture.
+
+
Activating Icon label outline puts a thin contour around icon labels.
+
Whether an icon label's actual text is black or white depends on the setting of the color picker. A dark color sets the text to white, a light color to black. So, if you assign a very bright image to the background, you should also set the color picker to a bright color in order to have icon labels readable in black. (Or use the outline option above.)
+The selected color is also reflected in the Workspaces applet, which ignores images as backgrounds.
+
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Backgrounds preferences.
~/config/settings/* - Every Translator creates its own settings file here after you've changes its defaults.
+~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Every application has the ability to open and save every file format for which there's a Translator installed. The settings for these Translators are configured in the DataTranslations preferences.
+
+
+
Depending on its capabilities, each Translator offers different settings. At least you'll get an Info... button that opens a window with the credits and the installation path.
+The following table gives an overview of the default Translators and their most useful options.
+
+
BMP Images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency
+
EXR Images
ILM's high dynamic-range (HDR) format
+
GIF Images
8bit, lossless compression, transparency
+You can reduce the filesize by limiting the number of used colors and the palette.
+You can write images with transparency, either by automatically using the alpha channel or by setting the RGB value that will be transparent by hand.
+
JPEG2000 Images
24bit, compressed, no transparency
+Here, you normally only care about the output quality.
+
JPEG Images
24bit, compressed, no transparency
+Besides the output quality you can also set a smoothing that will lessen compression artefacts but can blur the picture a little.
+
PCX Images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, PC Paintbrush Exchange format
+
PNG Images
32bit, lossless compression, transparency
+
PPM Images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, Portable PixMap format
Screenshots, charts, black&white drawings and other images with few used colors, as well as small pictures are best saved as GIF (up to 256 colors) or PNG (millions of colors). JPEG, for example, introduces compression artefacts without gain in smaller filesize.
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
+The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
+You start by clicking the Add button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
+
+
First, declare the Account Type which is either Receive Mail Only, Send Mail Only, or the most usual type, Send and Receive Mail. Then you set how you get your mail, via POP3 or IMAP.
+
Now you enter your E-mail Address, Login Name and Password, give an Account Name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real Name.
+
If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses and the following information is already filled in automatically. If that is not the case, just follow this guide and fill in the details to your e-mail account accordingly.
Click on Incoming under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.
+
+
From the pop-up menu you choose the protocol used by your provider. IMAP and POP3 are supported.
+
Next is the Mail Server address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+
Then you enter your login information, Username and Password, and if necessary change the Login Type from the default Plain Text to APOP for authentication.
+
If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to Leave mail on server and only Remove mail from server when deleted locally.
+
If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to Remove mail from server when deleted locally. You can specify a Top Mailbox Folder to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
+
The New Mail Notification offers different methods to announce the arrival of new mail. Try different settings to see what works best for you.
+
You can change the Location of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
+
Last on this page, you can opt to only Partially download messages that are larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
Click on Outgoing under your account's name to set up how e-mails are sent.
+
+
As with incoming mail, you can also change the Location of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
+
Next is the SMTP Server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+
If you need to login, you change the Login Type to ESMTP and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with POP3 before SMTP for identification.
If you want to filter your incoming email, you click on E-Mail Filters under your account's name to set up automatic sorting. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other. You can rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.
+Besides the R5 Daemon Filter that's used for backward compatibility, there are two other Incoming Mail Filters you can add.
+
+
+
+Spam Filter
+
+
The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
+You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
+Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
+
Together with the following Match Header filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+
+
+
+Match Header
+
+
This filter compares a header to a search pattern and performs some action when it matches.
+With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are available:
+
+
Name
+
the name of the sender
+
From
+
the e-mail address of the sender
+
To
+
your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account)
+
Reply To
+
the e-mail address replies are sent to
+
When
+
the date and time the mail was received
+
Subject
+
the subject line
+
Cc
+
addresses of anyone receiving a carbon copy (Cc)
+
Account
+
the name of the e-mail's account
+
Status
+
The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail.
+
Priority
+
is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent")
+
Thread
+
essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd:
+
Classification Group
+
depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"
+
Spam/Genuine Estimate
+
this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.
+
+
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
+
With the pop-up menu below it, you assign an action when the pattern matches. You can move or delete a mail, set the status to "Read" or anything else or set the e-mail account you'll reply with.
+
+
+
+Outgoing Mail Filters
+
At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
+ It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
+
+
Under Mail Checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
+If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that Only When Dial-Up is Connected and also Schedule Outgoing Mail When Dial-Up is Disconnected to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
+
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up Never, While Sending, While Sending and Receiving or Always.
+
Make sure to Start Mail Services on Startup or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
+
Edit Mailbox Menu... will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
+
From that menu, you can also Create New Message..., Check For Mail Now or Edit Preferences....
+
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/fonts
+~/config/settings/Font_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
+
+
Haiku defines three standard fonts for different purposes. You set plain, bold and fixed font types and sizes that will be used throughout the system. Besides these, there's also a separate setting for the font used in menus.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Fonts preferences.
You install new fonts by copying them into their respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/fonts/ or /boot/home/config/fonts/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Location of user modified keymaps.
+~/config/settings/Key_map
+
+
+
+
To the right, the Keymap window shows a representation of your keyboard. When you press a key, the corresponding key is darkened and the assigned symbol is entered into the Sample and Clipboard text field at the bottom. From there you can also copy and paste it into a document.
+Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but are also useful when looking for a special symbol used in other languages. For example, you can switch the keymap to "French", find the "ç" and copy it into your mail to François. (Though you'll find the "cedil" also in other keymaps...)
+
Pressing modifier keys like SHIFT, CONTROL or OPTION changes the displayed keyboard accordingly.
+
Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
+
Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+
+
Select Dead Keys
for setting the above mentioned blue keys.
+
Switch Shortcut Key...
for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT).
+
+
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap via drag&drop in the keyboard representation: a left-click-drag copies a key, a right-click-drag exchanges the two keys.
+When you're done you can save the result from the menu File | Save.... Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via File | Open....
+
To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the Layout menu.
+
The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the Font menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
+
Finally, there's a Revert button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
+
You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
+
keymap -d MyKeymap
+
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
+At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use e.g. SpicyKeys.
+
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+
keymap -l MyKeymap
+
This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
Set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click. A middle-click is also simulated by clicking left and right button together. Useful for notebooks, which mostly don't have a 3rd button.
+
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration.
+
Focus follows mouse means, that you don't have to click into a window to activate it. There are three modes:
+
+
Enabled
The window under the mouse pointer is always activated automatically, but doesn't pop to the front.
+
Warping
Choosing a window from Deskbar or the Twitcher will have the mouse pointer glide smoothly toward it.
+
Instant-Warping
Choosing a window from Deskbar or the Twitcher will have the mouse pointer jump instantly toward it.
+
+
All settings are immediately applied.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
At the top, you choose which network adapter to configure.
+
Then you specify if you get your network automatically (via DHCP) or if you're using static addresses. If it's the latter, you'll have to fill out IP Address, Netmask, Gateway and DNS Servers yourself. Otherwise the panel will show the addresses currently set with DHCP.
+
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Network preferences.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode.
+~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Each of your workspaces can have its own resolution and color depth.
+
+
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other two menus contain all supported resolution and depth settings.
+
After clicking on Apply, the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
+
To the left, you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
+
Revert brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
The top checkbox enables/disables the screen saver.
+With the slider below it, you control after how long an idle time the screen saver kicks in.
+
+
The next two sliders are only usable after you activated their checkboxes:
+One slider determines after how many minutes the screen is powered off.
+The other, after how many minutes you need a password to unlock your machine.
+
+
By clicking into different corners of the two screens at the bottom, you tell the system when to immediately start the screen saver or when to prevent it from kicking in when you rest the mouse in the indicated corner. Click in the middle of the screens to disable that feature again.
+
The second tab shows a list of all installed screen saver modules and their individual settings. You can test your settings with the Test button below the list and add modules with the Add... button beside it. Other ways to install new screen savers is by a simple drag&drop into the list. Of course, you can also copy/delete a module's file in its respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/add-ons/screensavers/ or /boot/home/config/add-ons/screensavers/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
+
You can assign sounds to certain events in the system. Just select the event from the list and choose a sound from the pop-up menu below.
+
+
None
will silence an event.
+
Other...
will open a file panel to find a new sound that isn't yet in the menu.
+
You can use any format that's supported by the system. If MediaPlayer can deal with it, so can any other program.
+You can "pre-hear" an event's sound by selecting it and using the Play and Stop buttons.
~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings
+~/config/settings/timezone - A link to the current timezone in /boot/system/etc/timezones/*/*
+~/config/settings/Time_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
The panel of the Time preferences is split into two tabs:
On the left side, you can set the day of the month by simply clicking on it in the calendar. You change the month and year by clicking on it and using the up/down arrows to the right or the cursor keys on your keyboard.
+
Similarly, you set the time. There are two modes for the clock:
The Tracker preference panel is also available from every Tracker window with the menu Window | Preferences....
+Its functions are discussed in the topic on Tracker.
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory
+~/config/settings/VM_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Virtual memory let's the system swap out memory to harddisk, if the RAM can be used more sensibly for other things. So, even if you have lots of RAM, providing virtual memory is never a bad idea.
+
+
You can set the size to even more than your physical memory size if needed. With today's huge harddisks, assigning the physical memory size shouldn't be a problem. Still, you can quickly adjust the size if your free space ever runs low. In that case you should also have a look at DiskUsage to find out what's eating up your diskspace.
+
Normally, the swap file's written to your boot partition. If you often run into disk thrashing due to the virtual memory system swapping memory in and out, you can try to use a separate harddisk for you swap file. Simply another partition on the same harddisk with your system/data won't help.
+Upgrading your RAM is of course the most effective way to go...
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the VirtualMemory preferences.
A query is a file search based on file attributes and can be performed within Tracker or in Terminal. Queries are saved in /boot/home/queries/ and by default last seven days before being purged. Note, these aren't static result lists of your search, but are the query formulas which trigger a new search whenever you open them.
+Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can drill down a saved query just like any folder by right-clicking on it and navigating through the submenus.
You start a query by invoking the Find... menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is ALTF. You're presented with the Find window:
+
+
+
Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as Query Template.
+
Narrow down your search from All files and folders to specific file types.
+
Define the search method:
+
by Name - a basic search by file or folder name
+
by Attribute - an advanced search, you specify search terms for one or more attributes
+
by Formula - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term
+
Select which drives to search on.
+
Enter the search term.
+
The expander hides/unhides the additional options.
+
Uncheck the Temporary checkbox if you don't want this query self-destruct after 7 days.
+
Check if your query is supposed to Include trash.
+
Optionally, enter a name for this query if you want to save it.
+
You can drag&drop the icon anywhere to save a query. Doing that with the right mouse button, offers the option to save as template.
If you simply want to find all files and folders on your mounted disks that match a certain pattern, simply leave the search method at by Name, enter the search term into the text box and press ENTER.
You can create more advanced queries by searching within the attributes of specific file types. For that to work, these attributes have to be indexed.
+
+
You start by setting the filetype from All files and folders to, for example, Text | E-mail and change the search method to by Attribute.
+
This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons Add and Remove under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With Add and Remove you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
+
Let's do an email query as an example:
+
+
This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Botters has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "vibraphone" or "skepticality".
+As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
+A good way to cut down the number of search results.
Typing in a formula query by hand is daunting and really quite unpractical. It still has its uses.
+
Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to by Formula mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
You could copy and paste the string into an email, forum or IRC for others to use or debug.
+
You can use this method to construct a query in Attribute mode and then switch to Formula mode, to comfortably generate a search string to use for a query in Terminal or a script.
+
You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
After you start a search, the Find window will be replaced by a result window. Here is an example that queried for "server":
+
+
Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:
+
+
You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.
+
With File | Edit Query or ALTG you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
+
A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with Attributes | Paste Layout.
If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
+By using the Save Query as Template menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
+
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
With CTRLALTDEL you invoke the Team Monitor which lists all currently running programs.
+
+
Programs that were launched by the system are blue, those started by the user black.
+Applications that are unresponsive, which is often a sign the program has crashed, are marked red. You can kill a program by selecting it and pressing the Kill Application button.
+
You can summon a Terminal with OPTALTT.
+
If your Tracker or Deskbar crashed or froze, a new button appears (you may have to kill the offending team first): Restart the Desktop will restart Tracker and/or Deskbar for you.
Applications can install add-ons so they can be invoked easily on a selection of files from Tracker. Only the add-ons that can handle a specific filetype are presented under Add-Ons from the context menu or the File menu of a Tracker window. Some add-ons don't necessarily need a file to work on and are thus always present.
+
Tracker Add-Ons, or links to applications that can act as add-ons, can be installed in three different locations (see topic Filesystem layout):
+
+
/boot/system/system/add-ons/Tracker/
for system provided add-ons.
+
/boot/common/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons available to every user.
+
/boot/home/config/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons only available to yourself.
+
+
The file name of an add-on can be suffixed with a dash and capital letter, and is then available via keyboard shortcut. For example, Open Target Folder-T opens with ALTOPTT.
+Of course, you have to take care of possible shortcut collisions when deciding on a shortcut. You can't have the same for different add-ons.
These Tracker Add-Ons come with every Haiku installation:
+
+
Background-B
+
Opens the Background preferences to change the color or image of the Desktop or any folder. Invoked on an image file the Background panel is launched with that image already loaded as a potential background.
+
DiskUsage-I
+
Starts the DiskUsage application with the according folder as basis.
+
FileType-F
+
Invoked on a file, opens its specific FileType panel, otherwise the general FileTypes preferences are launched.
+
Open Target Folder-O
+
Can only be used on a linked file and opens the folder that file lives in.
+
TextSearch-G
+
Starts the TextSearch application to look for a string in the selected folder (and its subfolders).
+
ZipOMatic-Z
+
A selection of files will be added to a zip archive, invoked without a selection opens a panel to create an archive via drag&drop.
The Tracker is the graphical interface to all your files. It let's you create new files and folders or find, launch or rename as well as copy or delete existing ones.
+
Being an application like any other (the Desktop with its icons is really just a fullscreen window in the background), Tracker appears with its windows in the Deskbar and can be quit and restarted. The easiest way to quit and restart a crashed or frozen Tracker (or a wayward Deskbar) is to call the Team Monitor.
In order to access a harddisk, CD, USB stick etc., you first have to mount the volume, that is, let the system know it's there. This is done with a right-click on the Desktop or an already mounted volume (like the boot disk) and choosing the volume from the Mount submenu. You find the same Mount menu in the Deskbar.
+
+
There are also Mount Settings so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.
+The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.
+
Before you disconnect e.g. a harddrive or USB stick, make sure you have successfully unmounted the volume. This guarantees that all data transfer has finished. Otherwise you may lose data or corrupt the disk!
By default, when you double-click a folder, Tracker opens a new window while leaving the parent window open. This can quickly lead to an overcrowded desktop.
+You can prevent that by holding down the OPT key, which automatically closes the parent window.
+This is also true for keyboard navigation. For more on that, see topic Shortcuts and key combinations.
+
Moving through your folders is one of Trackers main purposes, just like the file managers on other platforms. Haiku's Tracker has some unique features that will help you doing that efficiently.
Instead of double-clicking your way down folder after folder, there's a better way to drill down:
+
+
+
Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/home/config/.
+If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
+
A similar method can be used from any Tracker window:
+
+
Click on the area in the lower left, where the number of items is listed, and you'll get submenus for every level above your current location. From there you can drill down through the folders as usual.
+
Note, that the Desktop is always the topmost level as that is where Tracker shows mounted volumes. So, if you want to go to another disk, you first have to navigate to the top (Desktop) and cross over to your other disk from there.
+
You'll get the same submenu-navigating when you drag a file over a folder. After a short while of hovering, a submenu pops up and you can drill down to your destination. If you initiated the drag with the right mousebutton, you can choose between copying, moving or linking the file when you release the mouse.
You may be familiar with the concept from file managers of other operating systems: typing the first few letters of a filename will jump to the first file matching these starting characters. Haiku took the idea a step further. If there isn't a file starting with those letters it will jump to the first file including the string anywhere in its name. And if there's nothing with the string in its filename, the attributes are searched next.
+
+
In the above example, there are many files starting with "Haiku logo", rendering simpler approaches to typing ahead quite useless. In Haiku however, typing "web" jumps right to its first occurence in "Haiku logo - website". The characters you enter appear in the bottom left corner where you normally find the item count of all files in the folder. A second after entering a character, the display jumps back to normal and you're ready for a new type ahead search.
Tracker windows offer three different viewing modes from the Window menu:
+
+
Icon View (ALT1) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with ALT+/ALT-.
+
Mini Icon View (ALT2) - Small icons.
+
List View (ALT3) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide available attributes. (See topic Attributes.)
+
+
The Window menu offers a number of other functions:
+
+
Resize Window (ALTY) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
+
Clean Up (ALTK) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Clean Up All which additionally sorts all icons alphabetically.
Close (ALTW) - Closes the window. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Close All which closes every Tracker window.
+
Close All in Workspace (ALTQ) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
+
+
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete Clean Up (ALTK). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
+
The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.
Window | Preferences... opens a panel that offers a number of settings that, where not obvious, should become clear once tried out. Since all settings are applied live, you'll immediately see the changes.
+ So, in short, the not so obvious settings:
+
+
Desktop - Decide if all mounted disks appear directly on the Desktop or in a window after clicking a single Disk icon sitting on the Desktop.
+
Windows - You can set Single Window Navigation, i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of it's parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the OPT key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size.
+
+
+
+
Before you switch Tracker to Single Window Navigation mode, because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a Navigator where you can enter or copy&paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.
+
Date and Time - Set date and time formats.
+
Trash - Set the behavior when deleting a file.
+
Volume Icons - Set the color of an optional indicator of free space that's shown besides a disk's icon.
+
+
This panel, by the way, is also available as Tracker from Deskbar's Preferences.
When invoked on a selected file, most of the File menu commands are also offered in the context menu by right-clicking that file.
+
As usual the commands are pretty clear.
+
+
Find... - Find a file or folder. See topic Query for more info.
+
New - Create a new folder or any other file based on a template.
+
+
+
+
Choosing Edit Templates... opens the folder /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the New menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype text/plain. See topic Filetypes for more info.
+
Open With... - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
+
+
+
+
The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type text/plain. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here text/*. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the Open With... entry instead, a panel opens:
+
+
+
Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the Open and Make Preferred button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here text/plain.
+
Get Info
+
+
+
The panel presents info on the selected file and lets you set the default application and, after you expanded that part of the panel, permissions and owner. Clicking on the path will open it in a Tracker window.
+
Edit Name, Duplicate and Move to Trash - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.
+
Move to, Copy to and Create Link - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.
+
Cut, Copy and Paste - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding SHIFT while invoking the menu you can Copy/Cut more files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding SHIFT you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.
+
Identify - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with wget which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu changes the item to Force Identify which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.
+
Add-Ons - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic Tracker Add-ons for more information.
When you copy, move or delete files, Tracker shows its progress with a status window. If you initiate more than one transaction, each job gets its own status display.
+
+
To the right are two buttons to pause or stop a transaction entirely. Sometimes it can be useful to temporarily pause a large transaction. For example, you may need to quickly launch a large application. Copying large amounts of data chokes your harddisk's IO bandwidth and thus delays your workflow.
The Twitcher is a task switcher to jump between running applications and their windows.
+
+
Just tap CTRLTAB to switch between the current and the last application/window. Tapping CTRLTAB very quickly will switch between all applications. Or press and hold CTRLTAB to go through all running applications by repeatedly hitting TAB or ←/→. If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as described and then go through its open windows with the ↑/↓ keys.
+
You cycle through all an applications visible windows on the current workspace with CTRL~ (which, depending on the keymap you're using, is the key below ESC).
+
It's also possible to invoke the Twitcher with CTRLTAB and then use the mouse to choose the application/window you'll jump to when releasing the CTRL key.
+
The Twitcher also offers a few more advanced keyboard shortcuts:
+
+
ESC
Aborts the twitching and returns to the formerly active window.
Workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries
+
+
This is a workshop to show the use of Attributes, Queries, the Index and custom Filetypes. As an example, we build a database to keep track of our DVD library.
Let's first decide what filetype and attributes would serve our needs. Originally, I wanted to use a Bookmark file with a link to the movie's IMdB page, but Haiku doesn't have a "bookmarkable" browser like BeOS' NetPositive at the moment, so I came up with this: The file itself will be a JPEG image for the movie cover.
+To that we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to query it later (then we have to add it to the index) and if so, what type of attribute it should be. Numbers (int, float) can be evaluated differently than text (</=/> vs. is/contains/starts with).
+
Here are the attributes I'd like to see for my DVDs:
+
+
Movie title
+
Genre
+
URL to e.g. IMdB
+
Director/Cast
+
Plot
+
My rating from 1 to 10
+
Coordinates in my shelf, e.g. A2, B3, so I find the DVD also in Real Life :)
Start the Filetypes preferences, and click on the Add... button below the hierarchical list on the left. A small dialog opens and you specify in which MIME Group your new filetype will reside. You can also create a completely new group. Let's put it into "applications" and set the "Internal Name" to DVDdb.
Double-click the icon well to open Icon-O-Matic to design an icon for your filetype. You can also drag&drop an icon from the icon well of another type, maybe as starting point for a modified version.
You can add suffixes like .txt, .jpg, .mp3 to recognize files by their extention. Useful when working with files from systems without MIME typing. We don't need that for our example.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked.
+
+
Select...
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
+
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
Here we enter all the custom attributes we decided on in our preparations. Clicking the Add... button opens a panel:
+
+
+
Attribute Name - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.
+
Internal Name - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.
+
Type - Defines the value the attribute can hold and therefore how it can be queried.
+
+
String for normal text
+
Boolean for binary data: 0 or 1
+
Integer for integer numbers with different ranges:
+
+
8 bit: ± 255
+
16 bit: ± 65,535
+
32 bit: ± 4,294,967,295
+
64 bit: ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615
+
+
+
Float for floatingpoint numbers, single precision
+
Double for floatingpoint numbers, double precision
+
Time for time and date format
+
+
+
+
+
Visible - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:
+
Display As - Leave on "Default". In the future more option will become available, e.g. a bar or stars for a rating etc.
+
Editable - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker.
+
Width - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window.
+
Alignment - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned.
Before we start entering data in our little DVD database, we should add certain attributes to the Index. Only indexed attributes can use Haiku's fast Queries.
+So, what will we be searching in the future? We probably won't ask "What's in the B4 coordinate in my shelf?" or "Does the IMdB URL or the plot of the movie contain the word 'pope-shenooda'?".
+
This leaves these attributes:
+
+
Internal Name
Attribute type
+
DVDdb:title
text
+
DVDdb:genre
text
+
DVDdb:cast
text
+
DVDdb:rating
int-32
+
+
+
To index them, we open a Terminal and simply add one attribute after the other:
Now, everything's set and we can begin putting some data into our base.
+Since our basic file is a cover image, we go to some online resource like IMdB, look for our first movie and save the cover or movie poster in a new folder where we want to keep our DVDdb files.
+
Opening that folder we see a typical Tracker window with one JPEG in it. Right-clicking it, we change its filetype to application/DVDdb with the Filetype Addon. There's more info on this in the Filetypes document.
+
Now, we activate all our DVDdb attributes from the Attributes menu of the Tracker window and rearrange the columns to our taste:
+
+
By clicking on a yet empty attribute (or pressing ALTE) we enter editing mode and fill each attribute. With TAB and SHIFTTAB you can navigate between attributes.
+
In our example, we usually start with a downloaded JPG cover and change its type to applications/DVDdb. There's another elegant way to produce a file to work with. Just copy an empty file of our filetype to /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates and rename it to DVDdb.
+
Right-clicking into a Tracker window, you'll find a new entry under New... besides the default "New folder".
Several hours of grunt work later, we have a nice little database that you can query to find all your Christina Ricci movies that have a 7+ rating... :)
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.
+Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder and rename it to group/filetype, replacing slashes with underscores; in our case "applications_DVDdb".
+
Open the new folder and paste in the layout with Attributes | Paste Layout. Voilà:
Workspaces are virtual desktops, complete with their own resolution, color depth and background. Up to 32 of these workspaces can be set from the Screen preferences.
You switch between workspaces by either clicking into the Workspaces applet (which is seen in the above image) or by using the keyboard shortcut ALTFx, where "x" is the workspace number. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
+Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send you to the workspace it's in.
+
Another very convenient way is to use CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ to navigate spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. If you additionally hold down SHIFT, the active window will move with you to the new workspace.
+
You can switch back and forth between two workspaces with ALT` (the actual key depends on the keymap you're using - it is the key below ESC). Again, holding SHIFT will take the active window with you.
If you're interested in helping with a translation, get in touch on the Documentation mailing list.
-Right now, the User Guide is available in these languages:
Before diving into all the applications that come with Haiku, let's have a more detailed look at how to install and uninstall programs you downloaded somewhere, for example from a site mentioned on the Welcome page.
+
Вам следует просто распаковать архив под Haiku. Если вы сначала извлечете содержимое архива под Linux или Windows, к примеру, и потом просто скопируете в Haiku, то вы лишитесь всех жизненно важных атрибутов, т.к. эти операционные системы обычно не умеют обрабатывать метаданные.
Приложения для Haiku всегда поставляются в архиве. В большинстве случаев это ZIP-архивы, однако некоторые старые BeOS приложения поставляются в формате Software Valet's PKG. Software Valet позволял автоматически выполнять сценарии установки, вам нужно было лишь дважды щелкнуть по пакету и выбрать куда произвести установку и больше ни о чем не заботиться.
+Если это ZIP-архив, двойной щелчок мыши запустит Expander, где вы также выбираете куда распаковать и распаковываете. Согласно рекомендациям в теме иерархия файловой системы.
+
+
/boot/common/apps/
для приложений доступных для всех пользователей.
+
/boot/home/apps/
для приложений доступных толькой для вас.
+
+
Конечно же, это различие станет актуальным лишь только тогда, когда Haiku станет многопользовательской системой.
+
После распаковки архива, было бы неплохо заглянуть внутрь только что созданной папки. Зачастую, внутри помимо самого приложения вы найдете ReadMe-файл и другую документацию.
+
После установки некоторые приложения требуют последующей настройки. Например, дополнения для Tracker , трнасляторы или другие компоненты расширяющие возможности системы. В одном случае вы найдете небольшой файл-сценарий (обычно имеющий расширение .sh), навроде install, которые нужно просто запустить двойным щелчком мыши .
+В другом папки, которые ссылаются на нужное место назначения. Они обычно называются "drag [filename] here...". Таким образом, просто следую этим инструкциям, вы сможете все успешно настроить.
+
Однако в большинстве случаев от вас кроме распаковки архива ничего не потребуется.
+В темах Deskbar - панель задачи и LaunchBox описано, как добавить значок для новых приложений.
Если для установки был использован сценарий установки, то и для удаления должен существовать сценарий. В этом случае для удаления вам нужно его лишь запустить двойным щелчком мыши.
+В остальных случаях для удаления, просто удалите папку с приложением.
+
Это, конечно, оставляет возможность вернуть файлы настроек, которые хранятся в вашей папке по адресу ~/config/settings. Это удобно, сохранить их на тот случай, если вы снова установите приложение в будущем. Также сохранятся файлы, при установке которых вам следует перетащить файлы в папку с названием "drag [filename] here..." (этот метод описан выше).
+
Один из способов быстрой найти все файлы относящиеся к приложению, это сделать запрос по названию программы или его части. Это позволит выявить бинарный файл приложения, папку, где оно установлено и файлы его настроек и т.д. Просто выделите все соответствующие файлы и удалите их.
Haiku поставляется с небольшим набором необходимых приложений. Вы можете найти их по адресу /boot/system/apps/ или /boot/common/apps/. Приложения, которые обычно не запускаются по двойному щелчку по файлу (например, ShowImage для просмотра изображений) могут быть найдены в меню Приложения (Applications) панели Deskbar.
Кроме вышеперечисленных приложений, которые поддерживаются в рамках проекта Haiku, также поставляется несколько других необходимых приложений, которые поддерживаются отдельными людьми. Ошибки и запросы на улучшения, должны посылаться тем людям, которые их сопроваждают.
При помощи панели настройки ActivityMonitor вы можете отслеживать интересующие вас системные ресурсы.
+
+
+
Правым щелчком мыши по области окна, можно добавить графики, отображающие потребление разного рода ресурсов:
+Использованная/Кешированная Память (Used/Cached Memory), Файл подкачки (Swap Space), Использование ЦП (CPU Usage), Сеть получено/отправлено (Network Receive/Send), Отказы страницы (Page faults), Семафоры (Semaphores), Порты (Ports), Потоки (Threads), Процессы (Teams), Запущенные приложения (Running Applications), Raw/Text Clipboard Size, Медиа узлы (Media Nodes).
+
Под графиком располагается легенда (можно скрыть при помощи контекстного меню). Вы можете изменить цвет и фон графика, перетащив цвета легенды из любого диалога выбора цветов, например из Icon-O-Matic.
+
Вы можете создать несколько видов с графиками при помощи меню File.
+
Меню Настройки (Settings) открывает панель настроек, где можно задать интервал обновления графика.
+
Каждый вид с графиком упаковывается в отдельный репликант, тем самым каждый из них можно поместить на рабочий стол.
BePDF позволяет просмотривать PDF-документы. Помимо просмотра, поддерживает аннотирование и пользовательские закладки для незашифрованных PDF-документов. Полностью переведено на 20 языков, на данный момент дополнительные языки могут быть добавлены, путем добавления текстового файла с переводом.
+
Документация представлена в виде HTML-страниц и PDF-документа. Последняя может быть открыта при помощи вызова меню Помощь | Показать справку (Help | Show Help...).
BeZillaBrowser основан на исходных кода Mozilla Firefox и пользовательских патчахuses для повышения скорости, стабильности и других аспектов. На данный момент, все сборки BeZilla используют CVS-ветку Mozilla 1.8. Вы можете отправлять отчеты об ошибках проекту HaikuPorts.
+
Т.к. браузер Mozilla использует повсеместно на большинстве платформ, вы можете найти множество руководств и советов в Интернете. Можете начать с http://support.mozilla.com/.
+
При помощи BeZilla пока что невозможно распечатывать страницы. К счастью, есть дополнение html2pdf, которое использует онлайн сервис для генерации PDF-документа в качестве копии текущей страницы. После установки, в строке состояние коявится PDF-символ, по нажатию которого откроет окно с предложением скачать текущую страницу в формате "PDF".
+Предостережение: Дополнение работает только с онлайн страницами.
~/cd/* - Хранятся детали всех идентифицированных CD-дисков.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Пользоваться приложением очень просто, кнопки управления говорят сами за себя.
+Активируйте кнопку Повтор (Repeat) (слева от кнопки Перемешать (Shuffle)), чтобы CD-диск играл по кругу.
+
Если вам нужен больший функционал, например плейлисты, тогда следует попробовать MediaPlayer.
Таблица символов (CharacterMap) покажет вам код UTF-8 каждого символа, поддерживаемого шрифтом.
+
+
Слева выделены стандартные блоки символов, имеется удобная функция фильтрации. Опционально вы можете выбрать Отображать частные блоки (Show Private Blocks) в меню Вид (View). Справа отображаются символы, соотвествующие этим блокам, с исползованием шрифта, указанного в меню Шрифт (Font). Ниже вы можете изменить размер шрифта и посмотреть hex-, десятичный и UTF-8 код символа, под которым находится указатель мыши.
+
С помощью метода drag&drop вы можете переместить символ из таблицы прямо в текстовый редактор, или, кликнув правой кнопкой мыши и выбрав пункт меню Копировать символ (Copy Character) (ALTC) или Копировать как Esc-последовательность (Copy As Escaped Byte String) (SHIFTALTC). В резульнате чего вы получите € или же \xe2\x82\xac.
Приложение CodyCam получает изображения с указанным интервалом с подключенной веб-камеры или любого другого устройства с видеовходом и сохраняет их по FTP.
+
+
Слева под окном предварительного просмотра вы вводите имя файла, к которому будет прибавлено увеличивающиеся число с ростом количества сохраняемых кадров. Под ним вы выбираете формат файла и скорость передачи снимков.
+
Справа вы выбираете FTP или sFTP (если доступен SSH), и вводите необходимые данные, чтобы сохранять изображения на сервере.
DeskCalc - простой калькулятор, который не лишен некоторых полезных функций, возможно, неочевидных на первый взгляд.
+
+
+
DeskCalc понимает гораздо больше команд, чем позволяет ввести его скромная клавиатура.
+Помимо операторов +, -, *, /, %, ^ и констант pi и e, поддерживаются следующий функции:
+acos, asin, atan, atan2, ceil, cos, cosh, exp, floor, log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, tanh.
+
DeskCalc очень толерантен по отношению к вводу пользователя:
+/, :, \ - интерпретируются как операторы деления,
+*, x - символы умножения.
+Однако, следует помнить, что . и , считаются знаками обозначения дробной части, и использовать их для выделения разрядов нельзя.
+
Меню по правому клику делает доступными следюущие опции:
+
+
Включать режим Num Lock при старте (Enable Num Lock on start up)
автоматически включает цифровую клавиатуру при запуске DeskCalc
+
Отображать клавиатуру (Show Keypad)
настраивает отображение клавиатуры
+
+
Вы можете изменить размер калькулятора до нужного и расположить его в качестве Репликанта, перетащив его на рабочий стол за символ в правом нижнем углу. Убедитесь, что Отображать репликанты (Show Replicants) активировано в настройках Deskbar.
+
Клавиатура может быть раскрашена с перетаскиванием нужного цвета из любой прораммы, в которой есть палитра, например Icon-O-Matic.
+
Вы можете пролистывать историю ваших прошлых вычислений нажимая ↑ и ↓.
+
Вы можете выделить и перетащить методом drag&drop содержимое DeskCalc в любое приложение.
+
Что еще лучше, обратное действие так же возможно.
+
Наконец, DeskCalc можно использовать и в Terminal. Просто заключите выражение в двойные кавычки, как показано здесь:
DiskProbe - HEX редактор для просмотра и редактирования содержимого файла или устройства на уровне байтов, он работает на самом низком уровне и потому может серьёзно повредить данные, если не соблюдать осторожность!
+
Всегда работайте с резервной копией файла и будьте особенно внимательными, работая непосредственно с устройством.
+
При запуске DiskProbe у вас сначала спросят о файле или устройстве, с которым планируется работать. После выбора откроется следующее окно:
+
+
В основном окне всегда отображается один блок данных, размер которого может быть настроен в меню Вид (View) | Размер блока (BlockSize). Слева показано смещение от начала блока, в середине данные в виде HEX значений и справа то же самое в виде ASCII символов.
+Вы можете перемещаться от блока к блоку с помощью верхнего ползунка или клавиш ALT+← и ALT+→ и переключаться между HEX и ASCII колонками клавишей TAB.
+
Пункт меню Блок (Block) | Выбор (Selection) не только предоставит выбор с различным порядком байтов (в шестнадцатеричном или десятичном виде, устанавливаемом через Вид (View) | Представление (Base)), он так же интерпретирует его как смещение блоков, к которым вы можете перейти. Пункт будет недоступен (серым), если позиция будет за пределами файла/устройства.
+Эта функция удобна в основном при просмотре файловых систем, так как они часто содержат ссылки на другие блоки.
+
Если файл, который вы просматриваете, включает в себя атрибуты, то через меню Атрибуты (Attributes) можно открыть любой из них в новом окне DiskProbe. Вот атрибут авторских прав приложения AboutSystem:
+
+
В зависимости от вида атрибута откроется нужный таб редактора, помимо всегда присутствующего таба Raw Editor. Например, имеются редакторы для текста и MIME-типов, просмотрщик векторных иконок.
DiskUsage графически отображает дисковое пространство на ваших разделах.
+Полезный инструмент для ответа на вопрос: "Куда подевалось свободное место на диске"?
+
+
Концентрические круги представляют собой различные уровни в иерархии файловой системы. Над центральным кругом изображена /boot/home/ папка. Каждый сегмент окружности над ней - файл или папка, находящиеся в /boot/home/. Каждый дальнейший сегмент отображает на один уровень вглубь файловой иерархии. Возможно, придется изменить размеры окна, чтобы папки с большой степенью вложенности смогли вместиться в него.
+
Над окном с графикой имеется выпадающее меню, в котором можно переключаться между всеми доступными разделам. Прежде чем использование диска отобразится, произойдёт сканирование раздела. Для разделов большого объёма это может занять довольно много времени, в течение которого можно просмотреть другой, менее загруженный раздел, запустив вторую копию приложения.
+
+
Если графическое представление файла или папки умещается меньше, чем в 2° круга, то оно не отображается.
+
Количество файлов, сообщённое для папки, включает также и файлы в во вложенных папках. Папка подсчитывается также как файл.
+
DiskUsage игнорирует симлинки.
+
+
Наведя мышь на определённый сегмент, вы получите информацию об этом файле или папке снизу в строке состояния.
+
Клик правой кнопкой мыши по сегменту выведет контекстное меню для получения информации (Get Info), открытия (Open) (в Tracker-е), откытия с (Open With) использованием другого подходящего приложения или пересканирования (Rescan) папки этого сегмента.
+Клик левой кнопкой мыши по сегменту перенесёт этот файл или папку в центр круга.
+Клик левой кнопкой мыши по центру круга перемещает на один уровень вверх.
+
Вы можете перетаскивать файлы и папки из DiskUsage в другие приложения, на рабочий стол или на другое окно Tracker-а для копирования. Если же наоборот перетащить разделы и папки на окно DiskUsage, то размер окна "подгонится" под новое представление, сделая их новый центральным кругом.
Настройка дисков (DriveSetup) - это утилита для создания, удаления и инициализации разделов. На данный момент она не может перемещать разделы или менять их размер, поэтому вам понадобится неразмеченный том (возможно, внешний USB-накопитель или другой жесткий диск), либо придется воспользоваться сторонней утилитой вроде GParted LiveCD для выделения свободного пространства для нового раздела.
+
+
Верхнюю часть окна занимает графическое представление всех разделов устройства, выбранного в списке, расположенном ниже.
+Помимо 4 первичных разделов каждый из дисков может содержать несколько расширенных/логических разделов. Чтобы увидеть детальную информацию о каждом логическом разделе, вам понадобится развернуть список разделов, кликнув по элементу +/-, предшествующему наименованию диска,
+
Выбрав раздел из списка, вы можете смонтировать и размонтировать его с помощью команд в меню Partition, или нажав ALTM or ALTU.
+
Кроме того, вы можете удалить раздел с помощью Partition | Delete.
+Однако, следует помнить следующее:
+
Действия с созданием/удалением/инициализацией разделов достаточно опасны. Проверьте лишний раз, что вы работаете с нужным разделом, и позаботьтесь о резервной копии ваших данных, на случай того, если что-нибудь пойдет не так!
Если в ваших планах использовать весь объем диска, как, например, в случае с USB-накопителем или картой Compact Flash, вы можете пропустить процесс создания раздела и перейти непосредственно к Инициализации (Initializing).
+
Используя неформатированное пространство на диске, как показано ниже <empty>, вы можете создать новый раздел, выбрав Раздел | Создать... (Partition | Create...)(ALTC).
+
+
В этом диалоге следует задать размер и тип файловой системы. ВыберитеBe File System, если вам необходим раздел для установки Haiku или же если вы хотите использовать все преимущества этой системы, такие как атрибуты и запросы. Обратите внимание на то, что другие операционные системы могут иметь трудности с доступом к такому разделу.
+
Если вы создали первичный раздел вмесно очередного расширенного/логического раздела, диалог, показанный выше, также отобразит флажок Активный раздел (Active Partition). Если вы собираетесь использовать этот раздел для загрузки Haiku, то вам необходимо его отметить.
+
Перед тем как вы сможете использовать или просто смонтировать вновь созданный раздел, он должен быть инициализирован (отформатирован) в файловую систему.
Только размонтированные разделы могут быть инициализированы в меню Раздел | Инициализировать (Partition | Initialize).
+
+
Здесь вам нужно ввести имя раздела и размер его блока. Рекомендуемый размер - 2048 байт на блок, но, если вам потребуется, можете выбрать больше или меньше.
+Инициализация уничтожит все данные да этом разделе!
Отсутствует в меню Deskbar. Обычно запускается при двойном щелчке по файлу.
+
Расположение в Tracker:
/boot/system/apps/Expander
+
Настройки хранятся по адресу:
~/config/settings/Expander_Settings
+
+
+
Expander - это небольшая утилита для распаковки самых распространенных архивов,в том числе zip, gzip, bzip2, rar и tar.gz.
+Просто дважды щелкните левой кнопкой мыши по архиву, и появится следующее окно:
+
+
+
Источник (Source)
ALTS
Открывает диалог, в котором можно выбрать архив для распаковки.
+
Назначение (Destination)
ALTD
Открывает диалог, в котором можно выбрать место назначения, куда следует распаковать архив.
+
Раскрыть (Expand)
ALTE
Начинает распаковку архива. Остановить распаковку можно при помощи сочетания клавиш ALTK.
+
+
Вы можете включить\выключить отображения списка файлов архива, отметив пункт Отображать содержимое (Show Contents), либо использовать сочетание клавиш ALTL.
+
Expander может распаковать только весь архив целиком.
+Вы не можете выбрать отдельные файлы для распаковки или добавить\удалить файлы из архива.
+
Пункт меню Правка | Настройка (Edit | Preferences...) или сочетание клавиш ALTP откроют панель настройки, которая позволяет настроить поведение Expander.
+Опции говорят сами за себя:
Вопреки традициям BeOS, в Haiku используются векторные иконки. Специальный формат векторных иконок Haiku (Haiku Vector Icon Format) (HVIF) был оптимизирован для небольших размеров файла и быстрой отрисовки. Это объясняет, почему наши иконки чаще всего значительно меньше чем иконки пиксельного или широко распространенного SVG-формата. Кроме того, в отличие от пиксельных иконок BeOS, иконки в Haiku не ограничены 8-битной палитрой (256 цветов).
+Для примера, сравним эти иконки Terminal:
+
+
Пиксельные
SVG
HVIF
+
+
1,024 байт + 256 байт
7,192 байт
768 байт
+
+
Обратите внимание, что в BeOS используется 2 версии иконки: одна размером 16x16, а вторая 32x32, для четкого отображения в режиме списка (List) и в режиме Иконки (Icon View mode).
+
Подобный трюк не нужен для векторных иконок. За счет повышения объема файла на несколько сот байт, векторные иконки масштабируются гораздо лучше, чем пиксельные (Замечание: BeOS позволял отображать иконки только двух размеров - 16x16 и 32x32.)
Иконки сохранены в виде атрибута файла, к которому относятся. Правда, это не значит, что каждый файл должен иметь такой атрибут, чтобы его иконка отобразилась в окне Tracker: файлы с данными наследуют свои иконки от своего типа файла. Чтобы глобально поменять иконку типа файла, вы можете воспользоваться панелью настроек Типы Файлов (FileTypes). А если хотите назначить особенную иконку определенному файлу, вам следует воспользоваться Дополнение Тип Файла (FileType Add-On) на этом файле. Смотрите Типы файлов (Filetypes) для дополнительной информации.
+
Будучи атрибутом, индивидуальная иконка для файла сможет сохраняться только в файловой системе, поддерживающей атрибуты. Так, если вы перемещаете файлы с вашего BFS-диска, упакуйте их в zip-архив, иначе иконки или другие атрибуты будут потеряны.
Icon-O-Matic - это векторный редактор иконок для Haiku, который может сохранять ваши работы в формате HVIF, SVG или PNG. Иконка также может быть прикреплена как атрибут к существующему файлу или же экспортирована в виде ресурсного или файла исходного кода, используемых разработчиками. Оптимизация работы с HVIF отразилась на внутренней работе с ним.
+
В отличие от обычных векторных графических редакторов, вы не будете иметь дело с отдельными объектами, которые включают такие специфические свойства, как контуры, цвет штриха, его ширину, цвет заливки и др. Здесь вы будете составлять ваши объекты ("формы" - "shapes") из общих контуров и цветов ("стилей" - "styles") и устанавливать для них некоторые свойства. Многократное использование одних и тех же элементов - секрет эффективности HVIF. Хотя это и накладывает некоторые ограничения на разработку иконки, преимущества все же существуют.
+Например, при повторном использовании контуров, несколько объектов могут быть модифицированны одним движением. Представьте себе объект и его тень. Модификация их общих контуров поменяет не только сам объект, но и его тень (которая при этом может быть слегка растянута или сжата).
+
+
Приведем краткий обзор окна Icon-O-Matic:
+
+
+
Создание любого видимого объекта на канве требует наличия формы с контуром и стилем. Что удобно, меню Форма (Shape) позволит вам создать не только форму но и контуры и стили для нее. Для каждого вида объектов (контуры, формы, трансформеры и стили) существует специальный пункт меню, расположенный выше списка элементов, позволяющий совершать различные действия. Каждый элемент имеет набор свойст, которые устанавливаются в панели Свойства (Properties) view.
Контур состоит из нескольких точек, соединенных между собой линиями и кривыми Бизье. Для добавления или изменения точек убедитесь, что необходимый контур выбран в списке контуров.
+
+
Обычный клик на канве создаст первую точку. Во время добавления точки вы определяете, будет ли результирующая линия прямой или кривой: нажатие и отпускание кнопки мыши создаст прямую линию, удерживание нажатой кнопки мыши - кривую Бизье. Разумеется, тип линии можно сменить позже.
+
+
+
+
Чтобы перейти от "A" к "B", вам необходимо изменить некоторые точки из угловых в точки кривых. Сделать это можно удерживая клавишу ALT во время клика на точке и перемещении опорных вершин. Результатом чего будет : the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click&drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
+Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
+
+
To move a point, simply click&drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
+To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
+Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
+
+
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move point(s)
+
Insert point
+
Add point
+
Delete point CTRL
+
Corner↔Bezier ALT
+
Select points SHIFT
+
+
+
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
+
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
+
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
+
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
+
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add Rectangle and Add Circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
+
+
+
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
+
Clean Up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
+
Rotate Indices Right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
+
A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
+
+
+
+
When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move
+
Resize
+
Rotate
+
Move rotation point
+
+
+
+
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.
The Shape menu offers the before mentioned possibility to Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path&Style and to Duplicate or Remove a shape. Then, there is:
+
+
Reset Transformation
Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.
+
Freeze Transformation
When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used Options | Snap to Grid to set the points at precise pixel borders.
+If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
+With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
+
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its Min LOD and above its Max LOD.
+
So, if you set a shape's Min LOD to 0.0 and the Max LOD to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
+
The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
+For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
+Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
+
+
You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag&dropping it into the list of styles.
+
If you go for a gradient, you set the type (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag&drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
+Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
+
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
There's your usual menu bar at the top, File, Edit, Options. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
+
File | Save As... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
+
+
File | Export As... opens a familiar save panel with a file format dropdown menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+
+
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
+
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
+
HVIF Source Code
Saves as source code used by programmers
+
SVG
Saves as SVG
+
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
+
PNG Set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
+
BEOS:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
+
META:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
A few things you should keep in mind when working with Icon-O-Matic and some general tips for its usage:
+
+
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, colors and shadows.
+
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
+
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
+
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
+
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag&drop or copy&paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
+
If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
+
You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click&drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click&drag while holding SPACE.
Установщик служит для установки Haiku на другой раздел.
+После запуска отображается окно с важной информацией. Это не бессмысленное Пользовательское Соглашение (EULA), поэтому не стоит сразу же подтверждать соглашение, в нем говорится следующее:
+
+
Это приложение альфа-качества. Сделайте резервные копии, иначе поплатитесь!
+
Установщику потребуется заранее подготовленный раздел. Возможно, вам придется воспользоваться GParted LiveCD или чем-нибудь аналогичным. К счастью, приложение DriveSetup, входящее в состав Haiku по умолчанию, вполне справится с поставленной задачей.
+
Haiku придется вручную добавить в загрузчик GRUB. Вам нужно добавить в файл /boot/grub/menu.lst примерно следующую строку:
+
# Haiku on /dev/sda7
+title Haiku
+rootnoverify (hd0,6)
+chainloader +1
+
+
+
Как только вы нажмете Продолжить (Continue), вы увидите следующее окно:
+
+
В первом выпадающем списке вам предлагает выбрать откуда произвести установку. Источником установки может быть уже установленная Haiku, также можно произвести установку с CD-диска, USB-диска и т.д.
+Во втором выпадающем списке вам следует указать куда произвести установку. Раздел, на который будет произведена установка, полностью перезапишется т.е. вся информация находящаяся на нем пропадет безвозвратно.
+
Щелкнув по пункту Показать дополнительные пакеты (Show Optional Packages), отобразится список дополнительных пакетов, которые можно установить вместе с Haiku, если таковые конечно имеются.
+
Перед началом установки следует проверить, правильный ли вы указали раздел для установки. Щелкните по кнопке Установка разделов (Setup partitions...), откроется приложение DriveSetup и удостоверьтесь в правильности выбора.
+
Кнопка Начать (Begin) запустит процесс установки, которая включает в себя копирование всех данных, в том числе папки home/ и common/ на выбранный раздел и помечает его, как загрузочный.
+
По окончанию установки раздел автоматически помечается, как загрузочный. Однако, иногда случается, что другие операционные системы или программы для работы с разделами случайно переписывают загрузочный сектор вашего раздела с Haiku. В этом случае загрузите установочный CD-диск и запустите установщик. Выберите ваш раздел с Haiku в выпадающем списке Установить на: Пожалуйста выберите раздел (Onto: Please Choose Target) и нажмите кнопку Записать загрузочный сектор (Write Boot Sector). Это снова сделает ваш раздел загрузочным.
Лупа (Magnify) показывает увеличенную версию зоны вокруг указателя мыши.
+
+
Вверху вы найдете размер и степень увеличения зоны. "32 x 32 @ 8 пикселей/пиксель (pixels/pixel)" означает, что вы смотрите на область размером 32x32 пикселя вокруг указателя мыши и каждый пиксель увеличен в 8 раз.
+
Чуть ниже вы увидите цвет пикселя, обведенного красным цветомю.
+Вы можете двигать выделение с момощью КУРСОРНЫХ клавиш.
+
Для измерения дистанции и выравнивания объектов вы можете добавить до двух синих перекрестий, нажав ALTH. Их X/Y координаты, относительно левого верхнего угла и, если добавлены оба перекрестия, расстояние по X/Y относительно друг друга, отображаются внизу.
+Они так же могут быть перемещены КУРСОРНЫМИ клавишами. Активное перекрестие отмечается "x".
+
Кроме этого, вы можете перемещать курсор мыши попиксельно, нажимая OPTКУРСОРНЫЕ клавиши.
+
Ниспадающее меню дает доступ к следующим опциям:
+
+
Сохранить изображение (Save Image)
ALTS
Сохраняет текущее изображение в виде ресурсного файла.
Pe - это редактор кода, с подсветкой синтаксиса для программистов. Изначально создан Maarten Hekkelmann, последствии исходные коды были открыты и теперь поддерживается разработчиками Haiku. Более подробная информация доступна на сайте проекта.
+
Для более подробного изучения следует обратиться к документации, которая поставляется с приложением.
People - простая программа для хранения контактов, использующая атрибуты файловой системы Haiku для сохранения адресов и другой контактной информации. Каждый контакт сохранён как один персональный файл со всеми данными о нём в виде отдельных атрибутов. Все они проиндексированы и потому доступны для поиска по соответствующему запросу.
+
+
+
+
Атрибут Группа (Group) снизу осуществляет привязку контакта к одной или нескольким группам, что полезно для "массовой рассылки" ряду людей, которые, например, работают над определённым проектом. Выпадающее меню выводит все существующие в настоящее время группы, а если контакт принадлежит более, чем к одной группе, то их названия идут через запятую ",".
+
+
Персональные файлы принято сохранять в /boot/home/people/. Чтобы увидеть список всех контактов, откройте папку people и включите все интересующие вас атрибуты. Если же вы хотите хранить персональные файлы в различных папках, то для отображения их всех в одном окне используйте соответствующий поисковый запрос.
+
+
+
+
Вы можете обращаться с этими файлами, как и с любыми другими: сортировать по атрибутам, включая вторичную сортировку (нажать SHIFT во время клика по следующему атрибуту), удалять, переименовывать, копировать и т. д.. Также можно редактировать контактную информацию напрямую: кликнуть по атрибуту (или нажать ALT+E) для его изменения также как при переименовании файла, в режиме редактирования можно премещаться между колонками, нажимая TAB и SHIFT+TAB.
PoorMan - это простейший WEB-сервер с максимально простыми настройками. Он не имеет расширенных северных функций, в отличие от специализированного серверного программного обеспечения, предлагая минимально необходимый функционал.
+
При первом запуске PoorMan запросит папку, из которой файлы будут отдаваться в сеть. Если вы нажмёте кнопку Default, то создастся новая папка /boot/home/public_html, в которую следует поместить стартовую HTML страницу с названием по умолчанию index.html.
+
В PoorMan имеется консоль, которая отображает журнал активности, над ней расположена информация о состоянии (запущен сервер или нет), путь к раздаваемой папке, и счетчик посещений. Настройки могут быть изменены в меню Правка (Edit) | Настройки (Settings)...:
+
+
Панель настроек состоит из трех вкладок:
+
На вкладке Сайт (Site) можно выбрать другую раздаваемую паку (Web Folder), изменить начальную страницу (Start Page) и отметить опцию, которая отсылает список файлов, если начальная страница отсутствует.
+В Ведение журнала (Logging) можно включить/выключить вывод сообщений в консоль (Log to Console), а также активировать их запись в лог-файл (Log to File).
+Вкладка Расширенные настройки (Advanced) позволяет задать максимальное количество одновременных подключений.
+
Остальные пункты меню PoorMan очевидны: можно сохранить полностью или частично выводимые в консоль данные (Save Console...), очистить её или лог-файл (Clear Console Log/Log File), запустить или остановить сервер (Run Server) и обнулить счетчик посещений (Clear Hit Counter).
+
+
Если вы хотите проверить работоспособность PoorMan, то выберите для раздачи папку /boot/apps/BePDF/docs/ и файл index.html как начальную страницу, затем введите в браузере адрес локального компьютера 127.0.0.1.
Помимо получения обычных скриншотов через клавишу Print Screen, которая помещает изображение текущего экрана в PNG формате в папку /boot/home, это приложение содержит и ряд других полезных настроек.
+
+
Запуск приложения Screenshot приведёт к снятию обычного скриншота, а также предоставит возможность настроить в своём окне имя сохраняемого файла, формат изображения и место сохранения.
+
В диалоговом окне Опции (Options) присутствует несколько параметров:
+
+
Помимо очевидных опций - захвата всего экрана (Capture entire screen), либо только активного окна (Capture active window), включая его грани (Include window border) и курсор мыши (Include mouse pointer), также имеется возможность ввести задержку перед снятием скриншота. Эта задержка будет задействована, только если вы снимаете новый скриншот, нажимая кнопку Take Screenshot.
+
+
+
+Снятие скриншота из Terminal
+
Приложение Screenshot также можно использовать из Terminal или через скрипт.
+Screenshot --help выведет справку о доступных параметрах:
+
+
~> Screenshot --help
+
+Screenshot [OPTION]... Создает изображение текущего экрана.
+
+Опция:
+ -o, --options При запуске сразу откроется окно параметров
+ -m, --mouse-pointer Включает в снимок курсор мыши
+ -b, --border Включает в снимок грани окна
+ -w, --window Делает снимок только активного окна, а не всего экрана
+ -d, --delay=seconds Делает скриншот с указанной задержкой [в секундах]
+ -s, --silent Сохраняет скриншот, игнорируя настройки, выставленные в окне параметров и сохраняет его в домашнюю папку в PNG формате.
+
+Примечание: Опция -b, --border сработает только совместно с опцией -w, --window
+
StyledEdit - простой текстовый редактор, он сохраняет файлы в виде обычного текста, но через добавление к ним дополнительных атрибутов имеет некоторые возможности по форматированию, которые будут видны только при открытии файла в StyledEdit.
+
+
Если интересно, то эти дополнительные атрибуты можно просмотреть через Terminal при помощи команды listattr:
+
+
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+ Int-32 4 "be:encoding"
+MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Int-32 4 "wrap"
+ Int-32 4 "alignment"
+ Raw Data 1048 "styles"
+
+1071 bytes total in attributes.
+
Видно, что все параметры форматирования из меню StyledEdit присутствуют и здесь каждый в своём атрибуте: перенос строк (вкл/выкл) и выравнивание (левое/центральное/правое), а стили (шрифт, размер, цвет) каждого документа совмещены в одном отдельном атрибуте.
+
Поскольку эти атрибуты являются особенностью файловой системы BFS, то это означает, что в других О. С. этот файл откроется в виде обычного текста, атрибуты с форматированием потеряются. Оно также пропадёт, если файл сохранить на разделе с отличной от BFS файловой системой.
+
Таким образом имеется возможность делать текст цветным с различными шрифтами и их размером, но при этом файл так и остаётся остаётся обычным текстовым файлом. Поэтому ReadMe.txt, к примеру, остаётся читаемым в любой О. С., но в Haiku будет выглядеть красивее и удобнее к восприятию.
+
Работать в StyledEdit очень просто, поэтому мы пропустим описание каждого пункта в меню. Напишите нужный текст, выделите его часть, которую собираетесь форматировать и примените к ней нужные шрифт, его цвет и размер в меню Шрифт (Font). Перенос строки и выравнивание в меню Документ (Document) возможно применить только ко всему файлу целиком.
~/config/settings/Terminal_settings
+~/.profile - дополняет/отменяет умолчания в /boot/system/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - дополняет/отменяет умолчания в /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+
+
+
Terminal - интерфейс Haiku к командной оболочке bash (Bourne Again Shell)
+
Пожалуйста обратитесь к странице Scripting для просмотра ссылок на онлайновые обучающие программы по работе с командной оболочкой shell. Здесь же мы сконцентрируемся непосредственно на приложении Terminal.
Вы можете открыть столько Терминалов, сколько вам необходимо, каждый в своем собственном окне, просто запуская новые Терминалы, либо нажимая ALT+N в уже работающем Терминале. Также можно использовать вкладки в Терминале, открывая их комбнацией ALT+T.
+
У окна Терминала изменяется размер как и у любого другого приложения, а также имеется возможность использовать пресеты из меню Настройки | Размер окна (Settings | Window Size). Комбиация клавиш ALT+ENTER включает полноэкранный режим.
+
Измененный размер окна и кодировку текста можно сохранить, только выбрав пункт меню Настройки | Сохранить по умолчанию (Settings | Save as default).
+
+
+
Пункт меню Настройки | Параметры (Settings | Preferences) откроет панель, в которой можно выбрать шрифт, его размер а также цвет различного текста и фона. Вы можете сохранить разные варианты настроек как отдельные профили, которые открываются двойным кликом мышки, запуская Terminal с соответствующим видом.
+Нажатие кнопки OK сохранит текущие настойки по умолчанию.
Пришедшая из Unix, командная оболочка Bash имеет очень широкие возможности по настройке. Существуют два наиболее важных для пользователя файла: .profile и .inputrc
+Оба файла могут быть созданы в домашней папке (/boot/home/), где они дополняют или отменяют (т. к. более приоритетны) системные настройки по умолчанию, расположенные в /boot/system/etc/.
+
+
.profile
+
.profile загружается каждый раз, когда вы открываете новый Терминал. Этот файл устанавливает все виды псевдонимов и переменных, которые затрагивают поведение командной оболочки и её внешнего вида. Существует множество онлайн ресурсов, на которых детально описаны все эти возможности.
+
На сервере Haiku/BeOS Tips имеется довольно много подсказок для начала изучения настроек Bash, например:
.inputrc работает с клавиатурными привязками (keybindings). Так как в Haiku эти настройки вполне пригодны и по умолчанию, то скорее всего менять их не потребуется, но если всё же возникла небходимость их подправить, то рекомендуется обратится к одному из многочисленных онлайн ресурсов, например, The GNU Readline Library.
Перетаскивание файла или папки из окна Tracker-а в Терминал подставит путь к нему у курсора. Перетаскивание правой кнопкой мыши вызовет меню для дополнительных действий:
+
+
Вставить путь (Insert Path)
Вставляет путь к файлу так же, как при перетаскивании левой кнопкой мыши.
+
Сменить директорию (Change Directory)
Переводит Терминал в папку перетаскиваемого файла.
+
Создать здесь симлинк (Create Link Here)
Создает симлинк на перетаскиваемый файл в текущей директории Терминала.
+
Переместить сюда (Move Here)
Перемещает перетаскиваемый файл в текущую директорию Терминала.
+
Копировать сюда (Copy Here)
Копирует перетаскиваемый файл в текущую директорию Терминала.
+
+
Вы можете открыть любой файл, назначенной ему программой, используя команду open [имя_файла]. Это также сработает для открытия текущей (".") и родительской ("..") папки, которые откроются в окне Tracker-а. Так, чтобы открыть текущую директорию, следует набрать:
Vision - это IRC-клиент изначально разработанный для BeOS. Документация доступна на официальном сайте Vision.
+
Вы можете получить помощь от пользователей или разработчиков Haiku зайдя на один из Haiku каналов.
+Наиболее популярным является англо-говорящий канал #haiku на сервере irc.freenode.org.
Медиа проигрыватель VLC - это портированная версия широкоиспользуемого мультиплатформенного медиа проигрывателя. Более подробную информацию можно получить на официальном сайте VideoLAN.
WonderBrush - это редактор растровой и векторной графики. Найти более подробную информацию и семинары можно на сайте YellowBites website, а также в документации, которая идет с приложением.
Атрибуты - это поля данных, которые относятся к файлу, но не являются его частью. Они не учитываются при подсчете размера файла и могут быть скопированы или удалены без изменения самого файла. Система использует атрибуты для хранения, например, размера файла, типа файла, даты последнего изменения и т.д. Точно также, как в других операционных системах и их файловых системах.
+
Отличие состоит в том, что вы можете добавить любой атрибут к любому файлу, затем отобразить и сделать его редактируемым в окне Tracker. Вам нужно только определить какого типа атрибут вы хотите добавить к файлу (например: строка, целое число и время). дать название и описание.
+
Сам файл и вовсе может не содержать никакой информации. Давайте посмотрим на файлы контактов для примера:
+
+
+
Как вы видите все файлы имеют нулевой размер вместе с атрибутами и атрибут E-mail у контакта "John Nox" редактирует прямо в Tracker.
+
Если проиндексировать атрибуты у контактов, электронных писем или аудио-файлов, то вы сможете производить поиск по ним при помощи быстрой системы запросов.
В Tracker атрибуты отображаются, как в базе данных или таблице. Можно выбрать какие атрибуты отображать и отсортировать список файлов по ним.
+
Откройте Tracker, щелкните по пункту меню Атрибуты (Attributes) и выберите атрибуты, которые хотите отобразить. Также можно просто щелкнуть по заголовку колонки и отметить элементы в контекстном меню. Вы можете поменять местами колонки с атрибутами, просто перетаскивая их за заголовок. Перетащив колону за границы окна, вы быстро избавитесь от ненужной.
+
Дважды щелкните мышкой по линии, которая находится между двумя заголовками атрибутов, и ширина колонки автоматически изменится согласно длине самого длинного атрибута.
+
Щелкните по заголовку колонки, чтобы отсортировать список. Вы можете установить вторичную сортировку удерживая клавишу SHIFT, кликнув по заголовку колонки. Например, отсортируйте файла контактов по комании и по имени контакта. Посмотрите скриншот выше в качестве примера. Вторичная сортировка отмечена светлым индикатором рядом с заголовком.
+
Редактирование атрибутов является такой же простой операцией, как и переименовывание файла: Щелкните по строке, либо нажмите ALTE и для перемещения по атрибутам используйте клавиши TAB и SHIFTTAB.Клавиша ESC позволяет покинуть режим редактирования без сохранения изменений.
Если вы предпочитаете использовать командную строку или планируете работать с большим количеством файлов при помощи скриптов, то существует несколько команд для управления атрибутами в Терминале:
listattr - отображает список атрибутов файла, но не содержимое атрибутов.
+
usage: listattr 'filename' ['filename' ...]
+
Пример:
+
~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters
+File: Clara Botters
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Text 14 "META:name"
+ Text 6 "META:nickname"
+ Text 1 "META:company"
+
+ Text 18 "META:address"
+ Text 8 "META:city"
+ Text 1 "META:state"
+ Text 1 "META:zip"
+ Text 1 "META:country"
+
+ Text 1 "META:hphone"
+ Text 13 "META:wphone"
+ Text 1 "META:fax"
+ Text 19 "META:email"
+ Text 1 "META:url"
+
+ Text 5 "META:group"
+ Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le"
+
+131 bytes total in attributes.
+
Помимо всех "META:*" атрибутов, которые хранят контактную информацию, есть также два атрибута, которыми управляет система:
+
+
BEOS:TYPE хранит тип файла в виде MIME-строки , в нашем случае - "application/x-person". Он определяет иконку по умолчанию и приложение, которое открывает файл по двойному щелчку по нему.
+
"_trk/pinfo_le" при помощи этого атрибута Tracker отслеживает месторасположение иконки.
+
Note the backslash after "Clara". In Terminal you have to "escape" special characters like '"*\$?!. The space between "Clara" and "Botters" is also one of those. Therefore the backslash is really in front of the space character, and not after "Clara".
addattr - позволяет добавить атрибут, и(или) заполнить его содержимое.
+
usage: addattr [-t type] attr value file1 [file2...]
+ or: addattr [-f value-from-file] [-t type] attr file1 [file2...]
+
+ Type is one of:
+ string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, raw
+ or a numeric value (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...)
+ The default is "string"
+
Допустим, Clara (Клара) устроилась на работу в Barkelbaer Inc., и вы теперь можете заполнить ранее пустой атрибут "Company" (Компания) следующим образом:
+
~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters
rmattr - позволяет полность удалить атрибут файла.
+
+
usage: rmattr [-p] attr filename1 [filename2...]
+ 'attr' is the name of an attribute of the file
+ If '-p' is specified, 'attr' is regarded as a pattern.
+
Хотя можно было бы просто не заполнять атрибут "Fax" (Факс), но вы также можете полность удалить этот атрибут у файла Clara:
"Scripting" is the technique of automating procedures by stringing together commands and saving it all as text files, so called "scripts". Every time you run such a script, the commands are processed one after the other just like they would if you entered them into the Terminal by hand.
+Scripts can range from simply executing a few commands in a specific order to sophisticated pieces of code that solve complex tasks.
Since scripts rely naturally a lot on the shell they are interpreted by, you should first familiarize yourself with the BASH that's used by Haiku. There are many resources online as it's a widely used shell. One nice document is Johan Jansson's Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
After you've learned a few basics about working in the shell, it's time to slowly ease yourself into the world of scripting. Again, you'll find loads of tutorials and reference material online as well as in bookstores. A very nice introduction that's practically tailor-made for Haiku is the online available Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900kb) of Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible.
In Haiku, the system makes of course also use of scripting. Booting and shutting down are typical scripting procedures. These defined sequences can be augmented by the user with certain user scripts.
+If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Otherwise simply add your commands where in the process you want them to be executed.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript will be executed after the system has finished its boot process. For example, you could launch a number of programs that would then be automatically started on every boot up:
Remember to end a command with an "&" to start it as a background process, or the script will halt until that command has finished (in this case: the launched app was closed again).
+
+
A simple alternative to the above for launching applications at boot up is to put links to them in the /boot/home/config/boot/launch directory. This can be done simply by right-clicking on the application you wish to have started automatically, going to Create Link and then navigating to the above directory.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript will be executed as the first step in the shutdown process. If the script returns a non-zero exit status, the shutdown is aborted.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript is executed as the last step in the shutdown process. Note, that most parts of the system have terminated by the time this script is executed.
Загрузчик Haiku может помочь решить аппаратные проблемы, либо выбрать, какую из систем запустить для установки, если у вас более одной копии Haiku (установочный CD или USB карта).
+Он также полезен после установки программного компонента, который препятствует успешной загрузке системы. Опция Запретить загрузку пользовательских дополнений (Disable user add-ons) запустит систем без компонентов установленных пользователем (например - драйвер).
+
Для того чтобы зайти в настройки загрузчика, необходим нажать ПРОБЕЛ сразу же в начале загрузки системы. Этот момент легко пропустить, поэтому лучше удерживать клавишу до загрузки.
+
+
Вы увидите три пункта меню:
+
+
Select boot volume
Выбрать с какого раздела запустить Haiku.
+
Select safe mode options
+
Здесь находится несколько опций, которые могут решить аппаратные проблемы. При выборе опций, в нижней части экрана отображается краткое описание.
+
- Safe mode
+- Disable user add-ons
+- Disable IDE DMA
+- Use fail-safe video mode
+- Don't call the BIOS
+- Disable APM
+- Disable ACPI
+- Disable IO-APIC
+- Enable serial debug output
+- Enable on screen debug output
+
+
Select fail safe video mode
Если вы активировали опцию Use fail-safe video mode, то сможете выбрать разрешение экрана и глубину цвета.
+
+
+
После активации одной или более опций, вернитесь в главное меню и продолжите загрузку, далее вы увидите загрузочный экран:
+
+
+
Если все в порядке, то иконки будут быстро загораться, одна за другой.
+Каждая иконка соответствует определенному этапу загрузки:
+
+
Атом
Инициализация модулей.
+
Диск с лупой
Создание корневой файловой системы (/) и монтирование файловой системы устройств (/dev).
Ниже, вы найдете документацию о наиболее важных аспектах Haiku. Документация находится в стадии разработки. Если вы нашли ошибки, либо хотите что-то предложить или даже сделать свой вклад, ознакомьтесь со списком рассылки о документации.
+Если вы заинтересованы в помощи с переводом сам следует обратиться сюда.
Существует несколько маленьких игры и демонстрационных приложений для вашего развлечения. Большинство демонстрационных приложений ориентированы на разработчиков, которые заинтересованы в изучении кода эти приложений. В Haiku весь исходный код открыт!
Deskbar - это маленькая панель, которая по умолчанию располагается в правом верхнем углу экрана. Это аналог панели задачи с кнопкой Пуск из Windows. Она содержит меню, из которого вы можете запустить приложения и настройки, трей с часами и снизу список запущенных приложений.
+
+
Вы можете переместить Deskbar в любой угол, либо расположить на всю верхнюю\нижнюю границу экрана (как в Windows), ухватив за шероховатую область, расположенную слева от трея. Вы также можете свернуть эту панель в более компактную, ухватив за шероховатую область и потянув в сторону меню Deskbar.
Смонтировать (Mount) - Предлагает теже самые опции, что и меню при правом щелке мыши по Рабочему столу (для более подробного изучения, обратитесь к тему Монтирование разделов).
Выключение (Shutdown) - Предлагает опции: Перезапустить систему (Restart System) и Выключить питание (Power Off).
+
Недавно открытые документы, папки, приложения (Recent Documents, Folders, Applications) - Список последних открытых документов, папок и приложений (смотрите ниже Настройка меню Deskbar (Deskbar Preferences) ).
+
Приложения, демо приложения, приложеница для Deskbar, Настройки (Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, Preferences) - Список установленных приложений, демонстрационных приложений, приложениц и настроек (смотрите ниже Настройка меню Deskbar (Deskbar Preferences)).
+
+
+
+Настройки Deskbar
+
+
+
Меню
+Здесь вы можете установить количество отображаемых недавно открытых документов, папок и приложений, которые отображатся в меню Deskbar.
+Кнопка Изменить меню (Edit Menu...) откроет папку /boot/home/config/be/. В ней вы найдете файлы и папки, которые отображатся в Deskbar, по умолчанию это Приложения (Applications), Демонстрационные приложения (Demos), Приложеница (Deskbar Applets), и Настройки (Preferences).
+Вы можете добавить или удалить элементы такие как, ссылки на приложения, документы, папки и даже запросы путем простого копирования или удаления.
+
Есть ещё более простой способ - просто перенесите файл, папку, ссылку на приложений или запрос прямо в Deskbar.
+
Окно
+
+
Всегда поверх (Always on Top)
Deskbar отображается поверх всегда поверх всех окон.
+
Всплывать (Auto Raise)
Deskbar появляется поверх окон, если указатель мыши коснется его.
После активации, справа от названия приложения в списке запущенных приложений Deskbar, будет отображаться стрелочка, которая позволяет разворачивать/сворачивать список окон приложения.
+
Раскрывать запущенное приложение (Expand New Applications)
После запуска автоматически будет раскрываться список окон приложения .
+
+
Часы
+
+
24-х часовой формат (24 Hour Clock)
Переключение между 24-х и 12-ти часовыми форматами.
+
Отображать секунды (Show Seconds)
Добавляет отображение секунд.
+
Европейская дата (European Date)
Отображение даты в Европейском формате: день-месяц-год.
Помимо всего прочего в трее располагаются часы. Левый щелчок мыши по часам позволяет сменить отображение времени на отображение даты и обратно. Правый щелчок мыши по часам вызовет контекстное меню, из которого можно запустить настройку времени, даты и временной зоны.
+А также вызвать календарь и скрыть отображение часов.
+
Любая программа может установить иконку в трей для обеспечения быстрого доступа. Почтовый клиент, например, отображает другую иконку, когда у вас есть непрочитанные письма и предлагает контекстное меню, например создание письма для отправки, для проверки почты. Другим примером является Инспектор процессов (ProcessController) отображает иконку в трее, которая отображает нагрузку процессора и использование памяти, а также предлагает контекстное меню.
Вы можете обратиться к запущенному приложению, выбрав его в списке Deskbar, выбрать любое его окно из подменю. Правым щелчком мыши по приложению в списке вы можете свернуть или закрыть окна приложения, или само приложение.
+
Если вы активировали отображение экспандеров в настройках Deskbar, то сможете разворачивать/сворачивать список окон приложения.
+
Перед каждым окном приложения находится иконка, которая отображает состояние окна. Светлая иконка означает, что окно развернуто, темная - свернута. Три полоски перед иконкой означают, что окно находится на другом рабочем столе.
Один или несколько апплетов LaunchBox могут быть запущены для организации быстрого доступа к вашим избранным приложениям и документам. Вы сами решаете, будут ли они отображаться на всех рабочих столах, либо только на текущем. Также их можно использовать для быстрого открытия документов в определённом приложении, например, можно перетащить HTML файл на текстовый редактор в LaunchBox, чтобы открыть его в нём, а не его предпочтительном приложении - браузере.
+
+
Все опции доступны из контекстного меню:
+
+
Добавить сюда кнопку (Add Button Here)
Добавляет пустую кнопку.
+
Освободить кнопку (Clear Button)
Делает кнопку пустой.
+
Удалить кнопку (Remove Button)
Удаляет кнопку.
+
Параметры (Settings)
+- Горизонтальное расположение (Horizontal Layout)
+- Размер Иконк (Icon size)
+- Игнорировать двойной клик (Ignore Double-click)
+- Показывать рамку окна (Show Window Border)
+- Автоматически поверх окон (Auto Raise)
+- Показывать на всех раб. столах (Show On All Workspaces)
+Меняет расположение кнопок на горизонтальное.
+Устанавливает размер иконок от 16 до 64 пикселей.
+Запускает объект только один раз даже когда клик произведён, возможно случайно, дважды.
+Отображает рамку вокруг окна.
+LaunchBox показывается поверх всех окон, если подвести мышь к краю экрана.
+Отображает LaunchBox на всех рабочих столах.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - здесь хранятся позиции окон.
+
+
+
+
Приложенице для управления рабочими столами вы найдете в меню Приложеница для рабочего стола (Desktop Applets) панели задач Deskbar. Оно отображает миниатюрные версии всех рабочих столов. В контекстном меню доступные настройки, названия которых говорят сами за себя.
+Изменить количество рабочих столов (Change Workspace Count...) запустит настройки экрана, где вы сможете указать количество рабочих столов и их расположение (количество столбцов и строк).
+
Поскольку приложенице является репликантом, вы можете изменить размер окна и поместить на рабочий стол (убедитесь что у вас включена опция Отображать репликанты (Show Replicants) в меню панели задач Deskbar).
Чтобы переместить окно, просто выберите его в приложенице и перенесите на другой рабочий стол. Это имеет преимущество в том, что вам не придется покидаться текущий рабочий стол. Естественно, это хорошо работает, когда у вас не слишком много открытых окон и ваша цель не перекрыта другими окнами. Другая возможность заключается в том, чтобы удерживая окно за ярлычок переключиться на другой рабочий стол при помощи горячих клавиш ALTFx.
Иерархия файловой системы Haiku очень простая, по возможности используются понятные названия для файлов и папок для того, чтобы не вводить пользователя в замешательство. Важные для системы файлы и папки защищены от случайного изменения, предупреждая следующим образом:
+
+
+
Второе предупреждение появляется, в случае если вы попытаете удалить или переименовать что-нибудь в иерархии системы. Для того чтобы активировать кнопку "Сделать это (Do it)" нужно удерживать клавишу SHIFT.
+
В основном выделяют три направления корневой папки загрузочного раздела:
+
+
/boot/system/
принадлежит системе. Не стоит прикасаться к ней!
+
/boot/common/
содержит общие файлы для всех пользователей.
+
/boot/home/
это ваша персональная папка для хранения ваших данных и настроек.
У BeOS, предшественника Haiku, эта папка находилась по следующему адресу /boot/beos/. Вы всё ещё можете её найти в старых документациях (например, в оригинальной BeBook).
+Неважно как она называется, главное ничего не изменять внутри её. Каждое обновление в Haiku может добавить, удалить или перезаписать что-либо в находящееся в ней. Если вы хотите расширить функциональность при помощи дополнений для файлового менеджера Tracker или трансляторов, либо драйвера для устройства, вы должны устанавливать их в свою папку /boot/home/, однако если они предназначены для всех пользователей, то они должны быть установлены в /boot/common/. Пока Haiku не поддерживает многопользовательский режим это различие не имеет очевидного эффекта, в данный момент существует один пользователь с единственной домашней (home) папкой. Однако когда появится поддержка многопользовательского режима, это будет иметь значение, так что стоит с самого начала выбрать правильный путь.
+
Давайте представим, что вы хотите установить новый транслятор для нового формата изображения, вы не должны копировать его в соответствующую системную папку. Запомните: Не трогать!
+Вместо этого, вы должны скопировать его в аналогичную по назначению папку находящуюся по адресу /boot/common/ или /boot/home/config/.
+
В нашем примере расположение трансляторов в системной папке будет
+
/boot/system/add-ons/Translators/
+
Аналогичная пользовательская папка находится по адресу
Это дает ещё один положительный момент: Если компонент, который вы установили работает некорректно (например, драйвер) вы можете выбрать "Запретить загрузку пользовательских дополнений (Disable User Add-Ons)" в меню загрузчика и вы всегда сможете загрузиться без проблемного компонента..
+
В основном вы не будете иметь дело с подобными вещами, т.к. каждое программное обеспечение, поставляемое из надежного источника должно уметь делать эти вещи автоматически.
+
+
В настоящее время Haiku не являет многопользовательской системой. Когда она станет таковой, каждый пользователь будет иметь свою домашнюю папку, которая будет не доступна кому-либо ещё. Каждое приложения или дополнительный компонент(дополнение для файлового менедждера, трансляторы и т.д.), либо другие данные, которые предполагают использование всеми пользователями, должны находиться под адресу /boot/common/
Эта папка принадлежит вам. Здесь вы можете создавать и удалять файлы и папки по своему желанию. Тем не менее не стоит засорять папку ~/config/ и все папки, что находятся в ней. Вы можете удалить, к примеру, ~/config/settings/ папку без ущерба системе, но кто хочет потерять все свои настройки? В любом случае, система предупредит вас, как показано в примере выше.
+
Кроме того, папка ~/config/add-ons/, как и системная, предназначена для дополнительных компонентов. (Кстати, знак тильда ("~") это ссылка на вашу домашнюю папку, так что вам не придется каждый раз писать "/boot/home/" в терминале.)
+
+
~/mail
+
По умолчанию, здесь хранится ваша почта.
+
+
~/queries
+
В этой папке хранятся запросы, по умолчанию в течении 7-ми дней.
+
+
~/config/be/
+
Снова наше BeOS наследие, папка be содержит все что показывается в в меню панели задач Deskbar (Deskbar menu). Вы можете добавлять или удалять элементы при помощи панели конфигурации или просто путем копирования файлов, папок или ссылок непосредственно в эту папку.
+
+
~/config/bin/
+
Дополняет системную папку /boot/system/bin/ и хранит все ваши приложения для командной строки (терминала).
+
+
~/config/boot/
+
Эта папка для хранения сценариев пользователя, которые выполняются до или после загрузки либо выключения системы.
+
+
~/config/boot/launch/
+
Создайте ссылку на приложение или документ в этой папке и при каждой загрузке они будут запускаться.
+
+
~/config/fonts/
+
Просто скопируйте TrueType или Postscript шрифт в эту папку и вы сможете им мгновенно воспользоваться.
+
+
~/config/settings/
+
Эта папка содержит настройки для всех приложений и некоторые настройки системы. Некоторые приложения хранят свои настройки в собственных папка, другие просто хранят конфигурационные файлы прямо здесь.
+
+
~/config/settings/beos_mime/
+
В этой MIME -базе данных Haiku отслеживает все типы файлов и их настройки (примечание: MIME - Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension — многоцелевые расширения почты интернета, произносится как «майм»).
+
+
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/
+
Здесь располагается один из файлов с настройками, которые могут быть интересны: kernel предлагает некоторые низкоуровневые настройки, наприме, отключение SMP, активация APM. Вы можете активировать настройки, путем удаления символа комментария "#". Будьте осторожны!
+
+
~/config/settings/Tracker/
+
Здесь располагаются несколько интересных папок:
+
+
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Показывает и упорядочивает все атрибуты и размеры окна по вашему вкусу. Каждая новая папка, которую вы создадите, будет использовать этот шаблон.
+
+
DefaultQueryTemplates/
Вы можете определить формат окна результатов поиска для определенных типов файлов. Для более подробного изучения следует обратиться к теме запросы: Окно результатов поиск..
Добавьте шаблон для любого типа файла, которые в последствие будет доступен в меню файлового менеджера Файл | Создать (File | New... ) menu. Для более подробного изучения следует обратиться к теме Tracker - Файловый менеджер: Работа с файлами.
В отличие от Windows, Haiku не определяет тип файла по 3-м буквам расширения (например: .txt, .jpg, .mp3). Этот метод является лишь запасным выходом. Haiku использует MIME типы, как это принято в Интернете. (примечание: MIME - Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension — многоцелевые расширения почты интернета, произносится как «майм»).
+
While there's no reason to use file extensions in Haiku, remember to add them to files you want to share with users of other operating systems, e.g. over email, uploading to a server or via exchange of an USB drive. Otherwise their system may not recognize the file type.
Вы можете сменить тип любого файла, его иконку и приложение, которое с ним ассоциируется. Выделите файл, вызовите контекстное меню при помоши правого щелка мышью и выберите Дополнения | Тип файла (Add-Ons | Filetype add-on).
В нашем случае это PNG-файл, его MIME-строка image/png. Давайте представим, что вы точно знаете, что это не PNG-файл, а GIF-файл. Вы можете изменить тип изменив MIME-строку вручную, либо при помощи любой из двух кнопок расположенных ниже:
+
+
Выбрать (Select...)
Показать окно со списоком типов файлов, в котором следует выбрать image | GIF Image.
+
Такой же как (Same as...)
Открыть диалог, в котором вы можете выбрать файл с типом, который вам нужен.
Это ниспадающее меню отображает список все приложений, которые могут открыть файл определенного типа. Здесь вы можете выбрать приложение, которое должно открывать файл. Например, вы можете изменить предпочтительное приложение для HTML-файла с браузера на текстовый редактор, пока вы над ним работаете. Однако любой другой HTML-файл будет открываться в браузере.
+
+
Приложение по умолчанию (Default Application)устанавливается глобально для каждого тип файла. Если вы не нашли приложение, которое хотите ассоциировать с этим файлом, в ниспадающем меню, вы можете воспользоваться кнопками Выбрать (Select...) и Такое же как (Same As...) , которые выполняют аналогичные функции, которые описаны выше (см. "Тип файла").
Не стоит удивлялться тому, что место в правом верхнем углу для иконки пустое т.к. иконки по умолчанию наследуются от системных типов файлов. Вы можете открыть файл содержащий иконку при помощи дополнения тип файла (Filetype Add-On) и перетащить иконку. Либо дважды щелкнуть по области иконки и создать свою, либо изменить иконку. Для более изучения подробной информации о создании иконок обратитесь к тему Icon-O-Matic.
Если вы вызовите дополнение Тип файла (Filetype Add-On)для прияложения (мы рассмотрим: StyledEdit), то вы увидите следующее окно:
+
+
Сверху, вместо стандартной MIME-строки вы увидите уникальную сигнатуру приложения. При помощи нее система находит приложение где бы оно ни было установлена.
+
Ниже расположены настройки поведения приложения:
+
+
Одиночный запуск (Single Launch)
Только один экземляр приложения может быть запущен из исполняемого файла. Однако если вы имеет две копии приложения, они будут работать бок о бок.
+
Множественный запуск (Multiple Launch)
Одновременно может быть запущено несколько экземпляров приложения.
+
Единственный запуск (Exclusive Launch)
Может быть запущен действительно только один экземпляр приложения с данной сигнатурой
+
Только аргументы (Args Only)
Указать приложению не отвечать на сообщения.
+
Фоновое приложение (Background App)
Приложение не будет отображаться в Twitcher и списке запущенных приложений в Deskbar.
+
+
Ещё ниже расположен список поддерживаемых файлов. Вы можете добавлять (или удалять) типы файлов, если вы думаете, что приложение сможет открыть их. Как следствие, приложение появится в меню предпочтительного приложения, либо в контекстном меню Tracker Открыть с помощью (Open with...), которое вызывается правым щелчком мыши по файлу.
+
В самом низу отображается информация о версии приложения и авторских правах. Как и сигнатура приложения, эта информация заполняется автором приложения и должна оставаться неизменной.
Панель настройки Типы файлов (FileTypes) никак не связана настройкой отдельных файлов, она позволяет управлять глобальными настройками типов файлов. Вы можете изменить стандартную иконку, предпочтительное приложение или добавить, удалить, либо изменить атрибуты для всех файлов определенного типа. Вы даже можете создать свой собственный тип файла с нуля.
+
Все типы файлов и их настройки хранятся по адресу /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Перед тем, как вы начнете иксперементировать, было бы разумно сделать резервную копию этой папки...
Графический интерфейс Haiku является неотъемлемой частью системы. В отличие от Unix-подобных операционных систем, здесь нет отдельного менеждера окон и невозможно загрузиться только в оболочке командной строки. Haiku нацелена на десктоп-пользователей.
+
Т.к. вы, вероятно, уже имели дело с другими графическими средами, давайте опустим обсуждение стандартных вещей вроде меню, контекстного меню, вызываемого правым щелчком мыши, перетаскивания объектов, и т.д. Вместо этого, давайте перейдем к уникальным особенностям графического интерфейса Haiku.
+
+
Есть несколько вещей в графическом интерфейсе Haiku, которые нуждаются в объяснении.
+
+
Панель задач именуемая Deskbar, является аналогом меню "Пуск". Для более подробного изучения следует обратиться к теме Deskbar - Панель задач.
+
Желтый ярлычок (заголовок окна) предлагает немного больше, чем просто название программы и название документа:
+
Вы можете передвинуть его, удерживая клавишу SHIFT и перемещая в другую позицию. Если расположить ряд окон, то можно получить удобный доступ к ним по именам на ярлычках.
+
Свернуть окно можно при помощи двойного щелчка на этом ярлычке (или при помощи комбинации клавиш CTRLALTM). Доступ к свернутым окнам можно получить при помощи панели задач Deskbar или Twitcher.
+
Вы можете отправить окно на задний план при помоши правого щелчка мыши по ярлычку (или по краю окна).
+
Кнопка закрытия окна.
+
The "zoom" button (or CTRLALTZ). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size. It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.
+
Кнопка измнения размера окна. Потяните в любую сторону и окно поменяет свой размер.
+
+
Удерживая клавиши CTRLALT, вы можете переместить окно потащив за любую область левой кнопкой мыши, правой же вы отправите окно на задний план.
При сохранении или открытие файла в любом приложение, вы увидите такое диалоговое окно:
+
+
Оно содержит все привычные вещи: Список файлов в текушей папке, в случае диалога сохранения также поле для названия файла и выпадающее меню для разных форматов файлов и настроек.
+Вы можете также выбрать папку для сохранения или открытия в выпадающем меню в верхней части диалогового окна.
+
Если у вас уже открыто окно файлового менеджера Tracker, вы можете просто перенести любой файл или папку из него (в том числе символ из верхнего правого окна) в диалог сохранения или открытия. Это изменит текущий пусть диалог открытия или сохранения (изображение выше это иллюстрирует).
Вы можете использовать большинство горячих клавиш, которые используются в файловом менеджере Tracker. А также команды которые доступы через меню Файл (File). Вот некоторые из них:
+
+
ALTN
Создать новую папку.
+
ALTE
Переименовать выбранный файл или папку.
+
ALT↑
Открыть папку уровнем выше.
+
ALT↓ or ENTER
Открыть выделенную папку.
+
ALTD
Перейти в папку содержащую файлы с рабочего стола.
Меню Избранное (Favorites) обеспечивание доступ к недавно посещенным папкам и избранным местам, которые мы можете установить сами. Вы также можете использовать их для навигации.
+
+
Чтобы добавить что-нибудь в избранное, просто перейдите в нужное место и выберите в меню Избранное (Favorites) | Добавить текущую папку (Add Current Folder). Отныне эта папка будет доступна в любом диалоге открытия или сохранения. Для удаления чего-либо из избранного, выберите Избранное (Favorites) | Настроить избранное (Configure Favorites...) и удалите.
+Все избранные папки хранятся по следующему пути /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. Таким образом вы можете добавлять или удалять ссылки на файлы или папки непосредственно там.
Репликанты - это небольшие автономные части приложений, которые могут быть интегрированы в другие приложения. Если активировать в Deskbar опцию Отображать репликанты (Show Replicants), то вы сможете отличить область репликанта по маленькому значку в правом нижнем углу:
+
+
Наиболее подходящим местом для репликантов является Рабочий стол: Просто перетащите репликант за этот маленький в правом нижем углу на рабочий стол. Теперь репликант является частью рабочего стола и для его работы не требуется запуска оригинального приложения.
+Правым щелчком мыши по маленькой иконке в правом нижнем углу можно вызвать контекстное меню, которое содержит пункты О репликанте (About) и Удалить репликант (Remove Replicant).
+
Если вы испытываете трудности с репликантом и не можете его удалить, то просто удалите папку ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. К сожалению, это приведет к удалению всех репликантов с рабочего стола.
Атрибуты и Запросы являются ключевыми особенностями Haiku. Хотя атрибуты и полезны для отображения дополнительной инфомации о файлах, но для поиска по ним, требуется их проиндексировать. Индексы заносится в таблицу поиска, что делает запросы молниеносными..
+Индекс является частью файловой системы и хранятся отдельно для каждого раздела.
+
+
Индексация при помоши Терминала
+
Ниже приведено несколько команд для управления индексами:
+
+
lsindex - Отображает проиндексированные атрибуты на текущем разделе.
+Следующие атрибуты проиндексированы по умолчанию:
mkindex - Индексирует заданный атрибут на текущем разделе.
+
+
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute>
+Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume to which the index will be added,
+ defaults to current volume.
+ -t, --type=TYPE the type of the attribute being indexed. One of "int",
+ "llong", "string", "float", or "double".
+ Defaults to "string".
+ --copy-from path to volume to copy the indexes from.
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being created
+
+
+
Только новые файлы с заданным атрибутом будут автоматические добавлены в индекс!
+Уже существующие файлы придется добавлять вручную, путем копирования и удаления оригинала. В качестве альтернативы можно воспользоваться программой reindex.
+
+
+
reindex - Добавляет атрибуты для уже существующих файлов во вновь созданный индекс на текущем разделе.
+
+
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories>
+ -r enter directories recursively
+ -v verbose output
+ -f create/update all indices from the source volume,
+ "attr" is the path to the source volume
+
+
+
+
rmindex - Позволяет удалить атрибут из индекса с текущего раздела.
+
+
Usage: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME
+
+Removes the index named INDEX_NAME from a disk volume. Once this has been
+done, it will no longer be possible to use the query system to search for
+files with the INDEX_NAME attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume from which the index will be
+ removed
+ -h, --help display this help and exit
+ -p, --pattern INDEX_NAME is a pattern
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being removed
+
+INDEX_NAME is the name of a file attribute.
+
+If no volume is specified, the volume of the current directory is assumed.
По умолчанию в Haiku опциональной клавишей, например для вызова команд меню, является ALT, вместо CTRL. Так исторически сложилось, что BeOS переняла некоторые вещи из MacOS. После того, как вы привыкните, вы действительно ощутите удобство, например, сочетания клавиш ALTC и ALTV запросто можно использовать в оболочке терминала bash, где сочетание клавиш CTRLC привело бы к остановке текущего процесса.
+
В любом случае, вы сможете переключить на более привычную клавишу CTRL в настроках раскладки. В руководстве пользователя всегду будут описываться примеры с ипользованием стандартной опциональной клавишей ALT.
+
If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
В дополнении к основным, несколько горячих клавиш для навигации при помощи Tracker:
+
+
ALT↑
Открыть родительскую папку.
+
ALT↓ или ENTER
Открыть выделенную папку.
+
OPT
Удерживая при открытии папки, будет автоматически закрыта родительская. Это также работает при навигации мышью.
+
MENU
Открыть меню Deskbar (для того, чтобы покинуть, используйте ESC).
+
ALTZ
Отменить последнее действие. Помните, это распостраняется только на работу с файлами, изменение атрибутов и прав доступа не могут быть отменены при помощи этих клавиш. Также, если файл удален из Корзины (Trash), то он удален навсегда.
+
ALTSHIFTZ
Повторить действие, которое было отменено при помощи ALTZ.
Прокрутить содержимое терминала вверх/вниз на одну строку.
+
SHIFTPageUP/PageDOWN
Прокрутить содержимое терминала вверх/вниз на одну страницу.
+
TAB
После ввода нескольких букв имени файла или пути, если нажмете TAB, то название автодополнится. Если будет более одного соответствия, то дополнение остановится в том месте, где начинается различие в названиях, и вам следует ввести ещё несколько букв. Если вы нажмете TAB дважды, то отобразится список всех соответствий.
+
↑/↓
Просмотр истории всех ранее введенных команд.
+
CTRLR
Все комнады, которые вы вводили хранятся в файле ~/.bash_history. Нажмите CTRLR и начните вводить команду и вам будет предоставлена первая команда из истории bash, которая соответствует введеной вами. Продолжайте нажимать CTRLR пока не найдете нужную, после того как найдете, просто нажмите ENTER для исполнения.
Вы можете добавить\удалить элементы в\из выделение удерживая клавиши модификаторы и кликая по элементам.
+
+
SHIFT
Позволяет выделить все элементы, между первым и вторым выделенными элементами.
+
ALT
Позволяет добавить или удалить элемент, к уже выделенным, щелкнув по нему мышью.
+
+
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
+The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
Хотя ключевой философией Haiku является минимизировать опции и предоставить разумные настройки по умолчанию, есть некоторые вещи, которые нужно настроить и могут быть установлены в связи с индивидуальными предпочтениями. Все панели настроек вы можете найти в меню Deskbar под названием Настройки (Preferences).
На вкладке, Цвета (Colors), вы можете изменять цвет различных элементов интерфейса. Метод drag&drop позволит вам указать нужный цвет из других программ, таких как WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic или панели Фон (Backgrounds).
Включенный режим Уточнение (Glyph hinting) выравнивает символы таким образом, что их вертикальные и горизонтальные границы будут располагаться между двумя пикселями. Результатом чего будет превосходная контрастность символов, особенно в случае черного текста на белом фоне. Текст становится более четким. Так же этот режим можно применить исключительно для Моноширинных шрифтов (Monospaced Fonts Only), что особенно полезно на устройствах с низким разрешением, таких как нетбуки. Когда уточнение включено, мелкие шрифты могут выглядеть довольно-таки плохо, но этот режим все же позволит получить выгоду от уточнения в текстовых редакторах и в Terminal.
+
Заметить разницу, вносимую уточнением, можно, сравнив эти увеличенные снимки экрана:
+
+
Уточнение: выключено
Уточнение: включено
+
+
Следует отметить, что текст во всех окнах Magnify на этой странице, разумеется, отображается с различными параметрами уточнения. То есть вы можете сравнить результаты настройки на реальном примере: заголовок окна, набранный полужирным шрифтом, или же надпись "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+
+
+
+Тип сглаживания
+
Другой техникой улучшения отображения графики и текста является Сглаживание (Antialiasing). Линии сглаживаются за счет смены цвета некоторых пикселей. Применяются два метода сглаживания:
+
Оттенки серого (Grayscale) - меняет интенсивность цвета пикселя на границе.
+Субпиксельное сглаживание (LCD subpixel), гораздо более эффективно, особенно на ЖК-мониторах (высокого разрешения). При таком сглаживании меняется не интенсивность цвета пикселя, а его оттенок, "устанавливающий" границу элемента на доли пикселя, за счет того, что ЖК-мониторы используют красную, зеленую и синюю компоненту для отображения каждого пикселя.
+
И снова, сравним два этих метода на увеличенных снимках экрана:
Субпиксельное сглаживание добавляет цветные артефакты на границах объектов, что вряд-ли кому-то понравится. Haiku позволяет вам одновременно использовать оба метода сглаживания - перемещая бегунок, вы сможете найти их приемлемое соотношение.
+
Субпиксельное сглаживание в комбинации с уточнением - вопрос патентирования ПО, и поэтому такой режим недоступен по умолчанию. В зависимости от законодательства страны, в которой проживаете, вы можете получить разблокированную версию. Приносим свои извинения. Свяжитесь с вашим представителем.
+
Если вы активируете уточнение с субпиксельным сглаживанием путем модификации и перекомпиляции исходного кода, то сможете сравнить результат со сглаживанием оттенками серого:
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - хранятся позиции окна панели настройки.
+
+
Вы можете назначить любой цвет или изображение в качестве фона для каждого рабочего стола или папки.
+
+
+
Меню в верней части панели настройки позволяет определить, хотите ли вы применять производимые настройки к текущему рабочему столу или ко всем, к определенной папке, или же для каждой вновь создаваемой.
+
Под ним вы можете назначить изображение (Image) или выбрать Ничего (None), если хотите оставить только цветной фон. Изображения также можно перемещать мышкой на окно предварительного просмотра (Preview) слева.
+
Если вы выбрали изображение, то необходимо назначить его расположение (Placement):
+
+
Вручную (Manual)
позволяет задать координаты. Вы можете перемещать изображение в окне предварительного просмотра (Preview) или же ввести координаты X и Y вручную.
+
По центру (Center)
распологает изображение по центру экрана.
+
Подогнать (Scale to fit)
подгоняет изображение под разрешение рабочего стола, вне зависимости от его размеров.
+
Расположить рядом (Tile)
заполняет рабочий стол повторяющимся изображением.
+
+
Активация Контурный текст иконок (Icon label outline) придаёт тексту иконок тонкий контур вокруг.
+
Каким будет фактический цвет текста у иконок (чёрным или белым) зависит от настроек фонового цвета. При тёмном цвете фона, цвет текста становится белым, а при светлом - черным. Если вы назначили очень яркое фоновое изображение, то необходимо и цвет фона сделать светлым, чтобы цвет текста иконок стал черным (Или же активируйте контуры текста как сказано выше).
+Выбранный цвет также отражен в апплете управления рабочими столами (Workspaces applet), который игнорирует изображения как фон.
+
+
Вернуть (Revert)
Вернуть настройки, которые были установлены до запуска панели настройки.
~/config/settings/* - Здесь каждый транслятор создает файл своих настроек, когда вы меняете настройки по умолчанию.
+~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Запоминает настройки положения окна.
+
+
Любое приложение получает возможность открывать и сохранять файлы такого формата, для которого установлен транслятор. Настройки трансляторов задаются в этом приложении.
+
+
+
В зависимости от возможностей, каждый транслятор имеет свои собственные настройки. Как минимум вы увидите кнопку Информация... (Info...), которая открывает окно о создателях транслятора и пути установки.
+Таблица, представленная ниже, дает краткую характеристику трансляторов, установленных по умолчанию и их наиболее полезные параметры.
8 бит, сжатие без потерь, поддерживает прозрачность.
+Вы можете уменьшить размер файла, ограничив количество используемых цветов или выбрав другую палитру
+Канал прозрачности может быть выбран автоматически или вручную - установкой соответствующей RGB-величины.
+
Изображения JPEG2000 (JPEG2000 Images)
24 бита, поддерживается сжатие, не поддерживает прозрачность.
+Скорее всего, здесь вам понадобится только уровень качества выходного изображения.
+
Изображения JPEG (JPEG Images)
24 бита, поддерживается сжатие, не поддерживает прозрачность.
+Кроме качества выходного изображения, вы также можете установить уровень размытия, который уменьшит количество артефактов, но и сделает изображение менее четким.
+
Изображения PCX (PCX Images)
24 бита, поддерживается сжатие, не поддерживает прозрачность, стандартный формат программы PC Paintbrush.
+
Изображения PNG (PNG Images)
32bit, сжатие без потерь, поддерживает прозрачность
+
Изображения PPM (PPM Images)
24 бита, без сжатия, не поддерживает прозрачность, формат Portable PixMap
+
Изображения RAW (RAW Images)
вплоть до 48 бит, без сжатия, не поддерживает прозрачность
+
Текстовые файлы RTF (RTF Text Files)
Форматированный текст
+
Изображения SGI (SGI Images)
24 бита, сжатие без потерь (опционально), поддерживает прозрачность
+
Файлы StyledEdit (StyledEdit Files)
Форматированный текст
+
Изображения TGA (TGA Images)
32 бита, сжатие без потерь (опционально), поддерживает прозрачность
+
Изображения TIFF (TIFF Images)
24 бита, сжатие без потерь (опционально), поддерживает слои и прозрачность
+
Изображения WonderBrush (WonderBrush Images)
32 бита, поддерживает слои и прозрачность, хранит векторные и пиксельные данные
+
+
+
Снимки экрана, графики, черно-белые рисунки и другие изображения, в которых обычно используются всего несколько цветов, как и маленькие изображения лучше всего сохранять в формате GIF (поддерживается вплоть до 256 цветов) или PNG (миллионы цветов). JPEG, например, добавит артефакты сжатия, при этом не уменьшив размер файла .
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
+The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
+You start by clicking the Add button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
+
+
First, declare the Account Type which is either Receive Mail Only, Send Mail Only, or the most usual type, Send and Receive Mail. Then you set how you get your mail, via POP3 or IMAP.
+
Now you enter your E-mail Address, Login Name and Password, give an Account Name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real Name.
+
If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses and the following information is already filled in automatically. If that is not the case, just follow this guide and fill in the details to your e-mail account accordingly.
Click on Incoming under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.
+
+
From the pop-up menu you choose the protocol used by your provider. IMAP and POP3 are supported.
+
Next is the Mail Server address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+
Then you enter your login information, Username and Password, and if necessary change the Login Type from the default Plain Text to APOP for authentication.
+
If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to Leave mail on server and only Remove mail from server when deleted locally.
+
If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to Remove mail from server when deleted locally. You can specify a Top Mailbox Folder to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
+
The New Mail Notification offers different methods to announce the arrival of new mail. Try different settings to see what works best for you.
+
You can change the Location of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
+
Last on this page, you can opt to only Partially download messages that are larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
Click on Outgoing under your account's name to set up how e-mails are sent.
+
+
As with incoming mail, you can also change the Location of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
+
Next is the SMTP Server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+
If you need to login, you change the Login Type to ESMTP and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with POP3 before SMTP for identification.
If you want to filter your incoming email, you click on E-Mail Filters under your account's name to set up automatic sorting. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other. You can rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.
+Besides the R5 Daemon Filter that's used for backward compatibility, there are two other Incoming Mail Filters you can add.
+
+
+
+Spam Filter
+
+
The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
+You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
+Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
+
Together with the following Match Header filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+
+
+
+Match Header
+
+
This filter compares a header to a search pattern and performs some action when it matches.
+With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are available:
+
+
Name
+
the name of the sender
+
From
+
the e-mail address of the sender
+
To
+
your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account)
+
Reply To
+
the e-mail address replies are sent to
+
When
+
the date and time the mail was received
+
Subject
+
the subject line
+
Cc
+
addresses of anyone receiving a carbon copy (Cc)
+
Account
+
the name of the e-mail's account
+
Status
+
The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail.
+
Priority
+
is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent")
+
Thread
+
essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd:
+
Classification Group
+
depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"
+
Spam/Genuine Estimate
+
this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.
+
+
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
+
With the pop-up menu below it, you assign an action when the pattern matches. You can move or delete a mail, set the status to "Read" or anything else or set the e-mail account you'll reply with.
+
+
+
+Outgoing Mail Filters
+
At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
+ It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
+
+
Under Mail Checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
+If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that Only When Dial-Up is Connected and also Schedule Outgoing Mail When Dial-Up is Disconnected to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
+
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up Never, While Sending, While Sending and Receiving or Always.
+
Make sure to Start Mail Services on Startup or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
+
Edit Mailbox Menu... will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
+
From that menu, you can also Create New Message..., Check For Mail Now or Edit Preferences....
+
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/fonts
+~/config/settings/Font_settings - хранятся позиции окна панели настройки.
+
+
+
+
Haiku определяет три стандартных шрифта для различных целей. Вы можете установить обычный, жирный и курсивный типы шрифтом и размеры, которые будут использоваться во всей системе. Помимо этих трех, есть также настройки для шрифта используемого в меню.
+
+
По умолчанию (Defaults)
сбросить все настройки на значения по умолчанию.
+
Вернуть (Revert)
вернуть настройки, которые были установлены до запуска панели настройки.
Установить новые шрифты можно скопировав их в соответствующую папку, например, в /boot/common/fonts/ или /boot/home/config/fonts/ (Для того, чтобы определить в какую, смотрите тему иерархия файловой системы).
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - здесь находятся изменённые пользователем раскладки.
+~/config/settings/Key_map
+
+
+
+
Справа находится окно, отображающее клавиатуру с текущей раскладкой. При нажатии на клавишу соответствующая ей кнопка затемняется, и назначенный ей символ вводится в текстовое поле Пример для копирования (Sample and Clipboard) снизу, откуда его можно скопировать и вставить в любой документ.
+Таким образом, настройки клавиатурной раскладки позволяют не только конфигурировать вашу собственную раскладку, но и полезна при необходимости ввести специальный символ, используемый в других языках. Например, вы можете переключить раскладку на французский язык (French), найти кнопку "ç" и скопировать её в письмо для Франсуа "François" (хотя символ "cedil" можно найти и в других раскладках).
+
При нажатии клавиш-модификаторов, таких как SHIFT, CONTROL или OPTION, отображаемая клавиатура соответствующим образом изменится.
+
Кроме того имеются знаковые клавиши, которые отмечены синим фоном, их называют "мёртвыми" клавишами (Dead Keys), они могут изменить символ клавиши, нажав на неё после них. Если вы кликните по ней мышкой, то клавиши, на которые она влияет подсветятся желтым цветом, второй клик вернёт их в обычное состояние. Примеры: é, ñ, ó или ë.
+
Под клавиатурой представлены еще две опции:
+
+
Выбор мёртвых клавиш (Select Dead Keys)
для настройки вышеупомянутых знаковых синих клавиш.
для использования горячих клавиш в Windows/Linux режиме (клавише CONTROL соответствует CTRL) или в Haiku режиме (клавише COMMAND соответствует ALT).
+
+
В списке слева доступны предварительно сконфигурированные системные раскладки, а под ними, если такие имеются, пользовательские. Вы можете изменять раскладку, перетаскивая мышкой клавиши на клавиатуре - левой кнопкой клавиша скопируется, а правой обменяются местами.
+Когда все изменения произведены, то результат можно сохранить через меню меню Файл | Сохранить... (File | Save...), и ваша пользовательская раскладка появится в соответствующем списке, если сохраненние произведено в папку ~/config/settings/Keymap/, иначе нужно вручную открыть её через меню Файл | Открыть... (File | Open...).
+
Для большей схожести панели клавиатурной раскладки с вашей физической клавиатурой имеется несколько их различных вариантов, доступных через меню Раскладка (Layout).
+
Шрифт, используемый для изображения клавиатуры устанавливается через меню Шрифт (Font). Обратим внимание, что не все символы будут отображаться на многих раскладках.
+
В самом низу находится Кнопка Вернуть (Revert), возвращающая установки, которые были активны при открытии окна настроек клавиатурной раскладки.
Есть другой способ настройки раскладки помимо окна настройки, включающий редактирование текстового файла, изменяя HEX значения. Это может показаться, на первый взгляд, сложным, но разобраться будет достаточно легко.
+
Вы можете вывести текущую раскладку, набрав в Terminal команду:
+
keymap -d MyKeymap
+
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
+At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use e.g. SpicyKeys.
+
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+
keymap -l MyKeymap
+
This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
В выпадающем меню Mouse type выберите тип мыши: 1, 2 или 3-ёх кнопочная. Имеется возможность имитировать 2-ую (правую) кнопку мыши, удерживая клавишу CTRL и кликнув левой кнопкой, а также 3-ью (среднюю) кнопка мыши, нажимая CTRL+ALT совместно с левой кнопкой мыши. Клик средней кнопкой также можно имитировать нажав левую и правую кнопки одновременно - это актуально для ноутбуков, так как на большинстве из них она отсутствует.
+
Вы можете переназначить кнопки мыши, нажимая на них и выбирая их новое значение из выпадающего меню.
+
С помощью ползунков справа можно настроить скорость двойного клика, скорость мыши и её ускорение.
+
Фокусирование мышкой (Focus follows mouse) делает любое окно под мышкой активным без клика по нему. Имеется три режима:
+
+
Включено (Enabled)
окно под курсором мыши автоматически становится активным, но не выходит передний план.
+
Смещение (Warping)
выбор окна из Deskbar или Twitcher плавно переместит курсор мыши к нему.
+
Мгновенное смещение (Instant-Warping)
выбор окна из Deskbar или Twitcher сразу переместит курсор мыши к нему.
+
+
Все настройки применяются налету.
+
+
По умолчанию (Defaults)
сбросить все настройки на значения по умолчанию.
+
Вернуть (Revert)
возвращает настройки, которые были активны при открытии этого окна.
Выберете в верхнем меню сетевой адаптер, который необходимо настроить.
+
Затем укажите тип настройки вашей сети - автоматически (через DHCP) или Static, если вы используете статические адреса. В последнем случае необхотимо также заполнить поля IP адреса (IP Address), маски подсети (Netmask), шлюза (Gateway) и DNS-серверов (DNS #1, DNS #2) самостоятельно, если же ничего не вводить, то будут отображаться адреса, полученные с помощью DHCP.
+
+
Вернуть (Revert)
возвращает настройки, которые были активны при открытии этого окна.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - только для активного ВЕЗА режима.
+~/config/settings/Screen_data - сохраняется положение окон.
+
+
Каждый из ваших рабочих столов может иметь свое собственное разрешение и глубину цвета.
+
+
В верхнем меню определяется будут ли применяться изменения ко всем рабочим столам или же только к текущему. В зависимости от вашей видеокарты, в других двух меню будут находиться все поддерживаемые ею разрешения и настройки глубины цвета.
+
После нажатия кнопки Применить (Apply) графический режим сменится и появится окно для подтверждения сделанных изменений. Если вы их не подтвердите, то графический режим через 12 секунд вернётся к предыдущим настройкам, так как имеется вероятность, что вы не увидите это окно, если применённые настройки не поддерживаются вашим монитором.
+
Слева вы можете задать количество рабочих столов в порядке их расположения (Колонки (Columns) и Строки (Rows)) и открыть настройки Фона.
+
Кнопка Вернуть (Revert) возвращает установки, которые были активны при открытии окна настроек экрана.
Флажок сверху включает/выключает хранитель экрана.
+Активировав его, снизу станет доступен ползунок, с помощью которого выбирается время, через которое хранитель экрана включится при отсутствии активности с мыши и клавиатуры.
+
Следующие два ползунка активируются соответствующими флажками возле них:
+Первый ползунок определяет время, после которого монитор отключится.
+Второй ползунок определяет время, после которого активируется пароль для разблокировки вашего компьютера.
+
Кликая мышкой в различные углы двух экранов снизу, вы определяете когда запустить хранитель экрана или же наоборот воспрепятствовать его включению, переместив мышку в указанный угол. Кликните по центру любого экрана для отключения этой функции.
Во второй вкладке находится список всех установленных модулей хранителя экрана и их собственные настройки. Вы можете протестировать любой из них с изменёнными настройками, нажав кнопку Тест (Test) снизу, а также добавлять другие модули, нажав Добавить (Add)... справа, либо просто перетащить их мышкой в список. Естественно, вы можете просто вставить/удалить файл модуля в соответствующей пользовательской папке: /boot/common/add-ons/screensavers/ или /boot/home/config/add-ons/screensavers/ (см. подробнее Иерархия файловой системы).
Вы можете назначить звуки для определенных событий в системе. Просто выберите событие из списка и назначьте ему звук из выпадающего меню, расположенного ниже.
+
+
Ничего (None)
отключит звук для события.
+
Другой... (Other...)
откроет файловую панель, через которую можно добавить любой звук, отсутствующий в меню.
+
Вы можете использовать звук любого формата, поддерживаемого системой. Если MediaPlayer смог его воспроизвести, то он будет восприниматься и любой другой программой.
+Вы можете предварительно прослушать звук события, выбрав его и использовав кнопки Запуск (Play) и Стоп (Stop).
В левой части вы можете установить день месяца кликнув по нем в календаре. Смена месяца и года производится стрелками вверх/вниз на клавиатуре после щелчка мышью на них.
+
Точно так же меняется и время. Часы работают в двух режимах:
Виртуальная память позволяет системе осуществлять подкачку данных с диска, в случае если ОЗУ может быть использована более рационально для других задач. Даже если у вас установлен большой объем ОЗУ, использование виртуальной памяти не будет плохой идеей.
+
+
Вы можете установить объем виртуальной памяти значительно больший объема ОЗУ. С размерами современных жестких дисков выделение такого объема пространства не должно быть проблематичным. Конечно, в случае, если размер свободного места на диске невелик, вы можете легко уменьшить объем виртуальной памяти. Рекомендуется взглянуть на результат DiskUsage, чтобы понять, куда ушло свободное место .
+
Обычно файл-подкачки записывается на ваш загрузочный диск. Если вы сталкиваетесь с проблемами производительности дисковой подсистемы во время операций с виртуальной памятью, то вам следует попробовать использовать отдельный жесткий диск для файла подкачки. Выбор другого раздела на том же жестком диске не решит это проблему.
+Естественно, самым эффективным решением станет повышение объема оперативной памяти.
+
+
По умолчанию (Defaults)
сбросить все настройки на значения по умолчанию.
+
Вернуть (Revert)
возвращает настройки, активные на момент запуска программы Виртуальная память (VirtualMemory).
Запрос - это поиск файлов на основе атрибутов и может быть выполнен как в Tracker, так и в Терминале. Запросы за последние семь дней хранятся по следующему адресу /boot/home/queries/ по прошествию семи дней удаляются. Следует отметить, что они не являются статичными списками результатов поиска, при открытии запроса будет запущен новый поиск.
+Ещё более удобный способ заключается в использовании ниспадающих подменю, просто щелкните правой кнопкой мыши по файлу запроса.
Для того. чтобы произвести запрос, можно воспользоваться пуктом меню Найти (Find...) в Deskbar, либо в любом окне Tracker или на Рабочем столе, при помощи сочетания клавиш ALTF. Окно поиска выглядит следующим образом:
+
+
+
SВыбрать предыдущие или сохраненные запросы, либо сохранить текущий в виде шаблона запроса.
+
Выбрать какого типа файлы следует искать в выдающем меню Все файлы и папки (All files and folders).
+
Определить тип поиска:
+
По имени (by Name) - базовый поиск по имени файла
+
По атрибуту (by Attribute) - расширенный поиск, вы можете указать условия поиска по одному или нескольким атрибутам
+
По формуле (by Formula) - более продвинутый поиск, вы можете сформировать более сложный запрос
+
Выбрать на каких разделах произвести поиск..
+
Ввести условия поиска.
+
Показать/спрятать дополнительные опции.
+
Уберите галочку напротив - Временный (Temporary), если вы не хотите, чтоб запрос удалился через 7 дней.
+
Отметьте галочкой - Включая корзину (Include trash), если хотите, чтоб поиск был произведен и в корзине тоже.
+
Опционально, можете ввести название запроса, если хотите его сохранить.
+
Для того, чтобы сохранить запрос, можете просто перенести иконку в любую папку или рабочий стол.
Если вы хотите просто найти все файлы на ваших смонтированных разделах, то просто выберите тип поиска По имени (by Name), введите искомое слово в поле ввода и нажмите клавишу ENTER.
Вы можете произвести расширенный запрос по указаным атрибутам конкретных типов файлов. Чтобы это работало, атрибуты должны быть проиндексированы.
+
+
Вам следует выбрать тип файла отличный от Все файлы и папки (All files and folders), например, Текстовый | E-mail (Text | E-mail) и изменить тип поиска на по атрибуту (by Attribute).
+
Это добавляет всплывающее меню слева от текстового полня и кнопок Добавить (Add) и Удалить (Remove). Из меню можно выбрать атрибут, по которому будет произведен запрос. При помощи кнопок Добавить (Add) и Удалить (Remove) вы можете добавить дополнительный атрибут или удалить не нужный. Эти атрибуты могут быть логически связаны операторами И/ИЛИ (AND/OR).
+
Давайте произведем запрос по письмам для примера:
+
+
Так выглядит окно поиска для запроса по всем письмам, которые Clara Botters послала вам за последние два месяца с темой "vibraphone" или "skepticality".
+Как видите, поиск на основе атрибутов времени поддерживает некоторые полезные фразы: кроме "за последние два месяца (last 2 months)", вы можете выбрать "сегодня (today)", "вчера (yesterday)", "Понедельник (Monday)" или "последний Понедельник (last Monday)" (это будет понедельник на прошлой неделе), или "последние 2 минуты/часа/дня/недели (last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks").
+Хороший способ сузить круг поиска.
Используйте запросы по атрибутам, который находится выше. Если у вас есть все атрибуты и установлены условия поиска, попробуйте переключиться на тип поиска по формуле (by Formula) и вы увидите, как запрос превратится в строку:
Вы можете скопировать и вставить строку в письмо, форум или IRC для того чтобы пользовались другие или для отладки.
+
Вы можете использовать метод для построения запросов в режием Атрибутов (Attribute), затем переключаться в режим Формулы (Formula), чтобы сгенерировать строку поиска для использования запроса в терминале или сценарии.
+
You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
После того, как вы запустите поиск, окно поиска заменится окном результатов поиска. Вот пример результатов поиска по слову "server":
+
+
Некоторые вещи, которые стоит отметить:
+
+
Вы можете открыть месторасположение файла или папки дважды щелкнув по атрибуту адреса.
+
При помощи пункта меню Файл | Изменить запрос (File | Edit Query) или сочетания клавиш ALTG вы сможете вернуться к окну поиска для того, чтобы изменить критерии запроса.
+
Запрос выполняется в реальном времени т.е. если файл, который соответствует критериям будет создан или удален, то это будет отображено в окне результатов поиска в реальном времени.
+
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with Attributes | Paste Layout.
If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
+By using the Save Query as Template menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
+
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
При помощи сочетания клавиш CTRLALTDEL вы можете вызвать диспетчер задач Team Monitor, в котором отображается список всех запущенных приложений.
+
+
Приложения, которые были запущены системой, окрашены в синий цвет, те, которые запустил пользователь - черным.
+Приложения, которые не отвечают, что обычно говорит о том, что программа работает некорректно, отмечены красным цветом. Вы можете завершить работу программы, выбрав её и нажав кнопку Убить приложение (Kill Application).
+
Вы можете вызвать терминал используя горячие клавиши OPTALTT.
+
Если файловый менеджер Tracker или панель задач Deskbar аварийно закрылись, либо повисли, станет доступной кнопка: Перегрузить рабочий стол (Restart the Desktop) которая позволит перезагрузить файловый менеджер Tracker и панель задач Deskbar.
Некоторые приложения устанавливают дополнения (Add-Ons), и они могут быть легко вызваны для выбранных файлов в Tracker-е. В контекстном меню отображаются только те дополнения, которые применимы для выделенного файла (определяются по идентификатору типа), также их можно вызвать через меню File окна Tracker-а. Некоторые дополнения не обязательно нуждаются в файле для работы и присутствуют в меню всегда.
+
Дополнения Tracker-а или симлинки на программы, которые могут действовать как дополнения, могут быть установлены в трех различных местоположениях (подробнее см. Иерархия файловой системы):
+
+
/boot/system/system/add-ons/Tracker/
для дополнений, поставляемых с системой.
+
/boot/common/add-ons/Tracker/
для дополнений доступным всем пользователям.
+
/boot/home/config/add-ons/Tracker/
для дополнений доступных только текущему пользователю.
+
+
К имени файла дополнения может быть добавлено тире с заглавной буквой, и тогда оно станет доступно через горячие клавиши. Например, Open Target Folder-T (Открыть целевую папку) откроется при нажатии ALTOPTT.
+Конечно, вы должны позаботиться о возможных конфликтах, выбирая горячую клавишу, у разных дополнений они должны быть разными.
Следующие дополнения Tracker-а имеются в каждой установленной Haiku:
+
+
Background-B
+
Открывает настройки фона (Background), где можно изменить цвет или изображение рабочего стола или любой папки. Если это дополнение вызвано на графическом файле, то это изображение появится в окне предварительного просмотра как потенциальный фон.
Если вызвать его на файле, то откроется специфическая панель типа этого файла (FileType), если же файл не выбирать, то запустится это же приложение в стандартном виде.
+
Open Target Folder-O
+
Может использоваться только с симлинками - открывает папку где находится целевой файл.
+
TextSearch-G
+
Запускает приложение Текстовый поиск (TextSearch) для поиска строки в выбранной папке (и вложенных в неё папках тоже).
+
ZipOMatic-Z
+
Выбранные файлы будут добавлены в zip архив, а дополнение, вызванное без файла, откроет панель, для создания архива путём пертаскивания файов на неё мышкой.
Файловый менеджер Tracker (далее просто Tracker) позволяет создавать новые файлы и папки, а также копировать. удалять, переименовывать, искать, запускать уже существующие.
+
Являсь таким же приложением как и другие (Рабочий стол с иконками, по сути, является простым окным развернутым на весь экран), его окна отображают в панели задач Deskbar. Самый простой способ закрыть и перезагрузить повисший Tracker (или панель задач Deskbar) - это вызвать Team Monitor.
Для того, чтобы получить доступ к жёстком диску, CD-диску, USB-карте и т.д., вам сначала нужно смонтировать раздел. Это можно сделать при помощи правого щелчка мыши на рабочем столе и выбрать раздел и меню Смонтировать (Mount). Меню Смонтировать (Mount), также можно найти в панели задач Deskbar.
+
+
Для того, чтобы после каждой перезагрузки не монтировать снова все вручную, существуют Настройки монтирования (Mount Settings).
+Эти настройки позволяют автоматическим смонтировать любое устройство хранения при подключении. Настроить монтирование при загрузке системы всех дисков, которые были примонтированные раньше.
+
Перед тем как отключить жёсткий диск или USB-карту, убедитесь в том, что вы успешно его отмонтировали. Это гарантирует сохранность данных. Иначе вы можете потерять данные, либо повредить диск!
По умолчанию, при двойном щелчке по папке, Tracker откроет её в новом окне. Это может привести к тому. что весь ваш рабочий стол будет заполонен окнами.
+Этого можно избежать, удерживая клавишу OPT , которая автоматически закрывает родительское окно.
+Это также работает при навигации при помощи клавиатуры . Для более детального изучения следует обратиться к теме Горячие клавиши..
+
Перемещение по папка, является одной из главных целей Tracker. Ряд уникальных особенностей Tracker помогут сделать это более эффективно.
Вместо того, чтобы каждый раз дважды щелкать по папке, чтобы перейти на уровень ниже, есть более лучшее решение:
+
+
+
Щелките правой кнопкой мыши по папке, и в самом верху контекстного меню вы найдете подменю текущей папки, которое позволит вам перемещаться вниз по уровню. Просто перемещайтесь вниз по иерархии, пока не найдете нужную папку или файл. Как только вы найдете его. просто щелкните по нему, чтобы открыть. Изображение выше иллюстрирует содержание папки /boot/system/documentation/.
+Если вы будете переносить файл подобным образом, то он переместится туда, куда вы его положите.
+
Подобный метод можно использовать в любом окне Tracker:
+
+
Щелкните в область в левом нижнем углу, где отображаете количество элементов в списке, и вы увидите подменю местопожения уровнем выше. С помощью него вы также можете передвигаться по папкам.
+
Запомните, что рабочий стол является самым верхним уровнем, на нем Tracker отображает все смонтированные разделы. Так что, для того, чтобы перейти на другой диск вам нужно для начала, переместиться на самый верх (т.е. на рабочий стол).
+
Вы также можете использовать ниспадающие подменю для того, чтобы скопировать файл. Для этого выберите файл и перенесите его на папку, удерживая его некоторое время над папкой, вы увидите подменю, с помощью которого вы сможете выбрать место назначения. Если переносить файл при помощи правой кнопки мыши, то у вас будет возможность выбрать что сделать с ним - скопировать, переместить или создать на него ссылку.
Вы возможно знакомы с этой концепцией: наберите несколько первых букв из названия файла и вы переместитесь к файлу, который начинается с этих букв. Однако мы постарались улучшить эту идею. Если нет файла с названием, которое начинается с эти букв, то вы переместитесь к первому файлу, который содержит их в любом месте своего названия. И даже если этих букв совсем нет в названии файла, то вы переместитесь к файлы, атрибуты которого содержат эти буквы.
+
+
В примере выше, все файлы начинаются с "Haiku logo", так что набор первых букв будет бесполезным. Поэтому вместо "Haiku", наберем "web" и сразу же переместимся к первому файлу с названием "Haiku logo - website". Все набранные буквы отображаются в левом нижнем углу, где обычно отображается количество файлов в папке. Секунду спустя это поле вернется в прежнее состояние.
Tracker предлагает три различных режима просмотра при помощи меню Окно (Window):
+
+
Иконки (Icon View) (ALT1) - Большие иконки, размер которых вы можете изменять в меню или при помощи сочетания клавиш ALT+/ALT-.
+
Маленькие иконки (Mini Icon View) (ALT2) - название говорит само за себя.
+
Список (List View) (ALT3) - Подробный список позволяет отобразить/скрыть доступные атрибуты файлов. (Смотрите тему Атрибуты.)
+
+
Меню Окно (Window), также предоставляет ряд других функций:
+
+
Изменить размер окна (Resize Window) (ALTY) - Подогнать окно по размеру.
+
Очистить (Clean Up) (ALTK) - Уровнять иконки по невидимой сетке. Если удерживать клавишу SHIFT, тогда меню будет носить название Очистить всё (Clean Up All), это значит, что помимо уравнивания иконок по сетке, они также отсортируются в алфавитном порядке.
Закрыть (Close) (ALTW) - Закрыть текущее окно. Если удерживать клавишу SHIFT, тогда меню будет носить название Закрыть все (Close All), это означает, что все окна Tracker будут закрыты.
+
Закрыть всё на рабочем столе (Close All in Workspace (ALTQ) - Закрыть все окна Tracker, находящиеся на текущем рабочем столе. Очень удобно в том случае, когда вы забывали нажать клавишу OPT блуждая по папкам, тем самым наоткрывали огромное количество окон.
+
+
Бывают случаи, когда вам нужно перенести несколько иконок без выравнивания всех по сетке при помощи Очистить (Clean Up) (ALTK).В этом случае, выберите нужные иконки, и перед тем как перенести на новое место нажмите и удерживайте клавишу ALT. После того, как вы отпустите их, они выровняются по сетке.
Меню Окно | Настройки (Window | Preferences...) открывает окно, которое предлагает ряд настроек. Все настройки применяются в реальном времени, таким образом все изменения будут сразу же видны.
+ Перейдем к описанию настроек:
+
+
Рабочий стол (Desktop) - Настройка для отображения примонтированных дисков на рабочем столе. Предлагает отобразить все разделы отдельно, либо поместить иконку с изображением диска на рабочем столе, после нажатия на которой отобразится окно с разделами.
+
Окна (Windows) - Позволяет настроить окно навигации. Единое окно навигации (Single Window Navigation),, т.е. при двойном щелчке по папке, она не будет открыта в новом окне, а будет открыта в текущем. Это не то же самое, как при навигации с удержанием клавиши OPT, как описано выше, т.к. вы потеряете сохраненные позиции и размер окна.
+
+
+
+
Before you switch Tracker to Single Window Navigation mode, because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a Navigator where you can enter or copy&paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.
+
Дата и время (Date and Time) - Позволяет указать формат даты и времени.s.
+
Корзина (Trash) - Позволяет определить поведение при удалении файлов в корзину.
+
Иконки разделов (Volume Icons) - Установить индикатор свободно места на иконки разделов..
+
+
Это окно настроек также доступно из меню Tracker в меню Настройки (Preferences) панели задач Deskbar.
Если выделить файл и щелкнуть правой кнопкной мыши, то появится контекстное меню с командами, также эти команды можно найти в меню Файл (File).
+
Названия команд, как обычно, достаточно понятны.
+
+
Найти (Find...) - Найти файл или папку. Для более подробного изучения, следует обратиться к теме Запросы.
+
Создать (New) - Создать новую папку или любой файл по заданному шаблону.
+
+
+
+
При выборе пункта меню Изменить шаблоны (Edit Templates...), откроется папка /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Создание файла в этой папку, предполагает создание файла определенного типа, название файла и другие атрибуты. Этот файл будет служить шаблоном и будет доступен в меню Создать (New). На изображнии выше показан пример: файл с именем "Text" и типом text/plain. Для более подробного изучения, следует обратиться к теме Типы файлов .
+
Открыть с помощью (Open With...) - Подменю предлагает все приложения, с помощью которых можно открыть этот файл.
+
+
+
+
Галочкой отмечено предпочтительное приложение, т.е. при двойном щелчке по файлу, он будет открыт при помощи этого приложения. В этом подменю, первыми расположеные приложения, которые точно могут обрабатывать этот типа файлов, в нашем случае это текстовый файл, типа text/plain. Далее идут все приложения, которые могут обрабатывать этот супер-тип, в нашем случае это text/*. Последние приложения в списке приложения могут открыть любой файл. Если вы не станете выбирать приложения из списка, а щелкни по пункту меню Открыть с помощью (Open With...), то откроется следующий диалог:
+
+
+
Здесь вы обнаружите те же программы, которые были предложены в подменю. Выбрав одно из них и нажав кнопку Открыть и сделать предпочтительным (Open and Make Preferred), вы измените предпочтительное приложение для данного типа файлов, в нашем случае для text/plain.
+
Свойства (Get info)
+
+
+
Это окно отображает информацию о выбранном файле, позволяет установить предпочтительное приложение, а также права доступа.
+
Переименовать (Edit Name), Дублировать (Duplicate) и Перенести в корзину (Move to Trash) - позволяют переименовать или дублировать файл(ы) или перенести в корзину.
+
Переместить в (Move to) , Скопировать в (Copy to) and Создать ссылку (Create Link) - позволяют переместить, скопировать или создать ссылку для выделенных файлов , выбрав место назначения, используя ниспадающие подменю. Удерживая клавишу SHIFT при вызове меню, также будет доступна опция создания относительной ссылки.
+
Вырезать (Cut), Скопировать (Copy) and Вставить (Paste) - позволяют вырезать, скопировать или вставить файл или папку используя буфер обмена. Удерживая клавишу SHIFT при вызове меню вы можете Скопировать/Удалить (Copy/Cut) больше файлов, возможно, из другой папки, которую впоследствии вы можете вставить куда-нибудь ещё. Также, удерживая клавишу SHIFT вы можете вставить скопированные файлы в буфер обмена как ссылки.
+
Определить тип (Identify) - позволяет определить тип файлов, например вы скачали файл, у которого не указан тип, при помощи wget. Удерживая клавишу SHIFT при вызове меню, оно изменит название на Принудительное определение (Force Identify), что позволит идентифицировать тип файла и исправить его, если он был ложным.
+
Дополнения (Add-Ons) - предлагает воспользоваться дополнениями для Tracker. Для более подробного изучения, следует обратиться к теме Дополнения для Tracker.
Когда вы копируете, перемещаете или удаляете файлы, Tracker отображает ход выполнения операций. Если вы выполняете более одной операции, каждая из них будет иметь свой индикатор выполнения.
+
+
Справа расположены две кнопки для приостановки и полной остановки операции. Иногда это удобно, приостановить на время большую операцию. Например, вам срочно нужно запустить ресурсоемкое приложение. Копирование больших объемов данных могут неплохо нагрузить ваш жесткий диск, что существенно скажется на быстродействии.
Twitcher служит для переключения между запущенными приложениями и их окнами.
+
+
Просто нажмите CTRLTAB для переключения между запущенными приложениями или окнами. Простое нажатие CTRLTAB позволяет быстро переключаться между приложениями. Если нажать и удерживать CTRLTAB, можно переключиться на нужное приложение, нажимая клавишу TAB или ←/→. Если вы хотите переключиться на определенное окно программы, переключитесь на программу и нажимая клавиши ↑/↓, вы сможете выбрать нужное окно..
+
Переключаться между всеми видимыми окнами приложений на текущем рабочем столе, можно при помощи сочетания клавиш CTRL~ (~ находится ниже клавишы ESC).
+
Кроме того, Twitcher позволяет переключить программу используя мышь, нажмите CTRLTAB и выбирите при помоши мыши нужное приложение или окно, как только вы отпустите клавишу CTRL, приложение или окно переключится..
+
Twitcher также предлагает несколько горячих клавиш:
+
+
ESC
Отменить переключение и вернуться к текущему активному окну.
Семинар на тему: типы файлов, атрибуты, индексация и запросы
+
+
This is a workshop to show the use of Attributes, Queries, the Index and custom Filetypes. As an example, we build a database to keep track of our DVD library.
Let's first decide what filetype and attributes would serve our needs. Originally, I wanted to use a Bookmark file with a link to the movie's IMdB page, but Haiku doesn't have a "bookmarkable" browser like BeOS' NetPositive at the moment, so I came up with this: The file itself will be a JPEG image for the movie cover.
+To that we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to query it later (then we have to add it to the index) and if so, what type of attribute it should be. Numbers (int, float) can be evaluated differently than text (</=/> vs. is/contains/starts with).
+
Here are the attributes I'd like to see for my DVDs:
+
+
Movie title
+
Genre
+
URL to e.g. IMdB
+
Director/Cast
+
Plot
+
My rating from 1 to 10
+
Coordinates in my shelf, e.g. A2, B3, so I find the DVD also in Real Life :)
Start the Filetypes preferences, and click on the Add... button below the hierarchical list on the left. A small dialog opens and you specify in which MIME Group your new filetype will reside. You can also create a completely new group. Let's put it into "applications" and set the "Internal Name" to DVDdb.
Double-click the icon well to open Icon-O-Matic to design an icon for your filetype. You can also drag&drop an icon from the icon well of another type, maybe as starting point for a modified version.
You can add suffixes like .txt, .jpg, .mp3 to recognize files by their extention. Useful when working with files from systems without MIME typing. We don't need that for our example.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked.
+
+
Выбрать (Select...)
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
+
Такой же как (Same as...)
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
Here we enter all the custom attributes we decided on in our preparations. Clicking the Add... button opens a panel:
+
+
+
Attribute Name - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.
+
Internal Name - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.
+
Type - Defines the value the attribute can hold and therefore how it can be queried.
+
+
String for normal text
+
Boolean for binary data: 0 or 1
+
Integer for integer numbers with different ranges:
+
+
8 bit: ± 255
+
16 bit: ± 65,535
+
32 bit: ± 4,294,967,295
+
64 bit: ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615
+
+
+
Float for floatingpoint numbers, single precision
+
Double for floatingpoint numbers, double precision
+
Time for time and date format
+
+
+
+
+
Visible - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:
+
Display As - Leave on "Default". In the future more option will become available, e.g. a bar or stars for a rating etc.
+
Editable - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker.
+
Width - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window.
+
Alignment - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned.
Before we start entering data in our little DVD database, we should add certain attributes to the Index. Only indexed attributes can use Haiku's fast Queries.
+So, what will we be searching in the future? We probably won't ask "What's in the B4 coordinate in my shelf?" or "Does the IMdB URL or the plot of the movie contain the word 'pope-shenooda'?".
+
This leaves these attributes:
+
+
Internal Name
Attribute type
+
DVDdb:title
text
+
DVDdb:genre
text
+
DVDdb:cast
text
+
DVDdb:rating
int-32
+
+
+
To index them, we open a Terminal and simply add one attribute after the other:
Now, everything's set and we can begin putting some data into our base.
+Since our basic file is a cover image, we go to some online resource like IMdB, look for our first movie and save the cover or movie poster in a new folder where we want to keep our DVDdb files.
+
Opening that folder we see a typical Tracker window with one JPEG in it. Right-clicking it, we change its filetype to application/DVDdb with the Filetype Addon. There's more info on this in the Filetypes document.
+
Now, we activate all our DVDdb attributes from the Attributes menu of the Tracker window and rearrange the columns to our taste:
+
+
By clicking on a yet empty attribute (or pressing ALTE) we enter editing mode and fill each attribute. With TAB and SHIFTTAB you can navigate between attributes.
+
In our example, we usually start with a downloaded JPG cover and change its type to applications/DVDdb. There's another elegant way to produce a file to work with. Just copy an empty file of our filetype to /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates and rename it to DVDdb.
+
Right-clicking into a Tracker window, you'll find a new entry under New... besides the default "New folder".
Several hours of grunt work later, we have a nice little database that you can query to find all your Christina Ricci movies that have a 7+ rating... :)
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.
+Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder and rename it to group/filetype, replacing slashes with underscores; in our case "applications_DVDdb".
+
Open the new folder and paste in the layout with Attributes | Paste Layout. Voilà:
Рабочее пространство представляет собой виртуальные рабочие столы, каждый из которых, имеет свое разрешение, глубину цвета и фон. Можно создать до 32 рабочих столов при помощи настроек экрана.
Вы можете переключаться между рабочими столами просто щелкая по ним в приложенице Рабочие столы или используя горячие клавиши ALTFx, где "x" это номер рабочего стола. Хорошей идеей будет организовать ваши рабочие столы в четыре ряда, имитируя порядок следования клавиш Fx.
+Кроме того, выбрав приложение или одно из его окон в панеле задач Deskbar, вы немедленно переместитесь на тот рабочий стол, на котором оно находится.
+
Ещё один очень удобный способ заключается в использовании горячих клавиш CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓. Если при всем при этом ещё удерживать клавишу SHIFT, то вы и активное окно переместитесь на другой рабочий стол.
+
Вы можете переключаться между двумя рабочими столами с одного на другой при помощи комбинации клавиш ALT~ (символ ~ находится под клавишей ESC).
Before diving into all the applications that come with Haiku, let's have a more detailed look at how to install and uninstall programs you downloaded somewhere, for example from a site mentioned on the Welcome page.
+
You should only unpack/install archives within Haiku. If you extract a package under Linux or Windows, for example, and just copy the folder over to Haiku later, all the vital attributes are stripped, because those operating systems don't normally handle meta data.
Haiku software always comes as an archive. Most of the time it's a ZIP, some old BeOS packages come in Software Valet's PKG format. Software Valet was able to automatically execute installation scripts, so after double-clicking you just select a destination folder and everything's taken care of.
+If it's a ZIP archive, double-clicking opens Expander where you also set the destination and unpack it. As explained in the topic Filesystem layout, that destination is either
+
+
/boot/common/apps/
for applications available to every user
+
/boot/home/apps/
for applications only available to yourself
+
+
This distinction will only become relevant once Haiku gets multi-user support, of course.
+
Once the archive is unpacked, you should have a look into the newly created folder. Often you find ReadMe files or other documentation of interest.
+
Some programs need further configurations. For example, Tracker Add-Ons, Translators or other system enhancing components have to be put into the right folders. Either you'll find a little script file (often with the suffix .sh) like install that you simply double click to have all taken care of.
+Sometimes you'll find folders that link to the correct destination named "drag [filename] here...". So, you simply follow that instruction and you're done.
+
Most of the time, however, nothing of the sort is necessary and you're done after unpacking.
+Topics Deskbar or LaunchBox describe how to add shortcuts to your newly installed application.
If the installation was done with an install script, chances are, there's an uninstall script as well. In that case, double-click it and you're done.
+Otherwise, uninstalling is simply done by deleting the application's folder.
+
This, of course, leaves back possible configuration files in your ~/config/settings folder. This may be on purpose, if you want to keep those settings in case you'll install the program again in the future. Also, when the installation involved those "drag [filename] here..." folders, those files are also left behind.
+
One method to quickly get to all the app's files is to do a quick query for a significant part of the application's name. This will reveal the app's binary, its installation folder and its settings as well as possible links in the Deskbar etc. Simply select all relevant files and delete them.
Haiku comes with a set of mostly small but essential applications. You'll find all of them at /boot/system/apps/ or /boot/common/apps/. Applications that are not usually launched by a double-click on a data file (e.g. ShowImage for image files) can be found in the Applications menu of the Deskbar.
Besides the above listed programs, which are all maintained by the Haiku project, there are a few essential applications bundled in a standard Haiku system. Bugs and feature requests for those have to be filed with the particular maintainer.
Du kan övervaka systemresurser genom att starta ActivityMonitor och aktivera de funktioner du är intresserad av.
+
+
Genom att högerklicka i fönstret kan du slå av eller på visning av alla sorters resurser:
+Used/Cached Memory, Swap Space, CPU Usage, Network Receive/Send, Page faults, Semaphores, Ports, Threads, Teams, Running Applications, Raw/Text Clipboard Size, Media Nodes.
+
Below the graph is a legend (hideable from the context menu). You can change the colors and that of the graph's background via drag&drop from any color picker, e.g. from Icon-O-Matic.
+
Du kan lägga till fler vyer från menyn File om det blir för trångt.
+
Menyn Settings öppnar en panel för att justera uppdateringsintervallet.
+
Varje vy har sitt eget Replikanthandtag och kan därför placeras på t.ex. skrivbordet.
BePDF is a fast launching PDF viewer. Besides viewing, it supports annotating and user-defined bookmarking for unencrypted PDFs. It's fully localized for 20 languages at the moment with additional languages being easily added via text files.
+
Documentation is available as HTML or PDF. The latter will also open from the menu Help | Show Help....
BeZillaBrowser is based on Mozilla's source code and uses patches to improve speed, stability, and other UI aspects. Currently, all BeZilla builds use Mozilla's 1.8 CVS Branch. You can file bug reports of this port at the HaikuPorts.
+
As the Mozilla browsers are very widely used on many platforms, you'll find a plethora of guides and tips online. You could start from http://support.mozilla.com/.
+
BeZilla isn't able to print yet. Luckily, there's the add-on html2pdf that uses an online service to generate a PDF from the currently displayed page. After installation, there's a little PDF symbol in the status bar that, once clicked, opens a new window with a link offering to "Download PDF".
+Caveat: It only works with online pages, not with your locally stored documents.
Usage is pretty much what you'd expect from looking at the control buttons.
+Activate the Repeat button to the left of Shuffle to loop the complete CD.
+
If you need more control like playlists, try MediaPlayer instead.
CharacterMap will show you the UTF-8 code of every character a font supports.
+
+
To the left you have the standardized blocks, together with a handy filter function. Optionally, you can choose to also Show Private Blocks from the View menu. The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the Font menu. Below that you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer is displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.
+
You can drag&drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either Copy Character (ALTC) or Copy As Escaped Byte String (SHIFTALTC). Resulting in, e.g. either € or \xe2\x82\xac.
With CodyCam you take pictures at a specified interval from a connected webcam or any other video-in device and save it via FTP.
+
+
To the left under the preview, you set the filename that'll be suffixed with an increasing number for every picture taken. Beneath that you decide on the file format and the rate the pictures are taken.
+
To the right you choose either FTP or sFTP (if SSH is available) and enter the needed data to save the images on a server.
DeskCalc är en enkel kalkylator som ändå har några trevliga funktioner som inte är uppenbara vid första ögonkastet.
+
+
+
DeskCalc förstår mycket mer än vad den enkla knappsatsen antyder.
+Förutom räknesätten +, -, *, /, %, ^ och konstanterna pi och e stöds de följande matematiska funktionerna:
+acos, asin, atan, atan2, ceil, cos, cosh, exp, floor, log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, tanh.
+
När det gäller inmatning är DeskCalc ganska tolerant:
+/, : och \ tolkas alla som division, medan
+* och x är giltiga symboler för multiplikation.
+var också medveten om att . och , båda ses som decimaltecken. De kan därför inte användas för att markera tusental.
+
Högerklicka för att se de här valen:
+
+
Enable Num Lock on start up
aktiverar automatiskt den numeriska knappsatsen på tangentbordet när du startar DeskCalc
+
Show Keypad
döljer sifferknapparna på skärmen när inaktiverad
+
+
Du kan ändra storleken på kalkylatorn så att den passar dig och sedan lägga den som en Replikant på skrivbordet genom att dra symbolen i nedre högra hörnet och släppa den där du vill ha den. Försäkra dig om att Show Replicants är aktiverat i Deskbar.
+
Knappsatsen kan färgas genom att dra en färg från vilken färgkälla som helst, t.ex. från Icon-O-Matic, och släppa den i DeskCalc.
+
Du kan bläddra genom en historik över tidigare beräkningar med ↑ och ↓.
+
Du kan markera och dra innehållet i DeskCalc och släppa det i vilket program som helst. Eller så kan du släppa det i Tracker eller på skrivbordet, så skapas en textfil med det innehållet där.
+
Du kan till och med göra det omvända:
+Spara de olika stegen i din beräkning enligt ovan, och gå tillbaka till dem genom att dra tillbaka dem till DeskCalc och släppa dem där.
+Eller så kan du dra en beräkning direkt från från ett e-brev och släppa det i DeskCalc.
+
DeskCalc kan användas i Terminal. Skriv bara uttrycket inom citationstecken, så här:
DiskProbe is a HEX editor to view and alter data of a file or on a device on a byte-level. It's a very low-level tool and has therefore the potential to really mess things up if you're not careful!
+
Always work with the backup of a file and be extra careful when working directly on a device.
+
When starting DiskProbe you'll first be asked for the file or the device to work on. After that you are presented with this interface:
+
+
The main view shows always one block of data, the size of which can be adjusted with View | BlockSize. To the left is the offset to the start of the block, in the middle the data as HEX values and to the right the same as ASCII symbols.
+You can move from block to block with the slider above or with ALT← and ALT→ and switch between the HEX and ASCII columns with TAB.
+
Block | Selection will not only show the selection with different endianess (and in HEX or decimal, set by View | Base), it will also interprete the selection as a block offset that you can jump to. It will be grayed out if the position is outside of the file/device.
+This is a handy feature mostly when looking at file systems, as they often contain pointers to other blocks.
+
If the file you're probing includes attributes, the Attributes menu can be used to open any of them in a new DiskProbe window. Here's the copyright attribute of the AboutSystem application:
+
+
Depending on the kind of attribute, you'll get a different editor tab besides the always present Raw Editor. For example, there are editors for strings and MIME types or an icon viewer for the vectoricon attribute.
DiskUsage shows graphically how the space on your volumes is utilized.
+A useful tool to answer the question, "Where has all my disk space gone?".
+
+
The concentric circles represent different levels in the file system hierarchy. Above, the circle in the center represents the /boot/home/ folder. Each segment of the ring immediately outside that circle is a file or folder under /boot/home/. Every segment farther outside brings you one level deeper in the file hierarchy. You may have to resize the window to accommodate very deep folders.
+
Above the graphic is a pop-up menu that lets you switch between all mounted volumes. Before the disk usage of a volume can be displayed, it has to be scanned. As this can take a while for larger disks, you can examine another volume while that scan is done in the background.
+
+
If the graphical representation of a file or folder comprises less than about 2° of a circle, it is excluded from the display.
+
The number of files that's reported for a folder includes files in subfolders too. A folder counts as a file.
+
DiskUsage ignores symbolic links.
+
+
As you move the mouse over a segment, information about that file or folder appears in the status bar at the bottom.
+
Right-clicking a segment offers a context menu to Get Info, Open (with Tracker), Open With another suitable application or Rescan that particular folder.
+Left-clicking a segment makes that file/folder the center circle.
+Left-clicking the center circle moves you up one level.
+
You can drag files and folders from DiskUsage to other applications or to the Desktop or other Tracker windows for copying. Vice versa, dropped volumes and folders on DiskUsage's window will zoom directly to them, making them the new center circle.
DriveSetup is a tool to create, delete and initialize partitions. At this time it can't resize or move existing partitions, so that you'll either need an unpartitioned volume (perhaps an external USB drive or another harddisk) or do the initial setup with a tool like the GParted LiveCD to provide the space for another partition.
+
+
At the top is a graphical representation of all partitions inside the device chosen in the list below it. Besides a maximum of 4 primary partitions, each of those can contain a number of extended/logical partitions. You may have to expand such a list with the +/- widget that appears in that case in front of that device to see the details of every logical partition.
+
You can select a partition from the list and mount and unmount them with the commands in the Partition menu or by pressing ALTM or ALTU.
+
You can also completely delete a partition with Partition | Delete.
+Which brings us to this:
+
Dealing with creating/deleting/initializing partitions is very dangerous business. Always check twice to be sure you're working with the right one and always keep an up-to-date backup of your data in case something goes wrong!
If you plan to use the entire drive as one partition, e.g. a USB stick or a Compact Flash card, you can skip the creation of a partition and proceed right to Initializing.
+
When you found unformatted space on a drive, like the above <empty>, you can create a new partition in this space with Partition | Create...(ALTC).
+
+
You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose Be File System if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.
+
If you have created a primary partition instead of just another extended/logical partition within one, the above dialog also displays an Active Partition checkbox. You'll have to check that, if you'll use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.
+
Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be initialized with a filesystem.
Only unmounted partitions can be initialized by using the Partition | Initialize menu.
+
+
Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
+Initializing will destroy all data on that partition!
No entry, normally launched via double-clicking a supported file.
+
Plats:
/boot/system/apps/Expander
+
Inställningar:
~/config/settings/Expander_Settings
+
+
+
Expander is a small tool to quickly unpack the most common archives, among them zip, gzip, bzip2, rar and tar.gz.
+Just double-click an archive to see this simple interface:
+
+
+
Source
ALTS
will open a file dialog to find an archive to unpack.
+
Destination
ALTD
will open a file dialog to set the destination.
+
Expand
ALTE
will start the unpacking. It can be aborted with ALTK.
+
+
You can toggle the display of the file listing by un/checking Show Contents or pressing ALTL.
+
Expander can only unpack whole archives.
+You can't select individual files to expand or add/remove files from the archive.
+
Edit | Preferences... or ALTP opens a preference panel that offers some useful settings to adjust Expander's behavior.
+The options are all self-explanatory:
Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
+Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
+
+
Bitmap
SVG
HVIF
+
+
1,024 byte + 256 byte
7,192 byte
768 byte
+
+
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
+
This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType Add-On on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
+
Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.
Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
+
Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
+For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
+
+
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
+
+
To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the Shape menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the Properties view.
A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure, the path is selected in the path list.
+
+
Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+
+
+
+
To get from "A" to "B", you have to transform some points from corner-points to curve-points. That's done by holding ALT while clicking on a point and dragging out the handles. This results in a symmetrical Bezier: the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click&drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
+Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
+
+
To move a point, simply click&drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
+To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
+Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
+
+
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move point(s)
+
Insert point
+
Add point
+
Delete point CTRL
+
Corner↔Bezier ALT
+
Select points SHIFT
+
+
+
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
+
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
+
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
+
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
+
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add Rectangle and Add Circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
+
+
+
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
+
Clean Up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
+
Rotate Indices Right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
+
A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
+
+
+
+
When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Move
+
Resize
+
Rotate
+
Move rotation point
+
+
+
+
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag&drop their entry to a different position in the list.
The Shape menu offers the before mentioned possibility to Add Empty, With Path/Style/Path&Style and to Duplicate or Remove a shape. Then, there is:
+
+
Reset Transformation
Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.
+
Freeze Transformation
When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used Options | Snap to Grid to set the points at precise pixel borders.
+If not, "Freeze Transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
+With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
+
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its Min LOD and above its Max LOD.
+
So, if you set a shape's Min LOD to 0.0 and the Max LOD to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
+
The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
+For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
+Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
+
+
You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag&dropping it into the list of styles.
+
If you go for a gradient, you set the type (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag&drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
+Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
+
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
There's your usual menu bar at the top, File, Edit, Options. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
+
File | Save As... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
+
+
File | Export As... opens a familiar save panel with a file format dropdown menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+
+
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
+
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
+
HVIF Source Code
Saves as source code used by programmers
+
SVG
Saves as SVG
+
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
+
PNG Set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
+
BEOS:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
+
META:ICON Attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
A few things you should keep in mind when working with Icon-O-Matic and some general tips for its usage:
+
+
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, colors and shadows.
+
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
+
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
+
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
+
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag&drop or copy&paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
+
If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
+
You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click&drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click&drag while holding SPACE.
The Installer is used to copy Haiku onto another volume.
+Upon launch it displays a start window with important information. It's not a mindless EULA you're used to click away in the blink of an eye, it states:
+
+
This is alpha-quality software. Make backups or suffer the consequences!
+
The Installer needs a prepared partition. You may have to use a GParted LiveCD or a similar tool until Haiku's DriveSetup is mature enough to handle this task.
+
Haiku can be added manually to the bootmanager GRUB. In short, you have add an entry to /boot/grub/menu.lst of your Linux installation, similar to this:
+
# Haiku on /dev/sda7
+title Haiku
+rootnoverify (hd0,6)
+chainloader +1
+
+
+
Once you acknowledged with Continue, you're presented with the main window:
+
+
In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.
+The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.
+
Clicking the little expander widget will Show Optional Packages, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.
+
You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on Setup partitions... to open DriveSetup and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.
+
Begin starts the installation procedure, which basically copies everything but the home/ and common/ folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.
+
At the end of the installation procedure, the partition is automatically made bootable. However, it can happen that some other operating system or partitioning tool (accidentally) overwrites the boot sector of your Haiku volume. In this case, boot your installation CD and start the Installer. Select your Haiku boot partition from the Onto: Please Choose Target menu and click Write Boot Sector to make it bootable again.
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
+
At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "32 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 32x32 pixel square around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
+
Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
+You can move the red outline with the CURSOR keys.
+
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALTH. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
+They can also be moved with the CURSOR keys. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
+
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with OPTCURSOR keys.
+
Clicking on the pop-up menu gives you a number of options:
+
+
Save Image
ALTS
Saves the current display as a resource file.
+
Copy Image
ALTC
Copies the current display to the clipboard.
+
Hide/Show Info
ALTT
Toggles the display of all the additional information.
+
Add a Crosshair
ALTH
Adds a crosshair you can drag around.
+
Remove a Crosshair
ALTSHIFTH
Removes the last added crosshair.
+
Hide/Show Grid
ALTG
Toggles the overlayed grid.
+
Freeze/Unfreeze image
ALTF
Stops/continues updating the magnification area.
+
Stick Coordinates
ALTI
Keeps updating the magnification area, but don't follow the mouse pointer any more.
+
Make Square
ALT/
Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.
+
Decrease Window Size
ALT-
Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
+
Increase Window Size
ALT+
Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
Pe is a sophisticated editor, with its syntax highlighting targeted mainly at programmers and HTML writers. Originally created by Maarten Hekkelmann, it's been open sourced and maintained by Haiku developers. A bugtracker and more information is available at the Pe project page.
+
Find out more about Pe's features in its local documentation.
People is a simple contact database using the attributes of Haiku's filesystem to store addresses and other contact information. Every contact is saved as one Person file with its data in separate attributes. All are indexed and therefore searchable with a query.
+
+
+
+
The Group attribute at the bottom allows assigning a person to one or more groups. Useful for "mass mailing" a number of people who, for example, work on a specific project. The pop-up menu offers all currently existing groups. If a person belongs to more than one group, the group names are delimited with a ",".
+
+
These Person files are usually all saved in /boot/home/people/. To get a list of all your contacts, just open your people folder and display all attributes of interest. If you choose to organize your Person files in different folders, just use a query to display them all in one window.
+
+
+
+
You can treat these files like any other: You can sort according to attributes (even a second sorting order by holding SHIFT while clicking) and of course delete, duplicate or rename Person files. Even the contact information can be edited directly: Clicking on an attribute (or ALTE) to edit works just like renaming a file. Once you're in edit mode, TAB and SHIFTTAB will jump from column to column.
PoorMan is a nice little webserver that's extremly easy to set up. Naturally it doesn't offer any advanced features like other heavy duty server software, it's after all only a poor man's webserver.
+
Upon its first launch, PoorMan asks for the folder that is about to be served to the web. If you go with the Default, a new folder /boot/home/public_html is created for you. As a start page a HTML file named by default index.html has to be present there.
+
PoorMan presents itself with a simple console that logs its activity. Then, there's status information if the server is running, which folder is being served, and a hit counter. Settings are changed with Edit | Settings...:
+
+
+
The settings panel is divided into three tabs:
+
In Site you can select another folder to serve, enter another start page and have the option to send a file listing if the start page isn't present.
+Logging lets you de/activate logging to the console or optionally to a separate logfile.
+The Advanced tab holds the setting for the maximum simultaneous connections.
+
The menu items of the console window are all self-explanatory. With them you can e.g. save (parts) of the console output, clear the console or logging file and start/stop the server or clear the hit counter.
+
+
If you want to try out if PoorMan's working, choose /boot/apps/BePDF/docs/ as folder and index.html as start page. Then point your browser to the URL 127.0.0.1, which is your local host.
Besides normal screenshots taken via PRINT, which puts a PNG of the current screen into /boot/home/, this application provides some useful options.
+
+
Starting Screenshot will take a screenshot as usual, but offers from its main window controls to set filename, format and folder before saving the image.
+
The Options dialog has a few more settings:
+
+
Besides the obvious, toggle between taking the whole screen or just the active window, including the window border and the mouse pointer, you can enter a delay before a screenshot is taken. Of course, this delay takes only effect if you take a new shot by pressing Take Screenshot.
+
+
+
+Taking a screenshot from Terminal
+
The Screenshot application is also usable from Terminal or a script.
+Screenshot --help shows the familiar options as parameters:
+
+
~> Screenshot --help
+
+Screenshot [OPTION]... Creates a bitmap of the current screen
+
+OPTION
+ -o, --options Show options window first
+ -m, --mouse-pointer Include the mouse pointer
+ -b, --border Include the window border
+ -w, --window Capture the active window instead of the entire screen
+ -d, --delay=seconds Take screenshot after specified delay [in seconds]
+ -s, --silent Saves the screenshot without showing the app window
+ overrides --options, saves to home folder as png
+
+Note: OPTION -b, --border takes only effect when used with -w, --window
+
StyleEdit är Haikus enkla textredigerare. Fastän filer sparas som ren text, sparas även utökade attribut för att möjliggöra enklare formatering när de visas med StyleEdit.
+
+
För dig som är intresserad, är det så här de utökade attributen ser ut när de undersöks i Terminal med listattr:
+
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+ Int-32 4 "be:encoding"
+MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Int-32 4 "wrap"
+ Int-32 4 "alignment"
+ Raw Data 1048 "styles"
+
+1071 bytes total in attributes.
+
Som du kan se finns alla formateringsalternativ i StyleEdit med: radbrytning (på/av) och justering (vänster/centrerad/höger), i var sitt attribut. Formatering av enskilda tecken (teckensnitt, storlek, färg) sparas tillsammans i ytterligare ett attribut.
+
Eftersom attribut är en funktion i filsystemet BFS, betyder det att man på andra plattformar bara ser en ren textfil. Det gör också att formateringen förloras om en textfil sparas på en icke BFS-formaterad partition. Attributen ovan rensas alltså, och det som är kvar är en vanlig ren textfil.
+
I vilket fall är det trevligt att kunna använda text i olika storlekar, färger och teckensnitt, och ändå ha en ren textfil. En ReadMe.txt, till exempel, är därför läsbar via ett terminalfönster på vilken plattform som helst, och har ändå lite stil när den öppnas genom ett dubbelklick i Haiku.
+
Det är faktiskt så enkelt att använda StyleEdit att vi hoppar över att förklara varenda liten detalj. Skriv bara ner din text, välj de ord du vill formatera och välj teckensnitt, storlek och färg från menyn Font. Radbrytning och justering i menyn Document kan bara väljas för hela filen.
~/config/settings/Terminal_settings
+~/.profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/profile
+~/.inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/etc/inputrc
+
+
+
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
+
Please refer to the topic on Scripting for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.
You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALTN from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open another tab with ALTT.
+
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window Size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
+
Changed window size and text encoding are only kept choosing Settings | Save as default.
+
+
+
Settings | Preferences opens a panel where you can set font type, font size and the different text and background colors. You can save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal.
+Pressing OK will save the current settings as default.
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: .profile and .inputrc
+Both files can be created in the home/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/etc/.
+
+
.profile
+
The .profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
+
The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
The .inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:
+
+
Insert Path
Inserts the location of the file, same as drag&dropping with the left mouse button.
+
Change Directory
Changes to the folder of the dragged file.
+
Create Link Here
Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Move Here
Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Copy Here
Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
+
You can open any file with its preferred application with the command open [filename]. This also works with the representation of the current (".") and parent ("..") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:
Vision is an IRC client originally developed for the BeOS. Documentation and a bug tracker are available at the Vision website.
+
You can find help from other Haiku users and developers on Haiku channels in various languages.
+The most frequented is the English speaking #haiku at irc.freenode.org.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/userguide/sv_SE/applications/vlc.html b/userguide/sv_SE/applications/vlc.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1ffdb859
--- /dev/null
+++ b/userguide/sv_SE/applications/vlc.html
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ VLC media player
+
+
+
+
+
WonderBrush is an editor for bitmap and vector graphics. Find more information and workshops at the YellowBites website and in the local documentation.
Attributes are data fields that belong to a file but aren't part of that file, e.g. they are not computed into the file size and can be copied or changed without touching the file itself. The system uses these attributes to store e.g. file size, file type or date of the last modification. This is similar to other operating systems and their filesystems.
+
What's different is that you can add any kind of attribute to any file and display it or make it editable in a Tracker window. You just have to define the kind of attribute you want to add to a file type (e.g. string, integer or time) and give it a name and description.
+
The file itself doesn't even need any contents at all. Take a look at these People files for example:
+
+
+
As you can see, these are all 0-sized files with attached attributes, the E-mail attribute of "John Nox" being edited right in Tracker.
+
If you index these attributes, as People, Email or audio files are by default, they are also searchable with Haiku's fast query system.
Attributes are displayed quite similar to a database or spreadsheet. Using Tracker you can choose which attributes to display (columns) and sort file listings (rows) accordingly.
+
To do this, open a Tracker window, click on the Attributes menu, and select the attributes you want to display. Alternatively, simply right-click onto a column heading and mark the items in the context menu. You can rearrange the columns by a simple drag&drop of the column heading. Moving a column out of a window, is a fast way to get rid of columns you don't need.
+
Double-click on the line between two attributes in the heading to automatically resize a column to its optimal width.
+
Click on a column heading to toggle the sorting order from ascending to descending. You can establish a secondary sort order by pressing the SHIFT key while clicking on a column heading. You can sort your People files by company and within that order sort by contact name, for instance. See the above screenshot as an example. The secondary sort order is marked by a lighter colored indicator beside the heading.
+
Editing these attributes is as simple as renaming a file: Either click on an entry or press ALTE and move between the attributes with TAB and SHIFTTAB. ESC leaves the editing mode without applying the changes.
If you prefer to use the commandline or plan to work with many files using scripting, there are several commands for controlling attributes from Terminal.
listattr lists a file's attributes, but doesn't show the contents of the attributes.
+
usage: listattr 'filename' ['filename' ...]
+
From our screenshot example above:
+
~/people ->listattr Clara\ Botters
+File: Clara Botters
+ Type Size Name
+----------- --------- -------------------------------
+MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE"
+ Text 14 "META:name"
+ Text 6 "META:nickname"
+ Text 1 "META:company"
+
+ Text 18 "META:address"
+ Text 8 "META:city"
+ Text 1 "META:state"
+ Text 1 "META:zip"
+ Text 1 "META:country"
+
+ Text 1 "META:hphone"
+ Text 13 "META:wphone"
+ Text 1 "META:fax"
+ Text 19 "META:email"
+ Text 1 "META:url"
+
+ Text 5 "META:group"
+ Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le"
+
+131 bytes total in attributes.
+
Besides all the "META:*" attributes that hold the contact's information, there are two attributes that are managed by the system:
+
+
BEOS:TYPE holds the file type as a MIME string, here "application/x-person". It determines the default icon and the application that opens the file when you e.g. double click it.
+
"_trk/pinfo_le" is the attribute with which Tracker keeps track of a file's icon position.
+
Note the backslash after "Clara". In Terminal you have to "escape" special characters like '"*\$?!. The space between "Clara" and "Botters" is also one of those. Therefore the backslash is really in front of the space character, and not after "Clara".
addattr adds an attribute to a file and/or fills it with a value.
+
usage: addattr [-t type] attr value file1 [file2...]
+ or: addattr [-f value-from-file] [-t type] attr file1 [file2...]
+
+ Type is one of:
+ string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, raw
+ or a numeric value (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...)
+ The default is "string"
+
So, say dear Clara took a job with the multi-national Barkelbaer Inc., you fill the formerly empty "Company" attribute with that data (which is of type "string"):
+
~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters
rmattr completely removes an attribute from a file.
+
+
usage: rmattr [-p] attr filename1 [filename2...]
+ 'attr' is the name of an attribute of the file
+ If '-p' is specified, 'attr' is regarded as a pattern.
+
Though in all practicality it would be enough to just not fill the "Fax" attribute, you can completely remove it from Clara's file by typing:
"Scripting" is the technique of automating procedures by stringing together commands and saving it all as text files, so called "scripts". Every time you run such a script, the commands are processed one after the other just like they would if you entered them into the Terminal by hand.
+Scripts can range from simply executing a few commands in a specific order to sophisticated pieces of code that solve complex tasks.
Since scripts rely naturally a lot on the shell they are interpreted by, you should first familiarize yourself with the BASH that's used by Haiku. There are many resources online as it's a widely used shell. One nice document is Johan Jansson's Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
After you've learned a few basics about working in the shell, it's time to slowly ease yourself into the world of scripting. Again, you'll find loads of tutorials and reference material online as well as in bookstores. A very nice introduction that's practically tailor-made for Haiku is the online available Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900kb) of Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible.
In Haiku, the system makes of course also use of scripting. Booting and shutting down are typical scripting procedures. These defined sequences can be augmented by the user with certain user scripts.
+If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Otherwise simply add your commands where in the process you want them to be executed.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserBootscript will be executed after the system has finished its boot process. For example, you could launch a number of programs that would then be automatically started on every boot up:
Remember to end a command with an "&" to start it as a background process, or the script will halt until that command has finished (in this case: the launched app was closed again).
+
+
A simple alternative to the above for launching applications at boot up is to put links to them in the /boot/home/config/boot/launch directory. This can be done simply by right-clicking on the application you wish to have started automatically, going to Create Link and then navigating to the above directory.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownScript will be executed as the first step in the shutdown process. If the script returns a non-zero exit status, the shutdown is aborted.
/boot/home/config/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript is executed as the last step in the shutdown process. Note, that most parts of the system have terminated by the time this script is executed.
Haiku's Boot Loader can help when you experience hardware related problems or want to choose which Haiku installation to start, if you have more than one (maybe on an installation CD or USB stick).
+It's also handy after you installed a software component that acts up and prevents you from booting the system to remove it again. The Disable user add-ons option that's mentioned below, will start Haiku without loading user installed components, e.g. a driver.
+
To enter the Boot Loader options, you have to press the SPACE BAR right at the beginning of the boot process. It's easy to miss so you best keep hitting the key until it shows up.
+
+
Once it's there, you're offered three menus:
+
+
Select boot volume
Choose which Haiku installation to start.
+
Select safe mode options
+
There are several options to try in case of hardware related trouble. When moving the selection bar to an option, a short explanation appears at the bottom of the screen.
+
- Safe mode
+- Disable user add-ons
+- Disable IDE DMA
+- Use fail-safe video mode
+- Don't call the BIOS
+- Disable APM
+- Disable ACPI
+- Disable IO-APIC
+- Enable serial debug output
+- Enable on screen debug output
+
+
Select fail safe video mode
If you had to activate the option Use fail-safe video mode, you can set resolution and color depth.
+
+
+
After activating one or more options, you return to the main menu and continue booting, which presents you with this boot screen:
+
+
+
If everything works OK, one symbol after another quickly lights up.
+The different symbols roughly correspond to these boot stages:
Below, you'll find the documentation of the most important aspects of Haiku. Naturally, completing and extending the documentation is a continuing process. If you find errors, would like to suggest topics or maybe even contribute yourself, please get in touch on the documentation mailing list. If you're interested in helping with translations, you'll find information on that at the i18n User Guide Wiki.
There are some nice little games and demo applications for your entertainment. Most of the demos are targeted to developers who are interested in learning from the code, which is of course open source as is everything Haiku.
The Deskbar is the little panel that by default is located in the upper right corner of the screen. It's Haiku's version of Windows' taskbar with its Start button. It contains the Deskbar menu from where you can start applications and preferences, a tray with a clock and other tools below that and a list of currently running programs at the bottom.
+
+
You can move the Deskbar to any corner or as a bar along the upper or lower border of the screen by gripping the knobbly area on one side of the tray and drag&drop it into the new position. You can also fold it into a more compact layout by drag&dropping the knobbly area onto the Deskbar menu.
Show Replicants - Shows/hides the little Replicant widget you use to drag it around, remove or access its context menu.
+
Mount - Offers the same options as when invoked by right-clicking the Desktop (see Mounting Volumes).
+
Deskbar Preferences... - Opens a panel to configure the Deskbar (see below).
+
Shutdown - Offers options to either Restart System or Power Off.
+
Recent Documents, Folders, Applications - List of the last recently opened documents, folders and applications (see Deskbar Preferences below).
+
Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, Preferences - List of installed applications, demos, applets and preferences (see Deskbar Preferences below).
+
+
+
+Deskbar Preferences
+
+
+
Menu
+Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.
+The button Edit Menu... opens the folder /boot/home/config/be/. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are Applications, Demos, Deskbar Applets, and Preferences.
+You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.
+
It's even easier to simply drag a file, folder or saved query and drop it where you want it into the Deskbar.
+
Window
+
+
Always on Top
The Deskbar always stays above all other windows.
+
Auto Raise
The Deskbar pops to the front if the mouse pointer touches it.
+
+
Applications
+
+
Sort Running Applications
Sorts the list of running programs alphabetically.
+
Tracker always First
Even if you sort alphabetically, the Tracker entry always stays first in the list.
+
Show Application Expander
Provides a small widget to show/hide all windows of a program directly under its entry in the Deskbar.
+
Expand New Applications
Newly launched programs have their windows automatically expanded under their entry in the Deskbar.
Among other things, the tray is housing the clock. Left-click it to toggle between date and time. Right-click it to hide/show it or launch the Time preferences to set it.
+Here you can also launch a calendar that also appears, when you hold down the left mouse button on the clock for a little time.
+
Any program can install an icon in the tray to provide an interface to the user. The email system, for instance, shows a different symbol when there's unread mail and offers a context menu to e.g. create or check for new mail. ProcessController is another example that uses its icon in the tray to provide information (CPU/memory usage) and to offer a context menu.
You can change to a specific running application by clicking on its entry in the Deskbar and choosing (one of) its windows, from the submenu. By right-clicking you can minimize or close a window or the entire application.
+
If you activated Expanders in the Deskbar settings, you can expand/collapse the list of windows directly under an application's entry.
+
In front of every application's windows is a symbol providing info on its state. A bright symbol means a window is visible, a dark one that it's minimized. Three lines in front of a symbol shows that it's not on the current workspace.
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag&drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
+
+
All options are reached from the context menu:
+
+
Add Button Here
Adds an empty button.
+
Clear Button
Empties a button.
+
Remove Button
Removes a button.
+
Settings
+- Horizontal Layout
+- Icon size
+- Ignore Double-click
+- Show Window Border
+- Auto Raise
+- Show On All Workspaces
+Aligns the buttons horizontally.
+Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.
+Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.
+Shows the window border.
+LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge.
+Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace.
+
Pad
+- New
+- Clone
+- Close
+Add a new pad.
+Duplicate the current pad.
+Close the current pad.
+
LaunchBox
+- About...
+- Quit
+Shows the About window.
+Quits all LaunchBox pads.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Workspaces_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
+
+
You find the Workspaces applet with the other Desktop Applets in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.
+Change Workspace Count... will open the Screen preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).
+
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag&drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure Show Replicants is activated in the Deskbar menu).
To move a window, you grab it in the Workspaces applet and simply drag it to another workspace. This has the advantage, that you can move it without leaving your current desktop. Of course, that only works well when there aren't too many windows in a workspace and your target isn't obscured by other windows. Another possibility is to grab a window by its tab and just holding on to it while switching workspaces with ALTFx.
+
For more information on workspaces in general and more keyboard shortcuts, see topic Workspaces.
Haiku's filesystem layout is quite transparent, trying to always use non-cryptic names for files and folders, that don't leave the user guessing. Files and folders that are important for the system to function properly, are protected from accidental tempering by showing one of these alerts:
+
+
+
The second alert pops up if you try to rename or delete something in the system hierarchy. Here, the "Do it" button will only become clickable when you're holding down the SHIFT key.
+
Generally, there are three separate branches springing from the root folder of the boot volume:
+
+
/boot/system/
belongs to the system. Don't touch!
+
/boot/common/
holds files that are shared between users.
+
/boot/home/
is your personal folder where you keep your data and settings.
Under Haiku's predecessor BeOS, this folder was named /boot/beos/. You may still find it in some older documentation (e.g. in the original BeBook).
+Whatever it's named, you should not alter what's inside. Every update of Haiku can add, remove or overwrite anything within it. If you want to add functionality, maybe with other Tracker Add-Ons or Translators or maybe another hardware driver, you install these things under your own /boot/home/ hierarchy or, if it's supposed to be for every user, under /boot/common/. As long as Haiku isn't multi-user, this distinction has no apparent effect, as there's only one user with one home folder. But since there will be support for more users than one eventually, it makes sense to learn the right way from the start.
+
So, let's say you want to install a new Translator for the latest image format, you don't simply copy it into the respective system folder. Remember: Don't touch!
+Instead, you put it into the mirrored hierarchy under /boot/common/ or /boot/home/config/.
+
In our example the location for Translators in the system folder would be
This has another advantage: If the component you have installed messes things up (which is possible as you install hardware drivers like this, too) you are able to choose "Disable User Add-Ons" from the Boot Loader menu and are thus always able to boot without the offending component.
+
Most of the time, however, you won't have to deal with these things at all, since every software that comes from a trusted source should include an installation routine that handles these things.
+
+
Haiku is not a multi-user system yet. Once it is though, every user has her own home folder that is not accessible to anyone else. Every application or added component like Tracker Add-Ons, Translators etc. as well as any data that's supposed to be shared between different users, has to be put under /boot/common/.
This folder belongs to you. Here you can create and delete files and folders as you wish. However, you shouldn't mess too much with the ~/config/ directory and its subfolders. You could delete e.g. the ~/config/settings/ folder without damaging the operating system itself, but who wants to lose all his configurations and application settings? In any case, the system warns you with the at the top mentioned alert.
+
Besides the ~/config/add-ons/ folder, which mirrors the system's add-ons folder for additional components as described above, there are a few other folders of interest. (By the way, the tilde ("~") is a shortcut for your home folder, so you don't always have to write "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
+
+
~/mail
+
By default, this is where your mails are kept.
+
+
~/queries
+
Queries are stored, by default temporarily for 7 days, in this folder.
+
+
~/config/be/
+
Again from our BeOS legacy, the be folder contains what's shown in the Deskbar menu. You can add and remove items by putting files, folders, links or queries into this folder.
+
+
~/config/bin/
+
Complements the system's /boot/system/bin/ folder and holds all your command line programs.
+
+
~/config/boot/
+
This folder is the place for User Scripts that are executed before or after the system boots up or shuts down.
+
+
~/config/boot/launch/
+
Links to programs or documents in this folder are automatically launched on every boot-up.
+
+
~/config/fonts/
+
Simply copy a TrueType or Postscript font into this folder and its usable right away.
+
+
~/config/settings/
+
This folder contains the settings to all applications and a few configurations for the system. Some applications manage their settings in their own subfolders, others simply put their configuration file in there.
+
+
~/config/settings/beos_mime/
+
In this MIME database Haiku keeps track of all the different filetypes and their settings.
+
+
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/
+
There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here!
+
+
~/config/settings/Tracker/
+
Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders:
+
+
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Show and arrange all attributes and the window size to your liking. Every new folder you create will use it as a template.
+
+
DefaultQueryTemplates/
You can define the layout of query result windows for certain filetypes. See topic Query: The result window.
Other than Windows, Haiku doesn't rely on the 3-letter file extension for a file type (e.g. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). This method is only a last resort fallback. Haiku uses MIME types just like it's custom on the internet.
+
While there's no reason to use file extensions in Haiku, remember to add them to files you want to share with users of other operating systems, e.g. over email, uploading to a server or via exchange of an USB drive. Otherwise their system may not recognize the file type.
You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the Add-Ons | Filetype add-on from the right-click context menu.
The above is a PNG file, it's MIME string image/png. Let's say you definitely know that it's not a PNG but a GIF. You can change that either by entering the correct MIME string by hand or with one of the two buttons below the textbox:
+
+
Select...
shows a hierarchical list of filetypes where you navigate to image | GIF Image.
+
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the filetype you're looking for.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
+
+
The Default Application is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons Select... and Same As... which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype Add-On of a file that contains an icon and drag&drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
If you invoke the Filetype Add-On on an executable (here: StyledEdit), you'll get a different dialog:
+
+
On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.
+
Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:
+
+
Single Launch
Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side.
+
Multiple Launch
Many instances of the app can run simultaneously.
+
Exclusive Launch
Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time.
+
Args Only
Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages.
+
Background App
The app won't appear in Twitcher or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.
+
+
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's Open with... context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
+
At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.
The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
+
All filetypes and their configurations are stored in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Before you start experimenting, it may be prudent to make a backup of that folder...
Haiku's graphical user interface is an integral part of the system. Unlike Unix-based operating systems, there's no separate window manager and booting just into a command line shell is not possible. Haiku's focus being on the desktop user, this is just not considered necessary.
+
As you probably have experience with other graphical environments, let's skip over the standards like menus, right-click context menus, drag&drop etc. Let's have a look at the few unique aspects of Haiku's GUI instead.
+
+
There are only a few things in Haiku's GUI that aren't obvious and deserve an explanation.
+
+
The Deskbar is Haiku's "Start" menu and taskbar, if you will. See topic Deskbar.
+
The yellow tab offers more than just a program's name or a document's filename:
+
You can move it by holding the SHIFT key while dragging it to another position, enabling you to stack a number of windows and conveniently access them by their named tab.
+
You minimize a window with a double-click on its tab (or with CTRLALTM). A such hidden window can be accessed by its entry in the Deskbar or the Twitcher.
+
You can send a window to the back with a right-click on its tab (or its border).
+
The close button.
+
The "zoom" button (or CTRLALTZ). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size. It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.
+
The resize corner. Dragging anywhere else on a window's border will move the window.
+
+
While holding CTRLALT, you can click anywhere into a window to move it with the left mouse button; the right mouse button sends it to the back.
When opening or saving a file from any application, a panel like this opens:
+
+
It has all the usual things: A list of files of the current folder to choose from, in case of a save panel, a text field to enter a filename and a pop-up menu for different file formats and their settings.
+You can enter parent folders with the pop-up menu above the file listing.
+
If you already have a Tracker window with the location for a file open, you can simply drag either any file or the folder-representation (i.e. the symbol to the far right in its menu bar) into the panel. This changes the panel to that new location.
Many shortcuts in open and save panels are the same used in Tracker. Besides the commands that are also available through the File menu, there are a few not that obvious:
The Favorites menu in open and save panels provides recently visited folders and favorite locations that you can set up yourself. As indicated by the little arrow, you can also use these locations to navigate further down the hierarchy via submenus.
+
+
To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose Favorites | Add Current Folder. From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose Favorites | Configure Favorites... and delete its entry.
+All Favorites are kept in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. So you might as well add and remove links to files and folders there directly.
Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to Show Replicants is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:
+
+
The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag&drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.
+A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's About window and to Remove Replicant.
+
Should you experience difficulties with a Replicant on the Desktop and just can't get rid of it, delete ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. Unfortunately, this will remove all Replicants from the Desktop.
Attributes and Queries are key features of Haiku. While attributes are useful on their own, to display additional information on a file, for a query on them, they need to be indexed. It puts them into a lookup table, which in turn makes queries lightning fast.
+The index is part of the filesystem and is kept for every volume/partition separately.
+
+
+Indexing commands in Terminal
+
There are several commands to manage the index:
+
+
lsindex - Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition.
+These are the attributes that are indexed by default:
mkindex - Adds an attribute to the index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute>
+Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume to which the index will be added,
+ defaults to current volume.
+ -t, --type=TYPE the type of the attribute being indexed. One of "int",
+ "llong", "string", "float", or "double".
+ Defaults to "string".
+ --copy-from path to volume to copy the indexes from.
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being created
+
+
+
Only new files with that attribute come automatically into the index!
+Existing files have to be added manually by copying them and deleting the originals after that. Alternatively you can use the command reindex.
+
+
+
reindex - Puts the attributes of existing files into the newly created index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories>
+ -r enter directories recursively
+ -v verbose output
+ -f create/update all indices from the source volume,
+ "attr" is the path to the source volume
+
+
+
+
rmindex - Removes an attribute from the index of a volume/partition.
+
+
Usage: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME
+
+Removes the index named INDEX_NAME from a disk volume. Once this has been
+done, it will no longer be possible to use the query system to search for
+files with the INDEX_NAME attribute.
+
+ -d, --volume=PATH a path on the volume from which the index will be
+ removed
+ -h, --help display this help and exit
+ -p, --pattern INDEX_NAME is a pattern
+ -v, --verbose print information about the index being removed
+
+INDEX_NAME is the name of a file attribute.
+
+If no volume is specified, the volume of the current directory is assumed.
By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALTC and ALTV integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRLC quits the running process.
+
In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide will always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
+
If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
Additionally to the general shortcuts, here are some more for navigating with Tracker:
+
+
ALT↑
Opens the parent folder.
+
ALT↓ or ENTER
Opens the selected folder.
+
OPT
Holding it while opening a folder will automatically close the parent folder. This also works when navigating with the mouse.
+
MENU
Opens the Deskbar menu (leave with ESC).
+
ALTZ
Undo last action. The undo history is only limited by the available memory. Note, this only works for actions on the file itself, changed attributes and permission settings can't be undone with this. Also, once a file is removed from Trash it's gone for good.
Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press TAB once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press TAB twice to have all matches listed.
+
↑/↓
Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands.
+
CTRLR
Bash history. All the commands you enter
+are stored in the file ~/.bash_history. Press CTRLR and start to enter a command and you'll be provided with the first match from the bash history. Keep pressing CTRLR until you find the right command line and press ENTER to execute it.
You can add or remove items to/from a selection by holding down a modifier key while clicking on a entry (or file in case of Tracker).
+
+
SHIFT
This will select everything between the first selected item and the one you click on.
+
ALT
Adds or removes the item you're clicking on from the selection.
+
+
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
+The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
While a key philosophy of Haiku is to cut down on options and have sensible defaults instead, there are some things that have to be configured or can be set to individual preference. You find all panels in Deskbar's Preferences menu.
In the first tab, Colors, you can change the colors of different parts of the user interface. The color well accepts drag&drops from other programs, letting you drag colors over from e.g. WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic or the Backgrounds panel.
The second tab, Antialiasing, provides different settings for how things are rendered on screen.
+
+
+
+Glyph hinting
+
An activated Glyph hinting aligns all letters in such a way that their vertical and horizontal edges rest exactly between two pixels. The result is a perfect contrast, especially when dealing with black on white. Text appears crisper. There's also a setting for Monospaced Fonts Only that's especially helpful with low resolution devices like netbooks. Small fonts can look pretty bad when hinting is turned on, but with this setting you still have the advantage of hinting for text editors and Terminal.
+
See the difference hinting makes with these magnified screenshots:
+
+
Hinting: off
Hinting: on
+
+
It should be pointed out that all the Magnify windows on this page are of course rendered themselves with the different options as well. So, you get a real world impression of the settings by comparing, for example, the bold yellow tab title or the text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+
+
+
+Antialiasing type
+
Another technique to improve rendering is Antialiasing, which supports all vector graphics as well as text. It smooths lines by changing the color of certain pixels. There are two methods for that:
+
Grayscale changes the intensity of pixels at the edge.
+LCD subpixel does an even better job, especially with (high resolution) LCD monitors. Instead of the intensity of a pixel, it changes its color which moves an edge by a fraction of a pixel, because LCD displays produce every pixel with a red, green and blue component.
+
Again, the two different methods with magnified screenshots:
+
+
Grayscale, Hinting: off
LCD subpixel, Hinting: off
+
+
Subpixel based antialiasing adds a slight colored shine to objects. Something not everyone tolerates. In Haiku you can mix the two antialiasing methods and find the right setting for you by using a slider.
+
The subpixel based antialiasing in combination with the glyph hinting is subject of a software patent and is therefore not available by default. Depending on where in the world you live, you may get an unlocked version. Sorry about that. Talk with your representative.
+
If you do activate hinting plus LCD subpixel rendering by changing the source and recompiling, this is how it looks compared to hinting with Grayscale:
+
+
Grayscale, Hinting: on
LCD subpixel, Hinting: on
+
+
+
At the bottom of the panel are two buttons:
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Appearance preferences.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - stores the panel's window position
+
+
You can set a color or an image as background for every folder and the Desktop for every workspace.
+
+
+
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied to the current workspace only, all workspaces, a specific folder or as default for every new folder.
+
Below that you can assign an image or select None if you want simply a colored background. Images can also be drag&dropped onto the preview to the left.
+
If you are using an image, you have to decide on the placement:
+
+
Manual
lets you specify the coordinates. You can drag the picture around in the preview to the left or enter X and Y manually.
+
Center
centers the picture in the middle of the screen.
+
Scale to fit
enlarges the picture with no regard to its aspect ratio until it fills the screen.
+
Tile
fills the screen by repeating the picture.
+
+
Activating Icon label outline puts a thin contour around icon labels.
+
Whether an icon label's actual text is black or white depends on the setting of the color picker. A dark color sets the text to white, a light color to black. So, if you assign a very bright image to the background, you should also set the color picker to a bright color in order to have icon labels readable in black. (Or use the outline option above.)
+The selected color is also reflected in the Workspaces applet, which ignores images as backgrounds.
+
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Backgrounds preferences.
~/config/settings/* - Every Translator creates its own settings file here after you've changes its defaults.
+~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Every application has the ability to open and save every file format for which there's a Translator installed. The settings for these Translators are configured in the DataTranslations preferences.
+
+
+
Depending on its capabilities, each Translator offers different settings. At least you'll get an Info... button that opens a window with the credits and the installation path.
+The following table gives an overview of the default Translators and their most useful options.
+
+
BMP Images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency
+
EXR Images
ILM's high dynamic-range (HDR) format
+
GIF Images
8bit, lossless compression, transparency
+You can reduce the filesize by limiting the number of used colors and the palette.
+You can write images with transparency, either by automatically using the alpha channel or by setting the RGB value that will be transparent by hand.
+
JPEG2000 Images
24bit, compressed, no transparency
+Here, you normally only care about the output quality.
+
JPEG Images
24bit, compressed, no transparency
+Besides the output quality you can also set a smoothing that will lessen compression artefacts but can blur the picture a little.
+
PCX Images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, PC Paintbrush Exchange format
+
PNG Images
32bit, lossless compression, transparency
+
PPM Images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, Portable PixMap format
Screenshots, charts, black&white drawings and other images with few used colors, as well as small pictures are best saved as GIF (up to 256 colors) or PNG (millions of colors). JPEG, for example, introduces compression artefacts without gain in smaller filesize.
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
+The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
+You start by clicking the Add button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
+
+
First, declare the Account Type which is either Receive Mail Only, Send Mail Only, or the most usual type, Send and Receive Mail. Then you set how you get your mail, via POP3 or IMAP.
+
Now you enter your E-mail Address, Login Name and Password, give an Account Name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real Name.
+
If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses and the following information is already filled in automatically. If that is not the case, just follow this guide and fill in the details to your e-mail account accordingly.
Click on Incoming under your account's name to set up how e-mails are received.
+
+
From the pop-up menu you choose the protocol used by your provider. IMAP and POP3 are supported.
+
Next is the Mail Server address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+
Then you enter your login information, Username and Password, and if necessary change the Login Type from the default Plain Text to APOP for authentication.
+
If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to Leave mail on server and only Remove mail from server when deleted locally.
+
If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to Remove mail from server when deleted locally. You can specify a Top Mailbox Folder to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
+
The New Mail Notification offers different methods to announce the arrival of new mail. Try different settings to see what works best for you.
+
You can change the Location of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
+
Last on this page, you can opt to only Partially download messages that are larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
Click on Outgoing under your account's name to set up how e-mails are sent.
+
+
As with incoming mail, you can also change the Location of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
+
Next is the SMTP Server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+
If you need to login, you change the Login Type to ESMTP and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with POP3 before SMTP for identification.
If you want to filter your incoming email, you click on E-Mail Filters under your account's name to set up automatic sorting. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other. You can rearrange them by drag&dropping them to their new position.
+Besides the R5 Daemon Filter that's used for backward compatibility, there are two other Incoming Mail Filters you can add.
+
+
+
+Spam Filter
+
+
The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
+You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
+Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
+
Together with the following Match Header filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+
+
+
+Match Header
+
+
This filter compares a header to a search pattern and performs some action when it matches.
+With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are available:
+
+
Name
+
the name of the sender
+
From
+
the e-mail address of the sender
+
To
+
your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account)
+
Reply To
+
the e-mail address replies are sent to
+
When
+
the date and time the mail was received
+
Subject
+
the subject line
+
Cc
+
addresses of anyone receiving a carbon copy (Cc)
+
Account
+
the name of the e-mail's account
+
Status
+
The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail.
+
Priority
+
is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent")
+
Thread
+
essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd:
+
Classification Group
+
depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"
+
Spam/Genuine Estimate
+
this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.
+
+
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
+
With the pop-up menu below it, you assign an action when the pattern matches. You can move or delete a mail, set the status to "Read" or anything else or set the e-mail account you'll reply with.
+
+
+
+Outgoing Mail Filters
+
At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
+ It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
+
+
Under Mail Checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
+If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that Only When Dial-Up is Connected and also Schedule Outgoing Mail When Dial-Up is Disconnected to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
+
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up Never, While Sending, While Sending and Receiving or Always.
+
Make sure to Start Mail Services on Startup or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
+
Edit Mailbox Menu... will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
+
From that menu, you can also Create New Message..., Check For Mail Now or Edit Preferences....
+
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/fonts
+~/config/settings/Font_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
+
+
Haiku defines three standard fonts for different purposes. You set plain, bold and fixed font types and sizes that will be used throughout the system. Besides these, there's also a separate setting for the font used in menus.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Fonts preferences.
You install new fonts by copying them into their respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/fonts/ or /boot/home/config/fonts/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Location of user modified keymaps.
+~/config/settings/Key_map
+
+
+
+
To the right, the Keymap window shows a representation of your keyboard. When you press a key, the corresponding key is darkened and the assigned symbol is entered into the Sample and Clipboard text field at the bottom. From there you can also copy and paste it into a document.
+Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but are also useful when looking for a special symbol used in other languages. For example, you can switch the keymap to "French", find the "ç" and copy it into your mail to François. (Though you'll find the "cedil" also in other keymaps...)
+
Pressing modifier keys like SHIFT, CONTROL or OPTION changes the displayed keyboard accordingly.
+
Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
+
Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+
+
Select Dead Keys
for setting the above mentioned blue keys.
+
Switch Shortcut Key...
for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT).
+
+
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap via drag&drop in the keyboard representation: a left-click-drag copies a key, a right-click-drag exchanges the two keys.
+When you're done you can save the result from the menu File | Save.... Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via File | Open....
+
To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the Layout menu.
+
The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the Font menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
+
Finally, there's a Revert button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
+
You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
+
keymap -d MyKeymap
+
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
+At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use e.g. SpicyKeys.
+
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+
keymap -l MyKeymap
+
This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
Set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click. A middle-click is also simulated by clicking left and right button together. Useful for notebooks, which mostly don't have a 3rd button.
+
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration.
+
Focus follows mouse means, that you don't have to click into a window to activate it. There are three modes:
+
+
Enabled
The window under the mouse pointer is always activated automatically, but doesn't pop to the front.
+
Warping
Choosing a window from Deskbar or the Twitcher will have the mouse pointer glide smoothly toward it.
+
Instant-Warping
Choosing a window from Deskbar or the Twitcher will have the mouse pointer jump instantly toward it.
+
+
All settings are immediately applied.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
At the top, you choose which network adapter to configure.
+
Then you specify if you get your network automatically (via DHCP) or if you're using static addresses. If it's the latter, you'll have to fill out IP Address, Netmask, Gateway and DNS Servers yourself. Otherwise the panel will show the addresses currently set with DHCP.
+
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Network preferences.
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
+~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode.
+~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Each of your workspaces can have its own resolution and color depth.
+
+
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other two menus contain all supported resolution and depth settings.
+
After clicking on Apply, the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
+
To the left, you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
+
Revert brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
The top checkbox enables/disables the screen saver.
+With the slider below it, you control after how long an idle time the screen saver kicks in.
+
+
The next two sliders are only usable after you activated their checkboxes:
+One slider determines after how many minutes the screen is powered off.
+The other, after how many minutes you need a password to unlock your machine.
+
+
By clicking into different corners of the two screens at the bottom, you tell the system when to immediately start the screen saver or when to prevent it from kicking in when you rest the mouse in the indicated corner. Click in the middle of the screens to disable that feature again.
+
The second tab shows a list of all installed screen saver modules and their individual settings. You can test your settings with the Test button below the list and add modules with the Add... button beside it. Other ways to install new screen savers is by a simple drag&drop into the list. Of course, you can also copy/delete a module's file in its respective user folder, i.e. /boot/common/add-ons/screensavers/ or /boot/home/config/add-ons/screensavers/ (see topic Filesystem layout).
+
You can assign sounds to certain events in the system. Just select the event from the list and choose a sound from the pop-up menu below.
+
+
None
will silence an event.
+
Other...
will open a file panel to find a new sound that isn't yet in the menu.
+
You can use any format that's supported by the system. If MediaPlayer can deal with it, so can any other program.
+You can "pre-hear" an event's sound by selecting it and using the Play and Stop buttons.
~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings
+~/config/settings/timezone - A link to the current timezone in /boot/system/etc/timezones/*/*
+~/config/settings/Time_settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
The panel of the Time preferences is split into two tabs:
On the left side, you can set the day of the month by simply clicking on it in the calendar. You change the month and year by clicking on it and using the up/down arrows to the right or the cursor keys on your keyboard.
+
Similarly, you set the time. There are two modes for the clock:
The Tracker preference panel is also available from every Tracker window with the menu Window | Preferences....
+Its functions are discussed in the topic on Tracker.
~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/virtual_memory
+~/config/settings/VM_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+
+
Virtual memory let's the system swap out memory to harddisk, if the RAM can be used more sensibly for other things. So, even if you have lots of RAM, providing virtual memory is never a bad idea.
+
+
You can set the size to even more than your physical memory size if needed. With today's huge harddisks, assigning the physical memory size shouldn't be a problem. Still, you can quickly adjust the size if your free space ever runs low. In that case you should also have a look at DiskUsage to find out what's eating up your diskspace.
+
Normally, the swap file's written to your boot partition. If you often run into disk thrashing due to the virtual memory system swapping memory in and out, you can try to use a separate harddisk for you swap file. Simply another partition on the same harddisk with your system/data won't help.
+Upgrading your RAM is of course the most effective way to go...
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the VirtualMemory preferences.
A query is a file search based on file attributes and can be performed within Tracker or in Terminal. Queries are saved in /boot/home/queries/ and by default last seven days before being purged. Note, these aren't static result lists of your search, but are the query formulas which trigger a new search whenever you open them.
+Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can drill down a saved query just like any folder by right-clicking on it and navigating through the submenus.
You start a query by invoking the Find... menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is ALTF. You're presented with the Find window:
+
+
+
Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as Query Template.
+
Narrow down your search from All files and folders to specific file types.
+
Define the search method:
+
by Name - a basic search by file or folder name
+
by Attribute - an advanced search, you specify search terms for one or more attributes
+
by Formula - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term
+
Select which drives to search on.
+
Enter the search term.
+
The expander hides/unhides the additional options.
+
Uncheck the Temporary checkbox if you don't want this query self-destruct after 7 days.
+
Check if your query is supposed to Include trash.
+
Optionally, enter a name for this query if you want to save it.
+
You can drag&drop the icon anywhere to save a query. Doing that with the right mouse button, offers the option to save as template.
If you simply want to find all files and folders on your mounted disks that match a certain pattern, simply leave the search method at by Name, enter the search term into the text box and press ENTER.
You can create more advanced queries by searching within the attributes of specific file types. For that to work, these attributes have to be indexed.
+
+
You start by setting the filetype from All files and folders to, for example, Text | E-mail and change the search method to by Attribute.
+
This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons Add and Remove under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With Add and Remove you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
+
Let's do an email query as an example:
+
+
This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Botters has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "vibraphone" or "skepticality".
+As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
+A good way to cut down the number of search results.
Typing in a formula query by hand is daunting and really quite unpractical. It still has its uses.
+
Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to by Formula mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
You could copy and paste the string into an email, forum or IRC for others to use or debug.
+
You can use this method to construct a query in Attribute mode and then switch to Formula mode, to comfortably generate a search string to use for a query in Terminal or a script.
+
You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
After you start a search, the Find window will be replaced by a result window. Here is an example that queried for "server":
+
+
Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:
+
+
You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.
+
With File | Edit Query or ALTG you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
+
A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with Attributes | Paste Layout.
If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
+By using the Save Query as Template menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag&dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
+
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
With CTRLALTDEL you invoke the Team Monitor which lists all currently running programs.
+
+
Programs that were launched by the system are blue, those started by the user black.
+Applications that are unresponsive, which is often a sign the program has crashed, are marked red. You can kill a program by selecting it and pressing the Kill Application button.
+
You can summon a Terminal with OPTALTT.
+
If your Tracker or Deskbar crashed or froze, a new button appears (you may have to kill the offending team first): Restart the Desktop will restart Tracker and/or Deskbar for you.
Applications can install add-ons so they can be invoked easily on a selection of files from Tracker. Only the add-ons that can handle a specific filetype are presented under Add-Ons from the context menu or the File menu of a Tracker window. Some add-ons don't necessarily need a file to work on and are thus always present.
+
Tracker Add-Ons, or links to applications that can act as add-ons, can be installed in three different locations (see topic Filesystem layout):
+
+
/boot/system/system/add-ons/Tracker/
for system provided add-ons.
+
/boot/common/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons available to every user.
+
/boot/home/config/add-ons/Tracker/
for add-ons only available to yourself.
+
+
The file name of an add-on can be suffixed with a dash and capital letter, and is then available via keyboard shortcut. For example, Open Target Folder-T opens with ALTOPTT.
+Of course, you have to take care of possible shortcut collisions when deciding on a shortcut. You can't have the same for different add-ons.
These Tracker Add-Ons come with every Haiku installation:
+
+
Background-B
+
Opens the Background preferences to change the color or image of the Desktop or any folder. Invoked on an image file the Background panel is launched with that image already loaded as a potential background.
+
DiskUsage-I
+
Starts the DiskUsage application with the according folder as basis.
+
FileType-F
+
Invoked on a file, opens its specific FileType panel, otherwise the general FileTypes preferences are launched.
+
Open Target Folder-O
+
Can only be used on a linked file and opens the folder that file lives in.
+
TextSearch-G
+
Starts the TextSearch application to look for a string in the selected folder (and its subfolders).
+
ZipOMatic-Z
+
A selection of files will be added to a zip archive, invoked without a selection opens a panel to create an archive via drag&drop.
The Tracker is the graphical interface to all your files. It let's you create new files and folders or find, launch or rename as well as copy or delete existing ones.
+
Being an application like any other (the Desktop with its icons is really just a fullscreen window in the background), Tracker appears with its windows in the Deskbar and can be quit and restarted. The easiest way to quit and restart a crashed or frozen Tracker (or a wayward Deskbar) is to call the Team Monitor.
In order to access a harddisk, CD, USB stick etc., you first have to mount the volume, that is, let the system know it's there. This is done with a right-click on the Desktop or an already mounted volume (like the boot disk) and choosing the volume from the Mount submenu. You find the same Mount menu in the Deskbar.
+
+
There are also Mount Settings so you don't have to mount everything manually after every bootup.
+The above settings will automatically mount any storage device you connect/insert and also mount all disks on bootup that were mounted previously.
+
Before you disconnect e.g. a harddrive or USB stick, make sure you have successfully unmounted the volume. This guarantees that all data transfer has finished. Otherwise you may lose data or corrupt the disk!
By default, when you double-click a folder, Tracker opens a new window while leaving the parent window open. This can quickly lead to an overcrowded desktop.
+You can prevent that by holding down the OPT key, which automatically closes the parent window.
+This is also true for keyboard navigation. For more on that, see topic Shortcuts and key combinations.
+
Moving through your folders is one of Trackers main purposes, just like the file managers on other platforms. Haiku's Tracker has some unique features that will help you doing that efficiently.
Instead of double-clicking your way down folder after folder, there's a better way to drill down:
+
+
+
Right-click onto a folder, and at the top of the usual context menu you'll find a submenu of the current folder that let's you navigate down a level. Just move down the hierarchy until you find the file or folder you're looking for and click on it to open it. The above shows the contents of the folder /boot/home/config/.
+If you do the above while dragging a file with you, it will be moved to where you eventually drop it.
+
A similar method can be used from any Tracker window:
+
+
Click on the area in the lower left, where the number of items is listed, and you'll get submenus for every level above your current location. From there you can drill down through the folders as usual.
+
Note, that the Desktop is always the topmost level as that is where Tracker shows mounted volumes. So, if you want to go to another disk, you first have to navigate to the top (Desktop) and cross over to your other disk from there.
+
You'll get the same submenu-navigating when you drag a file over a folder. After a short while of hovering, a submenu pops up and you can drill down to your destination. If you initiated the drag with the right mousebutton, you can choose between copying, moving or linking the file when you release the mouse.
You may be familiar with the concept from file managers of other operating systems: typing the first few letters of a filename will jump to the first file matching these starting characters. Haiku took the idea a step further. If there isn't a file starting with those letters it will jump to the first file including the string anywhere in its name. And if there's nothing with the string in its filename, the attributes are searched next.
+
+
In the above example, there are many files starting with "Haiku logo", rendering simpler approaches to typing ahead quite useless. In Haiku however, typing "web" jumps right to its first occurence in "Haiku logo - website". The characters you enter appear in the bottom left corner where you normally find the item count of all files in the folder. A second after entering a character, the display jumps back to normal and you're ready for a new type ahead search.
Tracker windows offer three different viewing modes from the Window menu:
+
+
Icon View (ALT1) - Big icons, you can change the size from the submenu or in/decrease their size with ALT+/ALT-.
+
Mini Icon View (ALT2) - Small icons.
+
List View (ALT3) - A detailed list of your files enabling you to show/hide available attributes. (See topic Attributes.)
+
+
The Window menu offers a number of other functions:
+
+
Resize Window (ALTY) - Resizes the window to its ideal size.
+
Clean Up (ALTK) - Aligns all icons to an invisible grid. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Clean Up All which additionally sorts all icons alphabetically.
Close (ALTW) - Closes the window. Hold down SHIFT and the menu becomes Close All which closes every Tracker window.
+
Close All in Workspace (ALTQ) - Closes every Tracker window in the current workspace. A useful shortcut if you forgot to hold the OPT key while clicking through folders and all those still open Tracker windows clutter your workspace.
+
+
Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete Clean Up (ALTK). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep ALT pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.
+
The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.
Window | Preferences... opens a panel that offers a number of settings that, where not obvious, should become clear once tried out. Since all settings are applied live, you'll immediately see the changes.
+ So, in short, the not so obvious settings:
+
+
Desktop - Decide if all mounted disks appear directly on the Desktop or in a window after clicking a single Disk icon sitting on the Desktop.
+
Windows - You can set Single Window Navigation, i.e. a double-clicked folder doesn't open in its own window, but inside the already open window instead, replacing the view of it's parent folder. This is not the same as clicking while holding the OPT key, as described above, because you'll lose the per window saved position and size.
+
+
+
+
Before you switch Tracker to Single Window Navigation mode, because that may feel more familiar to you, we recommend giving the menu based browsing a try first, as that may actually work much faster for you after getting used to. On the other hand, single window browsing offers a Navigator where you can enter or copy&paste a path name and use back, forward and up buttons.
+
Date and Time - Set date and time formats.
+
Trash - Set the behavior when deleting a file.
+
Volume Icons - Set the color of an optional indicator of free space that's shown besides a disk's icon.
+
+
This panel, by the way, is also available as Tracker from Deskbar's Preferences.
When invoked on a selected file, most of the File menu commands are also offered in the context menu by right-clicking that file.
+
As usual the commands are pretty clear.
+
+
Find... - Find a file or folder. See topic Query for more info.
+
New - Create a new folder or any other file based on a template.
+
+
+
+
Choosing Edit Templates... opens the folder /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the New menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype text/plain. See topic Filetypes for more info.
+
Open With... - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
+
+
+
+
The preferred application that would open the file when double-clicked, is checkmarked. This submenu lists first those applications that can handle the exact filetype, in this case it's a text file, the type text/plain. Next come all applications that can handle that supertype in general, here text/*. Last in the list are those that can deal with any file. If you don't click on an app in the submenu, but on the Open With... entry instead, a panel opens:
+
+
+
Here you'll again find the programs that were listed in the submenu. By selecting one and clicking the Open and Make Preferred button, you changed the preferred application for every file of that filetype, here text/plain.
+
Get Info
+
+
+
The panel presents info on the selected file and lets you set the default application and, after you expanded that part of the panel, permissions and owner. Clicking on the path will open it in a Tracker window.
+
Edit Name, Duplicate and Move to Trash - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.
+
Move to, Copy to and Create Link - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.
+
Cut, Copy and Paste - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding SHIFT while invoking the menu you can Copy/Cut more files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding SHIFT you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.
+
Identify - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with wget which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding SHIFT while invoking the menu changes the item to Force Identify which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.
+
Add-Ons - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic Tracker Add-ons for more information.
When you copy, move or delete files, Tracker shows its progress with a status window. If you initiate more than one transaction, each job gets its own status display.
+
+
To the right are two buttons to pause or stop a transaction entirely. Sometimes it can be useful to temporarily pause a large transaction. For example, you may need to quickly launch a large application. Copying large amounts of data chokes your harddisk's IO bandwidth and thus delays your workflow.
The Twitcher is a task switcher to jump between running applications and their windows.
+
+
Just tap CTRLTAB to switch between the current and the last application/window. Tapping CTRLTAB very quickly will switch between all applications. Or press and hold CTRLTAB to go through all running applications by repeatedly hitting TAB or ←/→. If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as described and then go through its open windows with the ↑/↓ keys.
+
You cycle through all an applications visible windows on the current workspace with CTRL~ (which, depending on the keymap you're using, is the key below ESC).
+
It's also possible to invoke the Twitcher with CTRLTAB and then use the mouse to choose the application/window you'll jump to when releasing the CTRL key.
+
The Twitcher also offers a few more advanced keyboard shortcuts:
+
+
ESC
Aborts the twitching and returns to the formerly active window.
Workshop: Filetypes, Attributes, Index and Queries
+
+
This is a workshop to show the use of Attributes, Queries, the Index and custom Filetypes. As an example, we build a database to keep track of our DVD library.
Let's first decide what filetype and attributes would serve our needs. Originally, I wanted to use a Bookmark file with a link to the movie's IMdB page, but Haiku doesn't have a "bookmarkable" browser like BeOS' NetPositive at the moment, so I came up with this: The file itself will be a JPEG image for the movie cover.
+To that we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decide if we want to query it later (then we have to add it to the index) and if so, what type of attribute it should be. Numbers (int, float) can be evaluated differently than text (</=/> vs. is/contains/starts with).
+
Here are the attributes I'd like to see for my DVDs:
+
+
Movie title
+
Genre
+
URL to e.g. IMdB
+
Director/Cast
+
Plot
+
My rating from 1 to 10
+
Coordinates in my shelf, e.g. A2, B3, so I find the DVD also in Real Life :)
Start the Filetypes preferences, and click on the Add... button below the hierarchical list on the left. A small dialog opens and you specify in which MIME Group your new filetype will reside. You can also create a completely new group. Let's put it into "applications" and set the "Internal Name" to DVDdb.
Double-click the icon well to open Icon-O-Matic to design an icon for your filetype. You can also drag&drop an icon from the icon well of another type, maybe as starting point for a modified version.
You can add suffixes like .txt, .jpg, .mp3 to recognize files by their extention. Useful when working with files from systems without MIME typing. We don't need that for our example.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked.
+
+
Select...
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
+
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
Here we enter all the custom attributes we decided on in our preparations. Clicking the Add... button opens a panel:
+
+
+
Attribute Name - Appears e.g. as the column heading in Tracker windows.
+
Internal Name - Is used for indexing and querying the attribute.
+
Type - Defines the value the attribute can hold and therefore how it can be queried.
+
+
String for normal text
+
Boolean for binary data: 0 or 1
+
Integer for integer numbers with different ranges:
+
+
8 bit: ± 255
+
16 bit: ± 65,535
+
32 bit: ± 4,294,967,295
+
64 bit: ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615
+
+
+
Float for floatingpoint numbers, single precision
+
Double for floatingpoint numbers, double precision
+
Time for time and date format
+
+
+
+
+
Visible - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:
+
Display As - Leave on "Default". In the future more option will become available, e.g. a bar or stars for a rating etc.
+
Editable - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker.
+
Width - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window.
+
Alignment - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned.
Before we start entering data in our little DVD database, we should add certain attributes to the Index. Only indexed attributes can use Haiku's fast Queries.
+So, what will we be searching in the future? We probably won't ask "What's in the B4 coordinate in my shelf?" or "Does the IMdB URL or the plot of the movie contain the word 'pope-shenooda'?".
+
This leaves these attributes:
+
+
Internal Name
Attribute type
+
DVDdb:title
text
+
DVDdb:genre
text
+
DVDdb:cast
text
+
DVDdb:rating
int-32
+
+
+
To index them, we open a Terminal and simply add one attribute after the other:
Now, everything's set and we can begin putting some data into our base.
+Since our basic file is a cover image, we go to some online resource like IMdB, look for our first movie and save the cover or movie poster in a new folder where we want to keep our DVDdb files.
+
Opening that folder we see a typical Tracker window with one JPEG in it. Right-clicking it, we change its filetype to application/DVDdb with the Filetype Addon. There's more info on this in the Filetypes document.
+
Now, we activate all our DVDdb attributes from the Attributes menu of the Tracker window and rearrange the columns to our taste:
+
+
By clicking on a yet empty attribute (or pressing ALTE) we enter editing mode and fill each attribute. With TAB and SHIFTTAB you can navigate between attributes.
+
In our example, we usually start with a downloaded JPG cover and change its type to applications/DVDdb. There's another elegant way to produce a file to work with. Just copy an empty file of our filetype to /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates and rename it to DVDdb.
+
Right-clicking into a Tracker window, you'll find a new entry under New... besides the default "New folder".
Several hours of grunt work later, we have a nice little database that you can query to find all your Christina Ricci movies that have a 7+ rating... :)
+
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype.
+Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy Layout.
+
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder and rename it to group/filetype, replacing slashes with underscores; in our case "applications_DVDdb".
+
Open the new folder and paste in the layout with Attributes | Paste Layout. Voilà:
Workspaces are virtual desktops, complete with their own resolution, color depth and background. Up to 32 of these workspaces can be set from the Screen preferences.
You switch between workspaces by either clicking into the Workspaces applet (which is seen in the above image) or by using the keyboard shortcut ALTFx, where "x" is the workspace number. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
+Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send you to the workspace it's in.
+
Another very convenient way is to use CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ to navigate spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. If you additionally hold down SHIFT, the active window will move with you to the new workspace.
+
You can switch back and forth between two workspaces with ALT` (the actual key depends on the keymap you're using - it is the key below ESC). Again, holding SHIFT will take the active window with you.
Da es für die Haiku-Entwickler unmöglich ist, jede denkbare Hardware-Kombination oder jede mögliche Anwendungsweise eines Programmes zu testen, ist es eine große Hilfe, wenn erkannte Fehler von Anwendern gemeldet werden. Da Haiku noch nicht vollständig ausgereift ist - aktuell befindet es sich in der Alpha-Phase - ist es nicht unwahrscheinlich, dass Fehler auftreten. Nur mit Hilfe der Anwender können wir Haiku Stück für Stück perfektionieren.
+
Um unseren "Bugtracker" - also die Liste aller gefundenen Fehler - effektiv zu halten, ist es notwendig, eine grundlegende Etikette, die "Bug Tracker Etiquette" zu wahren.
+
+
Wie man einen Zugang zum Trac erhält
+
Um ein Fehler-Ticket einzureichen, muss man registrierter Benutzer beim Bugtracker sein. Um sich anzumelden ist eine gültige E-Mail Adresse notwendig. Sollte nach dem Anmelden keine Bestätigungsmail erhalten werden, lohnt es sich, seinen Spam-Filter zu überprüfen.
+
+
Einen Fehlerbericht erstellen
+
Ehe man einen Fehler meldet, sollte man sich sicher sein, dass er nicht schon gemeldet wurde. Hierzu kann auch die Suchfunktion verwendet werden.
+Nach dieser Überprüfung sollte man so genau wie möglich den Fehler beschreiben:
+
+
Wie wurde Haiku verwendet (auf echter Hardware oder virtualisiert unter VMWare, QEMU oder ähnlichem)
+
Welche Versionsnummer des SVN wurde verwendet?. Die Nummer ist auch unter 'About This System...' im Deskbar-Menü abzulesen.
+
Der Fehler sollte so präzise wie möglich beschrieben werden. Wie war das tatsächliche Verhalten im Gegensatz zum Erwarteten?
+
Wann ist der Fehler aufgetreten? Welche Schritte führten dazu? Nur so können die Entwickler den Fehler nachstellen und erkennen.
+
An den Fehlerbericht sollten so viele Informationen wie möglich angehängt werden. Log-Dateien oder Bildschirmphotos (die Taste PRINT speichert den Bildschirm als PNG im Verzeichnis /boot/home/) sind sehr hilfreich.
+
+
+
Fehler in Anwendungen
+
Wenn eine Anwendung unerwartet abstürzt, sollte man den "Debugger" aus dem erscheinenden Hinweisfenster aufrufen. Ein bt im daraufhin startenden Terminal erstellt einen sogenannten "backtrace" der mit an die Fehlermeldung angehängt werden sollte.
+
+
Fehler auf Grund Hardware
+
Wenn ein Fehler gemeldet wird, der Hardware oder Treiber betrifft, sollten mindestens diese Informationen an den Fehlerbericht angehängt werden:
+
+
listdev - eine detaillierte Auflistung aller vorhandener Hardware inklusive "vendor id" und "pci id"; ähnlich den Befehlen lshw und lspci unter Linux.
+
listusb -v - bei einem Fehler im Zusammenhang mit USB; ähnlich dem Befehlt lsusb.
+
open /var/log/syslog - die zentrale Log-Datei in Haiku. Mit dem Befehl open kann das Log auf eine sinnvolle Länge gekürzt werden.
+
listimage | grep drivers/ - eine Auflistung aller verwendeter Treiber.
+
ints - nur im Kernel Debugging Land (siehe weiter unten) möglich. Es zeigt eine Liste aller verwendeter "Interrupts".
+
+
Die genannten Befehle sind im Terminal einzugeben. Mit dem Anhang " > output.txt" an den Befehl wird dessen Ausgabe in die Datei output.txt gespeichert, die dann an den Fehlerbericht angehängt werden kann.
+
+
Kernel Debugging Land - KDL
+
Wenn grundlegende Systemkomponenten abgestürzt sind, dann friert das System ein und es wird das KDL aufgerufen. Man kann auch absichtlich dorthin wechseln durch Drücken von ALTSysReqD (SysReq ist in den meisten Fällen die Taste PRINT).
+
+
co - beendet das KDL und das System läuft - soweit möglich - normal weiter.
+
int - zeigt die verwendeten Interrupts (wie oben beschrieben).
+
bt - zeigt einen backtrace wo genau der Fehler aufgetreten ist.
+
+
+
Fehler gemeldet, und dann?
+
Nachdem ein Fehler gemeldet wurde wird sich ein Entwickler ihm annehmen und bewerten. Da es sich bei allen Entwicklern um Freiwillige handelt, die in ihrer Freizeit programmieren, kann es durchaus etwas dauern, bis man eine Rückmeldung erhält. Je mehr Informationen man einer Fehlermeldung beifügt oder nachreicht, um so leichter ist es für den Programmierer, diesen zu beheben.
+
Wenn man einen Fehler gemeldet hat ist es damit nicht abgeschlossen, eigentlich ist es erst der Anfang und man wird Teil des Entwicklungs-Prozesses von Haiku. Es ist durchaus möglich und eigentlich auch zu erwarten, dass sich ein Entwickler meldet, um näheres zu den Umständen des Fehler-Reports zu erfahren. Hier gilt wieder: je mehr man dem Entwickler helfen kann, um so leichter tut er sich mit der Fehlerbehebung. Erst wenn der Fehler als 'fixed' - also behoben - markiert ist, kann man sich zurücklehnen, mit dem guten Gefühl etwas beigetragen zu haben.
Since our developers are unable to test every hardware combination, nor every different way of interacting with the operating system, we are relying on you to give us some input on how things work at your end. Since this is a very early product, it is very likely that you will encounter bugs. We thank you for taking the time to report these.
-To keep our bugtracker effective, it's essential to abide by the Bug Tracker Etiquette. Besides, please follow these guidelines to create helpful bug reports:
-
-
Before reporting a bug please make sure that it does not yet exist. You can also use the search function for this.
-
After you have established this is a unique bug, make your information as accurate as possible:
-
+
Since our developers are unable to test every hardware combination, nor every different way of interacting with the operating system, we are relying on users to give us some input on how things work at their end. Since Haiku is still quite young, it's very likely that you will encounter bugs. We thank you for taking the time to report these. Together we can improve Haiku, bit by bit.
+
To keep our bugtracker effective, it's essential to abide by the Bug Tracker Etiquette.
+
+
Getting a Trac account
+
To file a ticket, you need to have an account at Haiku's Bugtracker.
+When creating a new account, be certain to provide your email address as it is necessary to obtain basic ticket modification privileges. Be sure to check your spam folder shortly afterwards, as the all important verification mail often ends up there.
+
+
Creating a bug report
+
Before reporting a bug, please make sure that it does not yet exist. You can also use the search function for this.
+After you have established that it's a unique bug, make your information as accurate as possible:
+
Include basic information such as how you are testing Haiku (on real hardware, on VMWare, on QEMU, etc.).
Mention which revision from SVN you are running. You can find this information in 'About This System...' from the Deskbar menu.
Describe the problem you are experiencing. Try to be as accurate as you can: describe the actual behavior, and the behavior you expected.
Describe what steps you need to perform in order to expose the bug. This will help developers reproduce the bug.
-
Attach as much information as you have. If it is a GUI bug, or a bug in one of the applications, try to make a screen shot (the PRINT key files a PNG into /boot/home/).
-
-
-
If it is a hardware problem, include a copy of the syslog file (just query for "syslog" to find it).
-
Also interesting when dealing with hardware issues, is the output of listdev and sysinfo. This will pipe the output into text files that you can attach to your bugreport or email:
Attach as much information as you have. If it is a GUI bug, or a bug in one of the applications, try to make a screen shot (the PRINT key saves a PNG in /boot/home/).
+
+
+
Software Bugs
+
When an application crashed, you should invoke the debugger from the alert that pops up. Entering bt into the launched debug Terminal, you create a "backtrace" that you should copy into your bug report.
-
-
When an application crashed, you should invoke the debugger from the alert that pops up. Entering bt into the launched debug Terminal, you create a "backtrace" that you should copy into your bugreport.
-
After the bug has been reported, a developer will look at your bug and try to classify it. Remember, we are all volunteers, and as such, sometimes a bug report might go unanswered for a while. Adding new information when it becomes available usually helps getting a bug picked up quicker, but do not try to 'bump' the bug up by adding non-descriptive comments.
-
Remember, reporting a bug is not something you spend a little time on and then you are done. If you reported a bug, then you are part of the Haiku development process. Developers might come up with questions while they are trying to fix your bug. Please stay around to answer these. Consider your participation 'done' when the bug is marked as 'fixed'. Together we can improve Haiku, bit by bit.
-
+
Hardware Bugs
+
When dealing with a hardware/driver related bug, you should attach the following information:
+
+
listdev - a detailed listing of your hardware, including vendor and pci id's, similar to Linux' lshw and lspci.
+
listusb -v - assuming its a USB related issue, similar to lsusb.
+
open /var/log/syslog - the primary system log used by Haiku, akin to on screen debugging during boot. With the open command you can crop down the relevant part of the syslog in a text editor.
+
listimage | grep drivers/ - lists all used drivers.
+
ints - only available within Kernel Debugging Land (see below). Shows interrupt usage. There shouldn't be too many that are shared by different devices.
+
+
You enter these commands into Terminal. Add a > output.txt after a command, and it's piped into a text file called "output.txt" that you can attach to your bug report or email.
+
+
Kernel Debugging Land - KDL
+
When some very low level system component crashed, you may end up in the kernel debugger. It can also be entered deliberately with ALTSysReqD (SysReq being PRINT on most keyboards).
+
+
co - will exit KDL and continue normal system operation, if possible.
+
int - will show interrupt usage (as described above).
+
bt - shows a backtrace, detailing where exactly the crash happened.
+
+
+
What's next?
+
After the bug has been reported, a developer will look at your bug and try to classify it. Remember, we are all volunteers, and as such, sometimes a bug report might go unanswered for a while. Adding new information when it becomes available usually helps getting a bug picked up quicker, but do not try to 'bump' the bug up by adding
+non-descriptive comments.
+
Remember, reporting a bug is not something you spend a little time on and then you are done. If you reported a bug, then you are part of the Haiku development process. Developers might come up with questions while they are trying to fix your bug. Please stay around to answer these. Consider your participation 'done' when the bug is marked
+as 'fixed'.
Since our developers are unable to test every hardware combination, nor every different way of interacting with the operating system, we are relying on users to give us some input on how things work at their end. Since Haiku is still quite young, it's very likely that you will encounter bugs. We thank you for taking the time to report these. Together we can improve Haiku, bit by bit.
+
To keep our bugtracker effective, it's essential to abide by the Bug Tracker Etiquette.
+
+
Getting a Trac account
+
To file a ticket, you need to have an account at Haiku's Bugtracker.
+When creating a new account, be certain to provide your email address as it is necessary to obtain basic ticket modification privileges. Be sure to check your spam folder shortly afterwards, as the all important verification mail often ends up there.
+
+
Creating a bug report
+
Before reporting a bug, please make sure that it does not yet exist. You can also use the search function for this.
+After you have established that it's a unique bug, make your information as accurate as possible:
+
+
Include basic information such as how you are testing Haiku (on real hardware, on VMWare, on QEMU, etc.).
+
Mention which revision from SVN you are running. You can find this information in 'About This System...' from the Deskbar menu.
+
Describe the problem you are experiencing. Try to be as accurate as you can: describe the actual behavior, and the behavior you expected.
+
Describe what steps you need to perform in order to expose the bug. This will help developers reproduce the bug.
+
Attach as much information as you have. If it is a GUI bug, or a bug in one of the applications, try to make a screen shot (the PRINT key saves a PNG in /boot/home/).
+
+
+
Software Bugs
+
When an application crashed, you should invoke the debugger from the alert that pops up. Entering bt into the launched debug Terminal, you create a "backtrace" that you should copy into your bug report.
+
+
Hardware Bugs
+
When dealing with a hardware/driver related bug, you should attach the following information:
+
+
listdev - a detailed listing of your hardware, including vendor and pci id's, similar to Linux' lshw and lspci.
+
listusb -v - assuming its a USB related issue, similar to lsusb.
+
open /var/log/syslog - the primary system log used by Haiku, akin to on screen debugging during boot. With the open command you can crop down the relevant part of the syslog in a text editor.
+
listimage | grep drivers/ - lists all used drivers.
+
ints - only available within Kernel Debugging Land (see below). Shows interrupt usage. There shouldn't be too many that are shared by different devices.
+
+
You enter these commands into Terminal. Add a > output.txt after a command, and it's piped into a text file called "output.txt" that you can attach to your bug report or email.
+
+
Kernel Debugging Land - KDL
+
When some very low level system component crashed, you may end up in the kernel debugger. It can also be entered deliberately with ALTSysReqD (SysReq being PRINT on most keyboards).
+
+
co - will exit KDL and continue normal system operation, if possible.
+
int - will show interrupt usage (as described above).
+
bt - shows a backtrace, detailing where exactly the crash happened.
+
+
+
What's next?
+
After the bug has been reported, a developer will look at your bug and try to classify it. Remember, we are all volunteers, and as such, sometimes a bug report might go unanswered for a while. Adding new information when it becomes available usually helps getting a bug picked up quicker, but do not try to 'bump' the bug up by adding
+non-descriptive comments.
+
Remember, reporting a bug is not something you spend a little time on and then you are done. If you reported a bug, then you are part of the Haiku development process. Developers might come up with questions while they are trying to fix your bug. Please stay around to answer these. Consider your participation 'done' when the bug is marked
+as 'fixed'.
Since our developers are unable to test every hardware combination, nor every different way of interacting with the operating system, we are relying on users to give us some input on how things work at their end. Since Haiku is still quite young, it's very likely that you will encounter bugs. We thank you for taking the time to report these. Together we can improve Haiku, bit by bit.
+
To keep our bugtracker effective, it's essential to abide by the Bug Tracker Etiquette.
+
+
Getting a Trac account
+
To file a ticket, you need to have an account at Haiku's Bugtracker.
+When creating a new account, be certain to provide your email address as it is necessary to obtain basic ticket modification privileges. Be sure to check your spam folder shortly afterwards, as the all important verification mail often ends up there.
+
+
Créer un rapport de bogue
+
Before reporting a bug, please make sure that it does not yet exist. You can also use the search function for this.
+After you have established that it's a unique bug, make your information as accurate as possible:
+
+
Include basic information such as how you are testing Haiku (on real hardware, on VMWare, on QEMU, etc.).
+
Mention which revision from SVN you are running. You can find this information in 'About This System...' from the Deskbar menu.
+
Describe the problem you are experiencing. Try to be as accurate as you can: describe the actual behavior, and the behavior you expected.
+
Describe what steps you need to perform in order to expose the bug. This will help developers reproduce the bug.
+
Attach as much information as you have. If it is a GUI bug, or a bug in one of the applications, try to make a screen shot (the PRINT key saves a PNG in /boot/home/).
+
+
+
Software Bugs
+
When an application crashed, you should invoke the debugger from the alert that pops up. Entering bt into the launched debug Terminal, you create a "backtrace" that you should copy into your bug report.
+
+
Hardware Bugs
+
When dealing with a hardware/driver related bug, you should attach the following information:
+
+
listdev - a detailed listing of your hardware, including vendor and pci id's, similar to Linux' lshw and lspci.
+
listusb -v - assuming its a USB related issue, similar to lsusb.
+
open /var/log/syslog - the primary system log used by Haiku, akin to on screen debugging during boot. With the open command you can crop down the relevant part of the syslog in a text editor.
+
listimage | grep drivers/ - lists all used drivers.
+
ints - only available within Kernel Debugging Land (see below). Shows interrupt usage. There shouldn't be too many that are shared by different devices.
+
+
You enter these commands into Terminal. Add a > output.txt after a command, and it's piped into a text file called "output.txt" that you can attach to your bug report or email.
+
+
Kernel Debugging Land - KDL
+
When some very low level system component crashed, you may end up in the kernel debugger. It can also be entered deliberately with ALTSysReqD (SysReq being PRINT on most keyboards).
+
+
co - will exit KDL and continue normal system operation, if possible.
+
int - will show interrupt usage (as described above).
+
bt - shows a backtrace, detailing where exactly the crash happened.
+
+
+
What's next?
+
After the bug has been reported, a developer will look at your bug and try to classify it. Remember, we are all volunteers, and as such, sometimes a bug report might go unanswered for a while. Adding new information when it becomes available usually helps getting a bug picked up quicker, but do not try to 'bump' the bug up by adding
+non-descriptive comments.
+
Remember, reporting a bug is not something you spend a little time on and then you are done. If you reported a bug, then you are part of the Haiku development process. Developers might come up with questions while they are trying to fix your bug. Please stay around to answer these. Consider your participation 'done' when the bug is marked
+as 'fixed'.
Since our developers are unable to test every hardware combination, nor every different way of interacting with the operating system, we are relying on users to give us some input on how things work at their end. Since Haiku is still quite young, it's very likely that you will encounter bugs. We thank you for taking the time to report these. Together we can improve Haiku, bit by bit.
+
To keep our bugtracker effective, it's essential to abide by the Bug Tracker Etiquette.
+
+
Getting a Trac account
+
To file a ticket, you need to have an account at Haiku's Bugtracker.
+When creating a new account, be certain to provide your email address as it is necessary to obtain basic ticket modification privileges. Be sure to check your spam folder shortly afterwards, as the all important verification mail often ends up there.
+
+
Creating a bug report
+
Before reporting a bug, please make sure that it does not yet exist. You can also use the search function for this.
+After you have established that it's a unique bug, make your information as accurate as possible:
+
+
Include basic information such as how you are testing Haiku (on real hardware, on VMWare, on QEMU, etc.).
+
Mention which revision from SVN you are running. You can find this information in 'About This System...' from the Deskbar menu.
+
Describe the problem you are experiencing. Try to be as accurate as you can: describe the actual behavior, and the behavior you expected.
+
Describe what steps you need to perform in order to expose the bug. This will help developers reproduce the bug.
+
Attach as much information as you have. If it is a GUI bug, or a bug in one of the applications, try to make a screen shot (the PRINT key saves a PNG in /boot/home/).
+
+
+
Software Bugs
+
When an application crashed, you should invoke the debugger from the alert that pops up. Entering bt into the launched debug Terminal, you create a "backtrace" that you should copy into your bug report.
+
+
Hardware Bugs
+
When dealing with a hardware/driver related bug, you should attach the following information:
+
+
listdev - a detailed listing of your hardware, including vendor and pci id's, similar to Linux' lshw and lspci.
+
listusb -v - assuming its a USB related issue, similar to lsusb.
+
open /var/log/syslog - the primary system log used by Haiku, akin to on screen debugging during boot. With the open command you can crop down the relevant part of the syslog in a text editor.
+
listimage | grep drivers/ - lists all used drivers.
+
ints - only available within Kernel Debugging Land (see below). Shows interrupt usage. There shouldn't be too many that are shared by different devices.
+
+
You enter these commands into Terminal. Add a > output.txt after a command, and it's piped into a text file called "output.txt" that you can attach to your bug report or email.
+
+
Kernel Debugging Land - KDL
+
When some very low level system component crashed, you may end up in the kernel debugger. It can also be entered deliberately with ALTSysReqD (SysReq being PRINT on most keyboards).
+
+
co - will exit KDL and continue normal system operation, if possible.
+
int - will show interrupt usage (as described above).
+
bt - shows a backtrace, detailing where exactly the crash happened.
+
+
+
What's next?
+
After the bug has been reported, a developer will look at your bug and try to classify it. Remember, we are all volunteers, and as such, sometimes a bug report might go unanswered for a while. Adding new information when it becomes available usually helps getting a bug picked up quicker, but do not try to 'bump' the bug up by adding
+non-descriptive comments.
+
Remember, reporting a bug is not something you spend a little time on and then you are done. If you reported a bug, then you are part of the Haiku development process. Developers might come up with questions while they are trying to fix your bug. Please stay around to answer these. Consider your participation 'done' when the bug is marked
+as 'fixed'.
Since our developers are unable to test every hardware combination, nor every different way of interacting with the operating system, we are relying on users to give us some input on how things work at their end. Since Haiku is still quite young, it's very likely that you will encounter bugs. We thank you for taking the time to report these. Together we can improve Haiku, bit by bit.
+
To keep our bugtracker effective, it's essential to abide by the Bug Tracker Etiquette.
+
+
Getting a Trac account
+
To file a ticket, you need to have an account at Haiku's Bugtracker.
+When creating a new account, be certain to provide your email address as it is necessary to obtain basic ticket modification privileges. Be sure to check your spam folder shortly afterwards, as the all important verification mail often ends up there.
+
+
Creating a bug report
+
Before reporting a bug, please make sure that it does not yet exist. You can also use the search function for this.
+After you have established that it's a unique bug, make your information as accurate as possible:
+
+
Include basic information such as how you are testing Haiku (on real hardware, on VMWare, on QEMU, etc.).
+
Mention which revision from SVN you are running. You can find this information in 'About This System...' from the Deskbar menu.
+
Describe the problem you are experiencing. Try to be as accurate as you can: describe the actual behavior, and the behavior you expected.
+
Describe what steps you need to perform in order to expose the bug. This will help developers reproduce the bug.
+
Attach as much information as you have. If it is a GUI bug, or a bug in one of the applications, try to make a screen shot (the PRINT key saves a PNG in /boot/home/).
+
+
+
Software Bugs
+
When an application crashed, you should invoke the debugger from the alert that pops up. Entering bt into the launched debug Terminal, you create a "backtrace" that you should copy into your bug report.
+
+
Hardware Bugs
+
When dealing with a hardware/driver related bug, you should attach the following information:
+
+
listdev - a detailed listing of your hardware, including vendor and pci id's, similar to Linux' lshw and lspci.
+
listusb -v - assuming its a USB related issue, similar to lsusb.
+
open /var/log/syslog - the primary system log used by Haiku, akin to on screen debugging during boot. With the open command you can crop down the relevant part of the syslog in a text editor.
+
listimage | grep drivers/ - lists all used drivers.
+
ints - only available within Kernel Debugging Land (see below). Shows interrupt usage. There shouldn't be too many that are shared by different devices.
+
+
You enter these commands into Terminal. Add a > output.txt after a command, and it's piped into a text file called "output.txt" that you can attach to your bug report or email.
+
+
Kernel Debugging Land - KDL
+
When some very low level system component crashed, you may end up in the kernel debugger. It can also be entered deliberately with ALTSysReqD (SysReq being PRINT on most keyboards).
+
+
co - will exit KDL and continue normal system operation, if possible.
+
int - will show interrupt usage (as described above).
+
bt - shows a backtrace, detailing where exactly the crash happened.
+
+
+
What's next?
+
After the bug has been reported, a developer will look at your bug and try to classify it. Remember, we are all volunteers, and as such, sometimes a bug report might go unanswered for a while. Adding new information when it becomes available usually helps getting a bug picked up quicker, but do not try to 'bump' the bug up by adding
+non-descriptive comments.
+
Remember, reporting a bug is not something you spend a little time on and then you are done. If you reported a bug, then you are part of the Haiku development process. Developers might come up with questions while they are trying to fix your bug. Please stay around to answer these. Consider your participation 'done' when the bug is marked
+as 'fixed'.
Since our developers are unable to test every hardware combination, nor every different way of interacting with the operating system, we are relying on users to give us some input on how things work at their end. Since Haiku is still quite young, it's very likely that you will encounter bugs. We thank you for taking the time to report these. Together we can improve Haiku, bit by bit.
+
To keep our bugtracker effective, it's essential to abide by the Bug Tracker Etiquette.
+
+
Getting a Trac account
+
To file a ticket, you need to have an account at Haiku's Bugtracker.
+When creating a new account, be certain to provide your email address as it is necessary to obtain basic ticket modification privileges. Be sure to check your spam folder shortly afterwards, as the all important verification mail often ends up there.
+
+
Creating a bug report
+
Before reporting a bug, please make sure that it does not yet exist. You can also use the search function for this.
+After you have established that it's a unique bug, make your information as accurate as possible:
+
+
Include basic information such as how you are testing Haiku (on real hardware, on VMWare, on QEMU, etc.).
+
Mention which revision from SVN you are running. You can find this information in 'About This System...' from the Deskbar menu.
+
Describe the problem you are experiencing. Try to be as accurate as you can: describe the actual behavior, and the behavior you expected.
+
Describe what steps you need to perform in order to expose the bug. This will help developers reproduce the bug.
+
Attach as much information as you have. If it is a GUI bug, or a bug in one of the applications, try to make a screen shot (the PRINT key saves a PNG in /boot/home/).
+
+
+
Software Bugs
+
When an application crashed, you should invoke the debugger from the alert that pops up. Entering bt into the launched debug Terminal, you create a "backtrace" that you should copy into your bug report.
+
+
Hardware Bugs
+
When dealing with a hardware/driver related bug, you should attach the following information:
+
+
listdev - a detailed listing of your hardware, including vendor and pci id's, similar to Linux' lshw and lspci.
+
listusb -v - assuming its a USB related issue, similar to lsusb.
+
open /var/log/syslog - the primary system log used by Haiku, akin to on screen debugging during boot. With the open command you can crop down the relevant part of the syslog in a text editor.
+
listimage | grep drivers/ - lists all used drivers.
+
ints - only available within Kernel Debugging Land (see below). Shows interrupt usage. There shouldn't be too many that are shared by different devices.
+
+
You enter these commands into Terminal. Add a > output.txt after a command, and it's piped into a text file called "output.txt" that you can attach to your bug report or email.
+
+
Kernel Debugging Land - KDL
+
When some very low level system component crashed, you may end up in the kernel debugger. It can also be entered deliberately with ALTSysReqD (SysReq being PRINT on most keyboards).
+
+
co - will exit KDL and continue normal system operation, if possible.
+
int - will show interrupt usage (as described above).
+
bt - shows a backtrace, detailing where exactly the crash happened.
+
+
+
What's next?
+
After the bug has been reported, a developer will look at your bug and try to classify it. Remember, we are all volunteers, and as such, sometimes a bug report might go unanswered for a while. Adding new information when it becomes available usually helps getting a bug picked up quicker, but do not try to 'bump' the bug up by adding
+non-descriptive comments.
+
Remember, reporting a bug is not something you spend a little time on and then you are done. If you reported a bug, then you are part of the Haiku development process. Developers might come up with questions while they are trying to fix your bug. Please stay around to answer these. Consider your participation 'done' when the bug is marked
+as 'fixed'.
Since our developers are unable to test every hardware combination, nor every different way of interacting with the operating system, we are relying on users to give us some input on how things work at their end. Since Haiku is still quite young, it's very likely that you will encounter bugs. We thank you for taking the time to report these. Together we can improve Haiku, bit by bit.
+
To keep our bugtracker effective, it's essential to abide by the Bug Tracker Etiquette.
+
+
Getting a Trac account
+
To file a ticket, you need to have an account at Haiku's Bugtracker.
+When creating a new account, be certain to provide your email address as it is necessary to obtain basic ticket modification privileges. Be sure to check your spam folder shortly afterwards, as the all important verification mail often ends up there.
+
+
Creating a bug report
+
Before reporting a bug, please make sure that it does not yet exist. You can also use the search function for this.
+After you have established that it's a unique bug, make your information as accurate as possible:
+
+
Include basic information such as how you are testing Haiku (on real hardware, on VMWare, on QEMU, etc.).
+
Mention which revision from SVN you are running. You can find this information in 'About This System...' from the Deskbar menu.
+
Describe the problem you are experiencing. Try to be as accurate as you can: describe the actual behavior, and the behavior you expected.
+
Describe what steps you need to perform in order to expose the bug. This will help developers reproduce the bug.
+
Attach as much information as you have. If it is a GUI bug, or a bug in one of the applications, try to make a screen shot (the PRINT key saves a PNG in /boot/home/).
+
+
+
Software Bugs
+
When an application crashed, you should invoke the debugger from the alert that pops up. Entering bt into the launched debug Terminal, you create a "backtrace" that you should copy into your bug report.
+
+
Hardware Bugs
+
When dealing with a hardware/driver related bug, you should attach the following information:
+
+
listdev - a detailed listing of your hardware, including vendor and pci id's, similar to Linux' lshw and lspci.
+
listusb -v - assuming its a USB related issue, similar to lsusb.
+
open /var/log/syslog - the primary system log used by Haiku, akin to on screen debugging during boot. With the open command you can crop down the relevant part of the syslog in a text editor.
+
listimage | grep drivers/ - lists all used drivers.
+
ints - only available within Kernel Debugging Land (see below). Shows interrupt usage. There shouldn't be too many that are shared by different devices.
+
+
You enter these commands into Terminal. Add a > output.txt after a command, and it's piped into a text file called "output.txt" that you can attach to your bug report or email.
+
+
Kernel Debugging Land - KDL
+
When some very low level system component crashed, you may end up in the kernel debugger. It can also be entered deliberately with ALTSysReqD (SysReq being PRINT on most keyboards).
+
+
co - will exit KDL and continue normal system operation, if possible.
+
int - will show interrupt usage (as described above).
+
bt - shows a backtrace, detailing where exactly the crash happened.
+
+
+
What's next?
+
After the bug has been reported, a developer will look at your bug and try to classify it. Remember, we are all volunteers, and as such, sometimes a bug report might go unanswered for a while. Adding new information when it becomes available usually helps getting a bug picked up quicker, but do not try to 'bump' the bug up by adding
+non-descriptive comments.
+
Remember, reporting a bug is not something you spend a little time on and then you are done. If you reported a bug, then you are part of the Haiku development process. Developers might come up with questions while they are trying to fix your bug. Please stay around to answer these. Consider your participation 'done' when the bug is marked
+as 'fixed'.
Danke, dass Sie sich für Haiku interessieren! Wir hoffen, dass wir durch unsere erste öffentliche Version neue Entwickler für unser Projekt begeistern können und Anwender in die Lage versetzen, Haiku auszuprobieren. Natürlich ist diese Alpha Version noch lange nicht vollständig oder gar fehlerfrei und sie erfüllt auch noch nicht die Ziele, die wir uns selbst gesteckt haben, aber sie zeigt, warum wir uns in diesem Projekt so engagieren und es ermöglicht anderen, das große Potential von Haiku zu erkunden.
So weit es geht, sind alle schwerwiegendere Fehler beseitigt. Da es sich aber trotz alle dem um eine Alpha-Version handelt, muss man davon ausgehen, dass noch Fehler vorhanden sind, die noch nicht entdeckt wurden.
+
Vom Verwenden dieser Alpha-Version in einer systemkritischen Umgebung wird dringend abgeraten! Obwohl es unwahrscheinlich ist, kann ein Datenverlust nicht ausgeschlossen werden!
+
+
Einer der Hauptgründe, diese Alpha-Version zu veröffentlichen war, das System einer Vielzahl von Menschen zum Testen anbieten zu können. Nur so ist es möglich, alle Fehler zu finden und Verbesserungsvorschläge zu erhalten. Deshalb sollte nicht gezögert werden, Fehler auch zu melden!
Da Haiku darauf abzielt ein würdiger Nachfolger des BeOS R5 zu werden, ist eine Erfahrung mit diesem System natürlich hilfreich. Darüber hinaus sei auf diese Punkte verwiesen:
Da Haiku sowohl binärkompatibel als auch code-kompatibel mit dem BeOS ist, laufen viele BeOS-Anwendungen auch direkt in Haiku. Nach dem Herunterladen eines Programm-Paketes muss es lediglich nach /boot/apps/ entpackt (ein Doppelklick öffnet den Expander) und von dort gestartet werden.
+
Eine Ausnahme hiervon sind die "OptionalPackages", die normalerweise mit Haiku mitgeliefert werden, wenn es direkt aus dem Quellcode übersetzt wird. Diese können natürlich auch in jedem anderen laufenden Haiku installiert werden, dann aber müssen sie ins Hauptverzeichnis "/" entpackt werden.
+Da die "OptionalPackages" eher für Entwickler gedacht sind, findet man oftmals mehrere Versionen die zu unterschiedlichen Revisionen von Haiku nicht kompatibel sind.
Da Haiku eine Reimplemention des BeOS R5 ist, sind die API die gleichen (mit einigen Erweiterungen). Deshalb ist die Dokumentation im BeBook immernoch eine hilfreiche Quelle. Dankenswerter weise hat die Firma ACCESS, die alle Rechte von Be Inc. übernommen hat, einer Veröffentlichung des BeBook zugestimmt.
+
+
Diese Informationen sollten einen guten Einstieg in die Materie vermitteln:
Um sich mit anderen Entwickler und Anwender auszutauschen muss man nur an den Diskussionen im IRC, unseren Foren oder Mailing-Listen teilnehmen. Wie üblich, wenn sich mehrere Menschen unterhalten, sollte eine gewisse Etikette eingehalten werden.
Muchas gracias por probar Haiku. Este es nuestro primer lanzamiento público. Esperamos poder atraer a nuevos desarrolladores a nuestro proyecto y darle a los usuarios una oportunidad para probar Haiku. Somos conscientes de que esta versión alpha no cumple del todo los requisitos que nos hemos propuesto nosotros mismos, y no ofrece todas las características ni la experiencia de usuario que fueron planificadas para la versión R1 final. De todas maneras, esperamos que esta versión le permita descubrir el gran potencial de Haiku, y que comparta nuestra emoción.
Hemos trabajado muy duro para arreglar todos los fallos posibles, de todas maneras, siendo una versión alpha, es muy probable que haya muchos por descubrir.
+
No recomendamos utilizar las versiones alpha en un sistema de producción. Sus datos podrían verse alterados, sesgados, o completamente borrados.
+
+
Una de las razones principales para liberar una versión alpha es atraer a mucha gente para probar el sistema y descubrir fallos o darnos sugerencias para futuras mejoras. Por favor, archive los fallos y mejoras en nuestro bug tracker después de utilizar su sistema de búsqueda para evitar duplicados.
Las primeras versiones de Haiku serán muy similares a BeOS R5, el sistema operativo que está recreando. Si nunca lo ha probado, puede mirar estos enlaces:
Debido a nuestra compatibilidad de código binario y código fuente, muchas aplicaciones de BeOS funcionan en Haiku. Tras descargar un paquete, tan sólo debe descomprimirlo (doble clic abre Expander) a /boot/apps/ e iniciar la aplicación desde ahí.
+
Una excepción son los OptionalPackages (paquetes opcionales), que habitualmente están incluídos cuando se compila Haiku desde el código fuente. Pueden ser también descargados e instalados en cualquier sistema Haiku ya funcionando. La única diferencia con los ficheros normales es que tiene que descomprimirlos directamente al directorio raíz /. Para propósitos de depuración de código, la web de los OptionalPackages mantiene versiones antiguas que no son compatibles con las nuevas revisiones de Haiku. Los OptionalPackages son principalmente para desarrolladores, no están pensados para el usuario final.
Como Haiku es una reimplementación, la API es la misma que para BeOS R5 (con algunos añadidos). Por lo tanto la documentación existente en el BeBook es todavía un recurso válido. Gracias a ACCESS, que tiene los derechos de la antigua Be Inc., se nos permite distribuir una copia del BeBook.
+
+
Existen algunos recursos que le pueden ayudar a comenzar:
Entre en contacto con otros desarrolladores y usuarios y únase a las conversaciones del IRC, foro o las listas de correo. Cuando tanta gente diferente se junta, es necesario establecer unas normas para que la comunicación sea efectiva. Por favor, respete nuestra Etiqueta de listas de correo.
Merci beaucoup d’essayer Haiku ! Voici notre première version publique. Nous espérons encourager de nouveaux développeurs à nous rejoindre et donner aux futurs utilisateurs la possibilité d’essayer Haiku. Nous sommes conscients que cette version alpha ne remplit pas touts les objectifs que nous nous sommes fixés et ne fournit pas toutes les fonctionnalités et l’expérience utilisateur attendues pour la version R1 finale. Néanmoins, nous espérons que cette pré-version vous permettra de découvrir le potentiel de Haiku et de partager notre excitation.
Nous travaillons dur pour résoudre les bogues critiques du système. Néanmoins, Haiku n'étant qu'au stade de version alpha, vous risquez d'en rencontrer lors de vos essais.
+
Nous déconseillons l'utilisation des versions Alpha sur un système en production. Les données que vous manipulez pourraient être altérées, corrompues ou tout simplement détruites.
+
+
La sortie d'une version alpha a pour objectif de faire découvrir et tester le système par d'avantage de personnes, afin de trouver les bogues présents et d'obtenir des suggestions d'améliorations futures. Veuillez rapporter d'éventuels bogues et suggestions sur notre traqueur de bogues après avoir utilisé sa fonction de recherche pour éviter les doublons.
Les premières versions de Haiku auront une apparence et des fonctionnalités proches de celles de BeOS R5, le système d'exploitation qu'il tente de ré-implémenter. Si vous ne l'avez jamais essayé, jetez un œil à ces liens :
Grace à notre compatibilité binaire et source avec BeOS, de nombreuses applications écrites pour ce système fonctionne sous Haiku. Après avoir téléchargé un paquet, décompressez le (un double-clic lancera Expander) dans /boot/apps/ et démarrez l'application depuis de ce dossier.
+
Les paquets optionnels font exception. ils sont normalement inclus à la compilation de Haiku à partir de leur code source.
+Ceux-ci peuvent cependant être téléchargés et ajoutés à n'importe quel système Haiku en cours d'exécution.
+Seule différence avec les archives normales : vous devez les décompresser directement à la racine /.
+Le site conserve les anciennes versions des paquets optionnels à des fins de débogage qui ne sont pas compatibles avec les nouvelles versions d'Haiku.
+Les paquets optionnels sont principalement destinées aux développeurs, et pas aux utilisateurs finaux.
+
+
Des sites populaires référencent les logiciels disponibles.
Comme Haiku est une ré-implémentation, l'API est encore le même que celle de BeOS R5 (avec quelques ajouts).
+Par conséquent, la documentation du BeBook est toujours valable. Nous remercions ACCESS, qui détient les droits de propriété de l'ancien Be Inc, de nous autoriser à fournir une copie du BeBook.
+
+
Quelques ressources supplémentaires sont susceptible de vous aider à commencer :
Entrer en contact avec les autres développeurs et utilisateurs, participer aux discussions sur IRC, dans nos forums ou les listes de diffusion.
+Quand beaucoup de gens différents se rencontrent, des règles doivent êtres établies pour maintenir une communication efficace. S'il vous plaît respecter
+l'étiquette de notre liste de diffusion.
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our first public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
We were working very hard to fix all possibly show stopping bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
+
We discourage using alpha versions as a production system. Your data could very well be altered, mangled or downright destroyed.
+
+
One of the main reasons for releasing an alpha version is to attract more people to test the system and discover bugs or provide suggestions for future enhancements. Please file bugs and enhancements in our bug tracker after using its search function to avoid duplicates.
The first release(s) of Haiku will be very much like the BeOS R5, the operating system it is reimplementing. If you never experienced it, have a look at these links:
Because of our binary and source compatibility, many BeOS applications run on Haiku. After downloading a package, simply unzip it (double clicking opens Expander) to /boot/apps/ and start the application from there.
+
An exception are OptionalPackages, which are normally included when building Haiku directly from source. Those can, however, also be downloaded and added to any running Haiku system. The only difference to normal archives: you have to unzip directly to root /.
+For debugging purposes the OptionalPackage site keeps older versions which are not compatible with newer Haiku revisions. OptionalPackages are primarily for developers, less so for end-users.
Since Haiku is a reimplementation, the API is still the same as for BeOS R5 (with some additions). Therefore the documentation in the BeBook is still a valid resource. Thanks to ACCESS, who own the rights to former Be Inc. property, we are allowed to provide a copy of the BeBook.
+
+
There are additional resources that should help you getting started:
Get in contact with other developers and users and join the discussions on IRC, in our forums or the mailing lists. When many different people come together, rules have to established to keep communication effective. Please respect our Mailing List Etiquette.
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our first public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
We were working very hard to fix all possibly show stopping bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
+
We discourage using alpha versions as a production system. Your data could very well be altered, mangled or downright destroyed.
+
+
One of the main reasons for releasing an alpha version is to attract more people to test the system and discover bugs or provide suggestions for future enhancements. Please file bugs and enhancements in our bug tracker after using its search function to avoid duplicates.
The first release(s) of Haiku will be very much like the BeOS R5, the operating system it is reimplementing. If you never experienced it, have a look at these links:
Because of our binary and source compatibility, many BeOS applications run on Haiku. After downloading a package, simply unzip it (double clicking opens Expander) to /boot/apps/ and start the application from there.
+
An exception are OptionalPackages, which are normally included when building Haiku directly from source. Those can, however, also be downloaded and added to any running Haiku system. The only difference to normal archives: you have to unzip directly to root /.
+For debugging purposes the OptionalPackage site keeps older versions which are not compatible with newer Haiku revisions. OptionalPackages are primarily for developers, less so for end-users.
Since Haiku is a reimplementation, the API is still the same as for BeOS R5 (with some additions). Therefore the documentation in the BeBook is still a valid resource. Thanks to ACCESS, who own the rights to former Be Inc. property, we are allowed to provide a copy of the BeBook.
+
+
There are additional resources that should help you getting started:
Get in contact with other developers and users and join the discussions on IRC, in our forums or the mailing lists. When many different people come together, rules have to established to keep communication effective. Please respect our Mailing List Etiquette.
Большое спасибо за проявленный интерес к Haiku! Это наш первый публичный релиз и мы надеемся привлечь новых разработчиков к нашему проекту и дать будущим пользователям шанс увидеть Haiku в деле. Понятно, что этот альфа-релиз далеко не полностью соответствует тем целям, которые мы сами наметили, и не предоставляет все функции, которые мы собирались дать конечному пользователю, запланировав их для финальной версии R1. Однако, мы надеемся, что этот релиз позволит вам заметить большой потенциал Haiku, и вы найдёте немного времени для её изучения.
Мы провели тяжёлую работу по выявлению и устранению ошибок ("багов"), однако это только альфа-релиз и в нём обязательно присутствуют немало скрытых ошибок.
+
Мы не рекомендуем использовать альфа-версии в качестве основной операционной системы. В ваши данные с большой вероятностью могут быть внесены нежелательные изменения, они могут исказиться или же уничтожиться.
+
+
Одной из главных причин для выпуска альфа-версии явилось желание привлечь больше пользователей для тестирования и обнаружения ошибок, а также получения от них предложений по дальнейшему улучшению Haiku. Пожалуйста, оставляйте отчёты о найденных багах и предложения по улучшению в нашей системе отслеживания ошибок (bug tracker), но только после использования поиска, чтобы избежать дубликатов.
Первые релизы Haiku будут похожи по функционалу и вешнему виду на BeOS R5, которую она и призвана повторить. Если вы никогда не пользовались этой операционной системой, то рекомендуется воспользоваться следующими ссылками:
Так как Haiku бинарно и на уровне исходных кодов совместима с BeOS, то многие BeOS-приложения работают и в ней. Загрузив архив с программой, просто распакуйте его (достаточно двойного клика для открытия архива в Expander) в /boot/apps/, и оттуда же запускайте это приложение.
+
Исключением являются опциональные пакеты (OptionalPackages), которые уже включены в Haiku при её компиляции из исходных кодов, однако их также можно загрузить и добавить в любую установленную копию Haiku. У них одно отличие от обычных архивов с программами: их следует распаковывать в корень загрузочного диска /boot.
+Для отладочных целей на сайте с опциональными пакетами хранятся их устаревшие версии, которые не совместимы с новыми ревизиями Haiku, и они в первую очередь предназначены для разработчиков, но не для конечных пользователей.
+
+
Популярные каталоги программ:
+
+
Haikuware сайт с программами, ориентированными на Haiku.
+
BeBits самый популярный каталог программ для BeOS (в последнее время и для Haiku).
+
HaikuPorts библиотеки, необходимые для портирования приложений.
+
OsDrawer хранилище для разрабатываемых приложений с открытым исходным кодом для BeOS и Haiku.
+
OptionalPackages в основном используется при компиляции Haiku из исходных кодов.
Так как Haiku повторяет BeOS R5, то и всё, что касается API у них схоже (с некоторыми исключениями), потому документация в BeBook всё ещё актуальна. Благодаря компании ACCESS, которой принадлежат права на интеллектуальную собственность Be Inc., нам позволено распространять BeBook.
+
+
Существуют и другие ресурсы, которые должны помочь вам начать изучение:
Вы можете связаться с разработчиками и другими пользователями, присоединившись к обсуждению на IRC каналах, нашем форуме или в списках рассылки. Когда множество людей обсуждают что-то вместе, то необходимо соблюдать некоторые правила для сохранения эффективности общения. Пожалуйста, соблюдайте этикет списков рассылки.
Thank you very much for checking out Haiku! This is our first public release. We hope to attract new developers to our project and give future users a chance to check out Haiku. We realize that this alpha release does not yet fully live up to the goals that we have set for ourselves and doesn't offer all the features and well-rounded end-user experience planned for the final R1 version. However, we hope that this release lets you discover Haiku's great potential and that you share our excitement.
We were working very hard to fix all possibly show stopping bugs, however, being an alpha release, there are bound to be plenty left undiscovered.
+
We discourage using alpha versions as a production system. Your data could very well be altered, mangled or downright destroyed.
+
+
One of the main reasons for releasing an alpha version is to attract more people to test the system and discover bugs or provide suggestions for future enhancements. Please file bugs and enhancements in our bug tracker after using its search function to avoid duplicates.
The first release(s) of Haiku will be very much like the BeOS R5, the operating system it is reimplementing. If you never experienced it, have a look at these links:
Because of our binary and source compatibility, many BeOS applications run on Haiku. After downloading a package, simply unzip it (double clicking opens Expander) to /boot/apps/ and start the application from there.
+
An exception are OptionalPackages, which are normally included when building Haiku directly from source. Those can, however, also be downloaded and added to any running Haiku system. The only difference to normal archives: you have to unzip directly to root /.
+For debugging purposes the OptionalPackage site keeps older versions which are not compatible with newer Haiku revisions. OptionalPackages are primarily for developers, less so for end-users.
Since Haiku is a reimplementation, the API is still the same as for BeOS R5 (with some additions). Therefore the documentation in the BeBook is still a valid resource. Thanks to ACCESS, who own the rights to former Be Inc. property, we are allowed to provide a copy of the BeBook.
+
+
There are additional resources that should help you getting started:
Get in contact with other developers and users and join the discussions on IRC, in our forums or the mailing lists. When many different people come together, rules have to established to keep communication effective. Please respect our Mailing List Etiquette.
Deutsch
Français
Italiano
Русский
Español
Svensk
日本語
English
+Anwendungen installieren
Deutsch
Français
Italiano
Русский
Español
Svensk
日本語
English
ActivityMonitor
+
BePDF
BeZillaBrowser
CDPlayer
+
CharacterMap
+
CodyCam
+
DeskCalc
+
DiskProbe
DiskUsage
DriveSetup
+
+
+
Expander
Icon-O-Matic
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Installer
+
Magnify
+
Mail
MediaPlayer
MidiPlayer
PackageInstaller
Pe
People
+
+
+
+
PoorMan
Screenshot
ShowImage
SoundRecorder
StyledEdit
+
Terminal
+
TextSearch
TV
Vision
VLC media player
WonderBrush
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
LaunchBox
+
NetworkStatus
ProcessController
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Appearance
+
+
Backgrounds
+
DataTranslations
+
Deskbar
E-Mail
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
FileTypes
Fonts
+
Keyboard
+
Keymap
+
Media
Mouse
+
Netzwerk
+
Printers
Screen
+
ScreenSaver
+
+
Sounds
+
Time
+
+
Tracker
VirtualMemory
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
Deutsch
Français
Italiano
Русский
Español
Svensk
日本語
English